JP7836061B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, reserve the right to execute a game using the first special symbol (first special symbol game) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot. In such gaming machines, when a predetermined reserve occurs (for example, a reserve where the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, or a reserve with a long display time), a sequence of identical, similar, or similar effects (reserve sequence effects) that explicitly or suggest the expectation (jackpot expectation) of the jackpot lottery result for the predetermined reserve are executed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special symbol games for a predetermined number of reserves at the time the predetermined reserve occurs.

Furthermore, some gaming machines are equipped with a second prize slot into which game balls can be entered when an electric mechanism such as an electric tulip opens. The game triggered by a game ball entering this second prize slot (second special symbol game) takes precedence over the first special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot. In such gaming machines, some machines feature special effects (second special symbol effects) that explicitly or suggest that a bonus (for example, the execution of a probability-increasing jackpot game after the second special symbol game ends) will be granted when a jackpot symbol stops or a near-win occurs during the second special symbol game.

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-014640

By the way, for amusement machines, it is important to increase attention to and interest in the game, thereby improving players' motivation to play.

The objective of this invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the level of attention and interest in the game, thereby improving the players' motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 77),
It is characterized by being equipped with [the following features].

A perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Figure 1 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine. Figure 1 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine. Figure 1 shows a front view of an example of the game board of a gaming machine. Figure 4 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening and closing door provided on the game board. Figure 4 shows an example of an opening/closing door, a roulette mechanism, and a game ball retention area provided on the game board. Perspective view of the Kroon device. A cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 cutting line in Figure 6. A diagram illustrating a specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention section, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls that enter the special out-ball opening of the roulette device, and a prescribed period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit. Figure 10(A) is a cross-sectional view along the X2-X2 cutting line in Figure 8, and Figures 10(B) and 10(C) are cross-sectional views along the X3-X3 cutting line in Figure 8. Figure 11(A) shows an example of a 7-segment display unit provided on the game board shown in Figure 4, Figure 11(B) shows an example of number display on the 7-segment display unit, and Figure 11(C) shows an example of alphabet display on the 7-segment display unit. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 1. A block diagram showing an example of the memory area of the main control unit of the gaming machine shown in Figure 1. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A block diagram showing an example of the memory area of the main control unit. A schematic diagram showing an example of a performance information display device for a main control unit. A diagram showing an example of the display on the performance display monitor of a performance information display device. This figure shows an example of the display on the setting value display section of a performance information display device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for main timer interrupt processing performed by the main control unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the start-up prize-winning process executed by the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 20. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the first hold command, which is executed in the start-up prize-winning process shown in Figure 21. A flowchart illustrating an example of the main processing procedure performed by the main control unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the variable game control processing executed in the main processing shown in Figure 23. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for data setting processing performed in the variable game control processing shown in Figure 24. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the variation start process executed in the variation game control process shown in Figure 24. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for changing the setting value, which is performed in the main process shown in Figure 23. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the specific performance information update process executed in the main process shown in Figure 23. Figure 28 shows an example of the base information updated during the specific performance information update process. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the display control process of the performance display monitor, which is executed in the main process shown in Figure 23. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the display control process of the performance display monitor, which is executed in the main process shown in Figure 23. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the display control process of the performance display monitor, which is executed in the main process shown in Figure 23. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the display control process of the performance display monitor, which is executed in the main process shown in Figure 23. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing performed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 1. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the display order, which is executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 34. Figure 35 shows an example of a numerical display order determination table referenced in the display order setting process. A flowchart showing an example of the command determination process executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 34. This figure shows an example of the first stop symbol selection table and variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process shown in Figure 37. Figure 37 shows an example of a performance pattern type selection table used when a variable pattern command is received in the command judgment process. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 34. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the 7-segment display control processing performed in the setting value suggestion processing shown in Figure 40. A diagram illustrating the 7-segment display control information storage area set in the audio lamp control device. A diagram illustrating an example of controlling the segment display unit and an example of updating the control information storage area of the 7-segment display unit. A diagram illustrating an example of controlling a 7-segment display unit. A diagram illustrating an example of updating the control information storage area of the 7-segment display unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the ending image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process in Figure 40. This diagram shows an example of a screen transition during the ending sequence of a jackpot game. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting value suggestion processing performed by the audio lamp control device of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the 7-segment display control processing performed in the setting value suggestion process shown in Figure 48. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the ending image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process shown in Figure 48. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the display order in an audio lamp control device for a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. Figure 51 shows an example of a table referenced in the display order setting process. A perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of a gaming machine, as shown in Figure 53. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing performed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 53. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for operation detection processing executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 55. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation button operation detection process performed in the operation detection process in Figure 56. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation detection pattern determination process performed in the operation detection process in Figure 56. A table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operating conditions. This diagram shows an example of screen transitions in the symbol display section during standby mode. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for transitioning to the standby screen, which is executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 55. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for transitioning to the standby screen, which is executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 55. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the 7-segment history selection screen processing that is executed during the standby screen transition process in Figure 62. A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of a gaming machine, as shown in Figure 64. A diagram showing examples of on/off states in the indicator lamp section. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 34. A diagram illustrating an example of updating the 7-segment display control information storage area set in the audio lamp control device. This diagram shows an example of screen transitions during round play when the lamp display unit is controlled during a jackpot game. This diagram shows an example of the display screen during the ending sequence of a jackpot game. A diagram showing another example of a lamp indicator. A diagram illustrating the conventional sequence of performances for a gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram illustrating the sequence of performance execution for a gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of a game board for a gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of the memory area of the main control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 74. A block diagram showing an example of the power reserve area in the memory area of the main control unit shown in Figure 75. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for through-gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt handler. A flowchart illustrating an example of the main processing procedure performed by the main control unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general game control processing performed in the main processing of Figure 79. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the general data in the general game control process, as shown in Figure 80. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal diagram variation start process executed in the normal diagram game control process of Figure 80. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular game control process executed in the main process of Figure 79. A flowchart illustrating an example of the command determination process performed by the audio lamp control device. A flowchart illustrating an example of the command determination process performed by the audio lamp control device. A flowchart illustrating an example of the command determination process performed by the audio lamp control device. This figure shows an example of a screen in the graphic display section. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the pending continuous performance processing executed in the command judgment process in Figure 85. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the pending continuous performance processing executed in the command judgment process in Figure 85. A diagram showing an example of a table used in the continuous hold animation processing. Figure 91(A) shows an example of the colors of the decorative patterns, and Figure 91(B) shows an example of the combination of decorative patterns and stop patterns. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special effect processing that is executed in the command determination process of Figure 85. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the performance type, which is executed in the command determination process in Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the performance type, which is executed in the command determination process in Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the performance type, which is executed in the command determination process in Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the performance type, which is executed in the command determination process in Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the performance type, which is executed in the command determination process in Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the performance type, which is executed in the command determination process in Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the stop symbol combination that is executed in the command determination process in Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the stop symbol combination that is executed in the command determination process in Figure 86. A diagram illustrating the sequence of performance execution for a gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart illustrating the differences from the sixth embodiment in the command determination process. A flowchart illustrating the differences from the sixth embodiment in the command determination process. A flowchart illustrating the differences between the second special effect setting process and the sixth embodiment. A flowchart illustrating the differences from the sixth embodiment in the process of setting the type of performance. A flowchart illustrating the differences from the sixth embodiment in the process of setting the type of performance. A flowchart illustrating the differences from the sixth embodiment in the process of setting the type of performance.

The following descriptions, with reference to the attached drawings, will explain the first to seventh embodiments of the present invention to facilitate understanding of the invention. Furthermore, the following embodiments are merely examples of the invention and do not limit the technical scope of the invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, a game machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 47.

[Outline configuration of the gaming machine 10]
Here, Figure 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, Figures 2 and 3 are exploded views of the gaming machine 10, and Figure 4 is a front view of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereafter, the front, back, left, right, and up and down directions used in this embodiment will be defined by the front-to-back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in Figures 1 to 3.

As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine comprising a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14. It is installed in a gaming hall by fixing the outer frame 14 to the island equipment (not shown) of the gaming hall. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example to explain the gaming machine, but the present invention is also applicable to other gaming machines such as revolving-type gaming machines (slot machines), arrangement ball gaming machines, and jackpot gaming machines.

[Configuration of the front frame 11]
The front frame 11 is rotatably supported at its left end by the outer frame 14, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 14. Similarly, the inner frame 12 is rotatably supported at its left end by the front frame 11, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Furthermore, the back pack unit 13 is rotatably supported at its left end by the inner frame 12, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illuminated section 27, among other things.

The operation button 20 is located in front of the upper tray 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see Figure 12) that switches the input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 (described later) depending on whether or not the button is pressed. This allows the audio lamp control device 5 to determine the operation status of the operation button 20 (operated or not). This operation button 20 is operated to trigger operation button effects and other actions that occur in variable game sequences, which are performed in variable game sequences that clearly indicate the results of the jackpot lottery to the player, triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 20 during a predetermined operation acceptance period.

Furthermore, the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23; it may be located at any position on the front frame 11 where the player can operate it. Also, there may be more than one operation button 20.

Furthermore, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel displaying touch keys and accepting player input via these keys may be provided. Alternatively, the operation buttons 20 may be equipped with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's input to the touch panel or panel 25 will be reflected in the operation button animations and other effects during the variable gameplay.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game balls. In the game machine 10, the basic game is played by launching game balls from the game ball launching mechanism 32 (described later) with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the launch handle 22 is being operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched towards the game area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is located below the panel 25 and is used to store game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 132 of the dispensing mechanism 130 (described later), and to guide the stored game balls to the game ball launching mechanism 32 in a single line. The lower tray 24 is located further below the upper tray 23 and is used to store any game balls that are surplus from the upper tray 23.

Panel 25 is made of colorless or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin, allowing the player to view the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. Speakers 26 are a pair of speakers located on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and they perform sound output effects. Note that the installation position of speakers 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Furthermore, the lighting unit 27 incorporates light sources such as indicator lamps and LEDs, and performs lamp effects through lighting color and flashing patterns such as on or off.

[Composition of inner frame 12]
As shown in Figures 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 comprises a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As described above, the inner frame 12 is rotatably supported at its left end by the front frame 11, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball launching mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Note that in Figure 2, the details on the surface of the game board 31 are omitted for the sake of simplicity.

The control unit 33 is located on the rear side of the game board 31 and includes a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In the game machine 10, commands (control signals) for instructing control content are transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in Figure 4, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general prize entry point 313, a first prize entry point 314, a second prize entry point 315, a variable prize entry point 316, a through gate 317, an out entry point 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display unit 36, a roulette device 37, a game ball retention area 38, and a 7-segment display unit 39.

The inner rail 311 and outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 towards the game area on the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312, any game balls that do not enter the general prize slot 313, the first prize slot 314, the second prize slot 315, or the variable prize slot 316 are discharged from the out slot 318.

Here, as shown in Figure 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 comprises a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid and supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launching rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving means that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. Then, in the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the player's operation of the launching handle 22, and game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game board 31. Furthermore, the game ball launching mechanism 32 may use other driving means, such as a motor, instead of the solenoid 323 to launch the game balls.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4, the general prize entry point 313, the first prize entry point 314, the second prize entry point 315, the variable prize entry point 316, and the out entry point 318 have openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-to-back direction. On the back side of the game board 31, ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see Figure 12) are provided, corresponding to the general prize entry point 313, the first prize entry point 314, the second prize entry point 315, and the variable prize entry point 316, respectively, and capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls. Furthermore, game balls that have passed through the openings of the general prize entry point 313, the first prize entry point 314, the second prize entry point 315, and the out entry point 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see Figure 12), which will be described later. Furthermore, the variable prize entry opening 316 is located in the central right-side portion of the game board 31, allowing game balls launched into the right-side area of the game board 31 to enter. Game balls that pass through the through-hole 316b of the variable prize entry opening 316 are guided to the roulette device 37 via the guide path 316c (see Figure 6), described later. The through-gate 317 is a gate through which game balls can pass, and it has an entry sensor 317a (see Figure 12) capable of individually detecting game balls passing through the through-gate 317. On the game board 31, game balls launched into the right-side area of the game board 31 have the potential to pass through the through-gate 317. When the passage of a game ball through the through-gate 317 is detected, a normal winning lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the second prize entry opening 315.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the ball exit sensor 318a, and the special ball exit sensor 384 (see Figure 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331. The detection results from the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the ball exit sensor 318a, and the special ball exit sensor 384 are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) sends a command to the payout control device 7 to dispense game balls based on the detection results from the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of game ball entry by the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as a "win." Furthermore, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of balls that have been exited based on the detection results from the ball exit sensor 318a. The number of balls that has been exited here matches the number of game balls launched onto the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) sets a special out ball detection command based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384, indicating that the detected game ball is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 (described later). This special out ball detection command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 in the main processing shown in Figure 23. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

Furthermore, while the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the ball exit sensor 318a, and the special ball exit sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, they may be any sensors capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls using other detection methods.

Furthermore, the second prize slot 315 is equipped with an electric mechanism (electric device) 315b that switches between restricting the entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 and restricting its entry. The electric mechanism 315b is opened and closed by a drive mechanism such as a solenoid located on the back side of the game board 31. When the electric mechanism 315b is open, game balls can enter the second prize slot 315; when the electric mechanism 315b is closed, entry of game balls into the second prize slot 315 is restricted.

Furthermore, the variable prize entry point 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 that switches between restricting the entry of game balls into the variable prize entry point 316 and restricting its entry. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a drive mechanism, such as a solenoid, located on the back side of the game board 31. When the opening/closing door 319 is open, game balls can enter the variable prize entry point 316. When the opening/closing door 319 is closed, entry of game balls into the variable prize entry point 316 is restricted. The opening/closing door 319 is moved to a position that opens the variable prize entry point 316 during round play in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game, and otherwise remains in a position that closes the variable prize entry point 316. As a result, game balls 99 launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31 during round play in a jackpot game can enter the variable prize entry point 316.

As shown in Figures 5 and 6, the opening/closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of mounting parts 319d for rotatably attaching the opening/closing door 319 to the game board 31, and protrudes slightly above horizontal from the game board 31 when the opening/closing door 319 is in the operating position. This allows the opening/closing door 319 to receive game balls 99 launched into the right-hand area of the game board 31 when it is in the operating position. The pair of guard walls 319b extend from the left and right edges of the base 319a to prevent the game balls 99 received by the base 319a from spilling out from the left and right sides of the base 319a. The pair of guides 319c guide the game balls 99 received by the base 319a to the variable prize entry opening 316. A pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable prize entry opening 316, forming a gap through which the game balls 99 can pass. The variable prize entry opening 316 also has a through-hole 316b that discharges the game balls 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 to the rear side of the game board 31. This through-hole 316b communicates with a guide path 316c provided on the rear side of the game board 31. The guide path 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. The game balls 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 enter the variable prize entry opening 316 and are guided to the roulette device 37 via the through-hole 316b and the guide path 316c. A ball entry sensor 316a is provided in the guide path 316c. As a result, the game balls 99 that enter the variable prize entry opening 316 are detected when they pass through the through-hole 316b and are introduced into the guide path 316c. This ball entry sensor 316a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331. As a result, the detection result from the ball entry sensor 316a is input to the main control unit 331, which can then detect that a game ball 99 has entered the variable prize entry slot 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, the ball entry sensor 314a or ball entry sensor 315a detects this, and the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery. The main control unit 331 then controls the display on the main display unit 36 according to the lottery result. The lottery result from the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, which then controls the display on the variable display unit 34 and other displays according to the lottery result.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of a game ball into the general prize slot 313, the first prize slot 314, the second prize slot 315, and the variable prize slot 316 is detected by the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, a preset number of prize balls are dispensed. For example, the number of prize balls dispensed when a ball enters the general prize slot 313 is 10, when a ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315 is 3, and when a ball enters the variable prize slot 316 is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, if the result of the lottery conducted by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the machine transitions to a jackpot game state (special game state), and the round game (unit game) described later, in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened, is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 or 16 times), allowing for the expectation of a large payout of prize balls.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, a jackpot lottery is conducted. If the lottery result is a win, the game transitions to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot game state includes the 5R jackpot game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R probability variation jackpot game state) and the 16R probability variation jackpot game state. The 5R jackpot game state is a game state that includes an opening and closing execution mode in which five round games (unit games) are performed in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened until a predetermined time has elapsed or until the variable prize slot 316 has been entered by an upper limit number (e.g., 9) or more game balls. The 16R probability variation jackpot game state is a game state that includes an opening and closing execution mode in which 16 rounds of gameplay (unit gameplay) are performed. It offers the potential for a larger payout of prize balls than the 5R jackpot game state, making it a more advantageous game state for the player.

As shown in Figure 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341, such as a liquid crystal display, which is positioned to be visible through an opening 31A formed approximately in the center of the game board 31. This symbol display unit 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the symbol display unit 341 displays various image effects, such as a variable display effect of decorative symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery conducted by the main control unit 331 in response to balls entering the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, and a variable game effect executed in conjunction with the variable display effect. Furthermore, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, plasma display, organic EL display, etc., or a combination of a liquid crystal display or plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the display of changing decorative patterns in the pattern display unit 341 is achieved by sequentially scrolling multiple types of decorative patterns, each numbered "1" through "9," in vertical, horizontal, or diagonal directions. Other characters or patterns may be displayed between the decorative patterns. In this embodiment, however, there are no secondary patterns, and the decorative patterns consist of nine types, numbered "1" through "9."

In the gaming machine 10, during variable gameplay, the display of decorative symbols is executed such that all decorative symbols stop changing after a predetermined display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol change display on the symbol display unit 341. More specifically, in the display of decorative symbols, all decorative symbols first change along a predetermined direction of change (e.g., horizontal, vertical, etc.), and the changes of multiple decorative symbols stop sequentially. Then, when the changes of decorative symbols on all lines have stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the decorative symbols ends.

When the display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 has finished changing, the symbol display unit 341 will display a state in which the decorative symbols are lined up on one or more active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative symbols will indicate or suggest the result of the jackpot lottery conducted by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," a "16R probability variation jackpot," or a "5R normal jackpot," a state in which decorative symbols of the same type are lined up on the active lines will be displayed, indicating that it is a jackpot. In addition, the type of jackpot may be indicated by the combination of decorative symbols on the active lines, but it is not always indicated. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot," a state in which the symbol combination set as a symbol combination indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot, such as "777," is lined up on the active lines will be displayed, or a state in which the same decorative symbol combination other than "777" is lined up on the active lines will be displayed. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," the display will show either a combination of decorative symbols pre-set to indicate a 5R probability variation jackpot, such as "333," lined up on the active payline, or a combination of the same decorative symbols other than those indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 5R probability variation jackpot, such as "777" or "333," lined up on the active payline. If the lottery result is a "5R regular jackpot," the display will show a combination of the same decorative symbols other than those pre-set to indicate a regular jackpot, such as "222" or "444," lined up on the active payline. If the lottery result is a "miss," a different combination of decorative symbols (such as "323" or "723") lined up on the active payline will be displayed.

Furthermore, the symbol display unit 341 displays a variation of the decorative symbols during variation gameplay, along with a variation gameplay animation that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot being won in the jackpot lottery. If the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot," and a combination of jackpot symbols other than those indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the active lines, a variation gameplay animation will be performed to suggest that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot. In this case, the jackpot gameplay animation will include an upgrade animation that clearly indicates the lottery result for the variation game is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Similarly, if the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," and a combination of jackpot symbols other than those indicating a probability variation jackpot is displayed on the active lines, a variation gameplay animation will be performed to suggest that it is a 5R regular jackpot. In this case, during the jackpot game animation, an upgrade animation will be performed to clearly indicate that the result of the lottery for the relevant spinning game is a 5R probability variation jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state transitions to a jackpot game state, the symbol display unit 341 displays the jackpot game sequence, including the opening sequence, the opening/closing execution mode sequence, and the ending sequence.

Furthermore, the game board 31 may also be equipped with magnetic sensors and radio wave sensors (both not shown). Magnetic sensors can be installed, for example, around the first prize entry point 314 and the variable prize entry point 316. The magnetic sensors are electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection results from the magnetic sensors are input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity if someone attempts to illegally guide game balls into the first prize entry point 314 or the variable prize entry point 316 using magnets. On the other hand, radio wave sensors can be installed, for example, around the first prize entry point 314 and the second prize entry point 315. The radio wave sensors are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results from the radio wave sensors are input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity if someone attempts to illegally input radio waves to the ball entry sensors 314a and 315a to cause false detection of game ball entry. The radio wave sensors can detect radio waves in the range of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

As shown in Figure 4, the roulette mechanism 37 distributes the game balls that enter the variable prize entry opening 316 to either the normal out ball opening 378 or the special out ball opening 373 (see Figures 7 and 8), which will be described later. Here, Figure 6 shows an example of the opening/closing door 319, the roulette mechanism 37, and the game ball retention area 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in Figure 4; Figure 7 is a perspective view of the roulette mechanism 37; and Figure 8 is a cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 cutting line in Figure 6.

As shown in Figures 6 to 8, the croon device 37 is dish-shaped, having a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 surrounding the bottom wall 371. The bottom wall 371 is circular in plan view and has a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and a left-sloping inclined portion 371c provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The elevated bottom portion 371a constitutes the right-side portion of the bottom wall 371 and slopes downward to the right. The elevated bottom portion 371a is provided with a special out-ball passage 374 having a special out-ball opening 373 (special discharge port). This special out-ball passage 374 is adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 at the center of the elevated bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. This special out-ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. A first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out-ball passage 374. This first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out-ball passage 374 to the game ball retention section 38. The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375a and a lower opening 375b connected to the lower end of the special out-ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is located to the right of the upper opening 375a, and releases the game balls 99 from the special ball-out passage 374 towards the game ball retention area 38 from the right side of the special ball-out passage 374.

Furthermore, the first guide member 375 can also be provided with a function to hold game balls 99 that cannot be held in the game ball retention section 38. In this embodiment, a number (specific information) corresponding to a non-set value, which is a game setting value other than the set value set in the game machine 10, is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37 during a predetermined period (see Figure 9) (the number of specific conditions that are met during the predetermined period). In this embodiment, since the number of segments in the 7-segment display unit 39 is 7 (excluding the dot point DP), one non-set value can be reliably identified with 7 pieces of information. Also, since there are 6 levels of game setting values from 1 to 6, there are 5 non-set values, and therefore all non-set values can be identified with 35 pieces of information. In other words, the game machine 10 is required to be able to display at least 35 pieces (a specified number) of information. Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention section 38 be configured to retain a specified number or more of game balls 99 during a specific period (see Figure 9) as described later. However, depending on the arrangement of various components of the game machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the game ball retention section 38 to retain a specified number or more of game balls 99. In this case, by giving the first guide member 375 the function of storing game balls 99, it is possible to retain a number of game balls 99 that would be difficult to retain in the game ball retention section 38 alone by utilizing the first guide member 375. This makes it possible to retain a specified number or more of game balls 99 during a specific period, and the information necessary to identify all non-set values is presented. Similarly, game balls 99 may also be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. As a result, even if the arrangement of various components makes it difficult to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 by providing the function of retaining game balls 99 not only in the game ball retention section 38 but also in the first guide member 375, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 by utilizing the special out-ball passage 374. Consequently, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 for a specific period, potentially providing the information necessary to identify all non-set values.

On the other hand, it is also conceivable to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 that remain in a specific period. For example, the limit could be set to the specified number (matching the limit to the specified number). In this case, if information corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out-ball slot 373 (individual information of the specific information) is presented, it is possible that information necessary to identify all non-set values in one specific period will be presented. Furthermore, if information corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that meet predetermined conditions among the game balls 99 entering the special out-ball slot 373, for example, the number of balls that win the lottery, is presented, then information corresponding to the expected number based on the winning probability of the lottery will be presented. Since this expected number is basically smaller than the specified number, it is possible that not all the information necessary to identify all non-set values will be presented. This prevents the setting value from being determined by the number of game balls 99 entering the special out-ball slot 373 in one specific period, and as a result, it is possible to prevent players from ending their game on the gaming machine 10 prematurely when the setting value is low (when the jackpot probability is low).

Furthermore, as a means of limiting the number of game balls 99 retained during a specific period, for example, a configuration could be adopted in which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, the first guide member 375, and the special out-ball passage 374. When the limited number of game balls 99 enter the special out-ball passage 374, the game balls 99 can be positioned near the special out-ball opening 373 (causing a ball jam), thereby limiting the entry of game balls 99 into the special out-ball passage 374. Such a configuration allows for limiting the number of game balls 99 retained during a specific period using a simple mechanical configuration, without requiring complex configurations or controls.

On the other hand, the game ball retention section 38 has a retention lane 381 that slopes downward to the left, as described later. In other words, the first guide member 375 guides the game balls 99 to the right side (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention section 38. The game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373 will not enter the various prize winning openings 313-316, nor will they pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373 are treated as out balls when it is no longer expected that they will enter the various prize winning openings 313-316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when they are introduced into the special out ball passage 374 (when detected by the special out ball sensor 384).

The lower bottom portion 371b constitutes the left portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined to be lower towards the center. The lower bottom portion 371b is provided with a normal passage 376 having a normal out ball opening 378. This normal passage 376 is provided adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c and extends in the vertical direction D2, except for the portion along the peripheral wall 372 of the lower bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 is for guiding game balls 99 that have entered through the normal out ball opening 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a larger opening area than the special out ball opening 373. A second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. This second guide member 377 collects game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 to the back side of the game board 31, similar to game balls that have passed through the opening of the out opening 318. The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are then detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see Figure 12) and counted as out balls.

In this type of roulette device 37, the game balls 99, which are launched into the right-hand region of the game board 31 and received by the opening/closing door 319 as described above, are guided by the guide path 316c. The game balls 99 guided into the roulette device 37 then move along the periphery wall 372 and onto the bottom wall 371. This delays the flow of the game balls 99 within the roulette device 37. Most of the game balls 99 moving along the bottom wall 371 then enter the normal out-ball opening 378, for example, due to a decrease in kinetic energy, or by collisions with the periphery wall 372 or other game balls 99. The game balls 99 that enter the normal out-ball opening 378 then move along the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 to a position detectable by the out-ball sensor 318a (see Figure 12).

Meanwhile, some of the game balls moving along the bottom wall 371 have their direction of movement changed by collisions with the periphery of the normal out-ball opening 378 or other game balls, and enter the special out-ball opening 373. The game balls 99 that enter the special out-ball opening 373 are released towards the game ball retention area 38 via the special out-ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

Here, the probability of a game ball 99 moving along the bottom wall 371 entering the special out-ball opening 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% to 5%, preferably 1% to 3%. In other words, the expected number of balls entering the special out-ball opening 373 per 10 rounds of gameplay is set to, for example, 0.5 to 5, preferably 1 to 3. By setting the probability of entry or the expected number of entries within this range, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the setting value too early, while still making it realistically possible to identify the setting value. This prevents the game from ending prematurely if the setting value is identified early, such as when the setting value is low, while also preventing the game from ending due to boredom caused by the inability to identify the setting value.

In this embodiment, the special ball-out opening 373 is provided at the high bottom portion 371a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal ball-out opening 378 has a larger opening area than the special ball-out opening 373. Therefore, it is significantly more difficult for game balls 99 to enter the special ball-out opening 373 compared to the normal ball-out opening 378. However, it is conceivable to make it more difficult for game balls 99 to enter the special ball-out opening 373 by other means, either in place of or in addition to all or part of these methods. For example, it is conceivable to provide an obstruction means around the special ball-out opening 373 that hinders the entry of game balls 99 into the special ball-out opening 373. Possible obstruction means include, for example, an obstacle that hinders entry into the special ball-out opening 373, such as a wall surrounding the special ball-out opening 373; means for generating a magnetic or electromagnetic force that repels the game balls 99 around the special ball-out opening 373; and means for forming an air curtain by blowing air around the special ball-out opening 373.

Furthermore, an opening/closing mechanism may be provided to open and close the special ball-out opening 373, making it difficult for game balls to enter the special ball-out opening 373. In this case, the special ball-out opening 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal ball-out opening 378, and the normal ball-out opening 378 may be formed to have the same or substantially the same opening area as the special ball-out opening 373.

Furthermore, the means for distributing the game balls 99 that enter the variable prize slot 316 to the normal out slot 378 and the special out slot 373 is not limited to the roulette device 37, but may be other means. For example, the distribution to the normal out slot 378 and the special out slot 373 may be achieved by adjusting the arrangement of rotating members such as switching valves, or the arrangement of nails driven into the game board 31.

As shown in Figures 4 and 8, the game ball retention unit 38 receives the game balls 99 that enter the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 and retains them until a specific period of time has elapsed. After the specific period has elapsed, segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 (described later) are controlled, and a number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out-ball opening 373 by the predetermined period. Here, Figure 9 is a diagram illustrating the specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention unit, the predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out-ball opening of the roulette device, and the specified period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit.

In the following explanation, referring to Figure 9, the "specific period" is defined as the period during which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, the "predetermined period" as the period during which the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 is cumulatively counted, and the "predetermined period" as the period during which all or part of a number indicating a non-set value (specific information) is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 during the specific period. However, the "specific period" is not limited to the period during which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, and the "predetermined period" is not limited to the period during which the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 is cumulatively counted. In other words, the "specific period," "predetermined period," and "predetermined period" include at least the periods described below.

As shown in Figures 9(A) and 9(B), the specific period during which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38 is from the start of a jackpot game (opening) until the opening/closing execution mode of that jackpot game ends (ending begins), and a specific period is set for each jackpot game that starts within a predetermined period. That is, the start of the specific period is the time when the jackpot game starts, and the end of the specific period is the time when the opening/closing execution mode of that jackpot game ends (ending begins). Specifically, as shown in Figure 9(A), when a normal jackpot is won in low probability mode (when the first win is a normal jackpot and a single jackpot), the specific period is from the start of that jackpot game until the opening/closing execution mode of that jackpot game ends. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9(B), if a bonus jackpot is won in low probability mode (i.e., the initial win is a bonus jackpot and a jackpot streak begins), a specific period is set for all jackpot games played between the start of each jackpot game and the end of the jackpot streak, which would occur if a regular jackpot were won in high probability mode. In other words, in a jackpot streak, multiple specific periods are set corresponding to the number of jackpot games played during that streak.

In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot or the timing of the win, the number of segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, described later, corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 during a specific period of a single jackpot game, will be controlled to light up or turn off during the ending of that jackpot game, which is the specified period. That is, the specified period is set as the period during which the 7-segment display unit 39 displays numbers representing game setting values other than the game setting value (set value) that defines the probability of a jackpot being achieved in the jackpot lottery set in the game machine 10, based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 during that specific period.

Furthermore, if the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373 during a specific period of a single jackpot game is 7 or more but less than 14, then a number that identifies game setting values (multiple non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) that defines the probability of the jackpot lottery result in the game machine 10 being a jackpot will be displayed once on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending (specified period) after the specific period of the jackpot game has elapsed, according to the display order set in the display order setting process of Figure 36 described later. Furthermore, during the ending sequence (predetermined period) after a specific period has elapsed in a jackpot game, the 7-segment display unit 39 will display the following: if the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out-ball slot 373 during the specific period of a jackpot game is 14 or more but less than 20, two numbers identifying multiple non-set values will be displayed in the order specified above; if the number is 21 or more but less than 28, three numbers identifying multiple non-set values will be displayed in the order specified above; if the number is 28 or more but less than 35, four numbers identifying multiple non-set values will be displayed in the order specified above; and if the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) identifying multiple non-set values will be displayed in the order specified above. Note that if the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out-ball slot 373 during the specific period of a jackpot game is less than 7, no numbers identifying multiple non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the ending sequence (predetermined period) after the specific period of the jackpot game.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, each time a jackpot game is played, one to five numbers identifying multiple non-set values may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 (described later) based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out-ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37 during a specific period. When five numbers identifying non-set values are displayed, the set value can be identified. For example, the display of the number 1 on the 7-segment display unit 39 identifies that game setting value 1 is a non-set value; the display of the number 2 on the 7-segment display unit 39 identifies that game setting value 2 is a non-set value; the display of the number 3 on the 7-segment display unit 39 identifies that game setting value 3 is a non-set value; the display of the number 4 on the 7-segment display unit 39 identifies that game setting value 4 is a non-set value; the display of the number 5 on the 7-segment display unit 39 identifies that game setting value 5 is a non-set value; and the display of the number 6 on the 7-segment display unit 39 identifies that game setting value 6 is a non-set value. Furthermore, since the 7-segment display unit 39 displays five numbers from 2 to 6, it can be identified that the unset value is a game setting value from 2 to 6, and thus the set value can be determined to be game setting value 1. Similarly, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays five numbers from 1, 3 to 6, indicating that the set value is game setting value 2; the 7-segment display unit 39 displays five numbers from 1, 2, 4 to 6, indicating that the set value is game setting value 3; the 7-segment display unit 39 displays five numbers from 1 to 3, 5, and 6, indicating that the set value is game setting value 4; the 7-segment display unit 39 displays five numbers from 1 to 4 and 6, indicating that the set value is game setting value 5; and the 7-segment display unit 39 displays five numbers from 1 to 5, indicating that the set value is game setting value 6.

Furthermore, the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be determined before all segments A to G become subject to control. For example, when segments A to G are subject to control in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, if segment A, the first subject to control, is turned off, the candidate numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are "1" and "4". Then, when segment F, the sixth subject to control, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". In other words, the numbers "1" or "4" can be recognized when segment F, the sixth subject to control, becomes subject to control, before all segments A to G become subject to control. Also, when segment A, the first subject to control, is turned on, the candidate numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are "2", "3", "5", and "6". Then, when segment B, the second controlled object, is lit, it can be determined to be either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined to be either "5" or "6". Furthermore, when segment C, the third controlled object, is lit, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". In other words, the numbers "2" or "3" can be recognized when segment C, the third controlled object, is controlled, before all segments A through G are controlled. Furthermore, when segment E, the fifth controlled object, is lit, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". In other words, the numbers "5" or "6" can be recognized when segment E, the fifth controlled object, is controlled, before all segments A through G are controlled. In other words, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when segment C, the third control target, is lit or turned off; the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when segment E, the fifth control target, is lit or turned off; and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, the sixth control target, is lit or turned off. Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if a number indicating a non-set value is identified before all segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 become control targets, control to display the next priority number will not be started until all segments A to G become control targets. As a result, in order to identify all non-set values, more specific conditions must be met compared to the case where control to display the next priority number is started when the number corresponding to the non-set value can be identified. Consequently, the difficulty in identifying all non-set values, and therefore the difficulty in recognizing the set values, can be increased, thus preventing the set values from being recognized in a short amount of play time. Therefore, even if the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming aware of that set value, thereby preventing a decrease in the playing time on the gaming machine 10 and suppressing a decline in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

Furthermore, if a number indicating an unset value is detected before all segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 become subject to control, control to display the next priority number may be initiated. For example, if the priority of the numbers is "1" → "2" → "3" → ..., and segment F, which is the 6th in the control order for the number "1", becomes the target of control, and it is determined that the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is "1", control to display the next priority number, "2", may be initiated without targeting segment G, which is the 7th in the control order. However, if segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G have become subject to control, even if the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized before all segments A to G become subject to control, control of segments A to G to display the next number to be displayed will not be initiated until all segments A to G have become subject to control. Therefore, even if a player recognizes a number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all segments A-G are subject to control, information will still be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 to identify the number already recognized by the player until the display of the next number to be displayed begins. In other words, if segments A-G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A-G have been controlled, unnecessary information may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. There is a concern that this unnecessary information may decrease the player's interest in the game. In contrast, if control to display the next priority number is initiated when a number indicating a non-set value is identified before all segments A-G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are subject to control, then segments A-G that do not contribute to the prediction of a non-set value will not be subject to control after one non-set value has been identified. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to segments A-G being unnecessarily controlled.

On the other hand, the predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37 is from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode until the end of the opening and closing execution mode for a normal jackpot. That is, the start of the predetermined period is the time when the jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode is started, and the end of the predetermined period is the time when the opening and closing execution mode for a normal jackpot game is ended (the time when the ending of the normal jackpot game is started). Specifically, as shown in Figure 9(A), if a normal jackpot is won in low probability mode (when the first win is a normal jackpot and it is a single jackpot), the predetermined period is from the start of the jackpot game until the end of the opening and closing execution mode for the jackpot game. That is, in the case of a single jackpot, the predetermined period coincides with the specific period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9(B), when a probability-increasing jackpot is won in low-probability mode (i.e., the initial win is a probability-increasing jackpot and a jackpot streak begins), the predetermined period is the time from the start of the probability-increasing jackpot game for the initial win that triggers the jackpot streak until the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot that triggers the jackpot streak ends. In other words, in the case of a jackpot streak, the predetermined period does not coincide with a specific period for retaining game balls 99 in the game ball retention unit 38, but is set to multiple predetermined periods depending on the number of jackpot games that begin within that period.

Incidentally, once a jackpot game has started, unless there are special circumstances, the game will not be ended in the middle of the jackpot game or in the middle of a jackpot streak. Therefore, a specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retention section 38 is set for each jackpot game, preventing the player from ending the game before the specific period ends. Furthermore, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 is set from the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode of a jackpot game for a normal jackpot, preventing the player from ending the game before the predetermined period ends. In a jackpot game, at the ending (predetermined period) after a specific period has elapsed, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled based on the number of game balls 99 that have been held in the game ball retention unit 38 during the specific period (the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37), so that information that allows the non-set value to be identified or inferred (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed. In the ending after the opening and closing execution mode of a jackpot game for a normal jackpot, information that allows the non-set value to be identified or inferred (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed in accordance with the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 during a predetermined period. As a result, even if a player who does not know the timing at which a non-set value other than the set value can be identified or inferred is playing the game, it is prevented from ending the game before the timing at which the non-set value can be identified or inferred. Therefore, even players who are unaware of the timing when non-set values can be identified or predicted can identify or predict them, and by identifying all non-set values, it becomes possible to identify the set values. In addition, it eliminates the so-called "hyena" behavior of other players who play at the timing when non-set values can be identified or predicted.

Furthermore, since a specific period is set for each jackpot game that begins within a predetermined period, in the case of consecutive jackpots, the predetermined period is set to span from the first jackpot to the last jackpot game in the jackpot streak. Therefore, in consecutive jackpots, the predetermined period is longer than in single jackpots, and the predetermined period becomes longer as the number of jackpot games increases. As a result, consecutive jackpots have a higher probability of a larger number of game balls 99 entering the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 compared to single jackpots, and the more consecutive jackpots there are, the higher the probability of a larger number of game balls 99 entering the special out-ball opening 373. This means that players benefit from a higher number of consecutive jackpots, not only because the expected value of the game they can win increases, but also because they can obtain more information to identify or estimate the non-set value, making it easier to estimate or identify the non-set value and, consequently, the set value.

The start date of the specific period during which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38 can be set during a jackpot game, and is not limited to the start of a jackpot game; it may also be the time when the opening/closing execution mode starts (when the opening of the first jackpot ends). The end date of the specific period can also be set during a jackpot game, or it may be set during the ending that follows a normal jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is set as one section including the opening/closing execution mode for each jackpot game. This allows information to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 after the specific period has elapsed, based on the number of specific conditions that are met when game balls 99 enter the variable prize entry point 316 in the opening/closing execution mode (based on the number of game balls 99 that have passed through the special out ball entry point 373 of the roulette device 37). As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a game ball 99 enters the special ball-out opening 373. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, i.e., after a specific period has elapsed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 and identifying or inferring the non-set value based on the displayed content.

Furthermore, the start date of the predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out-ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37 is not limited to the time when the jackpot game for the first win (jackpot in low probability mode) begins, but can be set at the time of the jackpot game. Preferably, it may be the time when the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the first win (jackpot in low probability mode) begins (the opening of the first win ends). In this way, by setting the start date of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the first win, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single jackpot or a series of jackpots, thus guaranteeing at least one opportunity to estimate or identify the non-set value for each first win.

On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is not limited to the time when the opening and closing execution mode of a normal jackpot game ends, but can be set during the jackpot game, for example, at the ending of the jackpot game, typically at the ending of a normal jackpot game. Alternatively, the end of the predetermined period may be the time when the normal jackpot game ends (the ending of that jackpot ends), or the time when the time-saving mode that is entered after a normal jackpot ends. Furthermore, although this embodiment is described assuming a loop probability variation machine, in other types of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and type 1 and type 2 mixed machines, it is also possible to set the predetermined period according to the type of machine. For example, in a V-ST machine, if there is no V-entry on the first win (normal jackpot), the predetermined period can be set in the same way as in the case of a normal jackpot in a loop probability variation machine. If there is a V-entry on the first win (probability variation jackpot), the start of the predetermined period can be set as the start of the jackpot game or opening/closing execution mode on the first win, and the end of the predetermined period can be set as the end of the opening/closing execution mode for a jackpot without a V-entry, or the end of the predetermined number of jackpot draws in high probability mode.

Furthermore, the predetermined period can also be set to the period during which variable gameplay is performed, regardless of jackpot gameplay (the period from the end of a jackpot game to the start of another jackpot game). For example, the predetermined period can be set according to the type of condition (specific condition) under which all or part of the specific information (numbers) indicating a non-set value is displayed, and can be the period during which the player stays in the normal game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode) (the period from the end of the time-saving mode until the next jackpot starts), the period during which the player stays in the time-saving mode (the period from the end of a normal jackpot until the player transitions to the normal game state), the period during which the player stays in the low probability mode (the period from the end of a normal jackpot until the next jackpot game starts), the period until a predetermined number of jackpot draws are received in either or both of the high probability mode and low probability mode, or until a predetermined number of jackpot draws are received in either or both of the high probability mode and low probability mode. Examples of predetermined periods include the period until a normal winning draw is received, the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are awarded to the general prize slot 313 in either or both of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are awarded to the first prize slot 314 in either or both of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are awarded to the second prize slot 315 in either or both of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in either or both of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, and the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are launched onto the game board 31 in either or both of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode. Furthermore, predetermined periods may be set for each variation game. That is, predetermined periods may be set from the start of the variation game (start of the variation display of decorative symbols) to the end of the variation game (end of the variation display of decorative symbols). In this case, the predetermined period may be the entire duration of a single spinning game, or it may be a portion of the duration of a single spinning game. If a portion of the duration of a single spinning game is designated as the predetermined period, possible examples of the predetermined period include: the period from the start of the spinning display of the decorative symbols until the decorative symbols reach a winning state; the period from the start of the spinning display of the decorative symbols until the start of a special winning sequence or other development sequence; the period from when the decorative symbols reach a winning state until the start of the development sequence; the period from when the decorative symbols reach a winning state until the end of the development sequence; and the duration during which the development sequence is executed.

In this way, by setting a predetermined period during which variable gameplay is performed, it becomes possible to identify or estimate non-set values and recognize or estimate set values even outside of the period when jackpot gameplay is performed. This allows players to enjoy the game while identifying or estimating non-set values (set values) during the period when variable gameplay is performed.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period is set as the period during which the variable game is executed, the distribution means such as the roulette device 37 may be positioned in the area where the game balls 99 launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31 are distributed between the normal out-ball opening 378 and the special out-ball opening 373 when the game balls 99 are launched into the left-hand area of the game board 31 using the normal left-hand shot method. (For example, the left-hand area of the game board 31 (above or below the general prize opening 313) or the central area (above or to the side of the first prize opening 314)). In this case, the non-set value (set value) can be identified or estimated without performing a special shot (right-hand shot launching the game balls 99 into the right-hand area of the game board 31). This allows players to enjoy identifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) while the game proceeds as usual, without reducing the probability of the game balls 99 entering the general prize opening 313 or the first prize opening 314.

Furthermore, depending on the type of specific condition, the start date of the predetermined period may be set to the time when the main power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Also, depending on the type of specific condition, the end date of the predetermined period may be set to the time when the main power to the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Furthermore, specific conditions include the game balls 99 being distributed by a distribution means such as the roulette device 37 during a predetermined period, instead of entering the special out-ball opening 373, passing through a specific area other than the special out-ball opening 373. For example, the game balls 99 passing through the through gate 317 or entering various prize-winning openings 313-316.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to guide game balls 99 that enter the general prize slot 313 or the first prize slot 314, or pass through the through gate 317, to a distribution means such as a roulette device 37. A specific condition may be set where the game balls 99 distributed by the distribution means enter the special out ball slot 373. Even in this case, players can enjoy identifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual, without performing any special launching techniques.

Furthermore, the specific conditions may include the occurrence of specific events that may occur during the game. These specific events may be either advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. If the specific event is advantageous to the player, the player may obtain all or part of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value) in addition to the benefits obtained from the occurrence of the specific event. On the other hand, if the specific event is disadvantageous to the player, the player may obtain all or part of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value) as a remedy for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event. Specific events that could trigger a win include, for example, winning a jackpot a predetermined number of times (including one time) or more (the jackpot game being played a predetermined number of times or more), winning a probability variation or regular jackpot a predetermined number of times (the probability variation or regular jackpot game being played a predetermined number of times or more), reaching a predetermined number of consecutive jackpot wins (winning a probability variation jackpot a predetermined number of times consecutively before winning a regular jackpot), reaching a predetermined number of jackpot draws before winning a jackpot, and the occurrence of an over-winning (99) of game balls exceeding the upper limit during the round game of the jackpot game's opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, specific events may include the execution of pre-set special effects during variable gameplay or jackpot gameplay. There are no particular restrictions on these special effects; for example, they may be set as either non-reach effects or reach effects, and as either opening effects, round game effects, or ending effects. Typically, special effects include premium effects in variable gameplay that guarantee a jackpot or a probability-increasing jackpot, and effects in jackpot gameplay that indicate that a reserve continuation will be executed after the jackpot game ends (that at a specific point in the jackpot game, such as the start of the jackpot game, the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the end of the opening/closing execution mode, or the end of the jackpot game, there is a reserve with a jackpot result). Additionally, specific events may include the symbol display unit 341 stopping or temporarily stopping (intermediate stop display) decorative symbols in a specific combination. For example, in the symbol display unit 341, the decorative symbols may stop at "777," at specific non-reach combinations such as "767," or at specific non-reach combinations (scattered combinations) such as "367." In addition, when development sequences such as super reach sequences or special reach sequences are executed as reach sequences, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development sequence is about to be executed is conceivable. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development sequence is about to be executed, for example, in the case of "7 Development 7," the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a reach state, and a symbol indicating that a development sequence such as "Development" will be executed may be temporarily stopped as the middle symbol. Furthermore, the specific conditions may also involve the occurrence of multiple specific events in a specific combination.

Furthermore, certain conditions may be met in relation to set values. That is, a set value may be included in a specific condition; for example, a specific condition may be met when a specific event occurs at a specific set value. In this case, while the type of specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined by the set value, as described later. Therefore, the numbers indicating non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a different order depending on the type of specific condition. This allows for setting the display order based on factors such as whether the probability of winning a jackpot is high or low for each set value, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple numbers indicating non-set values for each set value.

Furthermore, the specified period for displaying specific information or a part thereof (special information) indicating a non-set value when certain conditions are met is not limited to being set at each ending of a jackpot game, but may be at other times, and can be set in relation to a predetermined period, a specific period, or a specific condition. For example, the specified period may be only at the ending of a 5R normal jackpot game, where the end of the predetermined period is typically set after the expiration of the predetermined period, as will be explained in the second embodiment described later, or it may be at a time other than a jackpot game, such as after the end of a jackpot game. Also, if the predetermined period is set as the execution period of a variable game, the specified period may be at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols in the variable game, at the timing when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a reach state, at the timing when development effects such as super reach effects and special reach effects begin, or during the execution of development effects. In other words, the specified period may also be set as the period during which the variable game is executed. When the specified period is set as the period during which the variable game is executed, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating a non-set value along with the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the result of a jackpot lottery is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the changing display of decorative symbols, it becomes possible to simultaneously display specific information on the symbol display unit 341. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the variable gameplay by displaying specific information.

Here, Figure 10(A) is a cross-sectional view along the X2-X2 cutting line in Figure 8, Figure 10(B) is a cross-sectional view along the X3-X3 cutting line in Figure 8 when the stopper portion 383 (described later) is in the upper limit position, and Figure 10(C) is a cross-sectional view along the X3-X3 cutting line in Figure 8 when the stopper portion 383 is in the lower limit position. The configuration of the game ball retention section 38 will be explained below with reference to Figures 6 and 8 in addition to Figure 10.

As shown in Figures 6, 8, and 10, the game ball retention section 38 is designed to retain game balls 99 that are entered into the special out ball opening 373 for a specific period of time, and includes a retention lane 381, a discharge lane 382, and a stopper section 383.

The retention lane 381 receives the game balls 99 that enter the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 and allows the game balls 99 to remain there. The retention lane 381 is open at the top and slopes downward to the left. The depth dimension of the retention lane 381 is smaller than the diameter of the game balls, and at least a portion of the game balls 99 that remain in the retention lane 381 are visible (see Figure 4). This makes it possible to visually confirm that game balls 99 have remained in the retention lane 381, and also to visually confirm the number of game balls 99 that have remained, that is, the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 within a specific period of time. Furthermore, it is preferable that the retention lane 381 be made transparent, such as by resin. This makes it easier to grasp the number of game balls 99 that remain in the retention lane 381. Alternatively, instead of making the game balls 99 accumulated in the stagnant lane 381 visible, or in addition to that, the number of game balls 99 accumulated in the stagnant lane 381 may be displayed. The number of game balls 99 accumulated in the stagnant lane 381 could be displayed, for example, by the number of lit lamps or by an image display on the symbol display unit 341.

The discharge lane 382 is continuous with the left end of the retention lane 381 and guides the game balls 99 that have accumulated in the retention lane 381 to a predetermined location, for example, an out ball sensor 318a (see Figure 12) that can detect them.

Furthermore, a special out ball sensor 384 is provided in the discharge lane 382. This special out ball sensor 384 detects when game balls 99 that have been accumulated in the retention lane 381 move into the discharge lane 382. In other words, the special out ball sensor 384 is used to count the number of game balls 99 accumulated in the retention lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 within a specific period. Specifically, as shown in Figure 12, the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out ball sensor 384 to determine whether or not game balls 99 have moved into the discharge lane 382. Furthermore, when the special out ball sensor 384 detects a game ball 99, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and transmits this special out ball detection command to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing step S1301 of the main processing shown in Figure 23, described later. Meanwhile, when the audio lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls and controls the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the set value (see the command determination processing in Figure 37 and the set value suggestion processing in Figure 40).

Furthermore, while an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as the special out ball sensor 384, the game balls 99 may also be detected by other detection methods (e.g., an optical sensor). The special out ball sensor 384 may also be connected to the sound lamp control device 5. In this case, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 does not set a special out ball detection command, but the sound lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384.

The stopper section 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between an upper limit position and a lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. The upper limit position is where the tip protrudes upward, and when the stopper section 383 is in the upper limit position, it is possible to retain game balls 99 in the retention lane 381 (see Figure 10(B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is where the tip does not protrude upward, and when the stopper section 383 is in the lower limit position, the game balls 99 in the retention lane 381 are made available for discharge via the discharge lane 382 (see Figure 10(C)). The game balls 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 are then guided to a position where they can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see Figure 12).

Furthermore, the means for allowing game balls 99 to remain in the retention lane 381 and for allowing game balls 99 from the retention lane 381 to be discharged to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to a stopper part 383 that can move up and down, but may also be other means such as a stopper part that can move back and forth, or a stopper part that can rotate between an upright state and a prone state. Alternatively, the game balls 99 may be retained by preventing them from moving due to the action of magnetic or electromagnetic force, and the game balls 99 may be discharged by releasing the action of magnetic or electromagnetic force. Moreover, by making the retention lane 381 movable up and down, it is possible to achieve both a state in which game balls 99 are retained and a state in which they are discharged. For example, the game balls 99 may be retained by keeping the retention lane 381 at a lower position than the discharge lane 382, while the game balls 99 may be moved to the discharge lane 382 by moving the retention lane 381 to a higher position than the discharge lane 382. Alternatively, the game board 31 may be provided with an opening that allows game balls 99 to be discharged to the rear side of the game board 31, and the retention lane 381 may be configured to move vertically between a position where game balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 and a position where game balls 99 can be discharged to the rear side of the game board 31 through the opening. Furthermore, instead of the retention lane 381, a box-shaped movable body may be moved to allow game balls 99 to be retained in the movable body and to be discharged to the rear side of the game board 31.

Here, Figure 11(A) shows an example of a 7-segment display unit 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in Figure 4, Figure 11(B) shows an example of number display on the 7-segment display unit, and Figure 11(C) shows an example of alphabet display on the 7-segment display unit.

As shown in Figure 11(A), the 7-segment display unit 39 consists of seven segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and the dot point DP can be individually lit and extinguished, and can display at least the numbers 1 to 6 as shown in Figure 11(B), and at least the letters A to F as shown in Figure 11(C). In this embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays numbers (specific information) representing each of the five game setting values (non-set values (specific numerical information)) other than the game setting values (set values (predetermined numerical information)) set to define the probability of winning a jackpot in the game machine 10, from a plurality of (six) game setting values (numerical information) corresponding to the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery (see Figures 14(A) and 14(B)), by lighting or extinguishing each segment A to G. Specifically, on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the unset value is game setting value 1, segments B and C light up to display the number 1; if the unset value is game setting value 2, segments A, B, D, E, and G light up to display the number 2; if the unset value is game setting value 3, segments A-D and G light up to display the number 3; if the unset value is game setting value 4, segments B, C, F, and G light up to display the number 4; if the unset value is game setting value 5, segments A, C, D, F, and G light up to display the number 5; and if the unset value is game setting value 6, segments A, C-G light up to display the number 6. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the dot point DP lights up when the number corresponding to the unset value is displayed, clearly indicating that the number corresponding to the unset value has been displayed.

Furthermore, the numbers corresponding to the unset values in the 7-segment display unit 39 are displayed in an order determined when the main power is turned on (power-on) or when the set value is changed, as will be described later (see Figures 35 and 36). Also, as will be described later, the control order for lighting or extinguishing each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is set (fixed) to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G.

Then, in the 7-segment display unit 39, as described later, the segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37 during a predetermined period (the number of specific conditions that are met during the predetermined period) are controlled to light up or turn off, and a number, or a part of a number, is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 indicates a non-set value other than the game setting value. Therefore, a part of the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 does not indicate the game setting value, but rather indicates a part of specific information that indicates a non-set value, and thus corresponds to special information. In other words, special information is displayed using a part of the multiple segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39. In this way, by displaying not only a number indicating a non-set value but also a part of a number (special information) on the 7-segment display unit 39, the player can not only identify a non-set value when a number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, but can also infer a non-set value based on a part of the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, even if no numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, players can still enjoy guessing the non-set value based on a portion of the numbers, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, whether or not each segment A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 is a controlled segment may or may not be explicitly indicated to the player. If it is explicitly indicated that each segment A to G is a controlled segment, it becomes easier to guess the set value compared to when it is not explicitly indicated. In this embodiment, since the control order of each segment A to G is fixed, a method is employed in which it is difficult to guess the set value because it is not explicitly indicated that each segment A to G is a controlled segment. If it is to explicitly indicate to the player that each segment A to G is a controlled segment, for example, the controlled segment could be made to blink, or it could be made to light up the controlled segment in a different color than when it is simply lit, thus indicating to the player that the segment is a controlled segment.

Furthermore, the 7-segment display unit 39 may display information for identifying the unset value using an alphabet corresponding to the unset value. For example, the letter A may be displayed when the unset value is game setting value 1, the letter B may be displayed when the unset value is game setting value 2, the letter C may be displayed when the unset value is game setting value 3, the letter D may be displayed when the unset value is game setting value 4, the letter E may be displayed when the unset value is game setting value 5, and the letter F may be displayed when the unset value is game setting value 6 (see Figure 11(C)).

The main display unit 36 comprises a regular symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first reserved number display unit 364, and a second reserved number display unit 365, all located in the upper right corner of the game board 31.

The regular symbol display unit 361 includes a pair of LEDs representing regular symbols (regular symbols), and displays the result of the regular symbol winning lottery, which determines whether or not to open the electric mechanism 315b triggered by a win in the through gate 317, by the combination of on/off states of the LED pair. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the LED pair to blink (displaying the regular symbols) upon a win in the through gate 317, and displays the result of the regular symbol winning lottery by turning each LED on or off after the display time has elapsed.

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a 7-segment display device as the first special symbol (first special symbol), and displays the result of the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery), which determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game triggered by a ball entering the first prize slot 314, by a combination of the on/off states of the seven segments on the 7-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the 7-segment display device to flash (variable display of the first special symbol) when a ball enters the first prize slot 314, and displays the result of the jackpot lottery by turning each segment on or off after the variation display time has elapsed.

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment display device as the second special symbol (second special symbol), and displays the result of the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery), which determines whether or not to execute the jackpot game triggered by a ball entering the second prize slot 315, by a combination of the on/off states of the seven segments on the 7-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the 7-segment display device to flash (variable display of the second special symbol) when a ball enters the second prize slot 315, and displays the result of the jackpot lottery by turning each segment on or off after the variation display time has elapsed.

The first reserved number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the number of reserved numbers N of the first special symbol, which is generated by a winning entry into the first prize slot 314, by the number of lit LEDs.

The second reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reserved number M of the second special symbol, which is generated by a win in the second prize entry slot 315, by the number of lit LEDs.

[Back Pack Unit 13]
As shown in Figure 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The dispensing mechanism 130 comprises a tank 131 for storing game balls supplied from the island equipment (not shown) of the gaming hall, and a dispensing device 132 for dispensing game balls from the tank 131 towards the upper tray 23. If the upper tray 23 is saturated with game balls, the game balls dispensed by the dispensing device 132 are dispensed into the lower tray 24.

As shown in Figure 12, the peripheral control unit 140 comprises a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls dispensed by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launching mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the game machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level and supplies it to the control devices and drive means installed within the game machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 12 to 19.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in Figure 12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that performs the main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 performs a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transitioning to a preset jackpot game state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a single-chip microcontroller. The MPU 41 also incorporates a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 411 and other components. Furthermore, some or all of the processing performed by the main control unit 4 may be executed by electronic circuits.

The input/output interface (I/F) 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main control unit 4 and outputs control signals from the main control unit 4. The input/output interface 42 is also connected to ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, ball exit sensor 318a, and special ball exit sensor 384. The MPU 41 determines whether balls have entered the general prize entry opening 313, the first prize entry opening 314, the second prize entry opening 315, and the variable prize entry opening 316, and whether game balls 99 have passed through the through gate 317, based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. The MPU 41 also counts the number of balls that have been exited (number of balls launched) based on the detection signal from the ball exit sensor 318a. Furthermore, the input/output interface 42 is connected to the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the power supply control device 9.

The MPU 41 then outputs commands to the audio lamp control device 5, including commands such as the variable pattern command, the first hold command, the second hold command, the shift command, the jackpot game start command, the round game start command, the round game end command, the ending start command, the jackpot game end command, the special out ball detection command, and the setting value change command.

The variation pattern command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it includes information regarding the type of jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 of the variation start process shown in Figure 26, based on the information stored in the reserve storage area 412b (described later) when the main display unit 36 starts displaying the variation pattern. Note that the variation pattern command may also be a command that only notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the variation display time. In this case, the command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 of the jackpot lottery result and the type of jackpot is set as a separate command from the variation pattern command.

The first and second hold commands are commands that notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result, variation pattern, and the number of hold N or M in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold when the number of hold N or M stored in the hold storage area 412b (described later) increases. The first and second hold commands are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b (described later) when the number of hold N or M increases (steps S1207 or S1209 of the first hold command setting process in Figure 22, described later).

The shift command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the win/loss information indicating the jackpot lottery result in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 or the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 has shifted when the number of reserved balls N or M decreases. The shift command is set in step S1508 of the data setting process shown in Figure 25 below.

The "Big Win Game Start Command" is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that a big win game is about to begin, that is, that the game state is transitioning to the big win game state. It is set during the game state transition process in the main process shown in Figure 23 (described later) when transitioning to the big win game state. Furthermore, since the "Big Win Game Start Command" notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that a big win game is about to begin, the audio lamp control device 5 can understand not only that a big win game is about to begin, but also that the opening sequence is about to begin, upon receiving the "Big Win Game Start Command." However, it is also possible to set a separate "Opening Start Command" in addition to the "Big Win Start Command," so that the audio lamp control device 5 understands that the opening sequence is about to begin via the "Opening Start Command."

The round game start command is a command that, in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game, notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to start each round game and to provide information indicating the number of rounds in the current round game. This command is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process shown in Figure 23, described later. While the audio lamp control device 5 can understand that the opening has ended and the opening/closing execution mode has started based on the round game start command, it is also possible to set an opening end command separately at the end of the opening, or an opening/closing execution mode start command when the opening/closing execution mode begins. Furthermore, in addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds in the upcoming round game may be set at the start of the round game, and this command may be sent to the audio lamp control device 5.

The round game end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the round game is ending during the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game. It is set during the jackpot game control processing in the main processing shown in Figure 23, which will be described later.

The jackpot game end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game has ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process shown in Figure 23, which will be described later.

The special out ball detection command indicates that a game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37. This command is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 20 (described later). The audio lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls over a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control content on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The setting value change command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that a setting value has been changed and that the changed setting value is correct. It is set in step S1710 of the setting value change process shown in Figure 27 below.

Note that commands other than those mentioned above may be output from the main control unit 4 to the audio lamp control unit 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

Furthermore, the main control unit 4 is equipped with an oscillator circuit and a frequency divider circuit as means of supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution period of the main timer interrupt processing, described later, performed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (e.g., 4 msec), and the MPU 41 activates and executes the main timer interrupt processing described later each time a rising or falling edge of the clock signal occurs. The oscillator circuit and frequency divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and peripheral control unit 140 as needed, supplying the control-main operating clock for the sub-control unit 332 and peripheral control unit 140. Alternatively, the clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and peripheral control unit 140.

ROM 411 is a non-volatile memory unit that pre-stores control programs and parameter information. RAM 412 is a volatile memory unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as the primary storage area (work area) for processing performed by the MPU 41. For example, RAM 412 is used for setting commands transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5, etc. Note that RAM 412 may also be a non-volatile memory unit.

Here, referring to Figure 13, the memory area used by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 of the gaming machine 10 for performing jackpot lotteries and other operations will be explained. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the electric function hold area 412c of the RAM 412 to perform jackpot lotteries and set the display time for variations.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the type of loss. Furthermore, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display unit 36 and the symbol display unit 341. Additionally, the lottery counter 412a includes a normal jackpot random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not to activate the electric mechanism 315b of the second prize entry point 315, and a normal jackpot initial value counter CIN2 used for setting the initial value of the normal jackpot random number counter C4. Hereafter, when these multiple types of counters are described collectively, they will simply be referred to as "counters."

Furthermore, counters C1-C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters, where the MPU 41 increments the previous value by 1 at short intervals, and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in counters C1-C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 and are referenced by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and the display time for fluctuations.

The hold storage area 412b comprises a first hold storage area REA, a second hold storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first hold storage area REA includes a first hold storage area REA1, a second hold storage area REA2, a third hold storage area REA3, a fourth hold storage area REA4, and a hold count storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is conducted based on the values stored in the first hold storage area REA, and the type of variable game in which the first special symbol display unit 362 displays a variable and stopped symbol may be referred to as a first special symbol game. The second hold storage area REB includes a first hold storage area REB1, a second hold storage area REB2, a third hold storage area REB3, a fourth hold storage area REB4, and a hold count storage area NAB. The following refers to a type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is conducted based on the values stored in the second reserve storage area REB, and the second special symbol display unit 363 displays a variable and stopped symbol. This type of game may be referred to as a second special symbol game.

When a game ball enters the first prize slot 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery and stored in one of the first to fourth reserve areas REA1 to REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery and stored in one of the first to fourth reserve areas REB1 to REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB. The process of acquiring win/loss information is performed by the MPU 41, which functions as a determination means of the present invention, by executing processing according to the control program. Furthermore, a separate lottery counter 412a (such as a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1) may be provided for each of the first and second reserve storage areas REA and REB.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is stored in one of the first reserve storage areas REA1 to REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA, or in the first reserve area REB1 to 4 reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB.

Therefore, in addition to the results of the jackpot lottery for the 19 variable games executed based on the win/loss information stored in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB, it is possible to pre-determine the variation pattern (variation display time) of the variation display of the symbols displayed in the symbol display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314, the win/loss information is stored in the available areas in the following order of priority: first reserve area REA1, second reserve area REA2, third reserve area REA3, and fourth reserve area REA4. The reserve count memory area NAA stores the number of reserves N that have win/loss information stored in the first to fourth reserve areas REA1 through REA4.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second prize slot 315, the win/loss information is stored in the available areas in the following order of priority: first reserve area REB1, second reserve area REB2, third reserve area REB3, and fourth reserve area REB4. The reserve count memory area NAB stores the number of reserves (M) for which win/loss information is stored among the first to fourth reserve areas REB1.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 has a total of eight memory areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4, and the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4. This allows it to store up to four records each of win/loss information as entry history for the first prize entry point 314 and the second prize entry point 315.

Furthermore, in another embodiment, it is conceivable that both the first and second prize entry points 314 and 315 are provided with a maximum of eight retention areas. In this case as well, it is possible to retain up to eight sets of win/loss information as prize history. The storage process of the win/loss information is performed by the MPU 41 by executing processing according to the control program.

The execution area AE is a memory area used to move the win/loss information stored in the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA or the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB when the symbol variation display in the main display unit 36 and the symbol display unit 341 begins. Specifically, the win/loss information in the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. If there is no win/loss information in the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB and the hold count storage area NAB is 0, then the win/loss information in the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

Furthermore, in another embodiment, if the difference between the number of reserved items M stored in the reserved item storage area NAA of the first reserved item storage area REA and the number of reserved items N stored in the reserved item storage area NAB of the second reserved item storage area REB is 2 or more, the value of the reserved item storage area with the larger number may be prioritized and moved to the execution area AE. Also, in another embodiment, the validity information of the first reserved item storage area REA1 of the first reserved item storage area REA and the first reserved item storage area REB1 of the second reserved item storage area REB may be moved alternately to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of each variable game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on the numerical information stored as win/loss information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first reserve area REA1 of the first reserve storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the win/loss information stored in the second reserve area REA2 shifts to the first reserve area REA1, the win/loss information stored in the third reserve area REA3 shifts to the second reserve area REA2, and the win/loss information stored in the fourth reserve area REA4 shifts to the third reserve area REA3.

Similarly, if the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the validity information stored in the second holding area REB2 shifts to the first holding area REB1, the validity information stored in the third holding area REB3 shifts to the second holding area REB2, and the validity information stored in the fourth holding area REB4 shifts to the third holding area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 sequentially within a range, for example, 0 to 637, and resets to 0 after reaching its maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that point is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1 (0 to 738). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the reserve storage area 412b when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315.

The random number values that result in a jackpot are set in two types, corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode (a state of continuous bonus gameplay), based on the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table memory area of ROM 411. Here, Figure 14(A) shows an example of the low probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the low probability mode, and Figure 14(B) shows an example of the high probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the examples shown in Figures 14(A) and 14(B), multiple win/loss tables are provided for low-probability mode and high-probability mode, respectively, where the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery (jackpot probability) differs according to the game setting value. Both the low-probability mode and high-probability mode win/loss tables contain six win/loss tables, corresponding to six game setting values from 1 to 6. The probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery increases in the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1, making it more advantageous for the player.

With game setting 1, out of 65,536 random numbers ranging from 0 to 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 821 (0 to 820) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 1, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/79.9 (820/65536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 2, out of 65,536 random numbers ranging from 0 to 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 845 (0 to 844) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 2, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/77.6 (845/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 3, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 218 (0-217) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 869 (0-868) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 3, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/75.4 (869/65536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 4, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 224 (0-223) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 893 (0-892) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 4, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/73.4 (893/65536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 5, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 230 (0-229) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 917 (0-916) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 5, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/71.5 (917/65536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

With game setting 6, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 236 (0-235) for the low probability mode win/loss table and 941 (0-940) for the high probability mode win/loss table. In other words, with game setting 6, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately four times that of low probability mode, approximately 1/69.6 (941/65536).

Furthermore, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is anything other than a random number that results in a jackpot, the jackpot lottery will result in a loss.

Here, in the low-probability mode win/loss table and the high-probability mode win/loss table, the random numbers that result in a jackpot draw for the same game setting are common, but it is also possible that the random numbers that result in a jackpot are not common. Furthermore, the random numbers that result in a jackpot do not have to be consecutive values; some or all of them may be discrete values.

Furthermore, while there are six low-probability mode win/loss tables and six high-probability mode win/loss tables corresponding to the six game setting values, only one win/loss table is needed for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six. It is also conceivable to have multiple low-probability mode win/loss tables corresponding to multiple game setting values, while having only one high-probability mode win/loss table. That is, it is possible to have multiple game setting values for the low-probability mode, and no tiered game setting values for the high-probability mode, resulting in a uniform jackpot probability. Of course, it is also possible to have a uniform jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and multiple game setting values for the high-probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 19, and resets to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically and stored in the reserve storage area 412b when a game ball enters the first or second prize slot 314. In the game machine 10, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 411 sets the corresponding value of the jackpot type counter C2 for each of the two types of jackpots: probability variation jackpots and normal jackpots.

Here, Figure 14(C) shows an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in Figure 14(C), when the type of variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by a win in the first prize slot 314, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 (0-9), the number of random numbers that result in a 16R probability variation jackpot is 5 (10-14), and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 (15-19). On the other hand, when the type of variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by a win in the second prize slot 315, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 (0-4), the number of random numbers that result in a 16R probability variation jackpot is 10 (5-14), and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 (15-19). In other words, the game machine 10 is a so-called loop probability variation machine in which the probability of a probability variation jackpot is the same in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a 16R probability variation jackpot is set higher in the second special symbol game compared to the first special symbol game. In other words, in the probability variation game state (high probability mode and high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric mechanism 315b), the expected value of winning game balls when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot is set higher compared to the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) and the normal game state (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode with a low probability of opening the electric mechanism 315b).

In this embodiment, separate distribution tables are set for the first prize slot 314, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second prize slot 315, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol game upon winning. The probability of winning a different type of jackpot differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315. However, it is also possible that the probability of winning a different type of jackpot is the same for both the first and second special symbol games. Furthermore, the game machine 10 is not limited to a loop probability variation machine; it can also be configured as a so-called ST machine, V-ST machine, or a type 1/type 2 mixed machine.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R probability variation jackpot," a "16R probability variation jackpot," a "5R normal jackpot," or a "miss."

Here, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability-changing jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which the variable prize entry point 316 is opened and closed five times during the jackpot game. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability-changing jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which the round game is repeated 16 times during the jackpot game.

In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a probability variation game state, which is a high-probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric mechanism 315b. In this embodiment, the probability variation game state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," a "16R probability variation jackpot," or a "5R normal jackpot."

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R regular jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a time-saving game state, which is a low-probability mode with a low probability of winning a jackpot and a high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric mechanism 315b. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) continues until the player is notified of the results of a predetermined number of jackpot draws, such as 50 or 100 times, or it ends if the player is informed that the jackpot has been won before the predetermined number of draws has elapsed.

By the way, if the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or V-ST machine instead of a loop probability variation machine, after the jackpot game ends during a probability variation jackpot, a predetermined number of jackpot draws (for example, 50 or 100 times) are performed in the probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). If the jackpot draw does not result in a jackpot within the predetermined number of draws, the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is conceivable that a draw for transitioning from the probability variation game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state may be performed during variable gameplay. Note that if the jackpot draw result is a loss, the game does not transition to the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state. In this embodiment, we will explain using the example of a game machine 10 having three types of jackpots: a 5R probability-changing jackpot, a 16R probability-changing jackpot, and a 5R regular jackpot. However, the invention is not limited to this, and it is also conceivable that the machine may have other types of jackpots, such as a 2R probability-changing jackpot, a 2R regular jackpot, or a 16R regular jackpot.

Furthermore, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically and stored in the reserve storage area 412b when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stopping result for the variable display shown on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in a jackpot is a miss. Specifically, the miss type table stored in the miss type table storage area of the ROM 411 sets the corresponding value of the reach random number counter C3 for three types of misses: a front/back miss reach where the final stopping symbol stops one position before or after the reach symbol after a reach occurs; a non-front/back miss reach where the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol after a reach occurs; and a complete miss where no reach occurs.

Here, Figure 14(D) shows an example of a table of miss types. In the example shown in Figure 14(D), the random number values for a near miss (neither near nor near miss) are 0 to 8, the random number values for a near miss (other than near miss) are 9 to 38, and the random number values for a complete miss are 39 to 238. Note that in variable games where a 5R probability-changing jackpot, a 16R probability-changing jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot is won, i.e., variable games that transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 determines that a near miss has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, "reach" refers to a state in the symbol display unit 341 where, between the start of the symbol change display and the time the symbols stop, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot is likely to occur. For example, in this state, two of the three stop positions on the active line of the symbol display unit 341 are the same symbol, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. Furthermore, during the reach state of the symbol display unit 341, story-based presentation processing is performed, such as displaying videos of predetermined characters to suggest the level of expectation, or player-participation-type presentation processing where the player's actions on the operation buttons 20 are reflected in the presentation. It should be noted that during the execution of these presentation processes, the symbol change display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, or displayed in a reduced or enlarged state.

The normal win random number counter C4 is incremented by 1 sequentially within the range of 0 to 250, and resets to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The normal win random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 412c in the RAM 412 when a game ball enters the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to open the electric mechanism 315b for a predetermined time, based on the value of the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 412c. For example, a value of 0 to 199 indicates a win, while a value of 200 to 250 indicates a loss.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 sequentially within a range of, for example, 0 to 199, and resets to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display shown on the symbol display unit 341, according to the result of the jackpot lottery. In this way, once the variation pattern type is determined, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the general variation game effect types, such as high-speed variation effects (basic effects, non-reach effects), normal reach effects, super reach effects, and special reach effects, according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the main processing. Furthermore, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when a game ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315.

The MPU 41 then determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a pre-set variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern by referring to the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, or the losing variation table pre-stored in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. These variation tables may be provided separately for low probability mode and high probability mode. Furthermore, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided separately for 5R probability variation jackpots and 16R probability variation jackpots, respectively.

Here, Figures 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C) show examples of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, and a losing variation table. As shown in Figures 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C), the variation patterns in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the losing variation table are pre-associated according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. The MPU 41 then refers to the normal jackpot variation table if the jackpot lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot," the probability variation jackpot variation table if the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot" or a "16R probability variation jackpot," and the losing variation table if the lottery result is a "loser," thereby determining the type of variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 15(A) and 15(B), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 30s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the normal reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variation game performance is a normal reach performance. When variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 60s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the super reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variation game performance is a super reach performance. Furthermore, if variation pattern "03" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern as the variation type (effect pattern), which has the longest variation display time of 90s, and the special reach effect pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variation game effect is the special reach effect.

As shown in Figure 15(C), in the losing variation table, the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern is defined for each type of stop at a loss (front/back loss reach, reach other than front/back loss, complete loss) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, if the stop type at a loss is a front/back loss reach or a reach other than front/back loss, one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, if the stop type at a loss is a complete loss, one of the variation patterns "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When variation pattern "04" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a no-reach performance pattern (non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 7s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the non-reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, if variation pattern "05" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a variation type (performance pattern type) of a non-reach performance pattern (non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 10s, and the non-reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, when a spin pattern "04" results in a loss, the spin display stops on a losing symbol without any accompanying pre-announcement effects such as the display of characters or messages. Also, in the gaming machine 10, when a spin pattern "05" results in a loss, the spin display stops on a losing symbol accompanied by pre-announcement effects such as the display of characters or messages. Furthermore, when a spin pattern "05" results in a loss, a player-participation type pre-announcement effect may be executed, reflecting the player's operation of the operation buttons 20.

Furthermore, the types of variation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C). Also, the probability variation tables for jackpot wins may be provided separately for 5R and 16R jackpot wins.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach animations with different characters, stories, etc., are prepared for the normal reach animation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "01," and one of these normal reach animations is selected and executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reach animations with different characters and stories are available for the super reach animation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "02," and one of these super reach animations is selected and executed. Super reach animations are longer variation times than normal reach animations, and are executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expected value) of winning the jackpot is higher than with normal reach animations, but lower than with special reach animations.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of special reach sequences are available, each with different characters and storylines, which are executed in the special reach sequence sequence corresponding to the variation pattern "03". One of these special reach sequences is selected and executed. A special reach sequence is a reach sequence with a longer variation time than a normal reach sequence, and can develop from, for example, a normal reach sequence or a super reach sequence. A special reach sequence is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot is higher than that of a normal reach sequence or a special reach sequence.

Furthermore, the performance patterns corresponding to the fluctuation patterns may include player-participation performances that reflect the player's actions on the operation buttons 20. These include, for example, single-press performances where a single press is reflected in the performance, rapid-press performances where rapid-press operations of the operation buttons 20 are reflected in the performance, and long-press performances where long-press operations of the operation buttons 20 are reflected in the performance.

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies a variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 36, it inputs that variation pattern and a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "A01" to "A03", with "A" added before the variation pattern "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Also, if the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "B01" to "B03", with "B" added before the variation pattern "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "C01" to "C03," which have a "C" added before the variation pattern "01" to "03" to indicate a 16R probability variation jackpot. Also, if the lottery result is a "loss," the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "D01" to "D05," which have a "D" added before the variation pattern "01" to "05" to indicate a loss. This allows the audio lamp control device 5 to determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and then determine the details of the variation mode, such as the variation type and performance type, displayed on the symbol display unit 341, based on the variation mode details. Then, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform the variation display based on the determined details of the variation mode, plays sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variation display, and lights up, flashes, or turns off the illuminated unit 27.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process to determine the variation pattern (variation display time) for the variation display on the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcontroller, the MPU 41 can reliably perform the jackpot lottery. Furthermore, since the details of the variation patterns actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation patterns.

Here, Figure 16 is a block diagram showing an example of a game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 of the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 of the gaming machine shown in Figure 1. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, payout performance, etc. In this embodiment, the game information storage area 412d stores the following as game information: "Number of balls paid out," "Number of balls paid out from general prize slots," "Number of balls paid out from first prize slots," "Number of balls paid out from second prize slots," "Number of balls paid out from variable prize slots," "Setting value," "Base information," "Continuous prize ratio information," "Prize ratio information," "Cumulative number of jackpot draws," "Unit jackpot draws," "Number of jackpots," and "Number of consecutive misses." Of this game information, "Setting value," "Base information," "Continuous prize ratio information," "Prize ratio information," and "Unit jackpot draws" correspond to game information (performance information) related to payout performance.

The "Number of Out Balls" is the cumulative number of game balls launched into the game board 31 during normal gameplay (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "Number of Out Balls" is stored as the count of out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a during the sensor detection process in step S1001 of the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 20 (described later).

The "General Prize Ball Payout Count" is the cumulative number of game balls dispensed for winning in the general prize slot 313 during normal gameplay (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "General Prize Ball Payout Count" is updated when, during normal gameplay, the ball entry sensor 313a detects a win in the general prize slot 313. In the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing shown in Figure 23 (described later), a prize ball command is set to instruct the payout control device 7 to dispense the number of prize balls corresponding to the win in the general prize slot 313. The value is updated by adding the number of balls dispensed for the current win.

The "Number of Balls Dispensed from the First Prize Port" is the cumulative number of game balls dispensed for entries into the first prize port 314 during normal gameplay (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "Number of Balls Dispensed from the First Prize Port" is updated when, during normal gameplay, the ball entry sensor 314a detects an entry into the first prize port 314. In the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing shown in Figure 23 (described later), a prize ball command is set to instruct the payout control device 7 to dispense the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry into the first prize port 314. The value of this value is updated by adding the number of balls dispensed for the current entry.

The "Number of Balls Payout from the Second Prize Port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out for entries into the second prize port 315 during the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "Number of Balls Payout from the Second Prize Port" is updated when, during the time-saving game state, the ball entry sensor 315a detects an entry into the second prize port 315. In the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing shown in Figure 23 (described later), a prize ball command is set to instruct the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry into the second prize port 315. The value is updated by adding the number of balls paid out for this entry.

The "Variable Prize Outlet Payout Count" is the cumulative value of game balls dispensed for entries into the variable prize outlet 316 during a jackpot game. This "Variable Prize Outlet Payout Count" is updated when, during a jackpot game, the ball entry sensor 316a detects an entry into the variable prize outlet 316. In the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing shown in Figure 23 (described later), a prize ball command is set to instruct the payout control device 7 to dispense the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry into the variable prize outlet 316. The value is updated by adding the number of balls dispensed for the current entry.

The "setting value" is used to select the low-probability mode win/failure table (see Figure 14(A)) and the high-probability mode win/failure table (see Figure 14(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (win/failure determination). In other words, the "setting value" defines the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In this embodiment, as described later, six setting values (six different low-probability mode win/failure tables (see Figure 14(A)) and high-probability mode win/failure tables (see Figure 14(B))) with different jackpot probabilities are prepared. The "setting value" is updated in the setting value change process shown in Figure 27, described later.

"Base information" refers to information about the "base," which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "base" is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out from the "general prize slot" and the "first prize slot" to the "number of balls to be played" in the normal game state. Expressed as a formula, "base" = 100 × ("number of balls paid out from the general prize slot" + "number of balls paid out from the first prize slot") / "number of balls to be played". "Base information" includes information about the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the 60,000-ball base B2 from two games prior. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the 60,000-ball base B2 from two games prior are updated each time the number of balls to be played reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information update process shown in Figure 28 below (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, when the most recent number of balls dispensed reaches 60,000, the "base" is saved as the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and when the number of balls dispensed before that reached 60,000, the "base" is saved as the previous 60,000-ball base B2, both as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Furthermore, until the counter value of the number of balls dispensed reaches 60,000, the calculation is performed using the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is saved as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Also, when the calculation is performed using the current base BL until the counter value of the number of balls dispensed reaches 60,000, the "base information" stores "number of balls dispensed from the general prize slot," "number of balls dispensed from the first prize slot," and "number of balls dispensed" separately from the previously explained "number of balls dispensed from the general prize slot," "number of balls dispensed from the first prize slot," and "number of balls dispensed," specifically for base calculation.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes "current base BL," "previous 60,000 ball base B1," and "the previous 60,000 ball base B2," and the history of the last two 60,000 ball bases is retained. However, it is also possible to retain the history of three or more past 60,000 ball bases. Furthermore, the "base information" may include the cumulative base from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall until the present.

The "continuous prize payout ratio information" is information regarding the "continuous prize payout ratio," which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable prize payout slots to the total number of balls paid out from all prize payout slots (general prize payout slot 313, first prize payout slot 314, second prize payout slot 315, and variable prize payout slot 316) that pay out prize balls. The "continuous prize payout ratio" can be expressed by the formula: "continuous prize payout ratio" = 100 × "number of balls paid out from variable prize payout slots" / "total number of balls paid out." The "continuous prize payout ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process shown in Figure 28 below. In this embodiment, the "continuous prize payout ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous prize payout ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall until the present. Furthermore, "consecutive bonus payout ratio information" may also refer to the consecutive bonus payout ratio over a certain period (for example, over a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), over a period until a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 1000 times) are performed during normal gameplay, or over a period until the number of balls dispensed reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, "consecutive bonus payout ratio information" may include both the cumulative consecutive bonus payout ratio and the consecutive bonus payout ratio over a certain period.

The "prize payout ratio information" is information regarding the "prize payout ratio," which is the ratio of the combined number of balls paid out by the second prize payout slot and the number of balls paid out by the variable prize payout slot to the total number of balls paid out by all prize payout slots (general prize payout slot 313, first prize payout slot 314, second prize payout slot 315, and variable prize payout slot 316) that pay out prize balls. The "prize payout ratio" can be expressed by the formula: "prize payout ratio" = 100 × ("number of balls paid out by second prize payout slot" + "number of balls paid out by variable prize payout slot") / "total number of balls paid out". The "prize payout ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process shown in Figure 28 below. In this embodiment, the "prize payout ratio information" is stored as the cumulative prize payout ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall until the present. Furthermore, "prize payout ratio information" may also refer to the prize payout ratio over a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), for the period until a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 1000 times) are performed during normal gameplay, or for the period until the number of balls dispensed reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, "continuous prize payout ratio information" may include both the cumulative prize payout ratio and the prize payout ratio over a certain period.

The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is the number of times a jackpot draw has been performed in normal gameplay mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the time the gaming machine 10 was started before the start of business at the gaming hall until the present. In other words, the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is also the cumulative number of times the symbol change display on the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 has been executed, triggered by a ball entering the first prize slot 314 in normal gameplay mode. The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is increased by 1 each time the symbol change display on the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 of the change start processing shown in Figure 26 below. Furthermore, the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "unit jackpot draw count" is the number of times a jackpot draw was received (the number of times the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display unit of the main display unit 36 was executed) triggered by a certain number of negative ball differences entering the first prize slot 314 during normal gameplay (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). In this embodiment, the certain number is "250 balls," and the difference in balls is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "number of balls paid out from the general prize slot" and the "number of balls paid out from the first prize slot" from the "number of balls out." In other words, the "unit jackpot draw count" is the average number of times the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 varied per 1000 yen when a game hall provides 250 balls for every 1000 yen spent (the number of times a jackpot draw was received). Note that the "unit jackpot draw count" may also be the number of times a jackpot draw was received per a certain number of "balls out" during normal gameplay. The "Unit Jackpot Draw Count" is updated in the specific performance information update process shown in Figure 28, described later. In this embodiment, the "Unit Jackpot Draw Count" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall until the present. The "Unit Jackpot Draw Count" may also be for a specific period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), for a period until a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 1000 times) are performed during normal gameplay, or for a period until the number of balls dispensed reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, both the cumulative unit jackpot draw count and the unit jackpot draw count over a specific period may be stored as game information.

The "Number of Jackpots" is the number of times the jackpot lottery results have been achieved in the jackpot draws conducted from the time the gaming machine 10 was started before the opening of the gaming hall until the present. The "Number of Jackpots" is incremented by 1 each time the game state is transitioned to a jackpot game state during the game state transition process executed in step S1306 of the main processing shown in Figure 23 (described later). Furthermore, the "Number of Jackpots" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "Consecutive Losses Count" is the number of consecutive losses in the jackpot lottery during normal gameplay (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). It is reset to 0 if the lottery result is a jackpot. In step S1606 of the variation start processing shown in Figure 26 (described later), when the main display unit 36 starts displaying the changing symbols, the "Consecutive Losses Count" is incremented by 1 if the result of the win/loss judgment based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S1603 is a loss, and reset to 0 if the win/loss judgment result is a jackpot. In this embodiment, the "Consecutive Losses Count" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the game machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "Consecutive Losses Count" may be configured not to be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the game machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 12, the performance information display device 4A displays the "base information" and "setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a setting value display unit 45, a setting value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, Figure 17 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in Figure 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays "base information" for the gaming machine 10 and is positioned in a visible location when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see Figure 3). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of multiple (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-segment display. While it is preferable to provide the performance display monitor 43 on the main control device 4, it may also be provided on a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or on other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. Furthermore, it is also conceivable to display "base information" using the first special symbol display unit 362 and/or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

The 7-segment displays 431-434 can display the numbers "0" through "9" and the letters "A" through "F". In addition, when displaying the letter "B" on the 7-segment displays 431-434, a dot is illuminated to distinguish it from the number "8," displaying "8." Similarly, when displaying the letter "D," a dot is illuminated to distinguish it from the number "0," displaying "0." Furthermore, when displaying any of the letters "A" through "F," a dot may be illuminated to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet letter.

The performance display monitor 43 consists of four 7-segment displays 431-434. The two leftmost 7-segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments that display the "base type" using an abbreviation, while the two rightmost 7-segment displays 433 and 434 are ratio segments that display the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41. For example, if the current base BL is 31%, the two leftmost 7-segment displays 431 and 432 (identification segments) will display the abbreviation "BL" for the current base BL as "8." and "L," respectively, while the two rightmost 7-segment displays 433 and 434 (ratio segments) will display the base value "31" as "3" and "1." In other words, the four 7-segment displays 431-434 will display "8.", "L," "3," and "1" from left to right.

The performance display switch 44 switches the power on and off of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431-434) all at once when pressed, and is located in an easily accessible position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see Figure 3). In the illustrated example, pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44 turns the power on, and pressing the lower half turns the power off. When the power is turned on to the performance display switch 44, power is supplied to the four 7-segment displays 431-434, enabling the display of base information on the performance display monitor 43. Conversely, when the power is turned off to the performance display switch 44, power to the four 7-segment displays 431-434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. Note that the performance display switch 44 may be provided in locations other than the main control unit 4.

Here, Figure 18(A) shows an example of the display on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in Figure 18(A), when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, and therefore the base information is not displayed. As shown in Figures 18(B) to 18(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, as long as the performance display switch 44 is not turned off, the "base information" loops in the following order: current base BL → previous 60,000 ball base B1 → the time before last 60,000 ball base B2 → current base BL, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in Figure 18(B), the current base BL is shown to be 28%, in the example shown in Figure 18(C), the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is shown to be 34%, and in the example shown in Figure 18(D), the time before last 60,000 ball base B2 is shown to be 32%. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 18(A), when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431-434 are turned off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

Furthermore, the programs necessary to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as the programs that calculate the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the 60,000-ball base B2, and the programs that sequentially display the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the 60,000-ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 at regular intervals, are stored in ROM 47, which is provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. This reduces the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41. However, if there is sufficient capacity in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41, the programs necessary to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in ROM 411. Alternatively, the programs necessary to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 may display other performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d, such as "continuous bonus ratio information" or "bonus ratio information," instead of, or in addition to, the "base information."

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display; it may also be composed of other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 17, the setting value display unit 45 displays the aforementioned setting values for selecting the low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14(A)) and the high-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14(B)) which are referenced in the jackpot lottery, and is configured as a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display; it may also be configured as other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display, and the setting values may be displayed using the performance display monitor 43.

The setting value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off with a press operation, and allows the setting value to be changed by a rotation operation when the power of the 7-segment display is on. The setting value change operation unit 46 has the function of a contact-type switch that is switched on and off with a press operation, and the function of a rotary switch where the contacts are switched by a rotation operation (rotation by a predetermined angle). Here, Figure 19 shows an example of the display on the setting value display unit 45 of the main control unit.

As shown in Figure 19(A), when the setting value display unit 45 is off, pressing the setting value change operation unit 46 energizes the 7-segment display, causing a number to appear on the setting value display unit 45. The number displayed at this time is the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, indicating the current setting value. In the illustrated example, the setting value is "1". Conversely, when the setting value display unit 45 is lit, pressing the setting value change operation unit 46 energizes the 7-segment display, causing the setting value display unit 45 to turn off.

As shown in Figure 19(B), when the setting value display unit 45 is lit, a rotation operation is performed on the setting value change operation unit 46, and the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 changes. In the illustrated example, rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the right increases the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45, and rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the left decreases the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45. When the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 changes due to rotation, the changed number is stored as the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Therefore, if the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed and the power to the 7-segment display is turned off while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the number that was displayed immediately before the power was turned off is determined as the setting value. As a result, the MPU 41 can perform a jackpot lottery based on a low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14(A)) or a high-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14(B)) selected according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.

The method for changing the setting value is not limited to rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then turning off the power to the setting value display unit 45. For example, the setting value may be determined by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see Figure 1); the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 may be changed by repeatedly pressing or holding down the operation button 20 (see Figure 1) and then turning off the power to the setting value display unit 45; or a key may be inserted into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4, etc., and the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 may be changed by rotating the key and then removing the key.

Here, the performance information display device 4A, which includes a setting value display unit 45, is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. The control unit 33 is located on the rear side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Therefore, the setting value display unit 45 is located on the rear side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 relative to the front frame 11, it is possible to select between a state in which it is visible from the outside of the game machine 10 (the front side of the front frame 11) and a state in which it is not visible. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 cannot be seen, while by opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 can be seen. As a result, when a player plays a game on the gaming machine 10, the setting value display unit 45 is not visible unless the game board 31 is opened. Therefore, the setting value is not revealed to the player by the numbers displayed on the setting value display unit 45. Furthermore, the setting value display unit 45 is turned off when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while it is lit. Therefore, by maintaining the setting value display unit 45 in an off state during the gaming hall's operating hours, even if the game board 31 is opened due to a ball jam or other issue in the gaming machine 10, making the setting value display unit 45 visible, the setting value is not revealed to the player by the setting value display unit 45.

On the other hand, the setting value display unit 45, when off, is illuminated when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, and the number corresponding to the setting value is hidden. Therefore, outside of the gaming hall's operating hours, by opening the game board 31 to the front frame 11 and pressing the setting value change operation unit 46, the setting value display unit 45 is illuminated, allowing the setting value to be confirmed based on the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45. Furthermore, the setting value can be changed by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. This ensures the confidentiality of the setting value during operating hours while allowing for easy changes to the setting value outside of operating hours.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in Figure 12, the sub-control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and executes the display of changing patterns and effects in the pattern display unit 341 based on the control signals input from the main control unit 331.

[Voice Lamp Control Device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51 and an input/output interface 52, among other things. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a single-chip microcontroller. The MPU 51 also has a ROM 511 and a RAM 512 built into it.

ROM 511 is a non-volatile memory unit that pre-stores control programs and parameter information. ROM 511 also stores information such as audio and lamp flashing patterns used in variable game effects and jackpot game effects. RAM 512 is a volatile memory unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as the primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by MPU 51. Note that RAM 512 may also be a non-volatile memory unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 by executing processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 via the MPU 51, thereby inputting commands (control signals) to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the playback sound output from the speaker 26 and the flashing pattern of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, when executing the variable game performance and jackpot game performance described later, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the playback sound output from the speaker 26, and the flashing pattern of the illumination unit 27.

The input/output interface 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output interface 52. Commands such as variable pattern commands, first hold commands, second hold commands, and shift commands are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. The voice lamp control device 5 also outputs display variable pattern commands, etc., to the display control device 6. In other embodiments, a configuration in which the display control device 6 receives commands from the main control device 4 and inputs those commands to the voice lamp control device 5 is also conceivable. Furthermore, in other embodiments, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 comprises a single control device that possesses the functions of both the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable.

Furthermore, a speaker 26 and an illuminated unit 27 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the flashing pattern of the illuminated unit 27, the vertical movement of the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38, and the 7-segment display unit 39, based on commands input from the main control device 4. By controlling the vertical movement of the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38 by the MPU 51, it is possible to select between a state in which game balls (special out balls) that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 are retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention unit 38, and a state in which game balls (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 are discharged via the discharge lane 382. In addition, each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled by the MPU 51 to light up or turn off. Furthermore, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input/output interface 52. This allows the MPU 51 to detect when an operation is performed on the operation button 20, and based on this detection, to control image game effects executed on the symbol display unit 341, sound output effects that emit sound from the speaker 26, and lamp effects based on the flashing patterns of the lighting unit 27.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined calculation processing based on commands such as variable pattern commands, first hold commands, second hold commands, and shift commands input from the main control unit 4.

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern (combination of stop symbols for decorative symbols (see Figure 38(A)), variation display time, variation type (see Figure 38(B))) and the type of performance pattern (see Figures 39(A) to 37(C)) based on the variation pattern command, and transmits the display variation pattern command corresponding to that variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see step S2105 in the command determination process in Figure 37), thereby starting the display of the variation symbols in the symbol display unit 341. At this time, if the variation pattern command indicates a miss, the symbol display unit 341 displays the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the miss.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes pattern variation display and performance display by controlling the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on display variation pattern commands and the like input from the sound lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output interface 62, among other components. The input/output interface 62 is connected to the audio lamp control device 5 and the graphic display unit 341. Note that bidirectional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a single-chip microcontroller, and it incorporates a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits, such as a timer circuit for timing and an interrupt circuit for receiving interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 611 and other components. Furthermore, some or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be executed by electronic circuits.

The ROM 611 stores control programs, as well as multiple types of images used for the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341, including decorative symbols, variation symbols, preview images, reach images, jackpot images, and loss images. The images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include both still images and moving images. Furthermore, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variation display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the types of images to be used, the display timing, and the display time for the variation symbols. The display control device 6 then uses the MPU 61 to display images on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing symbol variation display and effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile memory unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as the primary storage area (work area) for processing performed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may also be a non-volatile memory unit.

[Dispensing control device 7]
The dispensing control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71 and an input/output interface 72, among other components. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a single-chip microcontroller. The MPU 71 also has a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 built into it.

ROM 711 is a non-volatile memory unit that pre-stores control programs and parameter information. RAM 712 is a volatile memory unit capable of reading and writing various types of information, and is used as the primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by MPU 71. Note that RAM 712 may also be a non-volatile memory unit.

The input/output interface 72 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball dispensing device 100 are connected to the input/output interface 72.

As described above, the dispensing device 132 dispenses game balls from the tank 131 to the upper tray 23. It comprises a drive unit 132a, such as a motor, which drives a ball-stopping member that switches between dispensing and not dispensing game balls, and a dispensing sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls to be dispensed. The dispensing control device 7 dispenses a desired number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection results from the dispensing sensor 132b. The dispensing control device 7 is also provided with a state reset switch 73. The state reset switch 73 is operated, for example, to resolve a ball jam (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 132.

The ball dispensing device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball dispensing device 100 can dispense a number of gaming balls corresponding to a predetermined amount, within the range of the amount stored on a recording medium such as a card inserted into the ball dispensing device 100, in response to the operation of a ball dispensing operation device (not shown) located on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. Specifically, when a control signal to dispense a predetermined number of gaming balls is input from the ball dispensing device 100 to the dispensing control device 7, the MPU 71 controls the dispensing device 132, and the predetermined number of gaming balls are dispensed. The recording medium is not limited to a card; for example, it may be a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Furthermore, the ball dispensing device 100 may also be capable of dispensing a predetermined number of gaming balls corresponding to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launching mechanism 32. Specifically, while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 to supply game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321. The launch control IC 81 then detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 according to that amount of operation, thereby launching the game balls on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 seconds) as a drive signal. As a result, in the game machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Furthermore, the launch handle 22 is equipped with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation performed by the player. A voltage is input to the launch control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22. Based on this, the launch control IC 81 adjusts the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 so that the greater the rotation of the launch handle 22, the stronger the launch force of the game balls from the game ball launching mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the launch handle 22 is equipped with a touch sensor 21a for detecting when a player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of game balls. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to stop the launch of game balls by the game ball launching mechanism 32 if the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or if the ball stop switch 21b is being operated by the player. This prevents gameplay in situations where, for example, the launch handle 22 is fixed in a rotated position and the player is not touching the launch handle 22. Additionally, the player can stop the launch of game balls by operating the ball stop switch 21b at any time using their thumb while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power control device 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors and drive units, and a +5V voltage for logic used in the control unit. The power control device 9 then supplies the generated +12V or +5V voltage to the main control unit 4, sound lamp control unit 5, display control unit 6, dispensing control unit 7, firing control unit 8, etc.

The power control device 9 is equipped with a power switch 90 for turning the gaming machine 10 on and off, and a RAM erase switch 91 which is operated to return the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

Furthermore, the power control device 9 is equipped with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means, which are charged by the power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is interrupted, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Also, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is interrupted, the control device can be operated for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply has been interrupted, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. For example, if the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, it determines that a power outage has occurred when that DC voltage falls below a preset 22V. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt their ongoing control and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing by the main control unit 4]
Next, the processes executed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 will be described with reference to Figures 20 to 33. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is activated periodically, and an NMI interrupt process that is executed in the event of a power outage. In this embodiment, the startup process, NMI interrupt process, etc. will not be explained, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described. In the startup process, it is checked whether the RAM 412 is operating normally, and the execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of the main control device 4]
Here, Figure 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for the main timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4. The main timer interrupt processing is performed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt processing will be explained below with reference to Figure 20.

<Step S1001>
As shown in Figure 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 performs sensor detection processing to determine the detection status of sensors connected to the main control device 4. For example, it determines the detection status of ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, ball exit sensor 318a, special ball exit sensor 384, etc. At this time, if the MPU 41 detects that a game ball has entered any of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, it stores that information as prize entry detection information in the RAM 412. Also, if a ball is detected as out by the ball exit sensor 318a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of balls that has been stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and updates the number of balls that has been out in the game information storage area 412d. Furthermore, if a special ball is detected by the special ball exit sensor 384, the MPU 41 sets a special ball exit detection command and stores this special ball exit detection command in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and if the counter value reaches the maximum value, it clears the counter value to 0.

<Step S1003>
Next, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the regular jackpot random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the regular jackpot random number counter C4, and clears the counter values to 0 if they reach their maximum values.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Subsequently, the MPU 41 performs a starting prize-winning process in response to a prize being awarded in the first prize-winning slot 314 or the second prize-winning slot 315 (step S1004), and then performs a launch control process (step S1005). Details of the starting prize-winning process will be described later with reference to Figure 21.

On the other hand, the launch control process enables the launch of game balls under the condition that the player is touching the launch handle 22, as detected by the touch sensor 21a, and the ball stop switch 21b, which stops the launch, is not operated. Furthermore, the launch control process disables the launch of game balls if the player is not touching the launch handle 22, as detected by the touch sensor 21a, or if the ball stop switch 21b is operated. The MPU 41 issues a launch instruction to the launch control device 8 to launch game balls when the launch of game balls is enabled.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 performs a through-gate process in which a lottery is held to determine whether or not to open the electric mechanism 315b of the second prize entry 315 based on the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the electric mechanism reserve area 412c. Specifically, in the through-gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high-frequency support mode based on the high-frequency support mode flag. If the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode, it determines that it is a normal win if the normal win random number counter C4 is between 0 and 29, and that it is a loss if the normal win random number counter C4 is between 30 and 249. If the MPU 41 is in the high-frequency support mode, it determines that it is a normal win if the normal win random number counter C4 is between 0 and 199, and that it is a loss if the normal win random number counter C4 is between 200 and 249. Then, if the MPU 41 determines that it is a normal win during the through-gate processing, it opens the electric mechanism 315b for a predetermined time. This makes it possible for the electric mechanism 315b to enter the second prize entry point 315 in the upper right of the game board 31, where it is installed side by side.

[Startup and Prize Entry Processing]
Here, Figure 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the start-up prize-winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 20. The start-up prize-winning process will be explained below with reference to Figure 21.

<Step S1101>
As shown in Figure 21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a win in the first prize slot 314. If the MPU 41 determines that there has been a win in the first prize slot 314 (step S1101: Yes), it proceeds to step S1102. If it determines that there has been no win in the first prize slot 314 (step S1101: No), it proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of reserved items N stored in the reserved item storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reserved items (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved items N is the maximum number of reserved items (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reserved items N is not the maximum number of reserved items (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reserved items N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 obtains the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of Figure 20, and the variation type counter CS1 (steps S1302 and S1312 of Figure 23), which is updated in the main processing described later, and stores these counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve storage area REA1 to the fourth reserve storage area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA in the reserve storage area 412b of RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the win/loss information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 before it becomes the subject of the win/loss determination for the jackpot in the variation start process described later (S1408 in Figure 24, Figure 26), and executes a first hold command setting process to set the first hold command in RAM 412 based on the result of this check. Details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 22.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a win in the second prize slot 315. If the MPU 41 determines that there has been a win in the second prize slot 315 (step S1106: Yes), it proceeds to step S1107. If it determines that there has been no win in the second prize slot 315 (step S1106: No), it terminates the start prize process and proceeds to step S1005 in Figure 20.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of reserved balls M stored in the reserved ball storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reserved balls (4 in this embodiment). If the number of reserved balls M is the maximum number of reserved balls (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the start prize entry process and proceeds to step S1005 in Figure 20. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls M is not the maximum number of reserved balls (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reserved balls M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 obtains the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of Figure 20, and the variation type counter CS1 (steps S1302 and S1312 of Figure 23), which is updated in the main processing described later, and stores these counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB of the reserve storage area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the win/fail information for the second hold obtained in step S1109 before it becomes the subject of the win/fail judgment for the jackpot in the variation start process described later (S1408 in Figure 24, Figure 26), and executes a second hold command setting process to set the second hold command in RAM 412 based on the result of this check. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to Figure 22, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that the second hold command setting process can be performed by replacing "first hold command" with "second hold command" and "number of holds N" with "number of holds M" in the first hold command setting process in Figure 22.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, Figure 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting the first reserve command, which is executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of the start-up prize-winning process in Figure 21. The first reserve command includes information indicating that the command is the first reserve command, as well as information such as the type of the first reserve command (jackpot type or miss), the variation pattern, and the number of reserves N. The first reserve command setting process will be explained below with reference to Figure 22.

<Step S1201>
As shown in Figure 22, the MPU 41 reads the number of reserved balls N from the reserved ball storage area NAA of the first reserved ball storage area REA, and also reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first reserved ball from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in high probability mode. If it is in high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process moves to step S1203. If it is not in high probability mode (step S1202: No), the process moves to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in high probability mode based on a high probability mode flag, which is set to ON when transitioning to high probability mode in the game state transition process (step S1306 in Figure 23) in the main process described later, and is set to OFF when transitioning from high probability mode to other game states such as the jackpot game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high probability mode success/failure table (see Figure 14(B)) which is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 of the setting value change process described later in Figure 27, and performs a success/failure determination based on the high probability mode success/failure table to determine whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 corresponds to a jackpot win. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the low probability mode success/failure table (see Figure 14(A)) which is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 of the setting value change process described later in Figure 27, and performs a success/failure determination based on the low probability mode success/failure table to determine whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 corresponds to a jackpot win.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the win/loss determination is performed based on the high-probability mode win/loss table or low-probability mode win/loss table saved in step S1712 of the setting value change process shown in Figure 27 (described later) according to the setting value. However, in step S1203 or S1204, the setting value saved in step S1710 of the setting value change process shown in Figure 27 (described later) may be read, and the win/loss determination may be performed by selecting the high-probability mode win/loss table or low-probability mode win/loss table corresponding to that setting value one by one.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win (step S1205: Yes), it proceeds to step S1206. If the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot win (step S1205: No), it proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, if the win/loss information is stored in the third reserve area REA3 in step S1104 of the start-up prize-winning process in Figure 21, the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 included in the win/loss information stored in the third reserve area REA3 are read out. Note that the reserve area in which the win/loss information is stored in step S1104 of the start-up prize-winning process in Figure 21, among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4, can be determined by the value of the number of reserves N stored in the number of reserves storage area NA.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the number of reserved balls N into the first reserved ball command. In this way, the first reserved ball command includes the number of reserved balls N read in step S1201, so the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first reserved ball command can recognize which of the first reserved ball area REA1 to the fourth reserved ball area REA4 the winning/losing information stored in the first reserved ball area corresponds to by referring to the number of reserved balls N included in the first reserved ball command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery was a loss, the variation type counter CS1, and the number of reserved balls N into the first reserved ball command (step S1209).

The first hold command, which is set to ON in the first hold command setting process, is stored in RAM 412 and, after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 along with other commands in step S1301 of the main process shown in Figure 23 (described later) executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, is erased. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to what is described here, as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp similar content to the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command may be included in other commands.

[Main processing of the main control unit 4]
Next, with reference to Figure 23, the main processing performed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 will be described. In the main processing, the main control processing for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game is performed. In the main processing, the processing in steps S1301 to S1309 is performed as a periodic process with a cycle of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter update processing in steps S1310 to S1312 is performed in the remaining time from the end of the processing in steps S1301 to S1309 until the next cycle.

<Step S1301>
As shown in Figure 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 performs external output processing to send output data, such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 20 or in the previous main processing, to control devices such as the sub-control unit 332 or peripheral control unit 140. For example, if commands such as a variable pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a setting value change command, or a unit jackpot lottery count update command are set in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 sends those commands to the sound lamp control device 5. Also, in the prize ball command setting processing of step S1303 described later in the main processing, if a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 sends that prize ball command to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1, and if the counter value reaches its maximum value, it clears the counter value to 0.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has occurred in the general prize slot 313, variable prize slot 316, etc., based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a win has occurred, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command in the RAM 412 indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to that win. At this time, in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a win occurs in the general prize slot 313 or the first prize slot 314, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out in the general prize slot or the first prize slot, which is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, to a value that adds the number of balls paid out due to the current win. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), if a ball enters the second prize pocket 315, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls dispensed from the second prize pocket stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value that includes the number of balls dispensed from the current prize. In addition, in the jackpot game state, if a ball enters the variable prize pocket 316, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls dispensed from the variable prize pocket stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value that includes the number of balls dispensed from the current prize.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process to control the game in the variable game. Details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to Figure 24, but in the variable game control process, the aforementioned jackpot lottery is executed and the variable pattern command necessary for the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a variable pattern command in the RAM 412 that indicates the jackpot lottery result and the variation display time, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in Figure 20, and the variable type counter CS1 which is updated in steps S1302 and S1312 of this process.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process to control the progress of the game in a jackpot game. The jackpot game control process executes control processing for a jackpot game consisting of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending. In the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 executes a number of round games in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened, by controlling the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing door 319, according to the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type) that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. For example, if the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times, and if the jackpot type is a 16R probability variation jackpot, it executes the round game 16 times. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, when starting each round game in the opening/closing execution mode, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412, and when starting the ending, an ending start command is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process to transition the game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 of the variation start process shown in Figure 26, which will be described later. In the game state transition process, if predetermined conditions are met, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state in which the opening and closing execution mode is executed, a probability variation game state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a time-saving game state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, or a normal game state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to the jackpot game state after the end of the variable game that notifies the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Also, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the jackpot game state to a predetermined game state according to the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the jackpot game. In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions to the probability variation game state after the end of the jackpot game, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, it transitions to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, if the notification of the lottery results for the prescribed number of jackpot draws is completed during the shortened game mode, the game mode will be returned to the normal game mode after the end of that game.

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 transitions between game states, it sets the flag for the previous game state to off while setting the flag for the new game state to on. For example, if the game state transitions from a jackpot state to a probability variation state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag to off while setting the high probability mode flag to on. Conversely, if the game state transitions from a probability variation state to a jackpot state, it sets the high probability mode flag to off while setting the jackpot game flag to on.

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state, it sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "number of jackpots" stored in the game information storage area 412d, which is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a setting value change process. This setting value change process controls the display or hiding of the setting value, or the modification of the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d, in response to operations on the setting value change operation unit 46. Details of the setting value change process will be described later with reference to Figure 27.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the setting value change process is executed in the main process, but it is also conceivable that it be limited to the startup process that is initiated when the power is turned on, or between the end of the startup process and the start of game ball launching. This would prevent the setting value from being changed during the operating hours of the gaming hall, as it would be impossible to change the setting value after the player has started playing until the next power-on.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 performs a specific performance information update process among the game information. In this embodiment, the specific performance information updated includes base information, unit jackpot lottery count, consecutive bonus ratio, and bonus ratio. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to Figures 28 and 29.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes the display control process for the performance display monitor 43. This display control process for the performance display monitor 43 executes the process of displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43. Details of the display control process for the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to Figures 30 to 33.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), it proceeds to step S1301 and executes each of the processes from S1301 onwards as described above. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), it repeatedly executes steps S1310, S1311, and S1312 until it determines that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), i.e., during the remaining time until the timing for executing the next main process arrives.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and if the counter value reaches the maximum value, it clears the counter value to 0.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, it adds 1 to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and if the counter value reaches the maximum value, it clears the counter value to 0. After updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, Figure 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the variable game control process executed in step S1304 of the main process in Figure 23. The variable game control process will be explained below with reference to Figure 24.

<Step S1401>
As shown in Figure 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot game. If it is in the middle of a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), it terminates the variable game control process. If it is not in the middle of a jackpot game (step S1401: No), it proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not a jackpot game is being played is determined, for example, based on a jackpot game flag in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process shown in Figure 23. This flag is set to ON when transitioning to a jackpot game state and OFF when transitioning from a jackpot game state to another game state.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress is determined based on the "Variation Display in Progress" flag, which is set to ON at step S1606 of the variation start process in Figure 26 described later, and then turned OFF in step S1405 of the variation game control process when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes).

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether the display time for the changing symbols has elapsed since the start of the changing symbol display. If it determines that the display time for the changing symbols has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), it proceeds to step S1404. If it determines that the display time for the changing symbols has not elapsed (step S1403: No), it terminates the changing symbol game control process.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the display time for the variation has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops displaying the symbols corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 (step S1404), and sets the display during variation flag to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If the symbol variation display is not active (Step S1402: No), the MPU 41 determines whether both the number of reserved balls N stored in the reserved ball storage area NAA of the reserved ball storage area 412b and the number of reserved balls M stored in the reserved ball storage area NAB are 0 (Step S1406). Here, if both the number of reserved balls N and the number of reserved balls M are 0 (Step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the variation game control process. On the other hand, if either the number of reserved balls N or the number of reserved balls M is not 0 (Step S1406: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 performs data setting processing on the valid/fail information data stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 has finished processing in step S1407, it proceeds to step S1408. Details of the data setting processing will be described later with reference to Figure 25.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process to cause the pattern display unit 341 to perform a variation display based on the win/loss information, and then terminates the variation game control process. Details of the variation start process will be described later with reference to Figure 26.

[Data setting process]
Here, Figure 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the data setting process performed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of Figure 24. The data setting process will be described below with reference to Figure 25.

<Step S1501>
As shown in Figure 25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of reserved balls M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0 or not. If the number of reserved balls M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1505.

<Steps S1502-S1504>
If the number of reserved items M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved items N stored in the reserved item storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves the success/failure information from the first reserved item area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the success/failure information from the second reserved item area REA2 to the fourth reserved item area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the success/failure information from the second reserved item area REA2 is moved to the first reserved item area REA1, the success/failure information from the third reserved item area REA3 is moved to the second reserved item area REA2, and the success/failure information from the fourth reserved item area REA4 is moved to the third reserved item area REA3. When the processing in step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Steps S1505-S1507>
Step S1505 is initiated when the number of reserved items M is 0 (Step S1501: No), but step S1501 is initiated when, in step S1406 of Figure 24, either or both of the number of reserved items M and the number of reserved items N are not 0 (Step S1406: No). Therefore, if the number of reserved items M is 0 (Step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number of reserved items N is not 0, and thus executes the processes in steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 deducts 1 from the number of reserved items M stored in the reserved item storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the success/failure information from the first reserved item area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the success/failure information from the second reserved item area REB2 to the fourth reserved item area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the success/failure information from the second reserved item area REB2 is moved to the first reserved item area REB1, the success/failure information from the third reserved item area REB3 is moved to the second reserved item area REB2, and the success/failure information from the fourth reserved item area REB4 is moved to the third reserved item area REB3. If the processing in step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets a shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the success/failure information for the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 or the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 has shifted. This shift command set in step S1508 is then transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 of the next main processing (see Figure 23) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of hold symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is changed. When the processing in step S1508 is completed, the MPU 41 terminates the data setting process and proceeds to step S1408 in Figure 24.

[Initiation of change process]
Here, Figure 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the variation initiation process performed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of Figure 24. The variation initiation process will be described below with reference to Figure 26.

<Step S1601>
As shown in Figure 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state is in high probability mode or not. Whether or not it is in high probability mode is determined based on whether or not the high probability mode flag, which is set to ON in the game state transition process in step S1306 of the main process in Figure 23, is set to ON. If the game state is in high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1602, and if the game state is not in high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, if the game state is in low probability mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is included as numerical information in the win/loss information stored in the execution area AE of the hold storage area 412b, corresponds to a jackpot win, based on the high probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14(B)) that is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 of the setting value change process shown in Figure 27 below. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is included as numerical information in the win/loss information stored in the execution area AE of the hold storage area 412b, corresponds to a jackpot win, based on the low probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14(A)) that is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 of the setting value change process shown in Figure 27 below.

In steps S1602 and S1603, the win/loss determination is performed based on the high-probability mode win/loss table or low-probability mode win/loss table saved in step S1712 of the setting value change process shown in Figure 27 (described later) according to the setting value. However, in steps S1602 and S1603, the setting value saved in step S1710 of the setting value change process shown in Figure 27 (described later) may be read, and the win/loss determination may be performed by selecting the high-probability mode win/loss table or low-probability mode win/loss table corresponding to that setting value one by one.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the display time of the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in question to the variation display time counter. Specifically, if the result of the win/loss determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see Figure 15(A)). Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see Figure 15(B)). In addition, if the result of the win/loss determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a loss, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the loss variation table (see Figure 15(C)).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command in the RAM 412 that includes the result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern identified in step S1604. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main processing (see Figure 23) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5, and the sound lamp control device 5 performs actions such as displaying the variation of symbols by the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern command.

As mentioned above, if the lottery result is a "regular jackpot," the MPU 41 sets one of the variation patterns "A01" to "A03," which are variation patterns "01" to "03" with an "A" indicating a 5R regular jackpot, as the variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," the MPU 41 sets one of the variation patterns "B01" to "B03," which are variation patterns "01" to "03" with a "B" indicating a 5R probability variation jackpot, as the variation pattern command in the RAM 412. In addition, if the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot," the MPU 41 sets one of the variation patterns "C01" to "C03," which are variation patterns "01" to "03" with a "C" indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot, as the variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the lottery result is "loser," the MPU 41 sets one of the variation patterns "D01" to "D08," which is a variation pattern "01" to "08" with a "D" added to indicate a loss, as the variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Also, if the lottery result is "loser," the MPU 41 includes information in the variation pattern command indicating whether it was a near miss (near or near miss), a near miss (other than near miss), or a complete loss.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the display of changing symbols on the main display unit 36 and ends the change start process. When the MPU 41 starts the display of changing symbols on the main display unit 36, it sets the "Displaying Changes" flag to ON. This "Displaying Changes" flag is referenced in step S1402 of the change game control process in Figure 24 to determine whether or not the display of changing symbols on the main display unit 36 is in progress. Furthermore, when the MPU 41 starts the display of changing symbols on the main display unit 36, it adds 1 to the "Cumulative Jackpot Draw Count" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S1603 is a loss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "Consecutive Losses Count" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and if the win/loss result is a jackpot, it clears the "Consecutive Losses Count" to 0.

[Setting value change process]
Here, Figure 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for changing the setting value, which is performed in step S1307 of the main process in Figure 23. The setting value changing process will be explained below with reference to Figure 27.

<Step S1701>
As shown in Figure 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes), the setting value change process is terminated. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress is determined based on the "variation display in progress" flag, which is set to ON in step S1606 of the variation start process in Figure 26.

<Step S1702>
If the symbols are not being displayed in a changing state (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in a jackpot game state (step S1702). If it is in a jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), it terminates the setting value change process. If it is not in a jackpot game state (step S1702: No), it moves the process to step S1703. For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag that is set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of Figure 23.

<Step S1703>
If neither the symbol variation display is active nor the jackpot game state is active (both steps S1701 and S1702 are No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power to the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), that is, whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been operated to turn on the power to the setting value display unit 45. In other words, in this embodiment, when the symbol variation display is active (step S1701: Yes) or when the jackpot game state is active (step S1702: Yes), the setting value is not displayed and the setting value cannot be changed. Here, if the power to the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1704, and if the power to the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704-S1706>
When the power to the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 (step S1704), and displays a number indicating the read setting value on the setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). This allows the current setting value to be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the setting value display flag indicating that the setting value is being displayed on the setting value display unit 45 (step S1706), and terminates the setting value change process.

<Step S1707>
If the power to the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The setting value display flag indicates that a setting value is being displayed on the setting value display unit 45, as described above, and is set to on in step S1706. If the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708. If the setting value display flag is set to off (step S1707: No), that is, if the setting value display unit 45 is off and the power is not turned on, the MPU 41 terminates the setting value change process.

<Step S1708>
If the flag indicating that the setting value is being displayed is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation to change the setting value has been performed. If the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1709, and if the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
If the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process to change the display on the setting value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, if the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one greater than the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before the rotation, and conversely, if the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one less than the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before the rotation.

Furthermore, if the setting value display unit 45 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right when the setting value display unit 45 is displayed as "6", the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 will change to "1". If the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle when the setting value display unit 45 is displayed as "1", the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 will change to "6". Alternatively, the unit may be prevented from rotating further to the right when the setting value display unit 45 is displayed as "6", and prevented from rotating further to the left when the setting value display unit 45 is displayed as "1".

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the number currently displayed in the setting value display unit 45 as the setting value, and then terminates the setting value change process. As a result, when the power of the setting value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 just before the power is turned off is ultimately saved in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the valid setting value. Therefore, by changing the number displayed in the setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed. Then, the setting value can be confirmed by turning off the power of the setting value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed in the setting value display unit 45.

<Step S1711>
If the setting value change operation unit 46 is not rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, whether an operation to turn off the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. If the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1712, and if the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from on to off (step S1711: No), the setting value change process is terminated. Note that if the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the power supply to the 7-segment display unit 45 is cut off, causing the numbers indicating the setting value to turn off, and the setting value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
If the power to the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 selects the low probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14(A)) and the high probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14(B)) corresponding to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 and saves them to the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to off and terminates the setting value change process.

In step S1712, the low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14(A)) and the high-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14(B)) are selected according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. In other words, since the same setting value is selected for both the low-probability mode and high-probability mode win/loss tables, changing the setting value is easy. However, it may be possible to change the setting value for the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode individually. In this case, for example, it becomes possible to set the setting value for the low-probability mode to "1" and the setting value for the high-probability mode to "6," thus allowing for different setting levels (numerical values) for the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

[Performance information update process]
Here, Figure 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 of the main process in Figure 23. Figure 29 is a diagram showing an example of the base information updated in the specific performance information update process in Figure 28. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to Figures 28 and 29.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
As shown in Figure 28, the MPU 41 reads the number of balls that have been put out for base calculation from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and determines whether the read number of balls that have been put out has reached 60,000 (step S1802). If the number of balls that have been put out has reached 60,000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1805, and if the number of balls that have been put out has not reached 60,000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
If the number of balls that have been played has not reached 60,000 (Step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads the number of balls dispensed from the general prize slot and the number of balls dispensed from the first prize slot for base calculation purposes from the base information (Step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 calculates the current base BL based on the number of balls that have been played for base calculation purposes from the base information read in Step S1801 and the number of balls dispensed from the general prize slot and the number of balls dispensed from the first prize slot for base calculation purposes from the base information read in Step S1803, and overwrites and updates the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (Step S1804) (see Figure 29(A)). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × (number of balls dispensed from general prize slot + number of balls dispensed from the first prize slot) / number of balls played.

<Steps S1805-S1808>
If the number of balls that have been dispensed has reached 60,000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805 to S1807). Specifically, as shown in Figures 29(A) and 29(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the 60,000-ball base from the previous time (step S1805), shifts the current base BL to the previous 60,000-ball base B1 (step S1806), and clears the current base BL to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of balls dispensed from the general prize slot, the number of balls dispensed from the first prize slot, and the number of balls dispensed for base calculation, which are stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, to 0 (step S1808).

<Step S1809>
When the processing in step S1804 or S1808 is completed, the MPU 51 reads various information from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performances, updates the other specific performance information with the calculated values (step S1809), and terminates the specific performance information update process. In this case, the specific performances are, for example, the number of unit jackpot draws, the ratio of consecutive bonus items, the bonus item ratio, etc.

[Display control processing for performance display monitor]
Here, Figures 30 to 33 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the display control process for the performance display monitor 43, which is executed in step S1309 of the main process in Figure 23. The display control process for the performance display monitor 43 will be explained below with reference to Figures 30 to 33.

<Step S1901>
As shown in Figure 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether the BL display flag is set to ON or OFF. Here, the BL display flag is a flag that indicates that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or in step S1930 in Figure 33. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1908 in Figure 31, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag that indicates that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 was displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to on in step S1912 of Figure 31, which will be described later. If the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1917 of Figure 32, and if the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag that indicates that the 60,000-ball base B2 from two rounds ago is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to on in step S1921 of Figure 32, which will be described later. If the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1926 of Figure 33, and if the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905. If the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S1905-S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1905). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Figure 29(A), then "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% will be displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in Figure 29(B), then "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% will be displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter to display the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in Figure 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 in Figure 30 (step S1908), and determines whether the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S1909). If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1910, and if the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910-S1913>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1910) and displays the previous 60,000 ball base B1 contained in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Figure 29(A), then "8.", "1", "3", and "3", indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 was 33%, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in Figure 29(B), then "8.", "1", "2", and "9", indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 was 29%, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S1912), sets a B1 display time counter to display the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and ends the display control process.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915. If the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the display control process ends. In addition, if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 on the performance display monitor 43 is cut off, causing the alphabet and numbers indicating the current base BL to turn off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915), clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1916), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), as shown in Figure 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 in Figure 31 (step S1917), and determines whether the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S1918). If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1919, and if the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919-S1922>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1919) and displays the previous 60,000 ball base B2 included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1920). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Figure 29(A), then "8.", "2", "3", and "2" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B2 was 32% will be displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in Figure 29(B), then "8.", "2", "3", and "3" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B2 was 33% will be displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S1921), sets a B2 display time counter corresponding to a certain period of time for displaying the previous 60,000-ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1922), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924. If the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the display control process ends. In addition, if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 on the performance display monitor 43 is cut off, causing the letters and numbers indicating the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to turn off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1924), clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1925), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), as shown in Figure 33, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 in Figure 32 (step S1926), and determines whether the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S1927). If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1928, and if the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928-S1931>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1928) and displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Figure 29(A), then "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in Figure 29(B), then "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter to display the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933. If the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the display control process ends. In addition, if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 on the performance display monitor 43 is cut off, causing the letters and numbers indicating the previous 60,000-ball base B2 to turn off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1933), clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1934), and terminates the display control process.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
Next, with reference to Figures 34 to 47, the processing performed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described.

Furthermore, in another embodiment, it is conceivable that some or all of the processing performed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be performed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Also, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 performs control processing for the speaker 26 and the lighting unit 27, startup processing when the audio lamp control device 5 is powered on, and NMI interrupt processing during power outages, but these processes will not be explained here.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of the audio lamp control device 5]
Here, Figure 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing performed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51, for example, performs sub-timer interrupt processing as a periodic process with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in Figure 34, the MPU 51 executes the following processes in the sub-timer interrupt processing: display order setting process (step S2000), counter update process (step S2001), command determination process (step S2002), variable game animation processing (step S2003), jackpot game animation processing (step S2004), and setting value suggestion process (step S2005).

[Display Order Setting Process]
In the display order setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 refers to the game setting value (setting value) set to define the probability of a jackpot in the gaming machine 10, and determines and stores (sets) the order in which the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period. In this embodiment, when a jackpot game is won during the predetermined period, the setting value suggestion process is executed, and five numbers to identify multiple (five) game setting values (non-setting values) other than the setting value are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined order. Therefore, in the display order setting process, the order in which the five numbers that identify the multiple non-setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set. Here, Figure 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the display order setting process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 34, and Figure 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table referenced in the display order setting process of Figure 35. The details of the display order setting process will be described below with reference to Figures 35 and 36.

<Step S2011>
As shown in Figure 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether the display order setting flag is set to ON or OFF (step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag that indicates that the setting of the display order of the numbers that identify the non-set values in a jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. The display order setting flag is also initially set to OFF when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, when the sub-timer interrupt process is executed because the startup process of the sound lamp control device allows the sub-timer interrupt process, the order of the numbers to be displayed by segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period is set (steps S2014 to S2016 described later). In other words, in the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the order of the numbers to be displayed by segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period is set.

Incidentally, the power to the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before the gaming hall opens. Therefore, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on, meaning the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming fixed, thus preventing the same information from being repeatedly displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 and preventing the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

Here, if the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2012; if the display order setting flag is off (step S2011: No), the process proceeds to step S2014.

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
If the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the setting value change flag is set to on (step S2012). The setting value change flag is a flag that indicates that the game setting value (setting value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed, and is set to on in step S2121 of the command judgment process in Figure 37 described later. If the setting value change flag is on (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting value change flag to off (step S2013) and then proceeds to step S2014. That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the setting value is changed, the order of the numbers to be displayed by segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period is set. In this way, when the setting value is changed, the display order of the numbers in the 7-segment display unit 39 is set, making it possible to determine the display order of the numbers according to the setting value, thereby preventing the presentation of information in the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, if the setting value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 terminates the display order setting process.

<Step S2014-S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 obtains a setting value from the RAM 512 and then sets the order of the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by referring to the setting value and the number display order determination table (see Figure 36) (step S2015). Here, Figure 36(A) is a diagram showing an example of the number display order determination table, and Figure 36(B) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the display order listed in the number display order determination table shown in Figure 36(A) and the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

As shown in Figure 36(A), the number display order determination table defines the display order of numbers by randomly generated numbers for each of the game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6) set to define the jackpot probability in the game machine 10. There are 120 randomly generated numbers, ranging from 0 to 119, and each randomly generated number is associated with one display order, with the selection probability of each display order being the same. The display orders include A1 to A120 selected for setting value 1, B1 to B120 for setting value 2, C1 to C120 for setting value 3, D1 to D120 for setting value 4, E1 to E120 for setting value 5, and F1 to F120 for setting value 6. For each of the setting values 1 to 6, 120 display orders are set, corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating a non-set value.

The display order A1 to A120, selected when the setting value is 1, defines the order in which the five numbers "2" to "6," which identify the game setting values (non-set values) 2 to 6, are displayed, excluding "1," which identifies setting value 1 (see Figure 36(B)). In other words, if the setting value is 1 and one of the display orders A1 to A120 is selected according to the randomly generated value, the number "1," which identifies setting value 1, will not be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The display order B1 to B120 selected when the setting value is 2 defines the order in which the five digits "2" to "6" that identify setting values 2 to 6 are displayed, excluding the digit "2" that identifies setting value 2 (see Figure 36(B)). In other words, if the setting value is 2 and one of the display orders B1 to B120 is selected according to the randomly generated value, the digit "2" that identifies setting value 2 will not be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The display order C1 to C120 selected when the setting value is 3 defines the order in which the five digits "1," "2," "4" to "6" that identify setting values 1, 2, 4 to 6 are displayed, excluding the digit "3" that identifies setting value 1 (see Figure 36(B)). In other words, if any of the display orders C1 to C120 is selected because the setting value is 3, the digit "3" that identifies the setting value 3 will not be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The display order D1 to D120, selected when the setting value is 4, defines the order in which the five digits "1" to "3", "5", and "6", which identify setting values 1 to 3, 5, and 6, are displayed, excluding the digit "4" that identifies setting value 4 (see Figure 36(B)). In other words, if any of the display orders D1 to D120 is selected because the setting value is 4, the digit "4", which identifies setting value 4, will not be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The display order E1 to E120, selected when the setting value is 5, defines the order in which the five digits "1" to "4" and "6" that identify setting values 1 to 4 and 6 are displayed, excluding the digit "5" that identifies setting value 5 (see Figure 36(B)). In other words, if any of the display orders E1 to E120 is selected because the setting value is 5, the digit "5" that identifies the setting value 5 will not be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The display order F1 to F120 selected when the setting value is 6 defines the order in which the five digits "1" to "5" that identify setting values 1 to 5 are displayed, excluding the digit "6" that identifies setting value 6 (see Figure 36(B)). In other words, if any of the display orders F1 to F120 is selected because the setting value is 6, the digit "6" that identifies the setting value as 6 will not be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

Then, when the order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display order setting flag to off (step S2016), and terminates the display order setting process. That is, when the power is turned on (step S2011: No), and when the setting value is changed (step S2013: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on a number display order determination table when the power is turned on. After power-on, the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table when the setting value is changed. This makes it possible to display numbers (non-set values) in a predetermined order on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period when predetermined conditions (e.g., power-on or setting change) are met. Furthermore, since the gaming machine 10 is often powered on before opening hours in a gaming hall, the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set based on the power-on of the gaming machine 10, meaning the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming fixed, thus preventing the repeated presentation of the same information on the 7-segment display unit 39 and preventing the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

In this embodiment, the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on and when a setting value is changed. However, the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 may also be set when other conditions (predetermined conditions) are met. These predetermined conditions will be described in the third embodiment below, but examples of predetermined conditions include the start of a predetermined period, the start of a jackpot game, and the start of the opening/closing execution mode for a jackpot game. Even when the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set due to the fulfillment of these predetermined conditions, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is prevented from becoming fixed. This prevents the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and prevents the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, in the number display order determination table shown in Figure 36(A), for the same setting value, the probability of selecting all number display orders is the same, but the probability of selecting a number display order does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the number display order determination table could be set so that for the same setting value, the probability of selecting at least some number display orders is different from that of other number display orders. That is, it is possible to make a specific display order more likely to be selected, and conversely, make a specific display order less likely to be selected. By setting the probability of selecting at least some number display orders to be different from that of other number display orders depending on the setting value, it is possible to make a specific number display order more likely to be selected, and conversely, make it less likely to be selected, depending on the setting value. In other words, unlike the case where the probability of selecting all number display orders is the same, it becomes possible to make it easier to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, to make it difficult to identify a specific non-set value. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of being a high setting value, the likelihood of being a low setting value, and so on. Specifically, for example, if the setting value is a low setting value (e.g., setting value 2 or less), the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set value corresponding to a high setting value (e.g., setting value 5 or more) may be delayed. In this case, by leaving open the possibility of a high setting value until the very end, the player is kept in anticipation of a high setting value while preventing the player from identifying the low setting value too early. This suppresses a decline in interest in the game, prevents the game on the gaming machine 10 from ending prematurely, and suppresses a decline in the utilization rate of the gaming machine 10. Conversely, if the setting value is a high setting value (e.g., setting value 5 or more), the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set value corresponding to a low setting value (e.g., setting value 2 or less) may be delayed. In this case, the numbers corresponding to the high setting value and the numbers corresponding to the low setting value are not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 until just before the player identifies the setting value as a high setting value, leaving open the possibility of a low setting value until just before the player realizes that the setting value is high. This allows players to focus on whether the setting is advantageous (high setting) or disadvantageous (low setting), and enjoy the thrill of anticipation leading up to the moment they realize it's a high setting. Furthermore, regardless of the setting, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest non-setting values should not be delayed; for example, the latest display order should be more likely to be selected. In this case, the number representing the most disadvantageous non-setting value for the player will be displayed last, leaving open the possibility of both the most disadvantageous non-setting value and a more advantageous non-setting value until the last number is displayed. This makes it more difficult for players to realize they have the most disadvantageous game setting value (jackpot probability), thus preventing them from ending their gameplay prematurely and preventing a decline in the machine's utilization rate.

Furthermore, it is conceivable to set the display order of the numbers so that the numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to high settings and the numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to low settings are displayed later, making it easier for the player to select this option. For example, it is conceivable to set the display order so that at least one of "1" and "2" corresponding to low settings and at least one of "5" and "6" corresponding to high settings are displayed later, making it easier for the player to select this option. In this case as well, until just before the player finds out the setting value, there is still the possibility that it is a high setting value which is advantageous to the player, and the possibility that it is a low setting value which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the thrill of wondering whether it is a high setting value or a low setting value until just before they find out the setting value.

Furthermore, except when the setting value is the highest setting value (setting value is 6), it is conceivable to set the number display order so that numbers corresponding to non-setting values higher than the setting value are displayed later, making it easier for players to select this order. For example, it is conceivable to set the priority of numbers indicating non-setting values with a higher probability of being judged as advantageous than the setting value to be set higher for display orders that are lower than the numbers indicating non-setting values with a lower probability of being judged as advantageous than the setting value. By delaying the display order of numbers indicating non-setting values higher than the setting value in this way, it is possible to make players expect that the setting value is higher than the actual setting value up until just before they find out the setting value. This allows players to enjoy guessing the non-setting value (setting value) while expecting that the setting value may be higher, up until just before they find out the setting value. Conversely, except when the setting value is the lowest setting value (setting value is 1), it is conceivable to set the number display order so that numbers corresponding to non-setting values lower than the setting value are displayed later, making it easier for players to select this order. For example, it is conceivable to set the priority of numbers indicating non-setting values with a lower probability of being judged as advantageous than the setting value to be set higher for display orders that are lower than the numbers indicating non-setting values with a higher probability of being judged as advantageous than the setting value. By delaying the display order of numbers indicating non-set values (lower than the set value), the numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to lower game setting values remain hidden just before the set value is determined. This results in the final set value candidates being the actual set value and lower game setting values (non-set values). Consequently, the player ultimately perceives the game setting value that is more advantageous to them as the set value, thus increasing their satisfaction when the set value is determined.

Furthermore, regardless of the set value, it is conceivable to configure the display order so that numbers corresponding to high set values (e.g., set value 5 or higher) are displayed later, making it easier for players to select this option. Conversely, it is conceivable to configure the display order so that numbers corresponding to low set values (e.g., set value 2 or lower) are displayed earlier, making it easier for players to select this option. In this way, numbers corresponding to low set values are displayed earlier, and numbers corresponding to high set values are displayed later, resulting in even higher set values being displayed later. This allows players to anticipate the possibility of a favorable high set value until just before they realize the actual set value, enabling them to enjoy guessing the non-set value (or set value) while hoping for a high setting.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, the performance pattern type counter, the variation display counter, and so on. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the performance type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when they reach their maximum values. The first stop symbol type counter, which is updated here, is used to determine the type of decorative symbol that will be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. The performance pattern type counter is used to determine the performance type (performance pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Meanwhile, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variation display counter is used to measure the variation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value of the variation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variation display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to determine the remaining variable display time, whether the display is in progress, and whether the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 has finished.

[Command determination process]
In the command determination process (step S2002), the command received from the main control unit 4 is determined, and the process corresponding to that command is executed. Here, Figure 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the command determination process executed in step S2002 in the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 34.

<Step S2101>
As shown in Figure 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it has received a command from the main control unit 4. If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S2101: Yes), it proceeds to step S2102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2101: No), it terminates the command determination process. The command received from the main control unit 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. A command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined in step S2101 that a command has been received and it becomes subject to processing, and is stored, for example, in the processing work storage area.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variable pattern command. If the command is a variable pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2103; if the command is not a variable pattern command (step S2102: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern (combination of stop symbols for decorative symbols and performance type (performance pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see Figure 38(A)), variation type table (see Figure 38(B)), and performance type table (see Figures 39(A) to 39(C)) which are stored in the ROM 511 in advance, and the value of the performance type counter stored in the RAM 512. In addition, if the variation pattern command includes information about the type of jackpot, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the type of jackpot to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON if the type of jackpot is a 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability variation jackpot flag to ON if the type of jackpot is a 5R probability variation jackpot, and sets the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to ON if the type of jackpot is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

The combination of decorative symbols that stop consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the decorative symbol that is first displayed in the symbol display unit 341; the second stop symbol is the decorative symbol that is second displayed; and the final stop symbol is the symbol that is last displayed. The performance type table includes a normal reach performance pattern type selection table corresponding to a normal reach (see Figure 39(A)), a super reach performance pattern type selection table corresponding to a super reach (see Figure 39(B)), and a special reach performance pattern type selection table corresponding to a special reach (see Figure 39(C)).

Here, Figure 38(A) shows an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in Figure 38(A), the first stop symbol selection table defines the decorative symbol (first stop symbol) that will be initially displayed by the symbol display unit 341. Note that Figure 38(A) assumes that the decorative symbols are "1" through "9", that "333" indicates a probability variation jackpot (either a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot), that "777" indicates a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that any other repeating numbers besides "333" and "777" indicate a 5R regular jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 16R probability variation jackpot.

When the lottery result is a "5R Regular Jackpot," the symbols "3" and "7" are not assigned as the first stop symbols. Instead, the first stop symbol is determined by a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than "3" and "7." In other words, if the lottery result is a "5R Regular Jackpot," the symbol combinations "333" or "777," which indicate a 5R Probability Jackpot or a 16R Probability Jackpot (Probability Jackpot), will not be displayed as stop symbols.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," the number "7" is not assigned as the first stop symbol. Instead, the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols other than "7" at a predetermined probability. In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," the symbol combination "777," which indicates a 16R probability variation jackpot, will not be displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" combination, which indicates a 5R probability variation jackpot, may be displayed as the stop symbol. In other words, even when the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," the symbol stop display result may be a symbol combination other than the "333" combination, which suggests a 5R regular jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "5R probability variation jackpot," and the first stop symbol is a decorative symbol other than "3" (excluding "7"), the MPU 51 executes a 5R probability variation upgrade animation to clearly indicate that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot," there is a distribution for all decorative symbols from "1" to "9," and the first stop symbol is determined from these symbols with a predetermined probability. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot," a combination of repeating digits other than the "777" combination that indicates a 16R probability variation jackpot may be displayed as the stop symbol. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot," the stop symbol display result may be a combination of repeating digits other than the "777" combination that suggests a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot. And, when the lottery result is a "16R probability variation jackpot" and "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R probability variation upgrade animation to clearly indicate that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

Then, if the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol, and then determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same as the first stop symbol. This determines the combination of stop symbols that will be displayed on the active lines of the symbol display unit 341 during that game round.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is a "miss," there is a distribution to all decorative symbols from "1" to "9," and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Then, when the lottery result is a "miss" and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol based on the type of miss selected based on the miss type table (Figure 14 (D)) and the first stop symbol that was determined earlier. For example, if the miss type is a near miss (miss before and after), the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before or after the first stop symbol. Also, if the miss type is a near miss (not near miss before and after), the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Furthermore, if the aforementioned "miss" type is a complete miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be a different symbol from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined independently of the first and second stop symbols. Note that the stop symbol combination for decorative symbols may be determined by the display control device 6, or the first stop symbol may be determined only by the sound lamp control device 5, while the second and final stop symbols are determined by the display control device 6.

Furthermore, Figure 38(B) shows an example of a variation type table. As shown in Figure 38(B), the variation type table defines the variation display time and variation type (performance pattern) content corresponding to the variation pattern command. For example, variation pattern command "A01", where the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the variation pattern is "01", is associated with a variation display time of "30s" and a variation type "normal reach performance pattern". Also, variation pattern command "B02", where the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and the variation pattern is "02", is associated with a variation display time of "60s" and a variation type "super reach performance pattern", and variation pattern command "C03", where the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and the variation pattern is "03", is associated with a variation display time of "90s" and a variation type "special reach performance pattern". Furthermore, the variation pattern command "D04," where the lottery result is "miss" and the variation pattern is "04," is associated with a variation display time of "7s" and a variation type of "non-reach animation pattern." Similarly, the variation pattern command "D05," where the lottery result is "miss" and the variation pattern is "05," is associated with a variation display time of "10s" and a variation type of "non-reach animation pattern."

Furthermore, Figures 39(A) to 39(C) show examples of the performance pattern type selection tables. The performance pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (performance pattern). Specifically, Figure 39(A) is the normal reach performance pattern type selection table, which is referenced when the final individual performance type in a variation game performance is a normal reach performance; Figure 39(B) is the super reach performance pattern type selection table, which is referenced when the final individual performance type in a variation game performance is a super reach performance; and Figure 39(C) is the special reach performance pattern type selection table, which is referenced when the final individual performance type in a variation game performance is a special reach performance.

In this embodiment, we will explain using the example of a case where there are five types of performance types corresponding to each variation type, but there may be six or more types of performance types. Also, in Figure 39, the performance type table for cases where the variation type is "no reach" is omitted.

In the normal reach animation pattern type selection table shown in Figure 39(A), "Animation Pattern X1" to "Animation Pattern X5" are defined as animation pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the animation pattern type counter, depending on the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and miss). When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (animation pattern) is a normal reach animation pattern, it selects the animation pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the animation pattern type counter from the normal reach animation pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, animation patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach animation pattern type selection table are, for example, animations in which a normal reach animation is executed after the end of a high-speed variation animation in which the decorative symbols change rapidly, and the final individual animation type is a normal reach animation.

Furthermore, in the Super Reach Performance Pattern Type Selection Table shown in Figure 39(B), "Performance Pattern Y1" to "Performance Pattern Y5" are defined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a Super Reach Performance Pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the Super Reach Performance Pattern Type Selection Table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the Super Reach Performance Pattern Type Selection Table are, for example, performances that, after the end of a high-speed variation performance, are executed as a normal reach performance, and then develop into a Super Reach performance as the final individual performance type, which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than a normal reach performance and a longer performance duration than a normal reach performance. Note that the Super Reach Performance Pattern Type Selection Table may also include Super Reach Performance Patterns that develop into a Super Reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance without going through a normal reach performance.

Furthermore, in the special reach performance pattern type selection table shown in Figure 39(C), "Performance Pattern Z1" to "Performance Pattern Z5" are defined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, if the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the special reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach performance pattern type selection table are, for example, performances that are executed as normal reach performances and super reach performances after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further develop into a special reach performance as the final individual performance type, which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the normal reach performance and super reach performance, and has a longer performance execution time than the normal reach performance. Note that the special reach performance pattern type selection table may also include special reach performance patterns that develop into a special reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance or a normal reach performance, without going through at least one of the normal reach performance and super reach performance.

The MPU 51 then sets the RAM 512 with the display variation pattern command, which indicates the combination of stop symbols for the decorative symbols determined based on the variation pattern command, variation type table, performance type table, and performance type counter, as well as the variation type (performance pattern type).

<Step S2104>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command in the variation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. The variation display counter is then decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 34, and the MPU 51 can determine whether or not the pattern variation display is in progress, the remaining time of the variation display, etc., based on the variation display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to identify the combination of stop symbols and the variation type (performance pattern type) of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341, and terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the combination of stop symbols and the variation type (performance pattern type) of the decorative symbols determined in step S2103. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and performance image of the decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, the MPU 61 in the display control device 6 executes the variation display and performance display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the combination of stop symbols, variation type and performance type of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the pattern display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the display of multiple decorative patterns (for example, three) while a preset display time for variation has elapsed, and then sequentially stops displaying the variations of the multiple decorative patterns. During the display of the decorative patterns, various effects corresponding to the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed in the pattern display unit 341, speaker 26, lighting unit 27, etc.

Furthermore, when the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, it sets the "Variable Game Performance" flag to ON. This "Variable Game Performance" flag indicates that a variable game performance is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. A jackpot game start command is a command that indicates the start of a jackpot game, and as described above, it is set when the jackpot game execution flag is turned ON by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 at the start of a jackpot game. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2107, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
If a jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game performance determination process (step S2107). The jackpot game performance determination process determines the performances to be executed by the symbol display unit 341, etc., when the game state transitions to the jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening performance, ending performance, and opening/closing execution mode performance to be executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance start flag to ON and terminates the command judgment process. The jackpot game performance start flag is a flag that starts the jackpot game performance (opening performance), and is referenced in the jackpot game performance processing of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 34 when determining whether or not to execute the opening performance start process.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. A round game start command is a command that indicates the start of a round game in the open/close execution mode, and is set when a round game is started in the jackpot game control process in step S1305 of the main process in Figure 23. Here, if the received command is a round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2110, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S2109: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
If a round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance start flag to ON (step S2310) and terminates the command determination process. The round game start flag is referenced in step S2004 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 34 when determining whether or not to start the round game performance in the jackpot game performance.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command. A round game end command is a command that indicates the end of a round game in the open/close execution mode, and is set when the round game is to be ended in the jackpot game control process in step S1305 of the main process in Figure 23. Here, if the received command is a round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2112, and if the received command is not a round game end command (step S2111: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
If a round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance end flag to ON (step S2312) and terminates the command determination process. The round game end flag is referenced in step S2004 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Figure 34 when determining whether or not to terminate the round game performance during the jackpot game performance.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special out ball detection command. A special out ball detection command is a command that indicates that a game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 and is a special out ball, and is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 20. Here, if the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2114, and if the received command is not a special out ball detection command (step S2113: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON and terminates the command determination process. The special out ball detection flag is referenced in step S2208 of the setting value suggestion process in Figure 40, described later, when determining whether or not to increment the value of the special out ball counter.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. An ending start command is a command that indicates the start of the ending in a jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process in step S1305 of the main process in Figure 23. Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2116, and if the received command is not an ending start command (step S2115: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending sequence start flag to ON and terminates the command determination process. The ending sequence start flag is referenced in step S2004 of the sub-timer interrupt process in Figure 34 when determining whether or not to start the ending sequence process. The ending sequence start flag is also referenced in step S2201 of the setting value suggestion process in Figure 40 when determining whether or not to move the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game termination command. A jackpot game termination command is a command that indicates the termination of a jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process in step S1305 of the main process in Figure 23. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game termination command (step S2117: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2118, and if the received command is not a jackpot game termination command (step S2117: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance termination flag to ON and terminates the command judgment process. The jackpot game performance termination flag is a flag that terminates the jackpot game performance (ending performance), and is referenced in the jackpot game performance processing of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 34 when determining whether or not to execute the ending performance termination process. The jackpot game performance termination flag is also referenced in step S2301 in the 7-segment display unit control processing of Figure 41 when determining whether or not to turn off the currently lit segments on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a setting value change command. A setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 of the setting value change process in Figure 27. Here, if the received command is a setting value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2120, and if the received command is not a setting value change command (step S2119: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed setting value included in the setting value change command, stores it, and terminates the command determination process. The setting value stored in the RAM 512 is read in step S2014 of the display order setting process in Figure 35 and is referenced to determine the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control unit 4, and then terminates the command determination process.

[Variable gameplay effect processing]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 34, in the variable game performance processing (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt processing, when a variable pattern command is received in a variable game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery, a variable game performance corresponding to the performance pattern determined in step S2103 of the command judgment processing in Figure 37 is executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, lighting unit 27, etc.

[Big Win Game Animation Processing]
In the jackpot game performance processing of the sub-timer interrupt processing (step S2004), the opening performance, ending performance, and opening/closing execution mode performance determined in the jackpot game performance determination processing of step S2107 of the command determination processing in Figure 37 are executed. In this embodiment, in the ending performance, an ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 47).

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion process of the sub-timer interrupt processing (step S2005), the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display part 39 are controlled. Furthermore, in the setting value suggestion process, as an ending effect for the jackpot game, an ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display part 39 during the jackpot game is displayed on the symbol display part 341. Here, Figure 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the command judgment process of Figure 37.

<Step S2201>
As shown in Figure 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending sequence start flag is set to ON. The ending sequence start flag is a flag that starts the ending sequence, and is set to ON in step S2116 of the command determination process in Figure 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the right time to start the ending sequence based on the ending sequence start flag. Here, if the ending sequence start flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2202, and if the ending sequence start flag is OFF (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2206.

<Step S2202>
If the flag for starting the ending sequence is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention section 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, at the timing of the start of the ending sequence, the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention section 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position. As a result, if game balls 99 are retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention section 38, those game balls 99 are moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the special out ball sensor 384 detects the game balls 99 being moved from the retention lane 381 to the discharge lane 382.

<Steps S2203-S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention section 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets the stopper portion downward flag to ON, indicating that the stopper portion 383 is moving downward (step S2203). The stopper portion downward flag is referenced in step S2206 to determine whether or not it is the right time for game balls (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 to be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. The MPU 51 then sets a downward time counter corresponding to the time until the stopper portion 383 returns to the upper limit position (step S2204), and further sets the ending performance start flag to OFF (step S2205), ending the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S2206>
If the flag to start the ending sequence is off (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the flag indicating that the stopper is moving downwards, which is set to on in step S2203, is set to on (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the right timing for the game balls (special out balls) that have accumulated in the stagnant lane 381 to be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Here, if the flag indicating that the stopper is moving downwards is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2207, and if the flag indicating that the stopper is moving downwards is off (step S2206: No), the MPU proceeds to step S2216.

<Step S2207>
If the stopper unit downward movement flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S2207). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to on in step S2114 of the command determination process in Figure 37. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2208, and if the special out ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208) and sets the special out ball detection flag to off (step S2209). That is, in the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when special out balls that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37 are stored in the game ball retention section 38. The number of special out balls counted in this way is referenced in the 7-segment display control processing shown in Figure 41, which will be described later, in order to control the lighting or extinguishing of segments A to G of the 7-segment display 39.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the downward movement time counter set in step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the downward movement time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is time to return the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38, which is at the lower limit position, to the upper limit position.

Furthermore, whether or not it is time to return the stopper unit 383 to its upper limit position may be determined by whether or not special out balls are detected for a certain period of time, that is, whether or not the special out ball detection flag is off for a predetermined number of consecutive times. If the condition for returning the stopper unit 383 to its upper limit position is that no special out balls are detected for a certain period of time, then even if there are many special out balls, those special out balls can be accurately counted.

Here, if the value of the downtime counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2212. If the value of the downtime counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), the setting value suggestion process ends.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
If the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention section 38 upward from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and sets the stopper portion downward movement flag, which was set to ON in step S2203, to OFF (step S2213). As a result, the game ball retention section 38 returns to a state in which game balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display control process to control the on/off state of the 7-segment display unit 39. In other words, for each jackpot game, at the end of the jackpot game after a specific period has elapsed, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display control process to control the on/off state of the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device during the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Details of the 7-segment display control process will be described later with reference to Figures 41 to 45.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes an ending additional image control process to display an additional image corresponding to the on/off state of the 7-segment display unit 39 on the symbol display unit 341 at the end of the jackpot game. This ending additional image control process makes it possible to confirm the on/off state of the 7-segment display unit 39 on the symbol display unit 341 as well. Details of the 7-segment display unit control process will be described later with reference to Figures 46 and 47.

<Step S2216>
If the stopper unit downward movement flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game performance end flag is set to on (step S2216). The jackpot game performance end flag is a flag that ends the jackpot game performance, and is set to on in step S2118 of the command judgment process in Figure 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing for the jackpot game performance (ending performance) to end due to the jackpot game performance end flag. Here, if the jackpot game performance end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2217, and if the jackpot game performance end flag is off (step S2216: No), the setting value suggestion process ends.

<Step S2217>
If the flag indicating the end of the jackpot game performance is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off segments A to G that are lit on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2217). In other words, when the jackpot game performance ends, the MPU 51 turns off all segments A to G on the 7-segment display unit 39. To put it another way, segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 can only be lit during the ending of the jackpot game.

Here, segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 display all or part of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values (non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) that defines the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, each time a jackpot game is played, the player can obtain information to identify or estimate the non-setting value at the end of that jackpot game. This allows the player to identify or estimate the non-setting value each time a jackpot game is played, thus allowing them to enjoy identifying or estimating the non-setting value during jackpot games. Furthermore, because information that allows for the identification or estimation of the non-setting value is obtained for each jackpot game, as the number of jackpot games increases, for example, as the number of consecutive jackpots increases, it becomes possible to grasp all (five) non-setting values, and in that case, it becomes possible to grasp the setting value. In other words, because the player can grasp the setting value based on the identified non-setting value, they can estimate the setting value during jackpot games, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance termination flag to off (step S2218). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R probability variation jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to off (step S2219), and terminates the setting value indication performance.

[7-segment display control processing]
Here, Figure 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for controlling the 7-segment display unit, which is performed in step S2214 of the setting value suggestion process in Figure 40.

<Steps S2301 and S2302>
As shown in Figure 41, in the 7-segment display control process, the MPU 51 first obtains the value of the special out ball counter, which is stored in the RAM 512 by being added in step S2208 of the setting value suggestion process in Figure 40 (step S2301), and determines whether the value of this special out ball counter is 1 or greater (step S2302). The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that entered the variable prize entry opening 316 and entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 during the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot. If the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or greater (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2303, and if the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or greater, i.e., 0 (step S2302: No), the MPU 51 terminates the 7-segment display control process because there is no need to light up any of segments A to G of the 7-segment display 39.

<Steps S2303-S2307>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 reads the segment display control information from the 7-segment display control information storage area (see Figure 42(A)) set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display control information is the information necessary to control the 7-segment display 39 during a predetermined period (a period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37). Then, the MPU 51 determines the control content for the 7-segment display 39 based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display control information read from the 7-segment display control information storage area in step S2303 (step S2304), and executes the control of the 7-segment display 39 based on this control content (step S2305). Details of determining the control content and the control of the 7-segment display 39 will be described later with reference to Figures 42 to 45. Furthermore, the MPU 51 updates the previously displayed information storage area (see Figure 42(A)) of the 7-segment display control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306), clears the value of the special out ball counter (step S2307), and terminates the 7-segment display control process.

Here, Figure 42 is a diagram illustrating the 7-segment display control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, Figure 42(A) shows an example of the 7-segment display control information storage area, Figure 42(B) shows an example of the control sequence storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area, and Figure 42(C) shows an example of the initial state (unupdated) of the previously displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area.

As shown in Figure 42(A), the 7-segment display unit control information storage area includes the control sequence storage area shown in Figure 42(B) and the previously displayed information storage area shown in Figure 42(C).

As shown in Figure 42(B), the control sequence storage area is an area that stores the order of the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the control target order of segments A to G when each number is displayed, during a predetermined period (a period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 is accumulated). This control sequence storage area includes the number display sequence storage area and the segment control sequence storage area.

The number display order memory area stores the order in which numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 (number display order) during a predetermined period (for example, from the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode until the end of the opening/closing execution mode for a jackpot game for a normal jackpot). The number display order is determined in the display order setting process of Figure 35 described above, based on a number display order determination table (see Figure 36) set for a setting value that defines the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In the number display order memory area of the example shown in Figure 42(B), in the number display order setting process described above, display order A1 is set based on the number display order determination table for the setting value of 1, and the number display order on the 7-segment display unit 39 for the predetermined period is stored as "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6". That is, unless the setting is changed during the operation of the gaming hall, a fixed order is determined for the number display order for each business day, and the number display order for a predetermined period on the same business day is fixed. In this way, by fixing the order in which numbers are displayed for a predetermined period on the business day, the numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the same order each time the predetermined period begins. As a result, numbers that appear earlier in the display order are more likely to be displayed, while numbers that appear later are less likely to be displayed. For example, if the order of display is "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6", the numbers will be displayed in this order, making it easier for "2" and "3" to be displayed, while "5" and "6" are less likely to be displayed. This allows for the estimation and identification of the setting value while preventing the setting value from being easily identified, thus allowing players to enjoy the process of estimating and identifying the setting value. Furthermore, because the order of display is fixed during the business day, numbers that appear earlier in the display order are more likely to be displayed, and numbers that appear later are less likely to be displayed. For example, if the setting value is low (when the probability of hitting a jackpot is low in low probability mode), this prevents players from realizing that the setting is low after only a few initial wins. This prevents players from prematurely ending their game on the gaming machine 10, thereby suppressing a decline in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

Furthermore, the 7-segment display unit 39 is expected to display more numbers as the number of specific periods within a predetermined period increases (the number of consecutive jackpots increases). Therefore, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the more non-set values that can be identified among the multiple non-set values other than the set value. As a result, a higher number of consecutive jackpots provides more information for identifying the non-set values, thus narrowing down the candidate set values. Then, by getting 35 or more game balls 99 into the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 within a predetermined period, the player can identify all the non-set values and, as a result, recognize the set value. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while aiming to identify all the non-set values, i.e., recognize the set value, and can also enjoy the game by focusing on whether the consecutive jackpots continue (whether the jackpot type is a probability-increasing jackpot or a regular jackpot), thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the order of number display is not limited to being fixed to the setting made when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when settings are changed. It may also be determined when a jackpot game (initial win) in low-probability mode begins. In this way, the number display order is determined when a jackpot game, such as an initial win, begins. For example, the number display order can be determined at predetermined intervals. This makes it difficult for the player to guess the number display order, thus reducing the variability in the ranking of numbers corresponding to the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, it becomes possible to identify all non-set values with a small number of initial wins, enabling early recognition of the set values. As a result, the player can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of numbers not currently shown on the 7-segment display unit 39, based on the numbers previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, with the aim of identifying all non-set values and recognizing the set values.

On the other hand, the segment control sequence memory area stores the control sequence (segment control sequence) of segments A to G when displaying numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39. The segment control sequence is fixed as follows: Segment A → Segment B → Segment C → Segment D → Segment E → Segment F → Segment G. That is, the segment control sequence is not determined by events such as powering on the gaming machine 10, changing settings, or winning a jackpot, but is fixed as a sequence unique to the gaming machine 10. Because the segment control sequence is fixed as a sequence unique to the gaming machine 10, players can understand the control sequence of segments A to G when displaying numbers corresponding to non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39. This allows players to understand the numbers that are scheduled to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 even before they are displayed. Therefore, players can enjoy guessing numbers that have not yet been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the control sequence of segments A to G, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while the segment control order is fixed within the same business day by being determined when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when the setting value is changed, similar to the number display order, it is also conceivable that it be determined on a per-business-day basis. In this case, compared to when the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10, it becomes more difficult to identify numbers that have not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. This increases the difficulty in identifying all non-set values and recognizing the set values, thus preventing players from recognizing early on that the setting value is low (for example, when the jackpot probability is low in low probability mode). This prevents players from prematurely ending their game on the gaming machine 10 while they are playing.

Furthermore, the segment control sequence may be determined when a jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode is initiated (when a predetermined period begins), as will be explained in the third embodiment described later.

As shown in Figure 42(C), the previously displayed information storage area is an area that stores information about digits already displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, digits currently being displayed, and segments A to G that have already been controlled, within a predetermined period. This previously displayed information storage area stores previously displayed digit flag information, currently displayed digit flag information, and previously displayed segment flag information.

The previously displayed digit flag information is information about a flag indicating whether or not a digit was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. This previously displayed digit flag information includes the digit 1 previously displayed flag, the digit 2 previously displayed flag, the digit 3 previously displayed flag, the digit 4 previously displayed flag, the digit 5 previously displayed flag, and the digit 6 previously displayed flag. The digit 1 previously displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the digit 1 corresponding to game setting value 1 was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When this digit 1 previously displayed flag is set to ON, it indicates that the digit 1 was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the predetermined period, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the digit 1 was not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the predetermined period. The digit 2 previously displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the digit 2 corresponding to game setting value 2 was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. The "Number 2 Pre-Displayed" flag indicates whether the number 2 was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period when it is set to "on," and whether the number 2 was not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period when it is set to "off." The "Number 3 Pre-Displayed" flag indicates whether the number 3, corresponding to the game setting value 3, was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. The "Number 3 Pre-Displayed" flag indicates whether the number 3 was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period when it is set to "on," and whether the number 3 was not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period when it is set to "off." The "Number 4 Pre-Displayed" flag indicates whether the number 4, corresponding to the game setting value 4, was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. The "Number 4 Pre-Displayed" flag indicates whether the number 4 was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period when it is set to "on," and whether the number 4 was not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period when it is set to "off." The "Number 5 Pre-Displayed" flag indicates whether the number 5, corresponding to the game setting value 5, was displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When this "Number 5 Pre-Displayed" flag is set to "on," it indicates that the number 5 was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the predetermined period. When it is set to "off," it indicates that the number 5 was not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the predetermined period. The "Number 6 Pre-Displayed" flag indicates whether the number 6, corresponding to the game setting value 6, was displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When this "Number 6 Pre-Displayed" flag is set to "on," it indicates that the number 6 was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the predetermined period. When it is set to "off," it indicates that the number 6 was not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the predetermined period.

The display target number flag information is a flag that indicates whether or not a number is a number to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. This display target number flag information includes the number 1 display target flag, the number 2 display target flag, the number 3 display target flag, the number 4 display target flag, the number 5 display target flag, and the number 6 display target flag. The number 1 display target flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the number 1 corresponding to game setting value 1 is a number to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When this number 1 display target flag is set to ON, it indicates that the number 1 is a number to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that the number 1 is not a number to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 2 display target flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the number 2 corresponding to game setting value 2 is a number to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. The number 2 display target flag indicates whether the number 2 is a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to on, and whether the number 2 is not a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to off. The number 3 display target flag indicates whether the number 3, which corresponds to the game setting value 3, is a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. The number 3 display target flag indicates whether the number 3 is a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to on, and whether the number 3 is not a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to off. The number 4 display target flag indicates whether the number 4, which corresponds to the game setting value 4, is a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. The number 4 display target flag indicates whether the number 4 is a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to on, and whether the number 4 is not a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to off. The "Number 5 Display Target Flag" indicates whether the number 5, corresponding to the game setting value 5, is a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When this "Number 5 Display Target Flag" is set to "on," it indicates that the number 5 is a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39; when it is set to "off," it indicates that the number 5 is not a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39. The "Number 6 Display Target Flag" indicates whether the number 6, corresponding to the game setting value 6, is a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When this "Number 6 Display Target Flag" is set to "on," it indicates that the number 6 is a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39; when it is set to "off," it indicates that the number 6 is not a target for display on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The previously targeted segment flag information is a flag that indicates whether or not each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 was subject to on/off control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. This previously targeted segment flag information includes the segment A previously targeted flag, segment B previously targeted flag, segment C previously targeted flag, segment D previously targeted flag, segment E previously targeted flag, segment F previously targeted flag, and segment G previously targeted flag. The segment A previously targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not segment A of the 7-segment display unit 39 was subject to on/off control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When this segment A previously targeted flag is set to ON, it indicates that segment A was subject to control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during the predetermined period, and when it is set to OFF, it indicates that segment A was not subject to control. The segment B previously targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not segment B of the 7-segment display unit 39 was subject to on/off control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. The segment B flag indicates whether segment B was controlled in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period when it is set to ON, and whether segment B was not controlled when it is set to OFF. The segment C flag indicates whether segment C of the 7-segment display unit 39 was controlled in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. The segment C flag indicates whether segment C was controlled in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period when it is set to ON, and whether segment C was not controlled when it is set to OFF. The segment D flag indicates whether segment D of the 7-segment display unit 39 was controlled in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. The segment D flag indicates whether segment D was controlled in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period when it is set to ON, and whether segment D was not controlled when it is set to OFF. The segment E flag indicates whether segment E of the 7-segment display unit 39 was controlled in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. The segment E flag indicates whether segment E was controlled during the display control of the digits to be displayed for a predetermined period when it is set to ON, and whether segment E was not controlled when it is set to OFF. The segment F flag indicates whether segment F of the 7-segment display unit 39 was controlled during the display control of the digits to be displayed for a predetermined period. When this segment F flag is set to ON, it indicates whether segment F was controlled during the display control of the digits to be displayed for a predetermined period, and whether segment F was not controlled when it is set to OFF. The segment G flag indicates whether segment G of the 7-segment display unit 39 was controlled during the display control of the digits to be displayed for a predetermined period. When this segment G flag is set to ON, it indicates that segment G was controlled during the display control of the digits to be displayed for a predetermined period, and whether segment G was not controlled when it is set to OFF.

Furthermore, in the initial state, the previously displayed information storage area has all flags included in the previously displayed number flag information, the display target number flag information, and the previously targeted segment flag information set to off. Here, the initial state represents the state outside of the predetermined period, i.e., the state at the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode (first jackpot) (the start of a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37). In this embodiment, all flags included in the previously displayed information storage area are set to off (cleared) in step S2405 of the ending addition image control processing shown in Figure 46, described later, if the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), i.e., if it is a normal jackpot for which the end of the predetermined period is set.

Figures 43 to 45 show examples of control (display) of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment display unit control information storage area, and examples of updating the previously displayed information storage area. The following explanation will refer to Figures 43 to 45 to describe the control (display) examples of the 7-segment display unit 39, along with the examples of updating the previously displayed information storage area in the 7-segment display unit control information storage area.

As described above, in the 7-segment display control process shown in Figure 41, the control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined (step S2304), and the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled according to that control content at the end of the jackpot game (step S2305). Afterward, the flag information stored in the previously displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

The control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined according to the value of the special out ball counter (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 during a specific period set for a jackpot game) acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process shown in Figure 41. For example, if the previously displayed information storage area is in its initial state (see Figure 42(C)), and the value of the special out ball counter is less than 7, then some of the seven segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 will be subject to on/off control. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 during a specific period is 5), and the contents of the control sequence storage area are in the state shown in Figure 42(B), and the previously displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in Figure 42(C) (when all flags are set to off), then the five segments A to E of the 7-segment display unit 39 will be subject to on/off control. Then, if the contents of the control sequence memory area are in the state shown in Figure 42(B), the number 2 is displayed first, so segment A is lit, segment B is lit, segment C is off, segment D is lit, and segment E is lit. Therefore, the 7-segment display unit 39 changes from the fully off state (uncontrolled state) shown in Figure 43(A), where all segments A to G are off, to the partially controlled state shown in Figure 43(B), where segments A, B, D, and E are lit.

The change from the uncontrolled state shown in Figure 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in Figure 43(B) may be performed abruptly, or it may be performed gradually by sequentially controlling segments A to E and turning each segment A to E on or off. Furthermore, when sequentially controlling segments A to E and turning them on or off, the controlled segments A to E may be made to appear as if they are being controlled, for example by blinking. Of course, it is not always necessary to explicitly indicate which segments are being controlled.

On the other hand, when control of the 7-segment display unit 39 is terminated, the previously displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display unit 39 changes from the uncontrolled state shown in Figure 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in Figure 43(B), the previously displayed information storage area is updated from the initial state shown in Figure 42(C), where all flags are set to off, to the content shown in Figure 43(C). Specifically, in the display state shown in Figure 43(B), for the number 2, which is the first number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, five segments A to E out of segments A to G are controlled, while segments F and G are not controlled. Therefore, as shown in Figure 43(C), since none of the numbers 1 to 6 are displayed in the previously displayed number flag information, all flags for previously displayed number 1, previously displayed number 2, previously displayed number 3, previously displayed number 4, previously displayed number 5, and previously displayed number 6 remain off. Furthermore, in the currently displayed digit flag information, the "Currently Displayed Digit 2" flag for the digit 2, which is controlled by segments A through E, is set to "on". Also, in the previously displayed segment flag information, since segments A through E are controlled, the previously targeted flags for segments A through E—segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, and segment E—are set to "on".

Furthermore, if the previously displayed information storage area is in its initial state (see Figure 42(C)), and the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process in Figure 41 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 during a specific period set for a jackpot game) exceeds 7, then at least one number (for example, 2) will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 during a specific period is 10), then a total of 10 segments A to G will be subject to control on/off in the 7-segment display unit 39. In other words, all seven segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 will be subject to on/off control, so the number for the first display order will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and then the three segments A to C will be subject to the second on/off control for the number for the second display order. Specifically, if the contents of the control sequence memory area are in the state shown in Figure 42(B), and the previously displayed information memory area is in the initial state shown in Figure 42(C) (when all flags are set to off), then because the first number to be displayed is 2, the 7-segment display unit 39 will display the number 2, followed by the number 3. Therefore, the 7-segment display unit 39 changes from a non-controlled state where all segments A to G are off (as shown in Figure 44(A)) to a fully controlled state where segments A, B, D, E, and G are lit, and segments C and F are off (as shown in Figure 44(B)), resulting in the display of the number 2. Furthermore, the segment display unit 39 changes from the fully controlled state where the number 2 is displayed (as shown in Figure 44(B)) to a partially controlled state where segments A to C are controlled (as shown in Figure 44(C)). In the example shown in Figure 44(C), because the second number to be displayed is 3, segments A to C are lit.

The transition from the uncontrolled state shown in Figure 44(A) to the fully controlled state shown in Figure 44(B), and the transition from the fully controlled state shown in Figure 44(B) to the partially controlled state shown in Figure 44(C), may be performed all at once, or it may be performed gradually by sequentially turning segments A to G, or segments A to C, on or off. Furthermore, when sequentially turning segments A to G, or segments A to C, the controlled segment may be made to clearly indicate that it is being controlled, for example, by blinking. Of course, it is not always necessary to explicitly indicate which segment is being controlled.

Furthermore, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled, the previously displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display unit 39 changes from the uncontrolled state shown in Figure 44(A) to the fully controlled state shown in Figure 44(B) and then to the partially controlled state shown in Figure 44(C), the previously displayed information storage area is updated from the initial state shown in Figure 42(C) where all flags are set to off, through the contents shown in Figures 45(A) and 45(B), and finally to the contents shown in Figure 45(C). Specifically, in the state shown in Figure 44(B), for the number 2 that is first displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, all segments A to E of segments A to G are subject to control. Therefore, as shown in Figure 45(A), in the previously displayed segment flag information, all previously targeted flags for segments A to G are set to on. Then, when all previously targeted flags for segments A through G are set to ON, the control for displaying digit 2 is terminated. Therefore, as shown in Figure 45(B), the previously displayed digit 2 flag is set to ON in the previously displayed digit flag information, while the currently displayed digit 2 flag is set to OFF in the currently displayed digit flag information, while the currently displayed digit 3 flag is set to ON. Subsequently, in the previously displayed segment flag information, all previously targeted flags for segments A through G are set to OFF. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 45(C), in the previously displayed segment flag information, the previously targeted flags for segments A through C—segment A, segment B, and segment C—are set to ON. In other words, each time all previously targeted flags in the previously displayed segment flag information are set to ON (each time all seven segments A through G are controlled), the previously displayed flag for the digit that was the target of display in the previously displayed digit flag information is set to ON, the target of display for the digit that was the target of display in the currently displayed digit flag information is set to OFF, while the target of display for the next target digit is set to ON.

As described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled according to the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information. This displays all or part of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values other than the game setting value (set value) that defines the probability of a jackpot in the jackpot lottery of the gaming machine 10 (non-set value). This allows the player to identify or infer the non-set value based on the display content of the 7-segment display unit 39, and as a result, recognize the set value.

Incidentally, some gaming machines, like the gaming machine 10 in this embodiment, have multiple setting values that differ in the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, and the gaming hall can select the setting value. In this case, the gaming hall wishes to set the setting value low in order to reduce the expected value of payouts. Furthermore, when the setting value is set low, there is a tendency to prefer gaming machines in which the setting value is not known to the player, in order to avoid the player stopping playing because they become aware that the setting value is low.

On the other hand, players, in order to play on gaming machines 10 with a higher expected payout, desire gaming machines with setting values that allow them to guess (narrow down to multiple setting values) or recognize the setting value. Thus, there is a tendency for gaming halls and players to have conflicting desires regarding gaming machines that suggest or explicitly display game setting values.

In contrast, in this embodiment, during a specific period from the start of the initial jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode, the game balls 99 that enter the variable prize entry point 316 and that enter the special out ball entry point 373 of the roulette device 37 (special out balls) are stored in the storage lane 381 of the game ball storage unit 38. Then, after the specific period has elapsed, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) stored in the storage lane 381 is counted, and segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled according to that count. In other words, unless the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot and the game transitions to a jackpot game, segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are neither controlled nor lit. Therefore, unless the game transitions to a jackpot game, the set values are not estimated or recognized.

Furthermore, it is difficult for game balls 99 to enter the special out-ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37. For example, only one to two game balls 99 are expected to enter for a single 16R jackpot game (about one ball for every 10 rounds of a round game). Therefore, it is difficult to identify or estimate the non-set value using the 7-segment display unit 39 for a single jackpot. On the other hand, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out-ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37 during a predetermined period from the start of the jackpot game (opening) which is executed when the lottery result in low probability mode results in a jackpot, until the opening and closing execution mode in a normal jackpot game ends (the ending begins). In other words, the predetermined period does not end as long as the jackpot streak continues in high probability mode if the initial win is a probability variation jackpot, and continues until the opening and closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends if a normal jackpot is won. In other words, in this embodiment, while the gameplay is such that it is not easy to recognize the non-set value and by extension the set value, the longer the jackpot streak continues in high probability mode, the more game balls 99 are expected to enter the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37, allowing for a more accurate estimation of the non-set value (set value). If 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special out-ball opening 373 during a predetermined period, the non-set value (set value) can be reliably identified. Therefore, the game machine 10 displays information that allows for the estimation of the set value according to the number of specific conditions met during a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls that entered the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 during a predetermined period. However, in the case of a single jackpot, the expected number of game balls 99 entering the special out-ball opening 373 is low, resulting in a gameplay where it is difficult to estimate or recognize the non-set value (set value). On the other hand, in the case of consecutive big wins, if the number of consecutive wins is small, it is difficult to estimate or recognize the non-set value (set value). However, as the number of consecutive wins increases, the expected value of the number of game balls 99 entering the special ball outlet 373 increases, thus reducing the difficulty in estimating the non-set value (set value). That is, in this embodiment, the set value can be estimated by identifying or estimating some or all of the multiple non-set values by accumulating all or some of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. In this way, the game machine 10 meets the store's wishes by suppressing the easy identification or estimation (narrowing) of the set value, while also meeting the player's wishes by enabling more accurate estimation of the non-set value (set value) through consecutive big wins. This provides a game machine 10 that meets the wishes of both the store and the player.

Incidentally, in conventional slot machines, the display device, such as the LCD display device where the game's effects are executed, may display images that suggest or explicitly indicate the set value. These images are displayed, for example, on the jackpot confirmation screen, jackpot start screen, jackpot end screen, and the start, continuation, and end screens of ART or AT, and the content of the displayed image is determined by a lottery. Specifically, in the image display section of the LCD display device, in addition to the default screen that does not suggest or explicitly indicate the set value, such as the jackpot game end screen, a screen may be presented with a certain probability that suggests or explicitly indicates that the setting value is above a specific value (e.g., above an intermediate setting value (setting value 4-6)), above a high setting value (e.g., setting value 5 or 6), above an odd setting value (e.g., setting value 1, 3, or 5), above an even setting value (e.g., setting value 2, 4, or 6), not a specific setting value (e.g., the negation of setting value 1), or the highest setting value (e.g., setting value 6).

However, in conventional slot machines, the default screen that does not suggest or explicitly indicate the setting value is set to be high, and the probability of a screen that suggests or explicitly indicates the setting value is set to be low, in order to prevent the setting value from being easily identified or guessed. In particular, the probability of suggesting or explicitly indicating a setting value that is advantageous to the player, or explicitly indicating a specific setting value, is set to be low. Furthermore, suggestions that the setting value is odd or even tend to have low reliability, for example, the reliability is often set to around 60%. Moreover, while slot machines may suggest or explicitly indicate a high setting value, they do not suggest or explicitly deny that it is a high setting value (e.g., setting value 5 or 6), and especially do not suggest or explicitly deny that it is the highest setting value (e.g., setting value 6). In other words, slot machines do not present information that is disadvantageous to the player, such as information that denies a high setting value.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, information that allows for the estimation of the set value (non-set value) is displayed as a number on the 7-segment display unit 39, based on the number of specific conditions met during a predetermined period, i.e., the number of game balls that entered the special out-ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37 during the predetermined period. In other words, by displaying each non-set value number on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is possible to identify or infer a portion of the non-set values, thus allowing for the estimation of the set value. Furthermore, by displaying all the non-set value numbers, all of the non-set values can be recognized, making it possible to identify the set value.

Thus, this embodiment fundamentally differs from conventional amusement machines such as slot machines, which suggest or explicitly indicate the setting value at a certain rate. Instead, it allows for the recognition of the setting value by identifying multiple non-setting values based on the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the non-setting value (setting value) is explicitly indicated or suggested depending on the number of specific conditions (entry of game balls 99 into the special out-ball opening 373) met during a jackpot game over a predetermined period. This also differs from conventional amusement machines such as slot machines, where the setting value is suggested or explicitly indicated at a certain rate. Moreover, this embodiment differs from conventional amusement machines such as slot machines in that the difficulty of identifying or inferring some or all of the multiple non-setting values decreases as the number of consecutive jackpots increases.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since numerical information indicating multiple non-set values is presented depending on the number of specific conditions (entry of game balls 99 into the special ball outlet 373) that are met during a jackpot game over a predetermined period, unlike conventional gaming machines, the frequency of information for identifying the set value does not decrease. As long as the predetermined period continues (as long as the jackpot streak continues), the presentation of information for identifying the non-set value (set value) continues, allowing players to enjoy guessing the set value even more, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a certain condition is met for a number of non-set values within a predetermined period, all non-set values can be identified. In other words, regardless of whether the non-set value is high or low, all non-set values, including information unfavorable to the player, are presented to the player. Thus, unlike conventional slot machines where set values are suggested or explicitly stated, in this embodiment, even information unfavorable to the player, such as negating the highest set value, is presented. As a result, the player can obtain not only favorable but also unfavorable information as information for identifying or inferring the set value, and can decide whether or not to continue playing on the gaming machine 10 based on the unfavorable information. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the display order of numbers corresponding to high set values (e.g., set value 5 or higher) is delayed, making it easier to select. Conversely, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the display order of numbers corresponding to low set values (e.g., set value 2 or lower) is displayed earlier, making it easier to select. In this way, the display order of numbers corresponding to low set values is earlier and the display order of numbers corresponding to high set values is delayed, so that higher set values are displayed later. This allows players to anticipate the possibility of a favorable high setting until just before they learn the actual setting value. Therefore, they can enjoy the process of guessing the setting value (or non-setting value) while hoping for a high setting.

[Ending Image Control Processing]
Here, Figure 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the ending image control process performed in step S2215 of the setting value suggestion process in Figure 40.

<Steps S2401-S2403>
As shown in Figure 46, in the ending additional image control process, in step S2401, the MPU 51 reads various information from the previously displayed information storage area which is updated in step S2306 of Figure 41, namely the previously displayed number flag information, the currently displayed number flag information, and the previously displayed segment flag information which are updated due to the passage of the specific period, and determines an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the end of the jackpot game based on this information (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image that shows the display content of the 7-segment display unit 39, and is an image that can identify or infer non-set values (see Figures 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C)). Then, the MPU 51 transmits an additional image display command to the display control device 6 to display the additional image determined in step S2402 on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending performance. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 displays the additional image as an ending performance.

Here, Figure 47 shows examples of screen transitions during the ending sequence of a jackpot game. Specifically, Figure 47(A1) is an example of the symbol display unit 341 screen during the first half of the ending sequence in a probability variation jackpot game, and Figure 47(A2) is an example of the symbol display unit 341 screen during the first half of the ending sequence in a normal jackpot game. Furthermore, Figures 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C) are examples of the symbol display unit 341 screen during the second half of the ending sequence (examples of setting value suggestion screens).

As shown in Figure 47(A1), in the ending of a probability-increasing jackpot game, the first part of the ending sequence displays an image on the symbol display unit 341 indicating that the game will transition to a high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after the probability-increasing jackpot game ends. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 47(B1), in the ending of a normal jackpot game, the first part of the ending sequence displays an image on the symbol display unit 341 indicating that the game will transition to a low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (time-saving mode) after the normal jackpot game ends. In addition to the image indicating the game mode to be transitioned to after the jackpot game ends, the first part of the ending sequence also displays images indicating the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of balls won.

On the other hand, in the latter half of the ending sequence of a jackpot game, an image including an additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control process shown in Figure 46 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as a result of a roulette game using the roulette device 37. As shown in Figures 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C), the additional image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and includes five setting value suggestion images that mimic the 7-segment display unit 39, which can display numbers corresponding to non-set values. Specifically, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in Figure 43(A) to the display state shown in Figure 43(B), an additional image including an image mimicking the display state on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the latter half of the ending sequence, as shown in Figure 47(B1). Furthermore, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in Figure 43(A) through Figure 44(B) to the display state shown in Figure 44(C), an additional image including a setting value suggestion image mimicking the display state shown in Figure 44(B) and a setting value suggestion image mimicking the display state shown in Figure 44(C) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the latter half of the ending sequence, as shown in Figure 47(B2). Moreover, if all five digits corresponding to the unset value are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before the predetermined period ends, an additional image including a setting value suggestion image mimicking the state in which each digit is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the latter half of the ending sequence, as shown in Figure 47(C). In the example shown in Figure 47(C), an image is displayed indicating that the digits "2" through "6" (excluding "1") have been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. In this case, it can be identified that the unset value is "2" through "6," and as a result, it can be recognized that the set value is "1."

Thus, in the ending sequence of a jackpot game, the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 up to the end of a predetermined period is displayed as an additional image, including five setting value suggestion images that mimic the 7-segment display unit 39, in the latter half of the sequence. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can confirm information regarding the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 up to that jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize the display content of the 7-segment display unit 39 even if they were unaware that information regarding non-set values was being displayed, missed the display content, or forgot the past display content of the 7-segment display unit 39 during the predetermined period. Therefore, for each jackpot game, the player can identify or infer the non-set values and recognize or infer the set values at the ending based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39.

Furthermore, whether or not to display an additional image on the symbol display unit 341 showing the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 up to the end of a predetermined period as part of the ending sequence of a jackpot game is a design consideration, and it is conceivable that the additional image not be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the ending sequence. If the additional image is not displayed during the ending sequence, and if there are numbers that have been displayed in the past during the predetermined period, unless those numbers are memorized or recorded, it becomes difficult to identify or estimate the non-set value, and consequently, to estimate or recognize the set value, based on the numbers previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. In other words, by not displaying the additional image during the ending sequence, the difficulty in identifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) is increased, thus preventing the setting value of the gaming machine 10 from being recognized early, or at least preventing the recognition that it is not a high setting value. This prevents the game of the gaming machine 10 from ending prematurely, and suppresses a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 determines whether the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is a 5R regular jackpot. Whether the type of jackpot is a 5R regular jackpot can be determined based on whether the 5R regular jackpot flag, which can be set to ON in step S2103 of Figure 37, is ON. If the type of jackpot is a 5R regular jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2305, and if the type of jackpot is not a 5R regular jackpot (step S2404: No), the ending image control process is terminated.

<Step S2405>
If the type of jackpot is a 5R regular jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 initializes the previously displayed information storage area (sets all flags to off) and terminates the ending image control process. In other words, if the jackpot is a 5R regular jackpot for which a predetermined period end date is set, the MPU 51 initializes the previously displayed information storage area.

As described above, in this embodiment, while the non-set value (set value) can be identified or inferred, increasing the accuracy of identifying or inferring the non-set value (set value) requires that a larger number of game balls 99 be entered into the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 within a predetermined period, making the hurdle to identifying the non-set value (set value) high. Therefore, for the amusement hall, there is an advantage in that the set value is not easily known to the player. On the other hand, for the player, there is an advantage in that the set value can be identified or inferred. In addition, it is possible to identify or infer the set value by winning the jackpot lottery, and the accuracy of the setting value inferred increases with the continuation of the jackpot (jackpot streak), and in some cases, the set value can be recognized, thus providing the amusement machine 10 with a gameplay feature. This makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game while meeting the wishes of both the amusement hall and the player.

Furthermore, once a jackpot game begins, unless there are exceptional circumstances, the game will end during the jackpot game, and will not end during the high-probability mode if the game is in high-probability mode. Therefore, by defining the predetermined period as the time from the start of the initial jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode, it prevents players from ending the game before the predetermined period ends. This prevents players who are unaware of the timing at which the non-set value (set value) can be identified or predicted (the end of the predetermined period) from ending the game immediately before the non-set value (set value) becomes identifiable or predictable. Therefore, even players who are unaware of the timing at which the non-set value (set value) can be identified or predicted can still predict or recognize it. In addition, it eliminates the so-called "hyena" behavior of other players who play to target the timing at which the non-set value (set value) can be identified or predicted.

Furthermore, because the start of the predetermined period coincides with the start of a jackpot game triggered by a jackpot win in the low-probability mode on the first win, not only is at least one jackpot win required before the non-set value (set value) can be identified or estimated, but even if the predetermined period has started, as mentioned above, the hurdle to identifying the non-set value (set value) is high, so a considerable number of game balls 99 will be fired into the game board 31 and a considerable number of jackpot draws will be received until the non-set value (set value) can be estimated or identified to some extent. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be estimated or identified with a high degree of accuracy, it is highly likely that the number of unit jackpot draws (ease of receiving a jackpot draw) has also been sufficiently determined. As a result, when the non-set value (set value) can be estimated or identified with a high degree of accuracy, the player can judge the payout performance of the game machine 10 during gameplay, including not only the non-set value (set value) but also the number of unit jackpot draws, and thus decide whether to continue playing. For example, even if the setting value is low, if the number of unit jackpot draws is high, it may be possible to decide to continue playing after considering all factors. Conversely, even if the setting value is high, if the number of unit jackpot draws is low, it may be possible to decide to abandon playing after considering all factors.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, information for identifying or inferring a non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. The display history of this 7-segment display unit 39 over a predetermined period is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the end of a jackpot game. Therefore, at the end of each jackpot game, the player can confirm the information regarding the non-set value that was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 up to that jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 even if they were unaware that information regarding the non-set value was being displayed, missed the display content, or forgot the past display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 over the predetermined period. Therefore, for each jackpot game, the player can identify or infer the non-set value and recognize or infer the set value based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39, and enjoy the game's progression.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 over a predetermined period is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the end of a jackpot game. However, the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 over a predetermined period may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 or other display unit after the end of a jackpot game for which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, the display history of the predetermined period may be made displayable during special periods other than the specified period. For example, in a standby state where neither a variable game nor a jackpot game is being played, it is conceivable that the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 over a predetermined period may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 or other display unit by a predetermined operation performed by the player on the game machine 10. By displaying the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 over a predetermined period on the symbol display unit 341 or other display unit after the end of a jackpot game for which the end of the predetermined period is set, it becomes possible to check the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 if the player has forgotten them. This makes it possible to identify or infer non-set values based on the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39. The display history in the pattern display unit 341, etc., during standby mode will be explained in detail in the fourth embodiment described later.

Thus, when the display history can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341, etc., in standby mode, there is an advantage in that it becomes possible to check the past display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 if it has been forgotten. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341, etc., in standby mode, anyone can check the display history by performing a predetermined operation on an empty gaming machine 10. In other words, it becomes possible to identify or guess the non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others, thus allowing so-called "hyena" behavior. In contrast, in this embodiment, it is not permitted to check the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game for which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, specific information indicating the non-set value, including the display history for the predetermined period, is restricted from being displayed outside of the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, hyena behavior, where one identifies or guesses the non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others, can be eliminated.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the initial win is a probability-increasing jackpot, a predetermined period is set spanning from the start of the initial jackpot game to the normal jackpot game in high-probability mode. However, the predetermined period may be set individually for each jackpot, regardless of the type of jackpot. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game, regardless of whether it is an initial win or a consecutive win. In this case, the predetermined period begins at the start of the jackpot game or the opening/closing execution mode and ends at the end of the jackpot game or the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, instead of or in addition to displaying the number corresponding to the unset value on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 may display the number or alphabet corresponding to the unset value, and the symbol display unit 341 may explicitly display the unset value in a "unset value explicit reach" performance. As a "unset value explicit reach" performance, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, for example, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed with a set of identical digits corresponding to the unset value. In this way, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 displays a number corresponding to the non-set value, and the symbol display unit 341 clearly indicates the non-set value. By executing this non-set value indication reach performance, players can enjoy the variable game not only by looking at whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or not, but also by focusing on the numbers that are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, when the non-set value indication reach performance is executed as one of the reach performances, it is also conceivable that in the reach of decorative symbols with numbers corresponding to the set value, the numbers will not line up as identical numbers but will be displayed as losing numbers. For example, if the setting value is 1, the decorative symbols can stop on "222," "333," "444," "555," and "666," but not on "111." In this case, a reach with the decorative symbol 1 will always result in a loss. Thus, by preventing the stopping of repeating numbers corresponding to the setting value, while it's usually desirable for the decorative symbols to stop on repeating numbers, it's also desirable that repeating numbers like 5 or 6 (which negate high setting values) are not displayed. This allows for a different perspective on enjoying the reach animations compared to before.

Furthermore, it is conceivable that the display of numbers corresponding to the non-set value, or the non-set value explicit reach animation, on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 could be executed only at specific timings. By limiting the display of numbers corresponding to the non-set value, or the non-set value explicit reach animation, to specific timings, players can enjoy the game by focusing on the variable gameplay executed at those specific timings.

One possible specific timing is when, for example, during a variable game played in a probability variation state or a time-saving game state, the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 and the symbol display unit 341 announce that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. By explicitly indicating or suggesting a non-set value during a variable game in a probability variation state or a time-saving game state, the reserves are consumed quickly by the high-frequency support mode, allowing players to enjoy the variable game in the probability variation state or time-saving game state, which can otherwise become monotonous. Another possibility is to set a specific timing when the number of variable games played after transitioning to a probability variation state or a time-saving game state falls within a predetermined range. For example, the predetermined range could be set when the number of variable games played after transitioning to a probability variation state is small (e.g., 1 to 10 times) or large (e.g., 100 times or more, 150 times or more, 200 times or more, etc.). In other words, the system may explicitly indicate or suggest a non-set value when a jackpot occurs early after transitioning to a probability-increasing game state, or when a long period of spinning games before a jackpot occurs. In this case, the explicit indication or suggestion of the non-set value is given as a reward for an early jackpot after the end of a jackpot game, or as relief for a long period of spinning games. Furthermore, the predetermined range of spins could be set to a small number of spins after transitioning to a time-saving game state (e.g., 1 to 10 spins), or to a point near the end of the time-saving game state (e.g., 90 to 100 spins). In this case, the explicit indication or suggestion of the non-set value is given as a reward for an early jackpot after the end of a jackpot game, or for a jackpot near the end of the time-saving game state.

[Other embodiments]
The following describes other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention. In the other embodiments described below, the same configurations and processing procedures as those described in the first embodiment described above will not be explained. It is also possible to select and combine the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment and the other embodiments described below as desired.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a specific period (the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode in a normal jackpot game) is set for each jackpot game executed within a predetermined period (the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode in a normal jackpot game for a normal jackpot), and at the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of a plurality of non-set values (set values) is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

By the way, as in the first embodiment described above, when a specific period is set for each jackpot game executed within a predetermined period, in the case of a jackpot streak, multiple specific periods corresponding to the number of streaks are set within the predetermined period. Therefore, in a jackpot streak, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end of each jackpot game. That is, in a jackpot streak, all or part of the specific information is displayed in multiple installments. However, when all or part of the specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end of each jackpot game, that is, when all or part of the specific information is displayed in multiple installments, it becomes difficult to identify the non-set value (set value) based on the specific information presented at the end of the previously executed jackpot game unless the specific information presented at the end of the previously executed jackpot game is stored or recorded. That is, if the 7-segment display unit 39 does not accurately store or record the specific information presented in the past, it becomes difficult to effectively identify or infer the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively identify or infer the non-set value (set value), it is necessary to accurately remember or record the specific information previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, which is cumbersome. As a result, it is conceivable that players may give up on identifying or inferring the non-set value (set value). In this case, the significance of improving the enjoyment of the game by being able to identify or infer the non-set value (set value) is lost.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, no specific period is set within the predetermined period. Instead, specific information for identifying or inferring a non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period, based on the number of specific conditions that are met within the predetermined period. Thus, in this embodiment, specific information for identifying or inferring a non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period, based on the number of specific conditions that are met within the predetermined period. Therefore, in this embodiment, the inconvenience of presenting specific information multiple times within a predetermined period, as in the first embodiment described above, is eliminated. That is, in this embodiment, since specific information is presented only once after the end of a predetermined period, there is no specific information presented in the past within that predetermined period, and therefore there is no specific information that the player needs to remember or record. As a result, the player can identify or infer a non-set value (set value) by focusing on the specific information presented only once per predetermined period, thereby freeing them from the hassle of accurately remembering or recording the presented specific information. Therefore, players can easily and effectively identify or infer non-set values (or set values), allowing them to enjoy the game while identifying or inferring these values, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In one example of this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment described above, the predetermined period is the period from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game for a normal jackpot, and the specific condition is that a game ball enters the special out ball opening of the roulette device. Furthermore, in one example of this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment described above, specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, but the display timing (predetermined period) of the specific information is only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game (after the end of the predetermined period) for each predetermined period. That is, the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 only once after the end of the predetermined period. Therefore, in this embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggestion processing, 7-segment display unit control processing, and ending image control processing differ from the first embodiment described above.

Here, Figure 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting value suggestion processing performed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment; Figure 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for 7-segment display unit control processing performed in the setting value suggestion processing of Figure 48; and Figure 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for ending image control processing performed in the setting value suggestion processing of Figure 48. The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described first embodiment, with reference to Figures 48 to 50.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
As shown in Figure 48, in the setting value suggestion process in this embodiment, when the ending of a jackpot game begins (step S2201: Yes), unlike the setting value suggestion process in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 40), on the condition that the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game with a predetermined end date set (step S2501: Yes), the process of controlling the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention section 38 that receives the game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37, and counting the number of game balls 99 that remain in the game ball retention section 38 during the predetermined period is executed (steps S2202 to S2213). As a result, in this embodiment, when the predetermined period ends, in a 5R normal jackpot with a predetermined end date set, the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37 during the predetermined period is counted in one step.

Furthermore, in the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, under the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2501: Yes), the process of controlling the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention section 38 and counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention section 38 during a predetermined period is executed (steps S2202 to S2213). The 7-segment display control process (step S2502) and the ending image control process (step S2503) are also executed under the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game, based on the stopper part downward movement flag, which is set under the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game with a predetermined period ending (step S2203) (step S2501: Yes).

[7-segment display control processing]
In this embodiment, the 7-segment display control process is executed when the ending begins in a 5R normal jackpot game (when the opening/closing execution mode (predetermined period) ends), as described above. Also, as shown in Figure 49, the 7-segment display control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the 7-segment display control process in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 41), but when the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), instead of reading the control order and previously displayed information of the 7-segment display control information (see Figure 42), only the control order of the 7-segment display control information is read (step S2504). That is, in the 7-segment display control process of this embodiment, the 7-segment display 39 is controlled (specific information is presented) only at the ending of a 5R normal jackpot (after the end of the predetermined period) when the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period, so there is no need to read previously displayed information to control the 7-segment display 39.

[Ending Image Control Processing]
As shown in Figure 50, the ending image control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the ending image control process in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 46), but step S2404 in the ending image control process in the first embodiment described above is omitted. That is, since the ending image control process in this embodiment is executed when it is determined that it is a 5R normal jackpot (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggestion process in Figure 48), the initialization of the previously displayed information storage area is performed in step S2405 without having to determine that it is a 5R normal jackpot.

As described above, in this embodiment, based on the number of specific conditions met during a predetermined period, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period. Therefore, there is no specific information presented in the past during that predetermined period, and no specific information that the player needs to remember or record. This allows the player to identify or infer the non-set value (set value) by focusing on the specific information presented only once per predetermined period, thus freeing them from the hassle of accurately remembering or recording the presented specific information. Therefore, the player can easily and effectively identify or infer the non-set value (set value), allowing them to enjoy the game while identifying or inferring the non-set value (set value), thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first embodiment are possible to the extent applicable.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case was explained in which, based on the number of times a specific condition is met during a specific period, all or part of the specific information (numbers) for identifying or inferring multiple non-set values (set values) is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 after the expiration of a specific period (the ending of a jackpot game). Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, a case was explained in which, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the numbers corresponding to the non-set values as specific information are displayed according to a number display order (see Figure 36) determined when the game machine 10 is powered on or when the set values are changed. In addition, in the first embodiment described above, a case was explained in which, when numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the number display order is fixed.

In the aforementioned first embodiment, when multiple numbers corresponding to multiple unset values as specific information are displayed in a number display order (see Figure 36) determined when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when the set values are changed, the numbers will be displayed in the same order unless the gaming machine 10 is powered off or the set values are changed. Furthermore, the control order of segments A to G when displaying each number on the 7-segment display unit 39 is fixed. Therefore, if the number of specific conditions satisfied within a predetermined period is less than the number of specific conditions satisfied within a preceding predetermined period, only a smaller amount of information than the already presented specific information can be obtained, and no new specific information can be acquired. As a result, for example, in the case of a jackpot game for a single jackpot, where a small number of specific conditions are expected to be satisfied within a predetermined number of rounds, there is a concern that interest in whether or not specific conditions are met within a specific period, the number of specific conditions satisfied, and the specific information presented after the expiration of the specific period will decrease.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the order in which specific information is presented (the order of numerical display and the order of segment display) is determined (changed) when predetermined conditions are met. In this way, by determining the order in which specific information is presented when predetermined conditions are met, it is possible to obtain new specific information even if the number of specific conditions met in a predetermined period is less than the number of specific conditions met in a preceding predetermined period. Therefore, even in cases where it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be met in a predetermined number of rounds is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it becomes possible to pique interest in whether or not specific conditions are met in a specific period, the number of specific conditions that are met, and also in the specific information presented after the expiration of the specific period. This makes it possible to more effectively enhance the enjoyment of the game by presenting specific information that allows for the identification or inference of non-set values (set values) according to the number of specific conditions that are met.

The predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order in which specific information is presented could include, for example, winning a jackpot, the start of the jackpot game's opening, the opening/closing execution mode, or the ending of the jackpot game. By setting these predetermined conditions, the order in which specific information is presented is determined (changed) each time the jackpot game is played. Therefore, the fixed order of presentation of specific information is prevented, thus preventing the same information from being presented repeatedly or the presentation of specific information from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information each time the jackpot game is played. This can, for example, make the order in which specific information is presented during the jackpot game more interesting, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, the predetermined conditions could include winning a specific jackpot (e.g., a jackpot in a probability variation mode, a regular jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode), or the start of the opening, opening/closing execution mode, or ending of a specific jackpot game (e.g., a jackpot game for a jackpot in a probability variation mode, a regular jackpot, or a jackpot game in a low probability mode). By setting these predetermined conditions, the number of times the order in which specific information is presented is determined (changed) is reduced compared to when the predetermined conditions are not limited to specific jackpots or jackpot games. Therefore, the possibility of new information being presented in addition to previously presented specific information is reduced, increasing the difficulty of identifying all non-set values (or set values), and preventing all non-set values (or set values) from being identified prematurely. This prevents, for example, a player from ending their game on the gaming machine 10 prematurely if the set value is low.

Furthermore, the predetermined conditions could include the start or end of a predetermined or specific period. By setting these predetermined conditions, the order in which specific information is presented is determined (changed) for each predetermined or specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information for each predetermined or specific period. This can increase interest in the presentation order of the specific information, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a predetermined condition, it is conceivable that a specific performance may be determined or executed as a variable game performance. In this case, the specific performance may be set to either a non-reach performance or a reach performance. Typically, the specific performance is a premium performance among the variable game performances that guarantees a big win or a probability-changing big win. In addition, as a specific performance, it is conceivable that the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 may stop and display in a specific combination, or temporarily stop (intermediate stop display). For example, the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 may stop and display as "777", as in the case of a specific non-reach combination such as "767", as in the case of a specific non-reach combination (scattered combination) such as "367", or as a reach performance, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that indicates that a development performance such as a super reach performance or a special reach performance will be executed is also conceivable. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) to indicate that a development sequence is about to be performed, for example, in the case of "7 Development 7," the decorative symbols on the left and right are temporarily stopped in a reach state, and a symbol indicating that a development sequence will be performed, such as "Development," is temporarily stopped as the middle symbol. Even when setting predetermined conditions in this way, the order in which specific information is presented is determined (changed) at predetermined or specific intervals. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information at predetermined or specific intervals. This makes the order in which specific information is presented more interesting, and thus can improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, possible predetermined conditions include multiple consecutive single-shot jackpots, and multiple consecutive presentations of the same specific information. By setting these predetermined conditions, the presentation order of specific information is determined (changed) when it is difficult to obtain new specific information. Therefore, it becomes easier to obtain new specific information, reducing the feeling of boredom when new specific information is not available, and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the specified conditions are met before the start of the specified period, the order in which the specific information is presented may be prioritized based on, for example, the first specified condition met, or the order in which the specific information is presented based on, for example, the last specified condition met.

In one example of this embodiment, the display order of the numbers corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values, which are specific information, and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined based on the condition that a jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode is started (the predetermined period begins, the first jackpot game begins). According to these display orders, at the ending of a 5R normal jackpot game (after the predetermined period has elapsed), when the end of the predetermined period is set, all or part of the numbers for identifying the multiple non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

Here, Figure 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the display order setting process performed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and Figure 52 is a diagram showing an example of the table referenced in the display order setting process procedure of Figure 51. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 51 and 52, focusing on the display order setting process, which is a difference from the first embodiment described above.

[Display Order Setting Process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in Figure 51, in the display order setting process in this embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game performance start flag is set to ON (step S2601). The jackpot game performance start flag is a flag that indicates that the jackpot game performance will start, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination process in Figure 37. If the jackpot game performance start flag is ON (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2602, and if the jackpot game performance start flag is OFF (step S2601: No), the display order setting process is terminated.

<Step S2602>
If the jackpot game performance start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game performance is a jackpot in low probability mode (step S2602). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot is the first jackpot and whether a predetermined period will start. Whether or not it is a jackpot in low probability mode can be determined by, for example, including probability mode information in the jackpot game start command that indicates whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game is in low probability mode or high probability mode when the jackpot game is started, and when the jackpot game start command is transmitted from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, setting a flag indicating that it is a jackpot in low probability mode on or off in the command judgment process in Figure 37 based on the probability mode information, and then confirming the flag with the MPU 51. Note that the probability mode information may be set as a separate command from the jackpot game start command.

Then, if the MPU 51 is a jackpot in low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), that is, if the jackpot is the first jackpot (the jackpot that marks the start of a predetermined period), the process proceeds to step S2603. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not a jackpot in low probability mode (step S2602: No), that is, if the jackpot is in high probability mode (step S2602: No), the display order setting process ends.

<Steps S2603-S2605>
If a jackpot is hit in low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 retrieves a setting value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), determines the display order of the numbers corresponding to multiple unset values on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2604), sets the control order of segments A to G for each number (step S2605), and then terminates the display order setting process.

Here, the display order of the numbers corresponding to multiple unset values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in Figure 36, similar to step S2015 of the display order setting process in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 35). The determined number display order is then stored in the RAM 512.

Furthermore, the control order of segments A to G for each digit is determined based on the control order determination table for segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 shown in Figure 52. This control order determination table defines multiple control orders for segments A to G based on the value of the control rank type counter, which is updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 35, and the probability of each control order being determined is set to be the same. The control order of segments A to G is then determined for each digit in the same order from among the multiple control orders, based on the value of the control rank type counter when the control order of segments A to G for each digit is set. The determined control order of segments A to G is then stored in the RAM 512.

In this embodiment, when displaying a number corresponding to an unset value on the 7-segment display unit 39, segments A to G are controlled in the same order for all numbers. However, the control order for each number may differ. In other words, the control order of segments A to G may be determined individually for each of the multiple numbers corresponding to the unset value.

As described above, in this embodiment, the order in which numbers corresponding to the non-set value are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined for each predetermined period. This determines the order in which specific information is presented when predetermined conditions are met, making it possible to obtain new specific information even if the number of specific conditions met in a predetermined period is less than the number of specific conditions met in a preceding predetermined period. Therefore, even in cases where a small number of specific conditions are expected to be met over a predetermined number of rounds, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it becomes possible to pique interest in whether or not specific conditions are met during a specific period, the number of specific conditions met, and also in the specific information presented after the expiration of the specific period. This makes it possible to more effectively enhance the enjoyment of the game by presenting specific information according to the number of specific conditions that are met, which allow for the identification or prediction of the non-set value (set value).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first and second embodiments are possible to the extent applicable.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, based on the number of times a specific condition is met during a specific period, all or part of specific information (numbers) corresponding to multiple non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 after the expiration of the specific period (the ending of the jackpot game), and the display of the specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39 ends when the jackpot game ends. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, all or part of the specific information is displayed after a predetermined period (after the expiration of the specific period).

Furthermore, it is anticipated that players may wish to reconfirm specific information if they miss or forget to view it during the specified period, in order to identify or infer multiple non-set values by considering previously displayed specific information. Also, it is anticipated that a new player may wish to reconfirm previously displayed specific information if a new player takes over. However, since specific information is not displayed outside of the specified period if it is only presented during that period, it is not possible to reconfirm the specific information.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is possible to present all or part of previously presented specific information during special periods other than the prescribed period. This allows players to review previously presented specific information during special periods. Specifically, if a player misses or forgets the presentation of specific information during the prescribed period, they can reconfirm the previously displayed information. Furthermore, if a player changes, the new player can review the specific information presented to the previous player. This allows players to identify or infer multiple non-set values (set values) by considering the specific information presented to previous players, thus improving the convenience of identifying or inferring non-set values (set values).

Here, a special period could be, for example, a waiting state (customer waiting state) during which neither variable gameplay nor jackpot gameplay is being performed. Because this special period is a waiting state, it becomes possible to check specific information previously displayed while gameplay is not in progress. Therefore, it prevents the viewing of various effects performed by the symbol display unit 341, etc., as gameplay progresses, such as variable gameplay effects and jackpot game effects, from being obstructed.

Furthermore, if it is possible to display all or part of previously presented specific information during the standby state, it is conceivable that this be conditional on performing a predetermined input operation, such as password input or command input, on a specific display screen accessible during the standby state. Passwords and commands may be made available by displaying them on the symbol display unit 341 during the ending of a jackpot game where a predetermined end period is set. Alternatively, passwords and commands may be made available through so-called mobile-linking, where a matrix-type two-dimensional code is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the jackpot game, and this matrix-type two-dimensional code is read by a mobile device such as a smartphone or mobile phone, transmitting the information from an external server to the mobile device.

In this way, by making it possible to view all or part of specific information previously presented during the waiting period, provided that a predetermined input operation such as password entry or command entry is performed, only players who can enter passwords or commands—that is, players for whom all or part of the specific information has been presented—can view all or part of the specific information previously presented during the waiting period. This eliminates so-called "hyena" behavior or "freeloading," where other players view all or part of the past specific information.

Furthermore, it is conceivable that, while in standby mode, a specific display screen could be accessed by scanning a matrix-type 2D code using a mobile device such as a smartphone or mobile phone, thereby displaying all or part of previously presented specific information on the mobile device.

Furthermore, special periods can be set during jackpot gameplay, for example, during the opening, opening/closing execution mode, or ending. By setting these special periods during jackpot gameplay, specific past information is presented when the jackpot lottery result is not explicitly shown or hinted at. Therefore, it prevents the explicit or hinting of the jackpot lottery result from being hindered by the presentation of specific information. Additionally, while jackpot gameplay tends to decrease player interest after the jackpot lottery result is explicitly shown through variable gameplay, presenting previously shown specific information during such jackpot gameplay can increase player interest.

Furthermore, it is conceivable to set a special period during variable gameplay. Here, theoretically, the execution time of variable gameplay (the time the game machine 10 is powered on minus the standby time) is longer than the execution time of jackpot variable gameplay. Therefore, by allowing the presentation of specific past information during variable gameplay, it becomes possible to set more opportunities to present this information. However, when setting a special period during variable gameplay, it is preferable to restrict the presentation of specific information for a certain period before the decorative symbols stop and are displayed, for example, during a non-reach state where a reach animation is not being performed as a variable game animation, or when the variation time is short. This prevents the visual confirmation of the jackpot lottery result, which is indicated by the display of the decorative symbols, from being hindered.

Furthermore, the presentation of specific past information during special periods may be done at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or at the discretion of the player.

When specific past information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it becomes possible to present this information at a timing that the player does not anticipate. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can be given an element of surprise. Furthermore, since the specific past information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 without the player having to perform any operation on the machine, even players with little knowledge of the gaming machine 10 can learn about the previously presented information. This ensures fairness among players.

Here, examples of cases in which specific past information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 include, for example, presenting previously presented specific information as a demonstration screen in the standby state, presenting previously presented specific information before a certain percentage (including 100%) of a reach animation is scheduled to be performed in a variable game, and determining whether to present previously presented specific information through a lottery performed at a specific timing in a variable game or a jackpot game. When previously presented specific information is presented as a demonstration screen in the standby state, players can consider the previously presented specific information on the demonstration screen and select a gaming machine 10 from the available machines to play, thereby improving the freedom and convenience of selecting a gaming machine 10 to play. Furthermore, when previously presented specific information is presented before a reach animation is performed in a variable game, the presentation of the previously presented specific information serves as a pre-announcement of the execution of the specific reach animation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the variable game. Furthermore, it is conceivable that the presentation of specific past information in variable gameplay could be implemented as an expectation-indicating effect (including a confirmation effect indicating a jackpot) that suggests the likelihood (reliability) of a jackpot being achieved in the jackpot lottery, or as a chance-up effect that increases the likelihood (reliability). In this case, the enjoyment of variable gameplay would also be enhanced. Additionally, if specific past information is presented through a lottery executed at a specific timing during variable gameplay or jackpot gameplay, the information is presented at a random, specific timing determined by the game machine 10, thus adding a significant element of surprise to the game. Moreover, if the player is aware of the specific timing at which the specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the game's progression by focusing on whether the specific information will be presented at that particular timing, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if the presentation of past specific information during a special period is initiated at the player's discretion, the player does not passively wait for the past specific information to be presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10. Instead, during a special period, the player can actively check the past specific information at their preferred timing. Therefore, when identifying or inferring multiple non-set values (set values) by considering past specific information, the timing of the presentation of past specific information is not restricted by the gaming machine 10, but reflects the player's own will, thus improving convenience.

Here, an example of the presentation of specific past information during a special period being performed at the player's discretion is when, during a special period set in standby mode, during variable gameplay, or during a jackpot game, the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation button 20, etc., and the specific information presented in the past is displayed.

In one example of this embodiment, during the ending of a jackpot game (a predetermined period), all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to multiple unset values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed. During the standby period (special period), by performing a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 or the selection/determination unit 21, all or part of the specific information (numbers) displayed during the endings of the most recent three jackpot games is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, in this example of the embodiment, it is possible to display all or part of the specific information previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the symbol display unit 341 without requiring any input operations such as passwords or commands.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described first embodiment, with reference to Figures 53 to 63.

Here, Figure 53 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and Figure 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 53.

As shown in Figure 53, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment further includes a selection/determination unit 21 provided on the front frame 11.

The selection/determination unit 21 is operated by the player and, in the standby state described later, accepts the player's press and changes the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 60). The selection/determination unit 21 includes multiple selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The multiple selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from the options (items) on various screens such as the top menu screen during the standby screen transition process shown in Figures 61 and 62 (see Figure 60), and include an up selection button 211, a down selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214. Here, provisional selection means that the provisionally selected content is confirmed (stored in RAM 512) when the confirm button 21B is operated. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 is equipped with an up selection operation switch 211a, a down selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d, which switch the input signal to the sound lamp control device 5, as shown in Figure 54. These switches 211a to 211d are connected to the input/output I/F of the sound lamp control device 5. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not an operation has been performed on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 based on the input signals from each of the switches 211a to 211d.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is determined that an operation has been performed on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 when it is detected that an operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has started. Of course, it is also possible to determine that an operation has been performed on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 when it is detected that an operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is continuing or has finished.

On the other hand, the confirmation button 21B is operated by the player to confirm the provisionally selected item. The confirmation button 21B also includes a confirmation operation switch 21Ba, which switches the input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 (described later). The confirmation operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output interface of the audio lamp control device 5. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not an operation has been performed on the confirmation operation switch 21Ba based on the input signal from the switch 21Ba.

Furthermore, instead of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the confirmation button 21B, a touch panel displaying touch keys and receiving player input via these keys could be provided as the operating means. Additionally, instead of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the confirmation button 21B, a translucent touch panel receiving player input could be provided on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, instead of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214), a jog dial could be provided. While the selection switches 211a-211d and the confirmation switch 21Ba are contact-type switches, they could also be, for example, piezoelectric elements, as long as they can be used to detect whether or not a player has made an operation.

Here, Figure 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the sub-timer interrupt processing performed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in Figure 53.

As shown in Figure 55, in the sub-timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, in addition to the processing similar to that in the sub-timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment described above (steps S2000 to S2005), operation detection processing (step S2701) and standby screen transition processing (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection process]
The operation detection process is the process of detecting whether or not an operation has been performed on the various buttons 20, 21A, and 21B. Here, Figure 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 55.

As shown in Figure 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 executes the following: operation button operation detection process (step S2801), operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), selection button operation detection process (step S2803), selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), confirm button operation detection process (step S2805), and confirm operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806).

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation status of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process is executed to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. In the gaming machine 10, when the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. Here, Figure 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to Figure 57.

<Steps S2901-S2903>
As shown in Figure 57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Then, in step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Subsequently, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operating state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

Thus, in the operation button operation detection process, the execution of steps S2901 to S2903 stores the operation history of the operation button 20, with the most recent three operation states at 1 msec intervals stored in RAM 512 as the first to third detection flags. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state as the second detection flag, and the operation state two operations prior as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 57, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, an operation pattern flag is set to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flag consists of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of on and off states of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, if only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that an operation on the operation button 20 is continuing (see Figure 38(A)). Also, if only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that an operation on the operation button 20 has started (see Figure 38(A)). Also, if only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that an operation on the operation button 20 has ended (see Figure 38(A)). And, if all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that no operation has been performed on the operation button 20 (see Figure 38(A)). Here, Figure 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for determining the operation detection pattern. Figure 59(A) is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern for the operation button 20 and the operation status. The operation button operation detection process will be explained below with reference to Figures 58 and 59(A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in Figure 58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether the first operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the operation button 20 three steps prior, is set to ON. Here, if the first operation detection flag is ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is OFF (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the operation button 20 two steps prior, is set to ON. Here, if the second operation detection flag is ON (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3003, and if the second operation detection flag is OFF (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the most recent operation button 20, is set to ON. Here, if the third operation detection flag is ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3004, and if the third operation detection flag is OFF (step S3003: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON and the second and third operation pattern flags to OFF, and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON and the second and third operation pattern flags to OFF (see Figure 59(A)). The first operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing. For example, if the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and send this operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation of the operation button 20 is continuing, and can grasp the duration of continuous operation of the operation button 20 based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is sent consecutively. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the duration for which the operation button 20 has been continuously pressed, making it possible to execute an operation button animation based on the long press operation.

<Step S3005>
If the MPU 41 determines in step S3001 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S3001: No), it determines whether the second operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the operation button 20 two steps prior, is on or not (step S3005). Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), it proceeds to step S3006, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), it proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the most recent operation button 20, is on or off. If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3007; if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON and the first and third operation pattern flags to OFF. That is, when the operation pattern "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as three operation states for the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON and the first and third operation pattern flags to OFF (see Figure 59(A)), and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. The second operation pattern flag is used as an indicator to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from an unoperated state to an operated state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, by using the second operation pattern flag to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from an unoperated state to an operated state, three operation states of the operation button 20 are reflected, thus preventing false detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 caused by noise such as radio waves or static electricity, and preventing the start of operation of the operation button 20 from being reflected in the display at a timing unintended by the player.

<Step S3008>
If the MPU 41 determines in step S3002 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S3002: No), it determines whether the third operation detection flag, which indicates the operation status of the most recent operation button 20, is on or off (step S3008). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON and the first and second operation pattern flags to OFF, and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states for the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second operation pattern flags to OFF (see Figure 59(A)). The third operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has ended).

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off, and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, if an operation pattern other than the above occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times, such as "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third operation pattern flags to off (see Figure 59(A)). The MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in an unoperated state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes the upper selection button operation process, the lower selection button operation process, the left selection button operation process, and the right selection button operation process.

<Processing of operation of the upper selection button>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the upper selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 57, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the upper selection button operation process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 57, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "upper selection operation detection flag".

<Processing of operation of the down selection button>
In the down selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the down selection button 212 and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the down selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 57, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the down selection button operation process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 57, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "down selection operation detection flag".

<Left selection button operation process>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the left selection button 213 and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the left selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 57, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the left selection button operation process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 57, "operation detection flag" should be read as "left selection operation detection flag".

<Right-select button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the right selection button 214 and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 57, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the right selection button operation process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 57, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "right selection operation detection flag".

[Selection operation detection pattern determination process]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and the right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets an upper operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the upper selection button 211 from the operation history of the upper selection button 211, which is determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. Here, the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 58, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 58, "operation detection flag" should be read as "upper selection operation detection flag" and "operation pattern flag" as "upper selection operation pattern flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 59(B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the upper selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the first upper selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second and third upper selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the upper selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third upper selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the upper selection button 211 has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether operation of the upper selection button 211 has begun).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occurs for three operations of the upper selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second upper selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the upper selection button 211 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (i.e., whether the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended).

Furthermore, if the operation status of the upper selection button 211 is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., as a result of three operation states, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is not being operated.

<Detection of lower selection operation pattern determination process>
In the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a down operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the down selection button 212 from the operation history of the down selection button 212, which is determined based on the first down selection operation detection flag, the second down selection operation detection flag, and the down selection operation detection flag. Here, the down selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 58, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 58, "operation detection flag" should be read as "down selection operation detection flag" and "operation pattern flag" as "down selection operation pattern flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 59(C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the down selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the first down selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second and third down selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The first down selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the down selection button 212 is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the down selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the second down selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third down selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The second down selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the down selection button 212 has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether operation of the down selection button 212 has begun).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the down selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third down selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second down selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The third down selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the down selection button 212 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (i.e., whether the operation of the down selection button 212 has ended).

Furthermore, if the operation status of the down selection button 212 is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third down selection operation detection flags to off. Note that if all of the first to third down selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the down selection button 212 is not being operated.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a left operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the left selection button 213 from the operation history of the left selection button 213, which is determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 58, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 58, "operation detection flag" should be read as "left selection operation detection flag" and "operation pattern flag" as "left selection operation pattern flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 59(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the first left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second and third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three operations of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether operation of the left selection button 213 has begun).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occurs for three operations of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (i.e., whether the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended).

Furthermore, if the operation status of the left selection button 213 is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is not in operation when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are OFF.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a first right selection operation detection flag, a second right selection operation detection flag, and a right operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the right selection button 214 from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the right selection operation detection flag. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 58, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 58, "operation detection flag" should be read as "right selection operation detection flag" and "operation pattern flag" as "right selection operation pattern flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 59(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs for three consecutive operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the first right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second and third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three operations of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has begun).

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occurs for three operations of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (i.e., whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended).

Furthermore, if the operation status of the right selection button 214 is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., as a result of three operation states, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is not being operated.

[Detection of OK button operation]
In the confirm button operation detection process (step S2805 in Figure 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation status of the confirm button 21B and executes a process to sequentially update the operation history for the past three times. Here, the confirm button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in Figure 57, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the confirm button operation detection process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process in Figure 57, "operation detection flag" should be read as "confirm button operation detection flag".

[Decision operation detection pattern determination process]
In the decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in Figure 56), the MPU 41 sets an operation pattern flag to determine the operation state for the decision button 21B from the operation history of the decision button 21B, which is determined based on the first decision operation detection flag, the second decision operation detection flag, and the third decision operation detection flag. Here, the decision operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 58, so a detailed explanation is omitted. Note that in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 58, "operation detection flag" should be read as "decision operation detection flag".

Here, as shown in Figure 59(F), in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs for three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the first decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second and third decision operation pattern flags to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator to determine whether the operation state of the decision button 21B is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation pattern "OFF," "ON," and "ON" occurs for three operation states of the select button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the second select operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third select operation pattern flags to OFF. The second select operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the select button 21B has changed from an inactive state to an active state (i.e., whether operation of the select button 21B has begun).

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 detects that the operation patterns "ON," "OFF," and "OFF" occur as three operation states for the select button 21B, it sets the third select operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and second select operation pattern flags to OFF. The third select operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator to determine whether the select button 21B has changed from an operational state to a non-operational state (i.e., whether the operation of the select button 21B has ended).

Furthermore, if the MPU 41 detects that the operation state of the select button 21B for three presses is any other than "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc., it sets all of the first to third select operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third select operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the select button 21B is not being operated.

[Process to transition to standby screen]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 55, the standby screen transition process executed by the sub-timer interrupt process 2702 performs a process that, in the standby state where neither variable gameplay nor jackpot gameplay is being performed, transitions the screen of the symbol display unit 341 in response to operations on the operation button 20, selection button 21A, or confirmation button 21B, enabling the player to make various selections and settings. Here, Figure 60 shows an example of screen transitions on the symbol display unit 341 in the standby state.

As shown in Figure 60, if the display of the decorative symbols stops, and the number of reserved symbols N and M are "0", and the game does not transition to a jackpot state, the display remains on the stopped display screen. Then, if the player operates the operation button 20 after the stopped display screen is shown, the display screen transitions from the stopped display screen to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes multiple screen transition images and cursor images.

The multiple screen transition images are images used to select the destination display screen and include multiple selectable items (destination display screens). These multiple screen transition images include a 7-segment display history selection screen transition image (displayed as "7-segment display history"), a character selection screen transition image (displayed as "character selection"), a character customization screen transition image (displayed as "character customization"), and a change stop screen transition image (displayed as "back").

The cursor image indicates which of the multiple selectable items is currently tentatively selected. The tentatively selected item is the one corresponding to the screen transition image to the right of the cursor image among the multiple screen transition images. In the example shown in Figure 60, "7-segment display history" is tentatively selected. Furthermore, the screen transition image corresponding to the tentatively selected item is displayed in a manner that distinguishes it from the other screen transition images to emphasize its tentative selection. The tentatively selected item can be changed by operating the up selection button 211 or the down selection button 212.

On the top menu screen, pressing the OK button 21B confirms the tentatively selected item (the destination display screen), and the display screen corresponding to that item is switched. For example, if the player selects the "7-segment display history" screen and presses the OK button 21B, the display screen will switch from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen.

The 7-segment display unit history selection screen is a screen that allows transitioning to a history screen that displays the content of specific information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period. This history screen shows the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for any of the three most recent predetermined periods, and includes a previous history screen that displays the content of specific information for the previous predetermined period, a history screen that displays the content of specific information for the period two prior to the previous predetermined period, and a history screen that displays the content of specific information for the period three prior to the previous predetermined period. Each history screen includes a history image in a similar form to the additional image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the latter half of the ending of a jackpot game (see Figures 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C)). The history image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and includes five setting value suggestion images that mimic the 7-segment display unit 39, which may display numbers corresponding to non-set values. The example shown in Figure 60 indicates that, in the previous predetermined period, the entry of a game ball 99 into the special out-ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37 resulted in the display of the number 2 on the 7-segment display unit 39, followed by the illumination of segments A to C.

Furthermore, the 7-segment display history selection screen includes a cursor image indicating a provisional selection, a transition image for the one-time history screen displaying "History 1 (1 time ago)", a transition image for the two-time history screen displaying "History 2 (2 times ago)", a transition image for the three-time history screen displaying "History 3 (3 times ago)", and a transition image for the change stop screen displaying "End". When the OK button 21B is operated on the 7-segment display history selection screen, the provisionally selected item (the destination display screen) is determined, and the display screen corresponding to that item is switched. For example, if the player provisionally selects the "History 1 (1 time ago)" transition image for the one-time history screen, and the OK button 21B is operated, the display screen switches from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the one-time history screen. Furthermore, if "History 2 (2 entries ago)" is selected, the screen will transition from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the history screen two entries ago. If "History 3 (3 entries ago)" is selected, the screen will transition from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the history screen three entries ago. Also, if "Exit" is selected, the screen will transition from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the top menu screen.

Thus, from the 7-segment display's history selection screen, the player can choose to transition to one of the following screens: the previous play history screen, the second-to-last play history screen, or the third-to-last play history screen. In other words, the player can view the desired history information by transitioning to their preferred history screen. This allows for efficient history review, as players can avoid reviewing previously viewed information or information with limited detail.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, information for identifying non-set values at the end of a jackpot game is displayed on a 7-segment display unit 39, which is different from the symbol display unit 341 where decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, even when displaying information for identifying non-set values, the visibility of the image effects executed on the symbol display unit 341 is not obstructed. On the other hand, in the standby state, history information identical to the information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end is displayed on a different symbol display unit 341. Generally, since the symbol display unit 341 has a large display area, displaying history information on the symbol display unit 341 improves the visibility of the history information. Also, the symbol display unit 341 is sometimes used to perform various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine 10. Therefore, by displaying the content of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end on the symbol display unit 341, it becomes possible to check the history information using the same operations as those used for various settings, thus improving the convenience of checking the history information.

In this embodiment, it is possible for the player to transition to a history screen selected from multiple history screens. However, it is also conceivable that multiple history entries could be displayed simultaneously on a single screen. In this case, since many history entries can be viewed at once, the displayed content can be reviewed efficiently.

Furthermore, if the "Character Selection" character screen transition image is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen will transition to the character selection screen. Similarly, if the "Character Customization" character customization screen transition image is selected, the display screen will transition to the character customization screen. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to select characters that appear in variable gameplay sequences, and to customize the character's costume, accessories, hairstyle, etc.

Furthermore, if the "Back" button (which displays the transition image to the stop-variance screen) is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen will transition to the stop-variance screen.

Thus, in this embodiment, by operating the selection/determination unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B) in the standby state, the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for the most recent three predetermined periods can be confirmed. Therefore, if a player misses or forgets the display content of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end of a jackpot game, they can reconfirm past displays of the 7-segment display unit 39. Furthermore, if a player changes, the new player can also confirm past displays of the 7-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to identify or infer multiple non-set values (set values) by considering past displays of the 7-segment display unit 39, thereby improving the convenience of identifying or inferring non-set values (set values).

Here, Figures 61 and 62 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure for transitioning to the standby screen, which is performed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 55. The procedure for transitioning to the standby screen, which is performed in step S2702 of the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 55, will be explained below with reference to Figures 61 and 62.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in Figure 61, in the standby screen transition process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not it is in standby mode (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that it is in standby mode if the variable game performance flag, which is set to ON in step S2105 of the command judgment process in Figure 37, is set to OFF (step S3101: No), and the jackpot game performance flag, which is set to ON when sending a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 in the jackpot game performance process in step S2004 of the sub-timer interrupt process in Figure 34, is set to OFF (step S3102: No). On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines that it is not in standby mode if the variable game performance flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes), or if the jackpot game performance flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes).

Then, if the MPU 51 is in a standby state (both steps S3101 and S3102 are No), the process proceeds to step S3103. If it is not in a standby state (step S3101 or S3102 is Yes), the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Step S3103>
If the system is in standby mode (both steps S3101 and S3102 are No), the MPU 51 determines whether the variable stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103). The variable stop screen flag is a flag that indicates that the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 is the variable stop screen. This variable stop screen flag is set to ON in step S3120 of Figure 62, described later, when transitioning from a variable game state or a jackpot game state to a standby state, that is, when all screen flags other than the variable stop screen flag are set to OFF in the standby state. The variable stop screen flag is also set to ON when transitioning from a display screen other than the variable stop screen to the variable stop screen. Specifically, the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON when the display screen transitions from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in step S3109 of Figure 62 described later, when the display screen transitions from the previous history screen to the fluctuation stop screen in step S3113, when the display screen transitions from the previous history screen to the fluctuation stop screen in step S3115, and when the display screen transitions from the previous history screen to the fluctuation stop screen in step S3117. The fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF in step S3107 when the display screen transitions from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to OFF when the fluctuation display of decorative symbols begins.

Then, if the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3104. If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), the process proceeds to step S3108 in Figure 62.

<Step S3104>
If the variable stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag that indicates that an operation on the operation button 20 has been started, and is set to ON in step S3007 of the operation detection pattern determination process in Figure 58. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether an operation has been performed on the operation button 20 when the display screen is the variable stop screen. Then, if the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3105, and if the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), the standby screen transition process ends.

<Steps S3105-S3107>
If the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the display screen from the variable display screen to the top menu screen where various selections and settings are made (step S3105) (see Figure 60). In other words, when the operation button 20 is operated while the display screen is the variable display screen, the MPU 51 transitions the display screen from the variable display screen to the top menu screen.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag to ON (step S3106) to indicate that the displayed screen is the top menu screen, and sets the variable stop screen flag to OFF (step S3107) to indicate that the displayed screen is the variable stop screen, and terminates the standby screen transition process.

<Step S3108>
If the variable stop screen flag is set to off (step S3103: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the top menu screen flag, which indicates that the displayed screen is the top menu screen, is set to on (step S3108), as shown in Figure 62. The top menu screen flag is set to on when transitioning the displayed screen from various screens, such as the variable stop screen, to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in Figure 61). If the top menu screen flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3109, and if the top menu screen flag is set to off (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3110.

<Step S3109>
If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes top menu screen processing (step S3109). In top menu screen processing, the temporarily selected item is changed according to the operation on the selection button 21A. Also, in top menu screen processing, if the OK button 21B is operated on, the display screen is moved to the screen corresponding to the temporarily selected item, specifically the change stop screen, the 7-segment display history selection screen, the character selection screen, or the character customization screen. Furthermore, when the MPU 51 moves the display screen from the top menu screen to another screen, it sets the screen flag for the destination screen to ON, while setting the top menu screen flag to OFF.

<Step S3110>
If the top menu screen flag is set to off (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 7-segment history selection screen flag, which indicates that the displayed screen is the 7-segment display unit history selection screen, is set to on (step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to on in the top menu screen processing of step S3109 when the displayed screen transitions from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display unit history selection screen. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to on (step S3110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3111, and if the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to off (step S3110: No), the process proceeds to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 7-segment history selection screen processing. The 7-segment history selection screen processing is executed when the 7-segment display unit history selection screen is displayed. Details of the 7-segment history selection screen processing will be described later with reference to Figure 63.

<Step S3112>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to off (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the previous history screen flag, which indicates that the displayed screen is the previous history screen, is set to on (step S3112). The previous history screen flag is set to on in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing shown in Figure 63 below, when the displayed screen transitions from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to the previous history screen. If the previous history screen flag is set to on (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3113, and if the previous history screen flag is set to off (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen processing and terminates the standby screen transition processing. In the previous history screen processing, if "Back" is selected, the display screen is transitioned from the previous history screen to the 7-segment display unit history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the previous history screen flag to OFF while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3114>
If the flag for the previous history screen is set to off (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the flag for the history screen two steps ago, which indicates that the displayed screen is the history screen two steps ago, is set to on (step S3114). The flag for the history screen two steps ago is set to on in step S3215 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing shown in Figure 63 below, when the displayed screen transitions from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to the history screen two steps ago. If the flag for the history screen two steps ago is set to on (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3115, and if the flag for the history screen two steps ago is set to off (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3116.

<Step S3115>
If the "Previous Two-Step History Screen" flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the "Previous Two-Step History Screen" process and terminates the standby screen transition process. In the "Previous Two-Step History Screen" process, if "Back" is selected, the display screen is transitioned from the "Previous Two-Step History Screen" to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the "Previous Two-Step History Screen" flag to OFF while setting the "7-segment history selection screen" flag to ON.

<Step S3116>
If the flag for the two previous history screen is set to off (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the flag for the three previous history screen, which indicates that the displayed screen is the three previous history screen, is set to on (step S3116). The flag for the six previous history screen is set to on in step S3217 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing shown in Figure 63 below, when the displayed screen transitions from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to the three previous history screen. If the flag for the three previous history screen is set to on (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3117, and if the flag for the three previous history screen is set to off (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3118.

<Step S3117>
If the "3 Previous History Screen" flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the "3 Previous History Screen" process and terminates the standby screen transition process. In the "3 Previous History Screen" process, if "Back" is selected, the display screen is transitioned from the "3 Previous History Screen" to the "7 Segment Display History Selection Screen". At this time, the MPU 51 sets the "3 Previous History Screen" flag to OFF while setting the "7 Segment History Selection Screen" flag to ON.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
If the 3-times-previous history screen flag is set to off (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not another screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to on (step S3118). The other screen flag is set to on when the display screen transitions from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109. If the other screen flag is set to on (step S3118: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the corresponding other screen processing for the other screen (step S3119) and terminates the standby screen transition processing. On the other hand, if the other screen flag is set to off (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
If other screen flags are set to off (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the variable stop screen flag to on (step S3120) and terminates the standby screen transition process. In other words, when the MPU 51 is in standby mode and all screen flags are also off, it can determine that the game has transitioned from a variable game state or a jackpot game state to a standby state and that the displayed screen is a variable stop screen, so it sets the variable stop screen flag to on.

[Processing of the 7-segment history selection screen]
In the 7-segment history selection screen processing executed in step S3111 of the standby screen transition processing, the display screen is transitioned from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the variation stop screen, the previous history screen, the two previous history screen, or the three previous history screen, depending on the player's operation on the selection/determination unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B) (see Figure 60). Here, Figure 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the 7-segment history selection screen processing executed in the standby screen transition processing of Figure 62.

<Step S3201>
As shown in Figure 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON or OFF (step S3201). The second upper selection pattern flag is a flag that indicates that an operation on the upper selection button 211 has been initiated, and is set to ON in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2804 of the operation detection process in Figure 56. If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3202, and if the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process to change the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the upper side. For example, if "History 2 (2 times ago)" is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display will be changed to "History 1 (1 time ago)" (see Figure 60). Note that if the upper selection button 211 is pressed when "History 1 (1 time ago)", which is displayed at the top of the selection images, is temporarily selected, the temporary selection display may not be changed, or the temporary selection display may be changed to "End", which is displayed at the bottom of the selection images (see Figure 60).

<Step S3203>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3201: No), that is, if no operation has been initiated on the upper selection button 211, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second lower selection pattern flag is set to on (step S3203). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag that indicates that an operation has been initiated on the lower selection button 212, and is set to on in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2804 of the operation detection process in Figure 56. If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to on (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3204, and if the second lower selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process to change the temporarily selected item (temporarily selected display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the lower side. For example, if "History 2 (2 times ago)" is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporarily selected display will be changed to "History 3 (3 times ago)" (see Figure 60). Note that if the lower selection button 212 is pressed while "End," which is displayed at the bottom of the selection images, is temporarily selected, the temporarily selected display may not be changed, or the temporarily selected display may be changed to "History 1 (1 time ago)," which is displayed at the top of the selection images (see Figure 60).

<Step S3205>
If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second decision operation pattern flag is set to on (step S3205). The second decision operation pattern flag is a flag that indicates that an operation on the decision button 21B has been initiated, and is set to on in the decision button operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2806 of the operation detection process in Figure 56. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether an operation on the decision button 21B has been performed when the display screen is the 7-segment display history selection screen. Then, if the second decision operation pattern flag is set to on (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3206, and if the second decision operation pattern flag is set to off (step S3205: No), the standby screen transition process ends.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
If the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206) and determines whether the item that was temporarily selected when the decision button 21B was operated is "End" (step S3207). If the item that was temporarily selected when the decision button 21B was operated is "End" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3208, and if the item that was temporarily selected when the decision button 21B was operated is not "End" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3210.

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
If the item that was temporarily selected when the OK button 21B is pressed is "End" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen (step S3208) (see Figure 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag to ON to indicate that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen (step S3209), and terminates the standby screen transition process.

<Step S3210>
If the item that was temporarily selected when the OK button 21B is operated is not "End" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the item that was temporarily selected is "History 1 (Previous)" (step S3210). If the MPU 51 determines that the item that was temporarily selected is "History 1 (Previous)" (step S3210: Yes), it proceeds to step S3211. If the item that was temporarily selected is not "History 1 (Previous)" (step S3210: No), it proceeds to step S3213.

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
If the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (Previous)" (Step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen (Step S3211) (see Figure 60), sets the previous history screen flag to ON (Step S3212), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Step S3213>
If the item that was temporarily selected when the OK button 21B is operated is not "History 1 (1st time)" (Step S3210: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the item that was temporarily selected is "History 2 (2 times ago)" (Step S3213). If the MPU 51 determines that the item that was temporarily selected is "History 2 (2 times ago)" (Step S3213: Yes), the process moves to Step S3214, and if the item that was temporarily selected is not "History 2 (2 times ago)" (Step S3213: No), the process moves to Step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
If the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 times ago)" (Step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 2 times ago history screen (Step S3214) (see Figure 60), sets the 2 times ago history screen flag to ON (Step S3215), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
If the item that was temporarily selected when the OK button 21B is operated is not "History 2 (2 times ago)" (Step S3213: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the item that was temporarily selected is "History 3 (3 times ago)", so it moves the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3-times ago history screen (Step S3216) (see Figure 60), sets the 3-times ago history screen flag to ON (Step S3217), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

Thus, in the 7-segment history screen that runs in standby mode, the display screen can be switched from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen (1st play history, 2nd play history, or 3rd play history), allowing the player to check all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37 for the past three predetermined periods (see Figure 60). Therefore, if a player misses or forgets the display content of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end of a jackpot game, they can reconfirm the past display content of the 7-segment display unit 39. Furthermore, if a player changes, the new player can also check the past display content of the 7-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to identify or infer multiple non-set values (set values) by considering the past display content of the 7-segment display unit 39, thus improving the convenience of identifying or inferring non-set values (set values).

In particular, in standby mode, unless a variable game is executed by launching the game balls 99, the display screen will not transition to other screens such as the variable stop screen from the history screen (previous game history screen, previous game history screen, and previous game history screen) unless the player intentionally performs a screen transition operation. Therefore, the player can stop launching the game balls 99 and maintain standby mode without being subject to the time constraints imposed when specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end of a jackpot game. This allows the player to deliberate at their own pace when identifying or inferring multiple non-set values (set values) based on past specific information, thus improving the convenience of identifying or inferring multiple non-set values (set values).

In this embodiment, the past specific information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, which can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the player's operation (intention) in the standby state, pertains to a predetermined period of three past events. However, there is no limit to the number of past specific information items that can be displayed. That is, it may be possible to check specific information for one, two, or four or more predetermined periods of past events.

Furthermore, the display of past specific information is not limited to the symbol display unit 341; it may be performed by any other display means having a display function. For example, past specific information may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, or on a display unit different from the symbol display unit 341 or the 7-segment display unit 39, such as a separate display unit provided specifically for displaying past specific information. Also, if there is a display unit separate from the symbol display unit 341 that is provided for executing part of the game's performance, such as a variable game animation, it is conceivable that past information could be displayed on that display unit.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to third embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, based on the number of times a specific condition is met during a specific period, all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values (set values) is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 after the expiration of the specific period (the ending of the jackpot game), and the display of the specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39 ends when the jackpot game ends. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, each time a specific period set in a predetermined period has elapsed, the specific information is displayed for a predetermined period set after the expiration of the specific period.

Incidentally, when the 7-segment display unit 39 displays numbers corresponding to multiple unset values, the numbers to be displayed (unset values) can be identified by controlling all segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39. Furthermore, it is possible to determine the numbers to be displayed in the 7-segment display unit 39 before all segments A to G become controlled. For example, if segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, when segment A, the first controlled segment, is turned off, the candidate numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are "1" and "4". Then, when segment F, the sixth controlled segment, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". In other words, the numbers "1" or "4" can be recognized when segment F, the sixth controlled segment, becomes controlled, before all segments A to G become controlled. Furthermore, when segment A, the first controlled object, is lit, the possible numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are "2", "3", "5", and "6". When segment B, the second controlled object, is lit, it can be determined that it is either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined that it is either "5" or "6". Furthermore, when segment C, the third controlled object, is lit, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". In other words, the numbers "2" or "3" can be recognized when segment C, the third controlled object, becomes a controlled object, before all segments A to G become controlled objects. Furthermore, when segment E, the fifth controlled object, is lit, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". In other words, the numbers "5" or "6" can be recognized when segment E, the fifth controlled object, becomes a controlled object, before all segments A to G become controlled objects. In other words, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when segment C, the third controlled object, is turned on or off; the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when segment E, the fifth controlled object, is turned on or off; and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, the sixth controlled object, is turned on or off.

However, in the first embodiment described above, segments A to G are controlled only after all segments A to G have been controlled in order to display the next number to be displayed. Therefore, even if a player recognizes a number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all segments A to G have been controlled, control of segments A to G to display the next number to be displayed will not begin until all segments A to G have been controlled. Consequently, even if a player recognizes a number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all segments A to G have been controlled, information identifying the number already recognized by the player will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the display of the next number to be displayed begins. In other words, when segments A to G are controlled only after all segments A to G have been controlled in order to display the next number to be displayed, unnecessary information may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease during the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the end of the jackpot game each time a specific period set for the jackpot game has elapsed. Therefore, all or part of the numbers (specific information) corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values are revealed gradually as the specific period progresses. As a result, it is conceivable that if a number corresponding to one of the non-set values has been displayed in a previously elapsed specific period, that number may be forgotten. In this case, it becomes difficult to identify or infer the set value from the multiple non-set values.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the non-set value display means (lamp display unit) has multiple information display units (six individual lamp units) numbering five or more non-set values, and each information display unit displays information (numbers) that identifies the non-set value. Each information display unit has two states: a display state that presents specific information (lit state) and a non-display state that does not present specific information (off state). When the information display unit is in the display state, the non-set value can be identified by the specific information displayed on that information display unit. In this way, by having the information display unit in either the display state or the non-display state, the non-set value can be identified by the specific information presented on the information display unit in the display state. That is, in this embodiment, only information that can identify the non-set value is displayed as specific information, and information that can infer the non-set value is not displayed. Therefore, after specific information that can identify one non-set value is presented, specific information for inferring that non-set value is not unnecessarily presented, thus preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information.

There are no particular restrictions on the means for displaying non-set values, but examples include display devices with multiple lamp groups that can be individually switched on and off, display devices with multiple 7-segment display units, liquid crystal displays, organic EL displays, dot matrix displays, and plasma displays. Furthermore, a display means that displays decorative patterns in a variable manner could also be used for displaying non-set values.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a number of information display units corresponding to the number of specific conditions met within a predetermined period are set to a display state. Until the jackpot game, which marks the end of the predetermined period, concludes, the information display units that were previously set to a display state remain displayed for at least the specified period. For example, an information display unit that was displayed during a previous specified period within the same predetermined period remains displayed during a subsequent specified period. This ensures that information display units that were displayed during a previous specified period within the same predetermined period remain displayed during subsequent specified periods, allowing for confirmation at any time during at least the specified period. Therefore, specific information displayed during a previous specified period within the same predetermined period is not forgotten, improving convenience when identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and consequently when identifying or inferring set values.

Furthermore, the information display unit, which is set to display during a specific period, may maintain its display state continuously for the predetermined period and until the end of the jackpot game for which the end date of the predetermined period is set, or it may maintain its display state only during the jackpot game, or it may maintain its display state only during a specific period.

In one example of this embodiment, a lamp display unit has six individual lamps, each assigned a number from 1 to 6. When a game ball enters the special ball-out opening of the roulette device during a specific period, a lamp lighting lottery is triggered. If the lottery is won, the individual lamps assigned numbers corresponding to the non-set values are lit without waiting for the specific period to elapse. During the predetermined period in which the specific period is set, the lamps remain lit until the jackpot game, which marks the end of the predetermined period, is completed.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described first embodiment, with reference to Figures 64 to 71. Figures 69 to 71 show modified examples of this embodiment.

Here, Figure 64 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, Figure 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 shown in Figure 64, and Figure 66 is a diagram showing an example of the on/off state of the lamp display unit 35.

As shown in Figure 64, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is provided with a special ball discharge unit 38A in place of the game ball retention unit 38 of the first embodiment, and a lamp display unit 35 is provided on the game board 31 in place of the 7-segment display unit 39 of the first embodiment.

The special ball discharge unit 38A discharges the game balls 99 that have entered the special ball outlet 373 of the roulette device 37 to the rear side of the game board 31. This special ball discharge unit 38A has a configuration similar to the game ball retention unit 38 of the first embodiment described above, but without the stopper unit 383. Except for the omission of the stopper unit 383, it has the same configuration as the game ball retention unit 38. In this special ball discharge unit 38A, the game balls 99 that enter the special ball outlet 373 are discharged to the rear side of the game board 31 without being retained (stopped) in the special ball discharge unit 38A. Therefore, unlike the first embodiment described above, where game balls 99 are detected by the special ball sensor 384 only after a specific period has elapsed, in this special ball discharge unit 38A, game balls 99 that enter the special ball outlet 373 are detected by the special ball sensor 384 every time a game ball 99 enters the special ball outlet 373, even during the specific period.

The lamp display unit 35 presents specific information to identify a non-set value and includes multiple (six) individual lamp units (1st to 6th individual lamp units 351 to 356) that can be individually illuminated and extinguished. The 1st to 6th individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a row (linear) in the left-right direction. As shown in Figure 65, the lamp display unit 35 is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. This allows the 1st to 6th individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be individually illuminated and extinguished, as can be seen from Figure 66.

The first individual lamp unit 351 is marked with the number 1. When the first individual lamp unit 351 is lit, one of the multiple unset values is game setting value 1, and game setting value 1 is rejected as a set value. The second individual lamp unit 352 is marked with the number 2. When the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit, one of the multiple unset values is game setting value 2, and game setting value 2 is rejected as a set value. The third individual lamp unit 353 is marked with the number 3. When the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit, one of the multiple unset values is game setting value 3, and game setting value 3 is rejected as a set value. The fourth individual lamp unit 354 is marked with the number 4. When the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit, one of the multiple unset values is game setting value 4, and game setting value 4 is rejected as a set value. The fifth individual lamp unit 355 is marked with the number 5. When the fifth individual lamp unit 355 lights up, one of the multiple unset values is the game setting value 5, and the game setting value 5 is rejected as a set value. The sixth individual lamp unit 356 is marked with the number 6. When the sixth individual lamp unit 356 lights up, one of the multiple unset values is the game setting value 6, and the game setting value 6 is rejected as a set value.

In other words, in the lamp display unit 35, the numbers assigned to the individual lamp units 351-356 that are lit correspond to multiple non-set values, and the game setting value corresponding to that number is rejected as the set value. When all five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to the (five) non-set values are lit, one individual lamp unit 351-356 corresponding to the set value is turned off, and the number corresponding to that off individual lamp unit 351-356 corresponds to the set value.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 66(A), when the second to fifth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are lit and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is off, the non-set value is determined to be 2 to 6 and the set value is determined to be 1. As shown in Figure 66(B), when the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are lit and only the second individual lamp unit 352 is off, the non-set value is determined to be 1, 3 to 6 and the set value is determined to be 2. As shown in Figure 66(C), when the first, second, fourth to sixth individual lamp units 351, 352, 354 to 356 are lit and only the third individual lamp unit 353 is off, the non-set value is determined to be 1, 2, 4 to 6 and the set value is determined to be 3. As shown in Figure 66(D), when the first to third, fifth, and sixth individual lamp units 351-353, 355, and 356 are lit, and only the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is off, the unset values are identified as 1-3, 5, and 6, and the set value is identified as 4. As shown in Figure 66(E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp units 351-354 and 356 are lit, and only the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is off, the unset values are identified as 1-4 and 6, and the set value is identified as 5. As shown in Figure 66(F), when the first to fifth individual lamp units 351-355 are lit, and only the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is off, the unset values are identified as 1-5, and the set value is identified as 6. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351-356 of the lamp display unit 35 are controlled in the set value suggestion process executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 34.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is performed to turn the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) on and off, and the setting value is suggested by identifying a non-set value based on the on or off state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. Here, Figure 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 34. In the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is performed to turn the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) on and off, and the setting value is suggested by identifying a non-set value based on the on or off state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. The procedure for the setting value suggestion process will be described below with reference to Figure 67.

<Step S3301>
As shown in Figure 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending sequence start flag is set to ON. The ending sequence start flag is a flag that starts the ending sequence, and is set to ON in step S2116 of the command determination process in Figure 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the right time to start the ending sequence based on the ending sequence start flag. Here, if the ending sequence start flag is ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3302, and if the ending sequence start flag is OFF (step S3301: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3311.

<Step S3302>
If the ending sequence start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S3302). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to on in step S2114 of the command determination process in Figure 37. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3303, and if the special out ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), it terminates the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S3303>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), that is, if it is detected that a game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light up the individual lamps 351 to 356. In other words, each time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light up the individual lamps 351 to 356.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, the set value becomes recognizable by displaying five numbers corresponding to multiple unset values on the 7-segment display unit 39 before the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which has a predetermined end period. Furthermore, in order for the 7-segment display unit 39 to display five numbers, it is necessary to control each of the seven segments A to G five times, meaning that a specific condition must be met at least 35 times (7 x 5 times). That is, within the predetermined period, it is necessary to enter 35 game balls 99 into the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 display information corresponding to the unset values, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are controlled in only two states: lit and off. Therefore, in order for the lamp display unit 35 to display the five unset values so that the set values can be recognized, a specific condition only needs to be met five or more times. Also, in this embodiment, the same type of roulette device 37 as in the first embodiment is employed. Therefore, if the specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set in the same way as in the first embodiment, it is clear that the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display the unset values will light up with a small number of jackpots.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are, in addition to the game ball 99 entering the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37, the condition of winning the lamp lighting lottery. In other words, by employing a lamp lighting lottery, the difficulty of fulfilling the specific conditions is adjusted, and the difficulty of identifying all of the multiple non-set values is adjusted. This adjusts the difficulty of lighting the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display the numbers corresponding to the non-set values on the lamp display unit 35, and prevents the five non-set values from being easily identified, that is, the set values from being easily recognized.

Furthermore, the probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery is set such that the difficulty of controlling the lighting of the five individual lamp units 351-356 is the same as, or approximately the same as, the difficulty of displaying the five numbers by the 7-segment display unit 39 in the first embodiment described above. Also, the probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same for the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to multiple unset values, or the probability of winning for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 may differ from that of the other individual lamp units 351-356.

If the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356, the gameplay is stabilized in that the probability of the individual lamp section 351 to 356 corresponding to the unset value being lit is stabilized. When the winning probability is set to be the same for the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356, for example, the winning probability is set to approximately 100 × (1/7)% (= 14.3%) (for example, 10% to 20%). This is because, in the first embodiment described above, when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37, one number is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball opening 373, on average, about one individual lamp section 351 to 356 is lit. Furthermore, when setting the same winning probability for the lamp illumination lottery for the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to multiple unset values, this winning probability is not limited to 10% to 20% and can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, if the lottery conditions that trigger the lamp lighting lottery to illuminate one of the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to multiple non-set values are different from the condition that a game ball 99 enters the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37, then the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery should be set according to the difficulty of fulfilling this lottery condition. That is, if the difficulty of fulfilling the lottery condition is low, the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery should be set low, and as the difficulty of fulfilling the lottery condition increases, the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery should be set high. By setting the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery according to the difficulty of fulfilling the lottery condition in this way, the difficulty of fulfilling the specific condition required to light one of the individual lamp units 351-356 can be made uniform regardless of the type of specific condition. This makes it possible to apply various conditions as specific conditions (more precisely, as triggers for the lottery).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 differs from that of the other individual lamp units 351-356, the game will have a variability in the probability of the individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to the non-set value being lit. When the winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 differs from that of the other individual lamp units 351-356, for example, the winning probability for the individual lamp units 351-356 with later control sequences can be set lower. As an example, the winning probabilities for the individual lamp units 351-356 with earlier control sequences could be set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% respectively.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it has won the lamp lighting lottery. If the MPU 51 has won the lamp lighting lottery (step S3304: Yes), it proceeds to step S3305; if it has not won the lamp lighting lottery (step S3304: No), it terminates the setting value processing.

<Step S3305>
If the lamp lighting lottery is won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads out the information of the lamps that have already been lit (step S3305).

Here, the "already lit lamp information" refers to information relating to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are currently lit, and includes "already lit lamp flag information" as shown in Figures 68(B) and 68(C). The "already lit lamp flag information consists of a first "already lit lamp flag" indicating whether the first individual lamp unit 351 is lit or not, a second "already lit lamp flag" indicating whether the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit or not, a third "already lit lamp flag" indicating whether the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit or not, a fourth "already lit lamp flag" indicating whether the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit or not, a fifth "already lit lamp flag" indicating whether the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is lit or not, and a sixth "already lit lamp flag" indicating whether the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit or not. Each "already lit lamp flag" is set to "on" when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit and set to "off" when they are off. In the example shown in Figure 68(B), all previously illuminated lamp flags are set to off (initial state), indicating that all of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are off. In the example shown in Figure 68(C), the second previously illuminated lamp flag is set to on, the first and third to sixth previously illuminated lamp flags are set to off, the second individual lamp unit 352 is illuminated, and the first and third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are off.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether all previously illuminated lamp flags in the previously illuminated lamp information are set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether all five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that identify non-set values are lit. If all previously illuminated lamp flags in the previously illuminated lamp information are set to ON (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the setting value suggestion process. That is, if all five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that identify non-set values are lit, there are no other individual lamp units 351 to 356 that should be lit, so the setting value suggestion process terminates. On the other hand, if there are previously illuminated lamp flags that are set to OFF in the previously illuminated lamp information (step S3306: No), the process proceeds to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
If there is a lamp flag that is set to OFF in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads the control order of the individual lamps (lamp control order) (step S3307).

Here, the lamp control order is set by a procedure similar to, for example, the display order setting process of the first embodiment described above (see Figure 35). That is, the lamp control order is determined when the power is turned on or when the setting value is changed, by referring to the lamp control order determination table based on the setting value stored in the RAM 412. This lamp control order determination table is the same as the numerical display order determination table in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 36), and the numbers in the numerical display order determination table can be considered as numbers assigned to individual lamps. The number 1 in the numerical display order determination table in the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp unit 351, and similarly, the numbers 2 to 6 in the numerical display order determination table in the first embodiment described above correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in Figure 68(A), when the setting value is 1 and display order A1 is determined, the control order of individual lamp units 351 to 356 is as follows: second individual lamp unit 352 → third individual lamp unit 353 → fourth individual lamp unit 354 → fifth individual lamp unit 355 → sixth individual lamp unit 356. Furthermore, in the numerical display order determination table of the first embodiment described above, the probability of each display order being selected is the same, and similarly, in the lamp control order determination table of this embodiment, the probability of each lamp control order being selected is also the same.

The lamp control sequence can be set when the power is turned on or when the set value is changed, but it can also be set when a predetermined period begins, etc. Furthermore, the lamp control sequence does not need to have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308-S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control sequence read in step S3305 and the already lit lamp information read in step S3307 (step S3308), and lights up the individual lamp units 351 to 356 (step S3309). That is, each time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed, and if the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, indicating specific information that the value is not set. Then, the MPU 51 updates the already lit lamp information (step S3310), and the setting value indication process ends. For example, if the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit when all previously lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state), as shown in the example in Figure 68(B), the second previously lit lamp flag corresponding to the second individual lamp unit 352 is set to on, as shown in Figure 68(C).

In this embodiment, a lamp lighting lottery is performed each time a game ball 99 enters the special out-ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37. If the lottery is successful, the individual lamps 351-356 light up, allowing the non-set value to be identified. That is, in this embodiment, the non-set value can be identified even before a specific period has elapsed, by the lighting of the individual lamps 351-356. Thus, the individual lamps 351-356 are either lit or unlit, and the non-set value can be identified by the numbers assigned to the lit individual lamps 351-356. In other words, in this embodiment, only information that allows the identification of the non-set value by the lighting of the individual lamps 351-356 is presented; information that allows the non-set value to be inferred is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that allows the identification of one non-set value is presented, specific information for inferring that non-set value is not unnecessarily presented, thus preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information.

<Step S3311>
If the ending sequence start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game sequence end flag is on (step S3311). The jackpot game sequence end flag is a flag that ends the jackpot game sequence (ending sequence), and is set to on in step S2118 of the command determination process in Figure 37. Then, if the jackpot game sequence end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3312, and if the jackpot game sequence end flag is off (step S3311: No), it terminates the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S3312>
If the flag indicating the end of the jackpot game performance is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the type of jackpot ending is a 5R regular jackpot (step S3312). Whether the type of jackpot is a 5R regular jackpot can be determined based on whether the 5R regular jackpot flag, which can be set to on in step S2103 of Figure 37, is on. If the type of jackpot is a 5R regular jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3313, and if the type of jackpot is not a 5R regular jackpot (step S3312: No), it terminates the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the type of jackpot is a 5R regular jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off any of the individual lamps 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 that are lit (step S3313), and then clears (initializes) the information of the lit lamps, ending the setting value suggestion process. In other words, the individual lamps 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are turned off when it is a 5R regular jackpot for which the end of a predetermined period is set. As a result, the lit individual lamps 351 to 356 remain lit until the 5R regular jackpot game for which the end of the predetermined period is set ends. Therefore, until the 5R regular jackpot game for which the end of the predetermined period is set ends, it is always possible to confirm that the individual lamps 351 to 356 are lit, that is, to confirm specific information that identifies a non-set value. Therefore, the previously presented specific information for the same predetermined period will not be forgotten, and the convenience of identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and consequently identifying or inferring set values, will be improved.

In this embodiment, when a game ball 99 enters the special out-ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed. If the lottery is successful, the individual lamps 351-356 corresponding to the unset value in the lamp display unit 35 are lit. However, performing the lamp lighting lottery is optional. As in the first embodiment described above, the individual lamps 351-356 corresponding to the unset value may be lit simply when a game ball 99 enters the special out-ball opening 373 without performing the lamp lighting lottery. If the lamp lighting lottery is not performed, it is conceivable to adjust the probability of the individual lamps 351-356 being lit by increasing the difficulty of the game ball 99 entering the special out-ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37, or by distributing the game ball 99 that enters the special out-ball opening 373 between routes detected by the special out-ball sensor 384 and routes not detected by the special out-ball sensor 384.

As described above, in this embodiment, the individual lamps 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35, which indicates the unset value, are in one of two states: lit or unlit. The type (number) of the lit individual lamps 351 to 356 indicates the information that identifies the unset value. That is, in this embodiment, only information that allows the identification of the unset value is presented by the lighting of the individual lamps 351 to 356; information that allows the estimation of the unset value is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that allows the identification of a single unset value is presented, unnecessary specific information for inferring that unset value is not presented, thus preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information.

Furthermore, the individually lit lamps 351-356 immediately light up upon winning a lamp lighting lottery, which is triggered when a game ball 99 enters the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37. The lit individual lamps 351-356 remain lit until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which is set to the end of a predetermined period. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which is set to the end of a predetermined period, specific information identifying the non-set value can be confirmed at any time based on whether the individual lamps 351-356 are lit or not. This prevents the forgetting of specific information presented in previous specific periods within the same predetermined period, improving convenience when identifying multiple non-set values based on specific information, and consequently when identifying or estimating set values.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are, in addition to the game ball 99 entering the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37, the condition of winning the lamp lighting lottery. This adjusts the difficulty of fulfilling the specific conditions based on the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery, thereby adjusting the difficulty of identifying all of the multiple non-set values. Therefore, the difficulty of lighting each of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display the numbers corresponding to the non-set values in the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, preventing the five non-set values from being easily identified, i.e., preventing the set values from being easily recognized.

Furthermore, the lamp lights up immediately upon winning the lamp lighting lottery, which is executed when a game ball 99 enters the special out-ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37. However, the fact that the lamp lighting lottery is being conducted (that a game ball 99 has entered the special out-ball opening 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be clearly indicated to the player by a display means other than the lamp display unit 35. For example, as shown in Figure 69(A), the fact that the lamp lighting lottery is being conducted (that a game ball 99 has entered the special out-ball opening 373 of the cruun device 37) is clearly indicated to the player, the result of the lamp lighting lottery is clearly indicated to the player as shown in Figure 69(B1) or Figure 69(B2), and further information regarding the lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 is clearly indicated on the pattern display unit 341 as shown in Figure 69(C1) or Figure 69(C2). Specifically, as shown in Figure 69(A), when a game ball 99 enters the special out-ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37, the individual lamps 351-356 of the lamp display unit 35 may light up; in other words, an image is displayed to draw attention to the lamp display unit 35 (roulette). In this way, the symbol display unit 341 clearly indicates that a lamp lighting lottery is being performed (that a game ball 99 has entered the special out-ball opening 373). Therefore, even if the player misses the game ball 99 entering the special out-ball opening 373, they can still understand from the image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 that a game ball 99 has entered the special out-ball opening 373, i.e., that the individual lamps 351-356 may light up.

Furthermore, if the lamp lighting lottery is won, information regarding the individual lamp units 351-356 that are lit is clearly displayed, as shown in Figure 69 (B1). In the illustrated example, it is clearly indicated that the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit. In this way, by clearly indicating the result of the lamp lighting lottery on the symbol display unit 341, it becomes possible to understand whether the individual lamp units 351-356 are lit or not not only on the lamp display unit 35 but also on the symbol display unit 341, thus improving convenience.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 69(C1), the symbol display unit 341 continuously displays information regarding the illuminated individual lamp units 351-356 during the execution of a jackpot game (at least during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode). That is, the individual lamp units 351-356 of the illuminated individual lamp unit 35 are displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Note that, until the end of a 5R normal jackpot, for example during a jackpot game (at least in the opening/closing execution mode), information regarding the illuminated individual lamp units 351-356 may be displayed.

On the other hand, if the lamp lighting lottery result is unsuccessful, an image indicating that the lamp lighting lottery result is unsuccessful will be displayed, as shown in Figure 69 (B1). In this way, during the execution of a jackpot game (at least during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode), the symbol display unit 341 continuously displays information regarding the illuminated individual lamp units 351-356. This improves convenience because the illuminated individual lamp units 351-356 can be confirmed on the symbol display unit 341 without having to check the lamp display unit 35.

Furthermore, specific information indicating a non-set value may be displayed only on the symbol display unit 341, rather than on the lamp display unit 35, which is provided separately from the symbol display unit 341. In other words, specific information may be presented to the player solely through the display on the symbol display unit 341 related to the lamp lighting lottery in the jackpot game (open/close execution mode) as explained with reference to Figure 69.

Furthermore, in this embodiment as well, similar to the first embodiment described above, an additional ending image for identifying non-set values may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the ending sequence of a jackpot game. For example, as shown in Figure 70, during the ending of a jackpot game, an image resembling the lamp display unit 35 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as an additional ending image. In the example shown in Figure 70(A), it is clearly indicated that only the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit in the lamp display unit 35, and in the example shown in Figure 70(B), it is clearly indicated that the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are lit, and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is off. In this way, by displaying the on/off state of the lamp display unit 35 via the symbol display unit 341 during the ending of a jackpot game, the on/off state of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that were lit up to the time of the jackpot game can be confirmed, improving convenience.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the lamp display unit 35 was configured with individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a row (linear) configuration. However, the lamp display unit 35 is not limited to a configuration with individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a row; other configurations can also be used. For example, as shown in Figure 71(A), a lamp display unit 35 with individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a ring configuration can be used, as can a lamp display unit 35 with a matrix configuration, as shown in Figure 71(B). Alternatively, the lamp display unit 35 may have individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a staggered pattern.

Alternatively, instead of the lamp display unit 35, a display device consisting of multiple 7-segment display devices arranged in a row, ring, matrix, staggered pattern, or the like may be used.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to fourth embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, based on the number of times a specific condition is met during a specific period, all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values (set values) is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 after the expiration of the specific period (the ending of the jackpot game), and the display of the specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39 ends when the jackpot game ends. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, each time a specific period set in a predetermined period has elapsed, the specific information is displayed for a predetermined period set after the expiration of the specific period.

Incidentally, some gaming machines reserve the right to execute a game using the first special symbol (first special symbol game) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot. In such gaming machines, when a predetermined reserve occurs (for example, a reserve where the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, or a reserve with a long display time), a sequence of identical, similar, or similar effects (reserve sequence effects) that explicitly or suggest the expectation level (jackpot expectation) of the jackpot lottery result for the predetermined reserve are executed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special symbol games for a predetermined number of reserves at the time the predetermined reserve occurs.

Furthermore, some gaming machines are equipped with a second prize slot into which game balls can enter when an electric mechanism, such as an electric tulip, opens. A game triggered by a second special symbol (the second special symbol game) occurs when a game ball enters this second prize slot. This second special symbol game takes precedence over the first special symbol game when a game ball enters the first prize slot. The reason the second special symbol game takes precedence over the first is that it may offer greater benefits to the player (e.g., a higher probability of winning a bonus round, a higher average number of rounds), while the first special symbol game may result in disadvantages not present in the second special symbol game (e.g., a return to normal gameplay).

In some gaming machines, a special effect (second special effect) is performed that explicitly or suggests that a bonus (for example, the execution of a probability-increasing jackpot game after the second special effect ends) will be granted when a jackpot symbol stops or a near-win occurs during the second special effect game.

However, in a gaming machine where the second special symbol game takes precedence over the first special symbol game, and the second special symbol special effect is executed during the second special symbol game, as shown in Figure 72(A), if the hold-continuous effect is scheduled to be executed consecutively for multiple first special symbol games (Special 1 current variation + Special 1 hold 1 + Special 1 hold 2), as shown in Figure 72(B), if a game ball enters the second prize slot during the execution of Special 1 current variation, as shown in Figure 72(C), the second special symbol game will be executed after the end of the variation (Special 1 current variation) in which the hold-continuous effect is being executed, and the second special symbol special effect will be executed during that second special symbol game, causing the hold-continuous effect to be interrupted.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 72(D), if the first special symbol game is executed after the second special symbol game has finished, and the planned continuous hold animation for the first special symbol game is not performed (Pattern 1), if the player remembers that the continuous hold animation was performed before the second special symbol game's special animation, they may feel a sense of unease when the continuous hold animation is not performed, potentially reducing the enjoyment of the game. In particular, if the second special symbol game (second special symbol special animation) has been executed infrequently, the player is more likely to remember that the continuous hold animation was performed before the second special symbol game's special animation, and therefore more likely to feel a sense of unease when the continuous hold animation is not performed after the second special symbol game (second special symbol special animation) has finished.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 72(E), if the first special symbol game is executed after the second special symbol game has finished, and the continuous hold animation is restarted (Pattern 2), there is a concern that if the player has forgotten that the continuous hold animation was executed before the second special symbol game, they may feel uncomfortable with the continuous hold animation being executed, and the enjoyment of the game may decrease. In particular, if the second special symbol game (second special symbol game) is executed many times, the time until the continuous hold animation is restarted becomes longer, increasing the likelihood that the player has forgotten that the continuous hold animation was executed before the second special symbol game, and thus increasing the likelihood that the player will feel uncomfortable with the continuous hold animation being restarted after the second special symbol game (second special symbol game) has finished.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the opening modes of the second prize slot by the electric mechanism are set as follows: a first opening of the first hour (a short opening that makes it difficult for game balls to enter the second prize slot), and a second opening of the second hour, which is longer than the first opening time (a long opening that makes it easy for game balls to enter the second prize slot).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is planned that the continuous hold animation will be performed in the next reserved first special symbol game (for example, special 1 variation + special 1 hold 1 + special 1 hold 2 (see Figure 72(A))), if a game ball enters the second prize slot due to a short opening of the second prize slot, as shown in Figure 73(A), the continuous hold animation that was being performed in the first special symbol game will continue to be performed in the second special symbol game which is executed after the end of the first special symbol game as a variation. In other words, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed during the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is scheduled that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next reserved first special symbol game, even if a game ball enters the second prize slot due to a brief opening of the second prize slot, the second special symbol animation will not be performed in the second special symbol game triggered by the game ball entering the second prize slot when the second prize slot is briefly open, and the continuous hold animation will continue to be performed. Therefore, when a continuous hold animation is being performed during the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is scheduled that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next reserved first special symbol game, the player will not feel any discomfort when the continuous hold animation is not performed after the end of the second special symbol game, which is triggered by the game ball entering the second prize slot during a brief opening of the second prize slot. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the continuous hold animation not being performed in the first special symbol game that is performed after the end of the second special symbol game.

In particular, when the second prize slot is briefly open, it is more difficult for game balls to enter the second prize slot compared to when it is fully open (fewer balls enter). Since players are more likely to remember that a continuous hold animation was performed before the second special feature game, the effect of having the continuous hold animation continue without the second special feature animation being performed when a game ball enters the second prize slot during a short opening is significant.

Furthermore, in the case of a short opening where it is difficult for game balls to enter the second prize slot, it is expected that the number of game balls entering the second prize slot will be small. Therefore, even if the continuous hold animation is executed continuously during the second special feature game when game balls enter the second prize slot in the case of a short opening, the number of consecutive executions of the continuous hold animation will not increase significantly. Thus, it is unlikely that players will feel any discomfort with the continuous hold animation being executed continuously during the second special feature game. On the contrary, the continuous hold animation being executed continuously during the second special feature game allows for the effective use of the continuous hold animation in that game.

In this embodiment, if the second prize slot is only partially open and a game ball enters the second prize slot, resulting in the second special feature game, the second special feature special effect is not executed, and the hold-continue effect continues to be executed. However, the hold-continue effect is restarted in the first special feature game, which is executed after the second special feature game ends. However, it is not necessary to restart the hold-continue effect in the first special feature game.

Incidentally, the "Reserve Consecutive Performance" is sometimes performed as a performance to clearly indicate that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. For example, if a predetermined Reserve Consecutive Performance is performed consecutively for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 4 times) of special symbol games, it may be clearly indicated that the result of the jackpot lottery for the predetermined number of special symbol games is a jackpot. On the other hand, if the second special symbol game is played by a game ball entering the second special symbol slot when the second special symbol slot is only partially open, and the second special symbol special performance is not performed, then the Reserve Consecutive Performance may be performed for more than the predetermined number of special symbol games. Therefore, if the Reserve Consecutive Performance is performed consecutively without the second special symbol special performance being performed during a second special symbol game played by a game ball entering the second special symbol slot when the second special symbol slot is only partially open, and that Reserve Consecutive Performance is a predetermined Reserve Consecutive Performance, then the predetermined Reserve Consecutive Performance may be performed more than the predetermined number of times. In other words, if a predetermined sequence of hold animations is scheduled to be executed consecutively in multiple first-symbol games, and the predetermined sequence of hold animations is executed consecutively in the second-symbol game, a discrepancy may arise between the result of the jackpot lottery (that it is a jackpot) indicated by the predetermined sequence of hold animations and the actual result of the jackpot lottery.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if a discrepancy arises between the result of the jackpot lottery (that it is a jackpot) indicated by the predetermined consecutive hold animation and the actual result of the jackpot lottery, a process is executed that prevents the number of consecutive special game rounds in which the predetermined consecutive hold animation is performed from reaching the predetermined number. For example, in a special game round before the predetermined number of consecutive special game rounds in which the predetermined consecutive hold animation is performed, or in a special game round after the predetermined number has been reached, the predetermined consecutive hold animation is not executed, and instead, a different consecutive hold animation is performed.

Thus, in this embodiment, if a situation arises where there is a discrepancy between the result of the jackpot lottery (that it is a jackpot) indicated by a predetermined continuous hold animation and the actual result of the jackpot lottery, the type of continuous hold animation is changed and executed so that the number of consecutive special game plays in which the predetermined continuous hold animation is performed does not reach a predetermined number. This prevents a discrepancy between the result of the jackpot lottery (that it is a jackpot) indicated by the predetermined continuous hold animation and the actual result of the jackpot lottery.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the hold-continuous performance is scheduled to be executed consecutively in multiple first special feature games (for example, Special 1 (the relevant variation) + Special 1 (hold 1) + Special 1 (hold 2) (see Figure 72(A))), when a game ball enters the second prize slot due to the extended opening of the second prize slot, the second special feature performance is executed in the second special feature game, which is executed after the end of the first special feature game (Special 1 (the relevant variation)), as shown in Figure 73(B). However, at the time of execution of this second special feature performance, it is explicitly or implicitly indicated that the hold-continuous performance had been executed prior to the execution of the second special feature performance. For example, in the image display means where the second special feature performance is displayed as an image, the type of hold-continuous performance that was executed prior to the execution of the second special feature performance is displayed as a captured image, etc. Of course, the explicit or implicit indication that the hold-continuous performance was executed prior to the execution of the second special feature performance is not limited to displaying a captured image of the hold-continuous performance on the image display means; as described later, other methods may also be used.

Thus, in this embodiment, by explicitly indicating or suggesting that a consecutive hold animation was performed before the execution of the second special animation, it is prevented for the player from forgetting that a consecutive hold animation was performed before the second special animation. Furthermore, the player can understand that the consecutive hold animation will resume after the end of the second special animation. Therefore, even when the consecutive hold animation resumes after the end of the second special animation, the feeling of unease regarding its execution after the end of the second special animation is significantly reduced. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of a consecutive hold animation that was performed before the end of the second special animation.

In particular, when the second prize slot is opened for a long time in a game with a long-opening normal winning slot, players tend to be more engrossed in whether or not a game ball will enter the second prize slot compared to when the second prize slot is opened for a short time in a game with a short-opening normal winning slot. Therefore, players are more likely to forget that a continuous hold animation was performed before the execution of the second special winning slot game. Also, when the second prize slot is opened for a long time in a game with a long-opening normal winning slot, game balls are more likely to enter the second prize slot (more balls enter) compared to when the second prize slot is opened for a short time in a game with a short-opening normal winning slot, resulting in more second special winning slot games where the second special animation is performed (the execution time of the second special animation is longer). Therefore, the time between the end of the reserve continuous performance before the execution of the second special feature performance (when the second special feature performance begins) and the resumption of the reserve continuous performance upon the end of the second special feature performance becomes longer. Furthermore, compared to when the first special feature game is executed, players pay more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special feature game in which the second special feature performance is executed is a jackpot. Thus, in a long-opening normal feature jackpot game, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time, compared to a short-opening normal feature jackpot game, players are more likely to forget that a reserve continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special feature game. Therefore, explicitly indicating or suggesting that a reserve continuous performance was executed in the first special feature game prior to the execution of the second special feature performance is highly effective.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described first embodiment, with reference to Figures 74 to 100.

[Configuration of the gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Figure 74. Here, Figure 74 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 74, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that, in addition to the through gate 317 provided in the right-hand region of the gaming board 31, a through gate 317L is also provided in the left-hand region of the gaming board 31. The left-hand through gate 317L, like the right-hand through gate 317, has an entry sensor (not shown) connected to the main control device 4 via an input/output I/F 42, and the entry sensor determines whether or not a gaming ball 99 has passed through the through gate 317L.

In this way, by providing a through gate 317L on the left side of the game board 31, game balls 99 launched into the left-side area of the game board 31 can pass through the through gate 317L. Therefore, even when game balls 99 are launched into the left-side area of the game board 31, the game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317L, and the normal winning lottery is executed. If the result of the normal winning lottery is a win, the electric mechanism 315b opens, allowing the game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to enter the second prize slot 315 not only in the probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), but also in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) by launching game balls 99 into the left-side area of the game board 31.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figures 75 to 77.

Here, Figure 75 is a block diagram showing an example of the memory area of the main control device 4, and Figure 76 is a block diagram showing an example of the power reserve area of the memory area of the main control device 4 shown in Figure 75.

The system configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is basically the same as the system configuration of the first embodiment described above, but a part of the configuration of the lottery counter 412a differs from the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Specifically, as shown in Figure 75, in addition to the normal win initial value counter CIN2 and the normal win random number counter C4, a normal win type random number counter C5 is set as a counter related to the normal win lottery. This normal win type random number counter C5 is a counter that, when the lottery result in the normal win lottery is a win, assigns the normal win to either a short-open normal win or a long-open normal win. In a short-open normal win, the electric mechanism 315b is opened, making it possible for the game ball 99 to enter the second prize opening 315, but the opening time of the second prize opening 315 is short (for example, 0.1 seconds), and a short-open normal win game is executed in which it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second prize opening 315. On the other hand, in a long-opening regular win, the electric mechanism 315b opens, allowing the game ball 99 to enter the second prize slot 315. However, the opening time of the second prize slot 315 is longer than in a short-opening regular win (for example, 6 seconds), resulting in a long-opening regular win game where the game ball 99 is more likely to enter the second prize slot 315.

Furthermore, when a game ball passes through the left through gate 317L or the right through gate 317, the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5 acquired at that time are stored in the electric power reserve area 412c. Also, the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing executed in the main control device 4 shown in Figure 20, similar to the normal win random number counter C4.

As shown in Figure 76, the electric payout reserve area 412c includes the normal game first reserve area SE1, the normal game second reserve area SE2, the normal game third reserve area SE3, the normal game fourth reserve area SE4, the normal game variable reserve number storage area SNA, and the normal game execution area SAE.

The first to fourth reserve areas of the regular game (SE1 to SE4) are memory areas that store the regular win random number counter C4 and the regular win type random number counter C5, which are acquired as win/loss information used in the regular win lottery when a game ball passes through the through gates 317 and 317L.

The Normal Diagram Fluctuation Reserved Count Storage Area SNA stores the number of Normal Diagram Game Reserved Areas SE1 to SE4, where win/loss information is stored. In other words, the Normal Diagram Fluctuation Reserved Count Storage Area SNA is a storage area that stores the number of reserved rights to execute the Normal Diagram Game.

The regular symbol game execution area SAE is a memory area used to move the win/loss information of the regular symbol game first reserve area SE1 when the symbol variation display in the regular symbol display unit 361 begins. Then, at the start of each regular symbol game, the MPU 41 performs a regular symbol win lottery based on the numerical information (values of the regular win random number counter C4 and the regular win type random number counter C5) stored as win/loss information in the regular symbol game execution area SAE, using the regular symbol win/loss table (Figures 77(A) and 77(B)) and the regular symbol win type distribution table (Figures 77(C) and 77(D)) described below. At this time, if the win/loss information stored in the first reserve area SE1 of the regular game is moved to the execution area SAE of the regular game, the win/loss information stored in the second reserve area SE2 of the regular game is shifted to the first reserve area SE1, the win/loss information stored in the third reserve area SE3 of the regular game is shifted to the second reserve area SE2, and the win/loss information stored in the fourth reserve area SE4 of the regular game is shifted to the third reserve area SE3.

[General Diagram Win/Loss Table]
In this embodiment, two types of win/loss tables are set for the regular spins: the low-frequency support mode regular spins win/loss table shown in Figure 77(A) and the high-frequency support mode regular spins win/loss table shown in Figure 77(B). That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the probability of winning a regular spin differs between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, with the probability of winning a regular spin being set higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

The low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table shown in Figure 77(A) is the table used for the normal win lottery in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 77(A), in the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table, a value of 0 for the normal win random number counter C4 is set to 0, and a value of 1 to 299 for the normal win random number counter C4 is set to 0 to 0 to 1 to 299 to 1 to 299. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal win is set to 1/300, making it difficult for the second prize slot 315 to open.

The high-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table shown in Figure 77(B) is the table used for the normal symbol win lottery in the high-frequency support mode, which includes the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state. As shown in Figure 77(B), in contrast to the high-frequency support mode normal symbol win/loss table, a value of 0 for the normal symbol win random number counter C4 indicates a loss, while a value of 1 to 299 for the normal symbol win random number counter C4 indicates a normal symbol win. In other words, in the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal symbol win is set to 299/300, which is higher than in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), and the second prize entry point 315 is more likely to open.

Furthermore, the probability of a normal win in low-frequency support mode and the probability of a normal win in high-frequency support mode are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 77(A) and 77(B), and can be changed as appropriate.

[Table of Classification by General Diagram]
In this embodiment, two types of distribution tables per regular drawing are set: the low-frequency support mode distribution table per regular drawing shown in Figure 77(C), and the high-frequency support mode distribution table per regular drawing. That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the distribution probabilities for the types per regular drawing (per short-open regular drawing and per long-open regular drawing) differ between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.

In this case, when a short-opening normal win occurs, the electric mechanism 315b is opened for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds), allowing the game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315 for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds). In this short-opening normal win game, because the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b is short, it is difficult for the game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315. The maximum number of game balls 99 that can enter the second prize slot 315 is about two, and sometimes no game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 at all.

On the other hand, in the case of a long-opening regular win, the electric mechanism 315b is open for a longer period (e.g., 6 seconds) than in a short-opening regular win game. This allows the game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315 for a longer period (e.g., 6 seconds) than in a short-opening regular win game. In this long-opening regular win game, the longer opening time of the electric mechanism 315b makes it easier for the game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315, and it is possible to reserve the right to execute the second special win game up to the maximum number (e.g., 4).

The low-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table shown in Figure 77(C) is the table used for the normal win lottery in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 77(C), in the low-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table, when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 0 and 99, it is set to a short-open normal win, and when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 100 and 199, it is set to a long-open normal win. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the distribution ratio between short-open normal wins and long-open normal wins is set to 1:1. Of course, the distribution ratio between short-open normal wins and long-open normal wins in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) does not necessarily have to be 1:1 and can be changed as appropriate.

The high-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table shown in Figure 77(D) is the table used for normal win抽選 (random draw) in the high-frequency support mode, which includes the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state. As shown in Figure 77(D), in the high-frequency support mode normal win type distribution table, a value of 0 for the normal win type random number counter C5 is set to a short-open normal win, and a value of 1 to 199 for a long-open normal win. In other words, in the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), the distribution is set to be more likely to result in a long-open normal win than a short-open normal win. Of course, the distribution rate between short-open and long-open normal wins in the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) is not limited to the example shown in Figure 77(D) and can be changed as appropriate.

[Table of Jackpot Types by Distribution]
While the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above was configured as a so-called loop probability variation machine, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as an ST machine. Therefore, the distribution table for the types of jackpots in this embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment described above.

Here, Figure 77(E) shows an example of a distribution table for assigning different types of jackpots when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot.

In the example shown in Figure 77(E), when the type of special game is the first special game triggered by a ball entering the first prize slot 314, there are 10 random numbers (0-9) that result in a 5R probability variation jackpot, 5 random numbers (10-14) that result in a 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5 random numbers (15-19) that result in a 5R normal jackpot. On the other hand, when the type of special game is the second special game triggered by a ball entering the second prize slot 315, there are 10 random numbers (0-9) that result in a 5R probability variation jackpot, 10 random numbers (10-19) that result in a 16R probability variation jackpot, and there are no random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot. In other words, in the game machine 10, the probability of a probability variation jackpot in the first special game is 75%, while the probability of a probability variation jackpot in the second special game is 100%. Therefore, when the second prize slot 315 is opened wide due to a long-opening regular symbol win, if the second special symbol game triggers a win when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315, and the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, it will be a 100% guaranteed jackpot with a probability variation. In other words, if a jackpot is announced during the reserve charge release period (see Figures 87(B) and 87(C)) when the reserve for the second special symbol game triggered by a long-opening regular symbol win is released, it will be a jackpot with a probability variation.

Furthermore, in both the first and second special symbol games, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability-increasing jackpot, the game transitions to a probability-increasing game state (high probability mode and high-frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special symbol games (ST rounds) that can be played in the probability-increasing game state. If the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of special symbol games, the game transitions to a normal game state after the execution of the upper limit of special symbol games. Note that the number of special symbol games in the probability-increasing game state is not limited to 100; it may be any other number.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a regular jackpot, the game transitions to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving game state (time-saving rounds). If the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of special symbol games, the game transitions to a regular game state after the execution of the upper limit of special symbol games. Note that the number of special symbol games in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100; it may be any other number.

Furthermore, the transition from the probability variation state to the normal state may not be limited to when the maximum value of the special symbol game is executed; for example, it may also occur when the state transition lottery (downgrade lottery) is won.

[Processing by the main control unit 4]
In this embodiment, the main timer interrupt processing and the main processing are executed, similar to the first embodiment described above. Below, with reference to Figures 78 to 83, the through-gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing, which was briefly described in the first embodiment described above, and the regular game control processing and regular winning game control processing executed in the main processing, which were omitted from the description in the first embodiment described above, will be explained in detail.

[Through-gate processing]
In the through-gate processing of this embodiment, when a game ball 99 passes through the left through-gate 317L or the right through-gate 317 (see Figure 74), the MPU 41 performs a process to update the information stored in the electric power reserve area 412c of the RAM 412.

Figure 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for through-gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt handler. The through-gate processing will be explained below with reference to Figure 78.

<Step S3401>
As shown in Figure 78, in the through-gate processing of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the left through-gate 317L (step S3401). If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has passed through the left through-gate 317L (step S3401: Yes), it proceeds to step S3403. If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has not passed through the left through-gate 317L (step S3401: No), it proceeds to step S3402.

<Step S3402>
If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has not passed through the left through gate 317L (step S3401: No), it determines whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the right through gate 317 (step S3402). If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has passed through the right through gate 317 (step S3402: Yes), it proceeds to step S3403. If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has not passed through the right through gate 317 (step S3402: No), it terminates the through gate processing.

<Step S3403>
If the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S3401: Yes), or if it determines that the game ball 99 has passed through the right through gate 317 (step S3402: Yes), it determines whether the number of reserved balls X stored in the number of reserved balls X storage area SNA set in the electric power reserve area 412c of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reserved balls (4 in this embodiment) (step S3403). If the number of reserved balls X is the maximum number of reserved balls (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the through gate processing, and if the number of reserved balls X is not the maximum number of reserved balls (step S3403: No), it proceeds to step S3404.

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
If the number of reserved normal figure fluctuations X is not the maximum number of reserved figures (step S3402: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reserved normal figure fluctuations X (step S3404), obtains the counter values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5 which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing executed in the main control device 4 in Figure 20, stores the counter values in the first empty reserved area of the normal figure game first reserved area SE1 to the fourth reserved area SE4 of the electric role reserved area 412c in the RAM 412 (step S3405), and terminates the through gate processing.

[Main processing of the main control unit 4]
In the main processing of the main control device 4, although not explained in the first embodiment described above, the following are executed: the regular game control processing (step S3501 in Figure 79) and the regular winning game control processing (step S3502 in Figure 79).

[General Game Control Processing]
In the regular symbol game control processing, processing related to the display of changes and stops of the regular symbol display unit 361 in the main display unit 36 is performed.

Here, Figure 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general game control process executed in step S3501 of the main process in Figure 79. The general game control process will now be explained with reference to Figure 80.

<Step S3601>
As shown in Figure 80, in the normal game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the game machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot game (step S3601). If it is in the middle of a jackpot game (step S3601: Yes), the variable game control process ends. If it is not in the middle of a jackpot game (step S3601: No), the process moves to step S3602.

Whether or not a jackpot game is currently in progress is determined, for example, in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main processing shown in Figure 79, based on the jackpot game flag, which is set to ON when transitioning to the jackpot game state and OFF when transitioning from the jackpot game state to other game states.

<Step S3602>
If a jackpot game is not in progress (step S3601: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the "Normal Symbol Variation Display" flag is on (step S3602). If the "Normal Symbol Variation Display" flag is on (step S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3607. If the "Normal Symbol Variation Display" flag is off (step S3602: No), the process proceeds to step S3603. The "Normal Symbol Variation Display" flag indicates that a normal symbol game, in which normal symbols are displayed in a variation, is in progress. This "Normal Symbol Variation Display" flag is set to on when the normal symbol variation display is started in step S3811 of the normal symbol variation start process shown in Figure 82 (described later), and is set to off when the normal symbol variation is stopped and displayed in step S3609 of the normal symbol game control process.

<Step S3603>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Display" flag is off (step S3602: No), that is, if the normal symbol game is not in progress, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a normal symbol winning game is in progress (step S3603). If the MPU 41 determines that a normal symbol winning game is in progress (step S3603: Yes), it terminates the normal symbol game control process. If the normal symbol winning game is not in progress (step S3603: No), it proceeds to step S3604.

Whether or not a regular winning game is in progress is determined, for example, by whether or not the "electric mechanism open" flag, which indicates that the electric mechanism 315b is open, is set. This "electric mechanism open" flag is set to "on" in step S3910 of the regular winning game control process shown in Figure 83 (described later) when the electric mechanism 315b is opened, and to "on" in step S3917 when the electric mechanism 315b is closed.

<Step S3604>
If a regular symbol win game is not currently in progress (step S3603: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the number of regular symbol variation reserves X stored in the regular symbol variation reserves storage area SNA set in the electric power reserve area 412c of the RAM 412 is 0 (step S3604). If the number of regular symbol variation reserves X is 0 (step S3604: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the regular symbol game control process, and if the number of regular symbol variation reserves X is not 0 (step S3604: No), the process proceeds to step S3605.

<Step S3605>
If the number of reserved regular figure fluctuations X is not 0 (step S3604: No), the MPU 41 performs a regular figure data setting process for the win/loss information stored in the electric role reserve area 412c (step S3605), and terminates the regular figure game control process. When the MPU 41 has completed the process in step S3605, it proceeds to step S3606. Details of the regular figure data setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 81.

<Step S3606>
In step S3606, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol variation start process to cause the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to execute a variation display based on the information stored in the electric power reserve area 412c, and then terminates the normal symbol game control process. Details of the normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to Figure 82.

<Step S3607>
If the "Normal Figure Fluctuation Display" flag is on (step S3602: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed since the start of the normal figure fluctuation display (step S3607). If it determines that the normal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S3607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3608. If it determines that the normal figure fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S3607: No), the normal figure game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3608-S3610>
If the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (step S3607: Yes), the MPU 41 stops displaying the symbols corresponding to the result of the normal symbol winning lottery for the normal symbol game in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S3608), and sets the normal symbol variation display in progress flag to off (step S3609). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variation stop display flag to on, indicating that the normal symbols have stopped being displayed, i.e., that the normal symbol game has ended (step S3610), and terminates the normal symbol game control process.

Furthermore, the "Normal Symbol Variation Stop" indicator flag is referenced in step S3901 of the normal symbol win game control process shown in Figure 83 (described later) to determine whether or not it is time to start the normal symbol win game.

[General drawing data setting process]
Here, Figure 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the general data of the map that is performed by the MPU 41 in step S3605 of Figure 80. The general data of the map will be described below with reference to Figure 81.

<Steps S3701-S3703>
As shown in Figure 81, in the normal drawing data setting process, first the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the normal drawing variable reserve number X stored in the normal drawing variable reserve number storage area SNA (step S3701), and moves the win/loss information from the normal drawing game first reserve area SE1 to the normal drawing game execution area SAE (step S3702). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the win/loss information stored in the normal drawing game second reserve area SE2 to the normal drawing game fourth reserve area SE4 one by one (step S3703). Specifically, in step S3702, the win/loss information from the normal drawing game second reserve area SE2 is moved to the normal drawing game first reserve area SE1, the win/loss information from the normal drawing game third reserve area SE3 is moved to the normal drawing game second reserve area SE2, and the win/loss information from the normal drawing game fourth reserve area SE4 is moved to the normal drawing game third reserve area SE3.

[Normal Chart Fluctuation Start Process]
Here, Figure 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for initiating a general-purpose graph variation, which is performed by the MPU 41 in step S3606 of Figure 80. The general-purpose graph variation initiation process will be described below with reference to Figure 82.

<Step S3801>
As shown in Figure 82, in the normal variation start process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode (step S3801). Whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode is determined based on whether or not the high-frequency support mode, which is set to ON when the game state transitions to a probability variation game state or a time-saving game state in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process in Figure 79, is set to ON. If it is in high-frequency support mode (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3802, and if it is not in high-frequency support mode (step S3801: No), i.e., in low-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3803.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If it is in high-frequency support mode (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the win/loss information stored in the normal game execution area SAE of the electric power reserve area 412c, correspond to a normal win, based on the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see Figure 77(B)) (step S3802). On the other hand, if it is not in high-frequency support mode (step S3801: No), i.e., in low-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the win/loss information stored in the normal game execution area SAE of the electric power reserve area 412c, correspond to a normal win, based on the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see Figure 77(A)) (step S3803).

<Steps S3804 and S3805>
If the MPU 41 has determined whether a regular win is possible (step S3802 or S3803), it determines whether the result of the win/fail determination is a long-open regular win in which the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time (step S3804). If the result of the win/fail determination is a long-open regular win (step S3804: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long-open regular win flag to ON to indicate that the result of the win/fail determination is a long-open regular win (step S3805), and proceeds to step S3808. On the other hand, if the result of the win/fail determination is not a long-open regular win (step S3804: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3806.

<Steps S3806 and S3807>
If the result of the win/failure determination is not a long-opening regular-circle win (step S3804: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the win/failure determination is a short-opening regular-circle win in which the second prize slot 315 is briefly opened (step S3806). If the result of the win/failure determination is a short-opening regular-circle win (step S3806: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short-opening regular-circle win flag to ON to indicate that the result of the win/failure determination is a short-opening regular-circle win (step S3807), and proceeds to step S3808. On the other hand, if the result of the win/failure determination is not a short-opening regular-circle win (step S3806: No), that is, if the result of the win/failure determination is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3808.

<Steps S3808 and S3809>
If the long-opening normal symbol win flag is set to ON (step S3805), if the short-opening normal symbol win flag is set to ON (step S3807), or if the result of the win/loss determination is a loss (step S3806: No), the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol variation pattern setting process to set the display time of the variation of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 in normal symbol gameplay, the lottery result in the normal symbol win lottery, and the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode) in RAM 412 (step S3808), and sets a normal symbol variation pattern command to transmit the display time of the variation of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361 in normal symbol gameplay, the lottery result in the normal symbol win lottery, and the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode) to the voice lamp control device 5 (step S3809), and proceeds to step S3810.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation display time of the normal symbols is set, for example, by setting the value of the normal symbol variation display time counter to the counter value corresponding to the variation display time of the normal symbols in the normal symbol game.

Furthermore, the regular symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1301 of the next main processing (see Figure 79) executed by the MPU 41. The sound lamp control device 5 then executes a display corresponding to the regular symbol game in the symbol display unit 341 based on the regular symbol variation pattern command. If the lottery result in the regular symbol win lottery is a long-open regular symbol win, the long-open flag is set to ON in step S4006 of the command determination processing shown in Figure 84 (described later).

Furthermore, the type of support mode does not necessarily need to be notified to the audio lamp control device 5 via the regular pattern variation command. For example, if there is a transition in support mode between high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode, or if there is a transition in game state between normal game state (low-frequency support mode) and probability variation game state or time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) in the game state transition process of step S1306 of the main processing in Figure 79, the type of support mode can be notified to the audio lamp control device 5 by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of support mode after the support mode transition.

<Steps S3810 and S3811>
In step S3810, the MPU 41 starts displaying the variation of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (step S3810). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variation display in progress flag to ON, which indicates that the normal symbols are being displayed in a variation state, i.e., that a normal symbol game is being played (step S3811), and ends the normal symbol variation start process.

[General Winning Game Control Processing]
In the regular winning game control process, if the result of the regular winning lottery is a win, a process is executed to switch between an allow state, which permits the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize pocket 315, and a restrict state, which restricts it, by controlling the opening and closing of the electric mechanism 315b.

Here, Figure 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal win game control process executed in step S3502 of the main process in Figure 79. The normal win game control process will now be explained with reference to Figure 83.

<Step S3901>
As shown in Figure 83, in the normal symbol win game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal symbol change stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped being displayed (the normal symbol game has ended), is on (step S3901). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the right timing to start a normal symbol win game. If the normal symbol change stop display flag is on (step S3901: Yes), that is, if it is the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3902. On the other hand, if the normal symbol change stop display flag is off (step S3901: No), that is, if it is not the right timing to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3912.

<Step S3902>
If the "Normal Symbol Variation Stop" display flag is on (step S3901: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start a normal symbol win game, the MPU 41 determines whether the "Long Open Normal Symbol Win" flag is set to on (step S3902). The "Long Open Normal Symbol Win" flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the normal symbol win lottery is a long open normal symbol win, and is set to on in step S3805 of the normal symbol variation start process in Figure 82 when the result of the normal symbol win lottery is a long open normal symbol win. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the normal symbol win lottery for the completed normal symbol game is a long open normal symbol win. If the "Long Open Normal Symbol Win" flag is set to on (step S3902: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3903, and if the "Long Open Normal Symbol Win" flag is set to off (step S3902: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3905.

<Steps S3903 and S3904>
If the long-opening regular win flag is set to ON (step S3902: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the value of the opening counter to a value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b in the long-opening regular win game (the time during which game balls 99 can enter the second prize pocket 315) (step S3903). Then, the MPU 41 sets the long-opening regular win flag to OFF (step S3904) and proceeds to step S3908.

<Step S3905>
If the long-opening regular figure win flag is set to off (step S3902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the short-opening regular figure win flag is set to on (step S3905). The short-opening regular figure win flag is a flag that indicates the result of the regular figure win lottery is a short-opening regular figure win, and is set to on in step S3807 of the regular figure variation start process in Figure 82 when the result of the regular figure win lottery is a short-opening regular figure win. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the regular figure win lottery for the completed regular figure game is a short-opening regular figure win. If the short-opening regular figure win flag is set to on (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3906, and if the short-opening regular figure win flag is set to off (step S3902: No), that is, if the result of the regular figure win lottery for the completed regular figure game is a loss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3911.

<Steps S3906 and S3907>
If the short-opening regular-win flag is set to ON (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric mechanism 315b in a short-opening regular-win game (the time during which game balls 99 can enter the second prize pocket 315), as the value of the opening counter (step S3906). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short-opening regular-win flag to OFF (step S3907) and proceeds to step S3908.

<Steps S3908-S3910>
If the result of the regular prize draw is a win, and the flag indicating the type of regular prize (long-open regular prize flag or short-open regular prize flag) is set to OFF (step S3904 or S3907), the MPU 41 opens the electric mechanism 315b, thereby allowing game balls 99 to enter the second prize pocket 315 (step S3908). The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism open command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S3909), sets an electric mechanism open flag to ON to indicate that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S3910), and proceeds to step S3911.

The electric mechanism release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1301 of the next main processing (see Figure 79) executed by the MPU 41. Meanwhile, when the sound lamp control device 5 receives the electric mechanism release command, if the lottery result in the regular symbol win lottery is a long-open regular symbol win, it executes a process to start the electric mechanism long-open effect (see Figure 87(A)) on the symbol display unit 341 in step S4010 of the command determination processing shown in Figure 84, based on the electric mechanism release command. This electric mechanism long-open effect is a visual effect that clearly indicates or suggests to the player that the electric mechanism 315b is in its long-open state due to the execution of a long-open regular symbol win game.

<Step S3911>
If the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a win, and the process of opening the electric mechanism 315b is executed (steps S3908 to S3910), or if the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a win (when the long-open regular symbol win flag and the short-open regular symbol win flag are set to off (when the result of the regular symbol win lottery is a loss) (when both steps S3902 and S3905 are No)), the MPU 41 sets the regular symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the regular symbol has stopped being displayed (the regular symbol game has ended), to off (step S3911), and terminates the regular symbol win game control process.

<Step S3912>
If the "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Stop" display flag is off (step S3901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag, which is set to turn on when the electric mechanism 315b is opened in step S3910 of the normal symbol winning game control process, is set to on (step S3912). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal symbol winning game is in progress. If the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to on (step S3912: Yes), that is, if a normal symbol winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3913. On the other hand, if the "Electric Mechanism Open" flag is set to off (step S3912: No), that is, if a normal symbol winning game is not in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol winning game control process.

<Steps S3913 and S3914>
If the "Electric mechanism open" flag is set to ON (step S3912: Yes), that is, if a regular winning game is in progress, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the open counter set in step S3903 or S3906 of the regular winning game control process (step S3913), and determines whether the value of the open counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3914). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to close the electric mechanism 315b. If the value of the open counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3914: Yes), that is, if it is time to close the electric mechanism 315b, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3915. On the other hand, if the value of the open counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3914: No), that is, if it is not time to close the electric mechanism 315b, the MPU 41 terminates the regular winning game control process.

<Step S3915>
If the value of the open counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3914: Yes), that is, if it is time to close the electric mechanism 315b, the MPU 41 closes the electric mechanism 315b, thereby restricting the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize pocket 315 (step S3915). The MPU 41 then sets an electric mechanism close command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the electric mechanism 315b has been closed (step S3916), sets the electric mechanism open flag to off to indicate that the electric mechanism 315b is open (step S3917), and terminates the normal winning game control process.

The electric mechanism closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 during the external output processing in step S1301 of the next main processing (see Figure 79) executed by the MPU 41. Upon receiving the electric mechanism closing command, the audio lamp control device 5, if the lottery result in the regular symbol win lottery is a long-open regular symbol win, executes a process to terminate the electric mechanism long-open effect on the symbol display unit 341 in step S4023 of the command determination processing shown in Figure 86, based on the electric mechanism closing command.

[Processing by the audio lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, the audio lamp control device 5 performs sub-timer interrupt processing and the like, as in the first embodiment described above. However, the command determination process in this embodiment differs in some steps from that of the first embodiment. In the following, with reference to Figures 84 to 100, the command determination process of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the command determination process in the first embodiment described above.

[Command determination process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, processing is performed to control the effects to be executed in the graphic display unit 341, etc., according to the type of command received.

Figures 84 to 86 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the command determination process procedure in this embodiment.

<Step S4001>
As shown in Figure 84, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received (step S4001). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S4001: Yes), it proceeds to step S4002; if it has not received a command (step S4001: No), it terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4002>
If a command is received (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a general diagram variation pattern command (step S4002). If the MPU 51 receives a general diagram variation pattern command (step S4002: Yes), it proceeds to step S4003. If the received command is not a general diagram variation pattern command (step S4002: No), it proceeds to step S4007.

The regular symbol variation pattern command includes information regarding the variation display time of the regular symbols on the regular symbol display unit 361, the lottery results in the regular symbol win lottery, and the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode, low-frequency support mode).

<Step S4003>
If a general diagram variation pattern command is received (step S4002: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is a high-frequency support mode based on the information regarding the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode) included in the received general diagram variation pattern command (step S4003).

If the MPU 51 is in high-frequency support mode (step S4003: Yes), it terminates the command determination process. Alternatively, if the MPU 51 is in high-frequency support mode (step S4003: Yes), it may set the high-frequency support mode flag to ON before terminating the command determination process.

On the other hand, if MPU 41 is not in high-frequency support mode (step S4003: No), i.e., in low-frequency support mode, it proceeds to step S4004. Note that if MPU 51 is in low-frequency support mode (step S4003: No), and the high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON, it may set the high-frequency support mode flag to OFF before terminating the command determination process.

<Step S4004>
If the high-frequency support mode is not active (step S4003: No), i.e., if the low-frequency support mode is active, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (step S4004). Whether or not a jackpot game is in progress is determined based on a jackpot game flag, which is set to ON when a jackpot game start command is received (step S2106 in Figure 37: Yes) and OFF when a jackpot game end command is received (step S2117 in Figure 37: Yes). If the MPU 51 determines that a jackpot game is in progress (step S4004: Yes), it terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 determines that a jackpot game is not in progress (step S4004: No), it proceeds to step S4005.

<Step S4005>
If the game is not currently in a jackpot state (Step S4004: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the normal jackpot lottery for the normal jackpot game to be started is a long-open jackpot, based on the information regarding the result of the normal jackpot lottery included in the received normal jackpot variation pattern command (Step S4005). If the result of the normal jackpot lottery for the normal jackpot game to be started is a long-open jackpot (Step S4005: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to Step S4006. On the other hand, if the result of the normal jackpot lottery for the normal jackpot game to be started is not a long-open jackpot (Step S4005: No), that is, if the result of the normal jackpot lottery is a short-open jackpot or a miss, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4006>
If the result of the lottery for a regular win in the regular game that is about to start is a long-open win (step S4005: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long-open flag to ON (S4006) and terminates the command determination process. That is, the long-open flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the lottery for a regular win in the regular game in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), which is neither a big win game nor a high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time reduction game state), is a long-open win in which a long-open regular game is executed, allowing game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315 due to the long opening of the electric mechanism 315b. This long-open flag is referenced in step S4008, described later, when determining whether the opening pattern of the second prize slot 315 in a regular win game in the normal game state is a long-open.

<Step S4007>
If the received command is not a regular pattern variation command (step S4002: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an electric mechanism opening command indicating that the opening of the electric mechanism 315b allows the game balls 99 to enter the second prize entry 315 (the regular winning game begins) (step S4007). If the received command is a regular pattern variation command (step S4007: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4008, and if the received command is not a regular pattern variation command (step S4007: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4012 in Figure 85.

<Step S4008>
If the received command is a regular pattern variation command (step S4007: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the long-open flag, which indicates that the lottery result in the regular pattern win lottery is a long-open win, is set to ON (step S4008). If the long-open flag is set to ON (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4009. If the long-open flag is set to OFF (step S4008: No), i.e., if the lottery result in the regular pattern win lottery is a short win, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S4009 and S4010>
If the long-open flag is set to ON (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long-open flag to OFF (step S4009), executes a process to start the long-open electric mechanism performance (step S4010), and then proceeds to step S4011.

The "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" effect is a feature that clearly indicates to the player, via the symbol display unit 341 or the like, that the electric mechanism 315b is in its long-open state. Here, Figure 87(A) shows an example of the screen on the symbol display unit 341 during the execution of the "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" effect. In the example of Figure 87(A), during the execution of the "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" effect, the symbol display unit 341 displays the text image "Hold Charge Chance" indicating that the second prize slot 315 is in its long-open state, and the text image "Put the ball in the tulip below" prompting the player to shoot the game ball 99 towards the second prize slot 315. Of course, the "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" effect is not limited to the example in Figure 87(A) and may take other forms. For example, the electric mechanism opening animation may display other images, such as character images, instead of or in addition to text images, and the animation on the symbol display unit 341 may be replaced with an audio animation using the speaker 26.

The process for initiating the "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" animation is executed only when the "Long Opening" flag is set to "On." However, as mentioned above, the "Long Opening" flag is not set to "On" during jackpot play, probability variation play, or time-saving play (high-frequency support mode). In other words, the "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" animation is executed when the second prize slot 315 is fully open during normal play (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode). It is not executed when the second prize slot 315 is only partially open during normal play (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode), during jackpot play, or during probability variation or time-saving play (high-frequency support modes). Of course, the "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" animation may also be executed during probability variation or time-saving play when the second prize slot 315 is only partially open during normal play (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode).

<Step S4011>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 84, in step S4011, the MPU 51 sets the "Electric Device Long Open" flag to ON, indicating that the electric device 315b is in a long open state, and terminates the command determination process. The "Electric Device Long Open" flag is referenced in step S4017 of Figure 85, described later, to determine whether a game ball 99 that enters the second prize slot 315 is intended for the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315.

<Step S4012>
If the received command is not a regular figure variation pattern command (step S4007: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first hold command, as shown in Figure 85 (step S4012). The first hold command includes information indicating that the first hold number N for the first special figure will increase, information regarding the hold number N after the increase, and information regarding the variation pattern for the increasing hold (variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery).

If the received command is a first-pending command (step S4012: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4013. If the received command is not a first-pending command (step S4012: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4015.

<Steps S4013 and S4014>
If the received command is a first-hold command (step S4012: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the hold information related to the first special game stored in the RAM 512 (variation pattern of each hold, jackpot lottery result, and number of holds N) (step S4013), executes the hold continuous performance setting process (step S4014), and then terminates the command determination process.

Here, the consecutive hold animation setting process is a process that sets consecutive hold animations for a predetermined hold in the first special symbol hold, where the same, similar, or similar type of animation that clearly indicates or suggests the probability of the lottery result being a jackpot is executed consecutively in a predetermined number of first special symbol games up to the first special symbol game in which the predetermined hold becomes the relevant variation, or in the second special symbol game for a predetermined number of holds executed before the predetermined hold. Details of the consecutive hold animation setting process will be explained with reference to Figures 88 to 91.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a series of hold animations are performed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special feature games, if the animation performed in each first special feature game is performed in a single first special feature game for a single hold that is executed before the predetermined hold, it does not strictly qualify as a "sequential animation," but for convenience, it will be included in the series of hold animations.

<Step S4015>
If the received command is not a first-hold command (step S4012: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second-hold command (step S4015). The second-hold command includes information indicating that the second-hold number M for the second special symbol game will increase, information regarding the increased-number-hold M, and information regarding the fluctuation pattern for the increasing-hold (fluctuation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery).

If the received command is a second-hold command (step S4015: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4016. If the received command is not a second-hold command (step S4015: No), the process proceeds to step S4021 in Figure 86.

<Step S4016>
If the received command is a second hold command (step S4015: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the hold information related to the second special game stored in the RAM 512 (variation pattern of each hold, jackpot lottery result, and number of holds M) (step S4016), and proceeds to step S4017.

<Step S4017>
In step S4017, the MPU 51 determines whether the "Electric Mechanism Long Open" flag is set to ON. The "Electric Mechanism Long Open" flag indicates that the second prize slot 315 is in a long open state (a long open normal winning game is being executed). Therefore, when the MPU 51 receives the second hold command, if the "Electric Mechanism Long Open" flag is set to ON, it can determine that the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 is triggered by the long opening of the second prize slot 315 (execution of a long open normal winning game). On the other hand, if the MPU 51 receives the second hold command and the electric mechanism long open flag is set to off, it can determine that the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize opening 315 is not triggered by the long opening of the second prize opening 315 (execution of a long open regular win game), but rather by the short opening of the second prize opening 315 (execution of a short open regular win game).

If the MPU 51 flag indicating that the electric mechanism is fully open is set to ON (step S4017: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4018. If the electric mechanism is fully open flag indicating that the electric mechanism is fully open is set to OFF (step S4017: No), the process proceeds to step S4020.

<Step S4018>
If the "Electric mechanism long open" flag is set to ON (step S4017: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the long open prize counter (step S4018) and proceeds to step S4019. In this way, the value of the long open prize counter is increased by 1 when the second prize opening 315 is in a long open state (a long open regular prize game is being executed) and a game ball 99 enters the second prize opening 315 while the number of reserved balls M for the second special prize game has not reached the upper limit. On the other hand, as described later, the value of the long open prize counter is decreased by 1 when the second special prize game is executed triggered by a game ball 99 entering the second prize opening 315 while the second prize opening 315 is in a long open state (step S4349 in Figure 96). In other words, the value of the long-open prize counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special feature games among the second special feature games triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize opening 315 while the second prize opening 315 is open for an extended period (during the execution of a long-open regular feature game).

<Step S4019>
In step S4019, the MPU 51 executes a second special effect setting process to execute a second special effect in the second special effect game.

Here, the second special feature is executed on the condition that the "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" flag is set to ON. On the other hand, as mentioned above, the "Electric Mechanism Long Opening" flag is not set to ON during jackpot gameplay, probability variation gameplay, or time-saving gameplay (high-frequency support mode). It is set to ON when the result of the regular jackpot lottery in normal gameplay (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode) is a long-opening jackpot. In other words, the second special feature is executed in a long-opening regular jackpot game, which is performed based on the result of the regular jackpot lottery in normal gameplay (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode) being a long-opening jackpot, triggered by the arrival of game ball 99 in the second prize entry point 315.

Of course, the electric mechanism's long-opening animation may also be executed based on the entry of 99 game balls into the second prize slot 315 during the short-opening of the second prize slot 315 in normal gameplay (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode), or during the opening of the second prize slot 315 in probability-changing gameplay or time-saving gameplay.

Here, Figures 87(B) and 87(C) show examples of the screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the execution of the second special feature animation. Specifically, Figure 87(B) is an example of the screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the execution of the second special feature animation when the hold-continuous animation is not executed after the second special feature animation is executed, and Figure 87(C) is an example of the screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the execution of the second special feature animation when the hold-continuous animation is executed before the execution of the second special feature animation and the hold-continuous animation is executed after the execution of the second special feature animation (see Figure 73(B)).

In the examples of Figures 87(B) and 87(C), during the execution of the second special effect, the symbol display unit 341 displays the text image "Reserve Charge Released" and the text image "If you hit a jackpot while Reserve Charge is released, you will enter a probability variation mode!".

The text image "Hold Charge Released" clearly indicates to the player that the display is being executed when the second prize slot 315 is fully opened during a long-opening regular symbol win game in normal gameplay, triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315. This "Hold Charge Released" text image is displayed in the symbol display unit 341 in an area adjacent to the above the aforementioned display image 75 and hold display image 76, without obstructing the display of the decorative symbols. This makes it possible to clearly indicate or suggest to the player that the second special symbol game corresponding to the display image 75 and hold display image 76 is the second special symbol game triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 during the long-opening, without obstructing the display of the decorative symbols.

The text image "If you hit a jackpot while the reserve charge is released, you will enter a probability variation mode!" is displayed to the player as a probability variation jackpot, provided that the decorative symbols stop on a jackpot symbol (e.g., matching numbers) during the spin display. This text image is displayed in the upper adjacent area of the symbol display unit 341, in a location that does not obstruct the spin display of the decorative symbols.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315, if the lottery result is a jackpot, there is no distribution of a regular jackpot; it is always a probability-increasing jackpot (see Figure 77(E)). Therefore, in this embodiment, as a second special effect triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot 315 during a long-open regular jackpot game in the normal game state, it becomes possible to clearly indicate that the jackpot type is a probability-increasing jackpot when the lottery result in the jackpot game is a jackpot, without interfering with the display of the changing decorative symbols.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in Figures 87(B) and 87(C), when the second special feature is executed, the variable display image 75 and the reserved display image 76 are displayed in the symbol display unit 341. The variable display image 75 indicates that it is a variable display for the second special feature, and the reserved display image 76 indicates that the right to execute the second special feature is reserved. It is conceivable that the variable display image 75 and the reserved display image 76 may be displayed in a different manner than the variable display image and the reserved display image (not shown) when the second special feature is not executed. That is, it is conceivable that the variable display image 75 and the reserved image 76 when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 during a long opening may be displayed in a different manner than the variable display image and the reserved display image (not shown) when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 during a short opening. In this case, not only is the second special effect executed, but the display patterns of the fluctuation display image 75 and the hold display image 76 also make it possible to clearly indicate to the player that the fluctuation display and hold are for the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 during a long opening. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish this from the fluctuation display and hold for the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 during a short opening.

Furthermore, the second special effect shown in Figure 87(C) differs from the second special effect shown in Figure 87(B) in that the captured image 77 is displayed in the lower left region (the region adjacent to the decorative symbol display area) that does not obstruct the display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341.

The captured image 77 is the display screen of the continuous hold animation that was being executed on the symbol display unit 341 during the first special animation game before the execution of the second special animation, as will be described later. In this embodiment, the image is displayed as a reduced-size image (an image with a changed size) of the animation screen while maintaining its appearance. This captured image 77 is displayed when the continuous hold animation was being executed during the first special animation game before the execution of the second special animation, and when the continuous hold animation is being executed during the first special animation game after the execution of the second special animation (see Figure 73(B)). In other words, the captured image 77 explicitly or suggests during the execution of the second special animation that the continuous hold animation was being executed during the first special animation game before the execution of the second special animation, and that the continuous hold animation will be executed during the first special animation game after the execution of the second special animation.

Thus, in this embodiment, the captured image 77 clearly or suggests that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special game before the execution of the second special animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation. Therefore, the possibility of the player forgetting that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special game before the execution of the second special animation is significantly reduced, and the player can understand that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation. As a result, even if the continuous hold animation is resumed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation, the player's feeling of discomfort regarding the continuous hold animation being performed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation is significantly reduced. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the continuous hold animation that was performed before the execution of the second special animation after the completion of the second special animation.

In particular, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time in a game with a long opening, players become more engrossed in whether or not the game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 compared to when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a short time in a game with a short opening. Therefore, players are more likely to forget that a continuous hold animation was performed before the execution of the second special symbol game. Also, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time in a game with a long opening, game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 more easily (more balls enter) compared to when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a short time in a game with a short opening, resulting in more second special symbol games in which the second special symbol animation is executed (the execution time of the second special symbol animation is longer). Therefore, the time between the end of the reserve continuous performance before the execution of the second special feature performance (when the second special feature performance begins) and the resumption of the reserve continuous performance upon the end of the second special feature performance becomes longer. Furthermore, compared to when the first special feature game is executed, players pay more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special feature game in which the second special feature performance is executed is a jackpot. Thus, in a long-opening normal feature jackpot game, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time, compared to a short-opening normal feature jackpot game, players are more likely to forget that a reserve continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special feature game. Therefore, explicitly indicating or suggesting that a reserve continuous performance was executed in the first special feature game prior to the execution of the second special feature performance is highly effective.

Furthermore, since the image is a reduced version of the screen of the hold-continuous performance that was being performed on the symbol display unit 341 during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol performance, the type of hold-continuous performance being performed during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol performance is clearly indicated or suggested, and the type of hold-continuous performance being performed during the first special symbol game after the completion of the second special symbol performance is clearly indicated or suggested. For example, in this embodiment, although the details will be described later, four types of hold-continuous performances are set: same-color symbol performance, chance eye performance, mini-character performance, and zone performance (mode performance) (see Figures 90 and 91). In the capture image 77 shown in Figure 87(C), it is clearly indicated or suggested that during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol performance, a chance eye performance was being performed as a hold-continuous performance, in which the decorative symbol stopped at "113" (see Figure 91(B)), which is a chance eye. This allows players to understand not only that a continuous hold animation was performed during the first special feature game before the second special feature animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation, but also the type of continuous hold animation. Therefore, players are less likely to feel uncomfortable when the continuous hold animation resumes during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation, and the decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the continuous hold animation that was running before the second special feature animation ends is further prevented.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the captured image 77 is displayed in a reduced size in the lower left area of the symbol display unit 341. However, it is preferable to display the captured image across the entire symbol display unit 341 for a certain period at the end of the second special feature animation and/or at the start of the hold-continuous animation performed after the end of the second special feature animation. For example, the captured image may be displayed as a so-called stage change animation, where the stage animation (background animation) from the previous special feature game is changed in the current special feature game. By displaying the captured image across the entire symbol display unit 341 for a certain period at the end of the second special feature animation and/or at the start of the hold-continuous animation performed after the end of the second special feature animation, the transition from the execution of the second special feature animation in the second special feature game to the execution of the hold-continuous animation in the first special feature game can be performed smoothly and without any sense of incongruity.

In this embodiment, the captured image 77 was displayed as a reduced image in the lower left region of the pattern display unit 341. However, it may also be displayed in other regions, for example, outside the area where the decorative patterns are displayed. By displaying the captured image 77 as a reduced image outside the area where the decorative patterns are displayed, the display of the captured image 77 is prevented from obstructing the visibility of the changing decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the captured image 77 may be displayed in its original form without being reduced in size, as long as it does not obstruct the visibility of the changing decorative symbols. For example, as described later, when a continuous hold animation is performed by the stopping of a specific perfect miss (same-colored symbols) or a predetermined perfect miss (chance symbol), displaying the specific perfect miss (same-colored symbols) or the predetermined perfect miss (chance symbol) on the back of the decorative symbols prevents obstruction of the visibility of the changing decorative symbols even when the captured image 77 is displayed in its original form without being reduced in size. When the captured image 77 is displayed in its original form without being reduced in size, its size is set to be large, making it easy for the player to recognize that the captured image 77 is being displayed.

Furthermore, the captured image 77 may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special feature game as an image with a lower density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) than the image of the first special feature continuous performance, for example as a lower density image than the decorative symbols, preferably as an image with a density that allows the image of the lower layer below the captured image 77 to be seen, or an image with a density that allows the back side of the captured image 77 to be seen. That is, the captured image 77 may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as a modified version of the image of the hold continuous performance that was being performed in the first special feature game, similar to when it is displayed as a reduced image. In this way, by displaying the captured image 77 as an image with a lower density than the image of the first special feature continuous performance, that is, as a modified version of the image of the hold continuous performance that was being performed in the first special feature game, it becomes possible to display the captured image 77 without being restricted by the display area of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341. This makes it possible to overlay the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 with the captured image 77 in the second special game, not only outside the fluctuation area of the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, by overlaying the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 with the captured image 77, it becomes possible to easily see the captured image 77 even when the player is intently watching the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, by displaying the captured image 77 on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special game as an image with a density that allows the image of the lower layer below the captured image 77 to be visible, or as an image with a density that allows the back side of the captured image 77 to be visible, it becomes possible to see the changing display of the decorative symbols even when the captured image 77 is displayed on the front or back side of the decorative symbols. This makes it possible for the player to easily see the captured image 77 even when they are intently watching the changing display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, by enabling the display of the captured image 77 without being restricted by the display area of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341, it becomes possible to visually confirm the display of the decorative symbols even when the reduction ratio of the captured image 77 is set high. Even when the captured image 77 is displayed without reduction, it becomes possible to visually confirm the display of the decorative symbols. As a result, even when the captured image 77 is displayed as an image with lower density than the image of the first special symbol continuous performance, the size of the captured image 77 can be set larger, ensuring sufficient visibility of the captured image 77.

When the captured image 77 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special feature game as an image with a density that allows the viewer to see the image of a lower layer than the captured image 77, or as an image with a density that allows the viewer to see the back side of the captured image 77, it is also possible to display only the outline of the captured image 77. For example, when the first special feature continuous performance is displayed by a combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed, such as a chance symbol performance or a same-color symbol performance (see Figure 91(B)), the captured image 77 may be set to display only the outline that allows the viewer to recognize the type of decorative symbol (only the outline of the numbers). In this way, when the captured image 77 is displayed as an outline that allows the viewer to recognize the type of decorative symbol, it becomes possible to see the changing display of the decorative symbol even if the captured image 77 is displayed on the front or back side of the decorative symbol. This makes it possible for the player to easily see the captured image 77 even when they are intently watching the changing display of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, the captured image 77 only needs to clearly or suggest that a continuous hold animation was performed during the first special feature game before the second special feature animation was performed, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation was performed. There are no particular restrictions on the timing of the capture during the continuous hold animation. For example, the timing of the capture during the continuous hold animation may be at the start of the continuous hold animation (when the decorative symbols start to change), during its execution (while the decorative symbols are displayed), or at its end (when the decorative symbols stop changing).

Furthermore, the explicit indication or suggestion that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation, is not limited to the display of the capture image 77, but may be done by any other method as long as the variation of the decorative symbols is visible. For example, the explicit indication or suggestion that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation, may be displayed as a specific image different from the capture image 77, such as a text image, icon image, character image, or an image combining two or more of these. In other words, the explicit indication or suggestion may be displayed as an image that has been changed to an image different from the animation image of the continuous hold animation that was performed in the first special feature game. In this way, by displaying the explicit or suggestive information as an image that differs from the image used in the continuous hold animation performed in the first special game, it becomes possible to display it in various positions on the symbol display unit 341 without obstructing the visibility of the changing decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341.

Furthermore, the type of specific image may be associated with the type of the consecutive hold animation. By associating the type of specific image with the type of consecutive hold animation in this way, it becomes possible not only to determine that a consecutive hold animation was performed during the first special feature game before the second special feature animation, but also to identify the type of consecutive hold animation that was performed during the first special feature game before the second special feature animation, based on the type of specific image displayed.

Furthermore, even when explicitly indicating or suggesting, by displaying a specific image, that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation, the specific image may be displayed as a lower density image than the decorative symbols, preferably as an image of a lower layer than the capture image 77 with a visible density, or as an image of the back side of the capture image 77 with a visible density, or as an image showing only the outline. Moreover, even when displaying the specific image in these display modes, the specific image may be displayed superimposed on the decorative symbols that are displayed in the second special feature game, either in front of or behind the decorative symbols, or outside the variable area of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, while the captured image 77 and specific images may be displayed for the entire duration of the execution of the second special symbol game, they may also be displayed for only a portion of the execution period, for example, only for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game, only for a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, or for both a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game and a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game. There are no particular limitations on the display period of the captured image 77 and specific images. Also, when the second special symbol game is executed multiple times consecutively, the captured image 77 and specific images do not need to be displayed for all of the second special symbol games. For example, they may be displayed only for the first second special symbol game executed, only for the last second special symbol game executed, or for both the first and last second special symbol games. The number of times the captured image 77 and specific images are displayed may differ from the number of times the second special symbol special effects are executed.

Furthermore, the second special effect is not limited to the examples in Figures 87(B) and 87(C), and may take other forms. For example, the second special effect may display other images, such as character images, in place of or in addition to the text images, or it may perform a predetermined sound effect using the speaker 26 in place of or in addition to the effect on the pattern display unit 341.

Furthermore, the second special effect only needs to be an effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a bonus will be granted to the player when certain conditions are met. It is not necessarily required that the effect be conditional on the decorative symbols stopping and displaying a winning symbol (e.g., matching numbers), and that the type of jackpot when this condition is met is a probability-increasing jackpot. Examples of predetermined conditions include the decorative symbols becoming a "reach" (a near-winning combination) or a specific effect being executed. In other words, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines other than those where the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot 315 is always a probability-increasing jackpot. For example, the present invention can be applied not only to loop probability-increasing machines like the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, but also to ST machines such as V-ST machines and Type 1 & 2 mixed machines, where the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 includes wins other than probability-increasing jackpots.

<Step S4020>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 85, if the flag indicating that the electric mechanism is fully open is set to off (step S4017: No), that is, if the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 is triggered by a short opening (execution of a short-open regular winning game), then the value of the short-open prize counter is increased by 1 (step S4020), and the command determination process is terminated. In this way, the value of the short-open prize counter is increased by 1 when the second prize slot 315 is in a short opening state (execution of a short-open regular winning game) and the number of reserved balls M for the second special game has not reached the upper limit when a game ball 99 is entered into the second prize slot 315. On the other hand, the value of the short-opening prize counter is used in the performance type setting process to set the type of performance to be executed in the special feature game when the number of special feature games in which the reserved consecutive performance is executed increases due to the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 during a short opening, in order to avoid the inconvenience caused by the chance event performance as a reserved consecutive performance being executed consecutively in four or more special feature games (the jackpot confirmation performance being executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss), as will be described in detail later (see step S4355 in Figure 97 and step S4364 in Figure 98).

<Step S4021>
If the received command is not a second pending command (step S4015: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an electric mechanism closing command, as shown in Figure 86. An electric mechanism closing command is a command that indicates that the electric mechanism 315b has been closed, and is set in step S3916 of the regular game control process shown in Figure 83, which is executed by the main control device 4 when the electric mechanism 315b is closed.

If the received command is an electric mechanism closing command (step S4021: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4022. If the received command is not an electric mechanism closing command (step S4021: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4026.

<Step S4022>
If the received command is an electric mechanism closing command (step S4021: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the electric mechanism long-open flag is set to ON (step S4022). The electric mechanism long-open flag indicates that the electric mechanism 315b is in a long-open state due to the execution of a long-open regular winning game, and is set to ON in step S4011 of the command determination process when an electric mechanism open command is received.

If the MPU 51 flag indicating that the electric mechanism is fully open is set to ON (step S4022: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4023. If the electric mechanism is fully open flag indicating that the electric mechanism is fully open is set to OFF (step S4022: No), the process proceeds to step S4025.

<Steps S4023 and S4024>
If the "Electric mechanism long open" flag is set to ON (step S4022: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process to terminate the electric mechanism long open animation (see Figure 87(A)) which clearly indicates or suggests to the player that the electric mechanism 315b is in a long open state due to the execution of a long open winning game (step S4023), and also sets the "Electric mechanism long open" flag to OFF (step S4024), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4025>
If the long-opening flag for the electric mechanism is set to off (step S4022: No), the MPU 51 sets the short-opening/closing flag to on (step S4025) and terminates the command determination process. The short-opening/closing flag indicates that the electric mechanism 315b, which was briefly open during a short-opening regular winning game, has been closed. This short-opening/closing flag is used in steps S4355 and S4356 of the performance type setting process in Figure 97 to determine whether the chance event will be executed for four or more consecutive special game rounds, as the game ball 99 enters the second prize entry 315 due to the short-opening of the electric mechanism 315b.

<Step S4026>
If the received command is not an electric mechanism closing command (step S4021: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variable pattern command. If the received command is a variable pattern command (step S4026: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4027. On the other hand, if the received command is not a variable pattern command (step S4026: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (steps S2106 to S2122) and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4027>
If the received command is a variable pattern command (step S4026: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a performance type setting process to set the type of performance to be executed in the special game (step S4027), and then proceeds to step S4028. Details of the performance type setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 93 to 98.

<Step S4028>
In step S4028, the MPU 51 executes a stop symbol combination setting process to set the stop display combinations of decorative symbols in the special game, and then proceeds to step S4029. Details of the stop symbol combination setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 99 and 100.

<Step S4029>
In step S4029, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command in the variation display counter and proceeds to step S4030. The variation display time is determined according to the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. The variation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 34, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the pattern variation display is in progress, the remaining time of the variation display, etc., based on the variation display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S4030>
In step S4030, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to identify the combination of stop symbols for the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 and the content of the performance type (performance pattern type), and then terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the variation type (performance pattern type) set in step S4027 and the combination of stop symbols for the decorative symbols set in step S4028. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores performance images and variation images of decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, the MPU 61 in the display control device 6 executes the variation display and performance display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the combination of stop symbols for the decorative symbols, the variation type, and the performance type corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the pattern display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the display of multiple decorative patterns (for example, three) while a preset display time for variation has elapsed, and then sequentially stops the display of the variations of the multiple decorative patterns. While the decorative patterns are being displayed, various effects corresponding to the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed in the pattern display unit 341, speaker 26, lighting unit 27, etc.

[Hold Continuous Performance Setting Process]
Next, an example of the procedure for the pending continuous performance setting process, which is executed in step S4014 of the command determination process in Figure 85, will be explained with reference to Figures 88 to 91. The pending continuous performance setting process is the process of setting the type of pending continuous performance when it is possible to start a pending continuous performance. Here, Figures 88 and 89 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the pending continuous performance setting process.

<Step S4101>
In the pending continuous performance setting process, in step S4101, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, that is, whether or not the first special symbol game is playable. Whether or not a jackpot game is in progress is determined based on a jackpot game flag, which is set to ON when a jackpot game start command is received (step S2106 in Figure 37: Yes) and OFF when a jackpot game end command is received (step S2117 in Figure 37: Yes). If the MPU 51 is in progress (step S4101: Yes), it terminates the pending continuous performance setting process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in progress (step S4101: No), it proceeds to step S4102.

<Step S4102>
If the game is not in a jackpot state (step S4101: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode (step S4102). Whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode is determined based on the high-frequency support mode flag, which is set to ON when it is determined to be in high-frequency support mode, for example, when a regular pattern variation command is received.

Here, in step S4102, the reason for determining whether or not the game is in high-frequency support mode is to ensure that the continuous hold animation is executed in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) and not in the probability variation game state or the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode). Of course, the continuous hold animation may also be executed in either or both of the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode).

If the MPU 51 is in high-frequency support mode (step S4102: Yes), it terminates the pending continuous performance setting process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in high-frequency support mode (step S4102: No), i.e., in low-frequency support mode, it proceeds to step S4103.

<Step S4103>
If it is not in high-frequency support mode (step S4102: No), i.e., in low-frequency support mode, the MPU 51 determines whether the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S4103). The pending continuous performance execution flag is a flag that indicates that a pending continuous performance has started, and is set to ON in step S4311 of the performance type setting process in Figure 94 described later, when it is scheduled that a pending continuous performance will be executed in the first special game that is executed immediately following the first special game in which the pending continuous performance starts.

If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S4103: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the pending continuous performance setting process because there is no need to set the pending continuous performance since it is already being executed. On the other hand, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S4103: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4104.

<Step S4104>
If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S4103: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the special performance execution flag is set to on (step S4104). The special performance execution flag is a flag that indicates that the second special performance has started, and is set to on in step S4336 of the performance type setting process in Figure 96 described later, when it is scheduled that the second special performance will be executed in the second special game that is executed immediately after the second special game in which the second special performance starts.

If the special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S4104: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the pending consecutive effect setting process because the second special effect is being executed and there is no need to set the pending consecutive effect. On the other hand, if the special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S4104: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4105.

<Step S4105>
If the special effect execution flag is set to off (step S4104: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the increased number of reserved first reserved balls N is 2 or more when the number of reserved balls for executing the first special feature game increases due to the entry of a game ball 99 into the first prize slot 314. That is, the MPU 51 sets a reserved ball sequence effect, with one of the conditions being that there is at least one reserved ball for the first special feature game when a game ball 99 enters the first prize slot 314.

If the increased number of reserved balls N in the MPU 51 is 2 or more (step S4105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4106. In other words, the continuous reserved ball animation can be initiated when the number of reserved balls N is between 1 and 3 and a game ball 99 enters the first prize entry point 314.

On the other hand, if the first number of reserved balls N, after the increase due to the entry of 99 game balls into the first prize slot 314, is not 2 or more (step S4104: No), the MPU 51 terminates the reserved ball continuous performance setting process. In other words, the reserved ball continuous performance is not triggered by the entry of 99 game balls into the first prize slot 314 when the number of reserved balls N is 0.

<Step S4106>
If the increased number of first reserved games N is 2 or more (step S4105: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the display time of the reserved first special game is 30 seconds or more, based on the information regarding the variation pattern (variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery) for the increasing reserved games included in the first reserved command. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the reserved game that could trigger the start of a reserved continuous performance is the first special game in which a performance involving a reach should be executed.

If the MPU 51 determines that the display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is 30 seconds or longer (step S4106: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is one in which a reach-related animation should be performed, the process proceeds to step S4107.

On the other hand, if the MPU 51 determines that the display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is not 30 seconds or more (step S4106: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold should execute a completely losing animation without a reach, the process proceeds to step S4110.

<Steps S4107-S4109>
If the display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is 30 seconds or longer (step S4106: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is one in which a reach-inducing animation should be performed, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is a jackpot or not, based on the information regarding the variation pattern for the increased hold (variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery) included in the first hold command (step S4107).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special feature game corresponding to the increased number of reserved balls is a jackpot (step S4107: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a reserved ball continuous performance setting process based on the reserved ball continuous performance pattern type setting table for jackpot performances (see Figure 90) described later, according to the number of reserved balls N (step S4108), and then proceeds to step S4111 in Figure 89.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special feature game corresponding to the increased number of reserved balls is not a jackpot (step S4107: No), that is, if a losing reach animation should be performed, the MPU 51 performs a reserved ball continuous animation setting process based on the reserved ball continuous animation pattern type setting table for losing reaches (see Figure 90), according to the number of reserved balls N (step S4109), and then proceeds to step S4111 in Figure 89.

<Step S4110>
If the display time of the first special game corresponding to the increased number of reserved balls is not 30 seconds or more (step S4106: Yes), that is, if the first special game corresponding to the increased number of reserved balls should execute a completely losing animation without a reach, the MPU 51 executes a reserved ball continuous animation setting process based on the reserved ball continuous animation pattern type setting table for completely losing reaches (see Figure 90) described later, according to the number of first reserved balls N (step S4110), and proceeds to step S4111 in Figure 89.

Here, Figures 90(A) to 90(C) show examples of the hold-continuous performance pattern type setting tables. Specifically, Figure 90(A) is the hold-continuous performance pattern type setting table used when the first hold-number N after increase is 4, Figure 90(B) is the hold-continuous performance pattern type setting table used when the first hold-number N after increase is 3, and Figure 90(C) is the hold-continuous performance pattern type setting table used when the first hold-number N after increase is 2.

As shown in Figures 90(A) to 90(C), there are four types of hold-continuous performance patterns: same-colored symbol performance, chance symbol performance, mini-character performance, and zone performance (mode performance). In Figures 90(A) to 90(C), "same-colored symbol 3 times" means that the same-colored symbol performance is executed consecutively for 3 times in the first special symbol game, "same-colored symbol 2 times" means that the same-colored symbol performance is executed consecutively for 2 times in the first special symbol game, and "same-colored symbol 1 time" means that the same-colored symbol performance is executed only once in the first special symbol game. Similarly, "chance symbol X times" (X is an integer from 1 to 4), "mini-character performance X times" (X is an integer from 1 to 3), and "zone performance X times" (X is an integer from 1 to 3) mean that the chance symbol performance, mini-character performance, or zone performance is executed for X times in the first special symbol game. In other words, "○○X times" means that a single type of consecutive hold animation is executed consecutively a predetermined number of times during the first special feature game. Of course, the consecutive hold animation is not limited to a single type of consecutive hold animation executed consecutively a predetermined number of times during the first special feature game; multiple types of consecutive hold animations (for example, mini-character animations and zone animations) may be executed simultaneously in a single first special feature game, as long as the combination is feasible as an animation.

Furthermore, regarding the consecutive hold animations, regardless of the number of initial hold animations (N), the chance symbol animation is the most frequently triggered compared to other consecutive hold animations such as the same-colored symbol animation. On the other hand, the zone animation (mode animation) is the least frequently triggered among the consecutive hold animations.

Furthermore, in Figures 90(A) to 90(C), "-" indicates that the consecutive hold animation is not set. The "-" where the consecutive hold animation is not set accounts for the majority of the random number distribution, regardless of the first hold number N. Therefore, the frequency (probability) of the consecutive hold animation being performed is lower than the frequency (probability) of the consecutive hold animation not being performed. Moreover, the smaller the first hold number N, the more random numbers are distributed when the "-" where the consecutive hold animation is not set. In other words, the smaller the first hold number N, the lower the frequency (probability) of the consecutive hold animation being performed, and the larger the first hold number N, the higher the frequency (probability) of the consecutive hold animation being performed.

Here, the same-colored pattern effect, chance symbol effect, mini-character effect, and zone effect (mode effect) are effects that clearly indicate or suggest the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol game for the hold that triggered the consecutive hold effect will be a jackpot. For example, "Chance Symbol 4 Times," in which the chance symbol effect is performed four times in a row during the first special symbol game, can only be set when the number of first holds N is 4 and the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (see Figure 90(A)). It is not set when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss (a losing reach or a complete miss), so "Chance Symbol 4 Times" is a jackpot confirmation effect that clearly indicates the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. On the other hand, all consecutive hold effect effects other than "Chance Symbol 4 Times" are effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot. In other words, the consecutive hold animations other than "four chance symbols," such as the same-colored symbol animation, the mini-character animation, and the zone animation (mode animation), do not constitute a guaranteed jackpot animation that explicitly indicates a jackpot result, even if they are executed four or more times.

Thus, by clearly indicating or suggesting the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special game, which triggered the continuous hold animation, will be a jackpot, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the continuous hold animation. Furthermore, when the continuous hold animation is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the jackpot lottery result will transition to a special game state, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, excluding the "four chance symbols" that clearly indicate a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot in consecutive hold-and-reserve animations is set as follows, assuming the same number of times the first special symbol game is played in which the consecutive hold-and-reserve animation is executed: for example, the mini-character animation is set to the lowest probability, the same-colored symbol animation and the chance symbol animation are set to roughly the same (identical or nearly identical) level, and the zone animation (mode animation) is set to the highest probability.

By the way, in this embodiment, when the continuous hold animation is scheduled to be executed consecutively for multiple first special symbol games, in the second special symbol game, which is executed based on the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 by the execution of a short-opening normal symbol win game, the second special symbol special animation is not executed, and the continuous hold animation continues to be executed. In this case, when the number of times the continuous hold animation is executed in the first special symbol game and the number of times the continuous hold animation is executed in the second special symbol game are added together, the number of special symbol games in which the continuous hold animation is executed may be four or more.

Here, if a chance symbol animation is being performed as part of a continuous hold animation, and the number of special game rounds in which the continuous hold animation is performed exceeds four, then, as mentioned above, the continuous hold animation becomes a jackpot confirmation animation, clearly indicating that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. Therefore, if a jackpot is not included in the jackpot lottery results for special game rounds performed from the fourth round onward after the start of the predetermined chance symbol animation as part of the continuous hold animation, then if the chance symbol animation continues to be performed for four or more consecutive rounds, an inconsistency will arise between the jackpot lottery result and the content clearly indicated by the continuous hold animation.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a chance symbol animation is performed as a pending continuous animation, and the number of special game rounds in which the pending continuous animation is performed is four or more, the pending continuous animation is changed to an animation other than the chance symbol animation, for example, a same-colored symbol animation, which does not become a jackpot confirmation animation that explicitly indicates a jackpot even if it is performed four or more times. This prevents inconsistencies between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the pending continuous animation.

As mentioned above, even if a consecutive hold animation other than a chance symbol animation is executed for four or more consecutive first-symbol games, it does not constitute a guaranteed jackpot animation, but rather an animation that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot. Therefore, even if the number of special-symbol games in which a consecutive hold animation is executed exceeds four, if an animation other than a chance symbol animation is being executed as a consecutive hold animation, the type of consecutive hold animation will continue to be executed without changing the type of consecutive hold animation. Of course, even if a type of consecutive hold animation does not cause any problems when executed consecutively for a predetermined number of special-symbol games (for example, four times), the type of consecutive hold animation may be changed before the scheduled number of special-symbol games are executed.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot between the predetermined consecutive hold animation (the "chance symbol" animation) before the change and the specific consecutive hold animation (the "same-colored symbol" animation) after the change is set to be the same or approximately the same. For example, the difference in the probability of winning a jackpot between the "chance symbol" animation and the "same-colored symbol" animation is set to be between -5% and +5%, and the difference in the probability of winning a jackpot between the "chance symbol" animation and the "same-colored symbol" animation is set to be between -2.5% and +2.5%. In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot between the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change and the specific consecutive hold animation after the change is set to be the same or approximately the same.

In this way, by setting the expected probability of a jackpot for the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change and the specific consecutive hold animation after the change to be the same or nearly the same, when the type of consecutive hold animation is changed, for example from a chance symbol animation to a same-colored symbol animation, the expected probability of a jackpot for the changed consecutive hold animation does not decrease significantly. Therefore, a decrease in the expected probability of a jackpot due to a change in the consecutive hold animation is prevented, thus preventing a decline in player interest and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Here, as mentioned above, the selection rate for the predetermined consecutive hold animation, the "chance symbol" animation, is set higher than the selection rate for the specific consecutive hold animation, the "same-colored symbol" animation. That is, in this embodiment, the selection rate for the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change is set higher than the selection rate for the specific consecutive hold animation after the change. By setting the selection rate for the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change higher than the selection rate for the specific consecutive hold animation after the change, the occurrence of problems is appropriately avoided when a predetermined consecutive hold animation (e.g., the "chance symbol" animation), which has a high probability of causing problems, is displayed consecutively.

Furthermore, not only when changing the type of consecutive hold animation to prevent inconsistencies between the results of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the consecutive hold animation, but also when changing the type of consecutive hold animation, if the display time for the variation of the hold for the first special symbol game that triggered the start of the consecutive hold animation is long, that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery for that hold is a jackpot, or if a reach animation with a high probability of winning a jackpot is executed, the type of consecutive hold animation may be changed so that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher for the specific consecutive hold animation after the change compared to the predetermined consecutive hold animation type before the change. For example, if the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change is the mini-character animation with the lowest probability of winning a jackpot, the specific consecutive hold animation after the change may be a chance eye animation, same-colored symbol animation, or zone animation (mode animation) which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the mini-character animation. If the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change is the chance eye animation or same-colored symbol animation, the specific consecutive hold animation after the change may be a zone animation (mode animation) which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the chance eye animation and same-colored symbol animation. In this case, the difference in the probability of winning a jackpot between the modified specific consecutive hold animation and the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the modification is set to, for example, 10% or more, preferably 25% or more.

In this way, by changing the type of consecutive hold animation so that the changed animation has a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot than the pre-changed consecutive hold animation, the probability of a jackpot suggested to the player by the change in the type of consecutive hold animation is improved. This allows players to enjoy the game while anticipating that the type of consecutive hold animation will change when the pre-changed consecutive hold animation is displayed. Furthermore, if the type of consecutive hold animation changes from the pre-changed animation to the new consecutive hold animation, players can enjoy the game with a greater expectation that the jackpot lottery result in the special feature game where the new consecutive hold animation is executed will be a jackpot, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the zone effect (mode effect) with the highest probability of a big win has the lowest selection rate among the consecutive hold effects. That is, in this embodiment, when the type of consecutive hold effect is changed from a predetermined consecutive hold effect such as a chance symbol effect or a same-color symbol effect to a specific consecutive hold effect such as a zone effect (mode effect), it is conceivable to set a high selection rate for the predetermined consecutive hold effect with a low probability of a big win before the change, and a high selection rate for the specific consecutive hold effect with a high probability of a big win after the change.

By setting a higher selection rate for the predetermined consecutive reserve animation with a low probability of winning the jackpot before the change, and a higher selection rate for a specific consecutive reserve animation with a high probability of winning the jackpot after the change, the frequency of the predetermined consecutive reserve animation before the change increases. This increases the opportunities for players to anticipate the change to the specific consecutive reserve animation with a high probability of winning the jackpot, thus further enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Conversely, by setting a lower selection rate for the specific consecutive reserve animation after the change, the frequency of the specific consecutive reserve animation with a high probability of winning the jackpot decreases. This further enhances the enjoyment of the game by increasing the player's satisfaction when the animation changes to the specific consecutive reserve animation with a high probability of winning the jackpot.

The timing for changing the type of the consecutive hold animation can be any time when there is no inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content revealed by the predetermined consecutive hold animation. For example, it can be any time from the special feature game executed after the special feature game executed at the stage when it is discovered that an inconsistency may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content revealed by the consecutive hold animation, until the special feature game in which an inconsistency occurs (for example, the special feature game executed the fourth time from the start of the predetermined consecutive hold animation). In other words, the timing for changing the type of consecutive hold animation can be either the first special feature game or the second special feature game, as long as there is no inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content revealed by the consecutive hold animation.

Here, if the timing of the change in the type of the pending continuous performance occurs during the first special symbol game, then if executing the pending continuous performance consecutively would cause problems in the first special symbol game that resumes after the second special symbol game ends, these problems are avoided.

Furthermore, when the type of continuous hold animation is changed in the first special feature game that resumes after the second special feature game ends, if continuing to execute the previous continuous hold animation would cause inconvenience, the number of special feature games in which the previous continuous hold animation is displayed is maximized. In this way, by maximizing the number of special feature games in which the previous continuous hold animation is displayed, even if continuing to execute the previous continuous hold animation would cause inconvenience, players can enjoy the previous continuous hold animation to the fullest extent.

On the other hand, if the timing of the change in the type of continuous hold animation is during the second special symbol game, and if an inconvenience occurs due to the continuous execution of the predetermined continuous hold animation before the change, the occurrence of the inconvenience in the second special symbol game will be avoided. Furthermore, even if an inconvenience occurs in the first special symbol game which resumes after the end of the second special symbol game, the occurrence of the inconvenience will be avoided before the first special symbol game resumes.

Furthermore, if the timing of the change in the type of consecutive hold animation is such that an inconsistency may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the predetermined consecutive hold animation, and this occurs in the special feature game that follows the special feature game being played at that point, the inconsistency will be immediately avoided once it is understood that the predetermined consecutive hold animation will cause problems.

On the other hand, in special feature games where the timing of the change in the type of consecutive hold animation occurs inconsistently with the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the predetermined consecutive hold animation, it is possible to maximize the player's expectation by having the predetermined consecutive hold animation displayed consecutively. Therefore, the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the change from the predetermined consecutive hold animation to a specific consecutive hold animation is reduced, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Of course, even if a series of hold-and-reserve animations other than the chance-eye animation is being performed, and the number of times the hold-and-reserve animation is performed in the special feature game exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 4 times), the type of hold-and-reserve animation may be changed. In other words, even if no inconvenience occurs when a single type of hold-and-reserve animation is performed consecutively more than a predetermined number of times, the type of hold-and-reserve animation may be changed. By changing the type of hold-and-reserve animation when no inconvenience occurs when a single type of hold-and-reserve animation is performed consecutively more than a predetermined number of times, it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored when a single type of hold-and-reserve animation is performed consecutively in many special feature games, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the consecutive performance of a single type of hold-and-reserve animation in many special feature games.

Furthermore, there are no restrictions on the combination of the type of pending continuous animation before the change and the type of pending continuous animation after the change. The combination should be determined within a range that does not create inconsistencies between the jackpot lottery results and the pending continuous animation. For example, if the pending continuous animation is set to a same-colored symbol animation, and the number of special gameplay rounds in which the pending continuous animation is performed exceeds a predetermined four, the pending continuous animation may be changed to an animation other than the same-colored symbol animation, such as a chance symbol animation.

Furthermore, the change in the pending sequence animation is not limited to just one change; it may be performed multiple times.

Here, the same-color symbol effect is an effect where all the decorative symbols displayed at the stop are the same color, and the combination of decorative symbols displayed is a specific combination that is not a winning combination (for example, a triple where all decorative symbols are the same) or a losing combination (for example, a combination where the left and right symbols are the same and only the middle symbol is different).

For example, as shown in Figure 91(A), if the decorative symbols "3" and "7" are set to red, the odd-numbered decorative symbols other than "3" and "7" ("1", "5", and "9") are set to green, and the even-numbered decorative symbols ("2", "4", "6", and "8") are set to blue, there are many possible combinations of same-colored symbols that result in a complete miss. However, it is preferable that the specific combination of same-colored symbols that stops and is displayed as a complete miss in the same-colored symbol performance is a distinctive symbol combination. For example, as shown in Figure 91(B), a possible combination of same-colored symbols that stops and is displayed as a specific complete miss in the same-colored symbol performance is one in which the left and middle symbols are the same number, and the right symbol is different from the left and middle symbols. In this way, by having a distinctive combination of same-colored symbols that stops and is displayed as a complete miss in the same-colored symbol performance, players can easily understand that the same-colored symbol performance has been executed. Furthermore, in the same-color symbol animation, when a specific combination of same-color symbols that represents a complete miss is displayed, the speaker 26 may output a unique special sound specific to the execution of the same-color symbol animation. This also allows the player to easily understand that the same-color symbol animation has been performed.

The Chance Symbol演出 (Chance Symbol演出) is a special effect in which a predetermined complete miss (a symbol that is not the same color) is displayed when the decorative symbols that stop are of different colors. For the same reasons as in the Same-Color Symbol演出 (Chance Symbol演出), the predetermined complete miss (Chance Symbol) displayed in the Chance Symbol演出 is preferably a distinctive symbol combination. For example, as shown in Figure 91(B), a possible predetermined complete miss (Chance Symbol) displayed in the Chance Symbol演出 is a combination where all decorative symbols are odd numbers, the left and middle symbols are the same number, and the right symbol is different from the left and middle symbols. Furthermore, in the Chance Symbol演出, to allow the player to easily understand that the Chance Symbol演出 has been performed, a specific special sound unique to the Chance Symbol演出 may be output from speaker 26 when the predetermined complete miss (Chance Symbol) is displayed.

The mini-character effect is an effect in which mini-characters are displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Mini-characters are, for example, miniature versions of characters that appear in the game machine 10's effects, or versions of those characters with enlarged heads, such as by making them two heads tall. There are no particular restrictions on the display manner of the mini-characters in the mini-character effect, but when the mini-character effect is performed in an effect other than the continuous hold effect, it is preferable that it be displayed in a manner that can be distinguished from other mini-character effects. Examples of mini-character effects in the continuous hold effect include mini-characters crossing the symbol display unit 341 to the left, right, top, bottom, or diagonally. Furthermore, when a hold display image is displayed for the first hold of the first special symbol game, the mini-characters may be displayed near the hold display image to suggest that the mini-character effect is related to the first hold of the first special symbol game.

Zone effects (mode effects) are effects that indicate the upcoming occurrence of reach effects or effects with a high probability of winning a jackpot by displaying special background effects (for example, background effects including text images such as "○○ Zone" or "○○ Mode") as background effects for decorative symbols.

In this embodiment, the continuous hold animation includes a same-color symbol animation and a chance symbol animation. The same-color symbol animation and the chance symbol animation are animations in which decorative symbols (e.g., numbers) stop and are displayed at specific complete misses as same-color symbols or predetermined misses as chance symbols. Because the player can easily understand that the continuous hold animation is being performed based on the combination of decorative symbols displayed, they can enjoy the game while anticipating that the continuous hold animation will be performed consecutively when it is executed, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when a hold-continuous performance is executed by stopping and displaying a specific complete miss or a predetermined complete miss, and as described above, if the display of the capture image 77 clearly indicates or suggests that a hold-continuous performance was executed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature performance, it becomes possible to display the capture image 77 in various forms without obstructing the visibility of the decorative symbol changes in the second special feature game. For example, the capture image 77 can display the image of the hold-continuous performance in the first special feature game in its original form, or it can be displayed as a reduced image, an image with reduced density, an image of the outline, etc. This allows for the clear indication or suggestion of the hold-continuous performance being executed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature performance through various effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

<Step S4111>
Returning to the explanation of the procedure for setting the pending continuous performance, when any of the setting processes in steps S4108 to S4110 is completed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the setting to execute the pending continuous performance was made in that setting process (step S4111), as shown in Figure 89. If the setting to execute the pending continuous performance is made (step S4111: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4112, and if the setting to execute the pending continuous performance is not made (step S4111: No), the pending continuous performance setting process is terminated.

<Step S4112>
If the setting to execute the pending continuous performance is made (step S4111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance setting flag to ON to indicate that the setting to execute the pending continuous performance has been made (step S4112), and proceeds to step S4113. The pending continuous performance setting flag is referenced in step S4302 of the performance type setting process in Figure 93 to determine whether or not it is the first special game to start the pending continuous performance.

<Step S4113>
In step S4113, the MPU 51 sets a reserve consecutive performance execution counter that indicates the number of remaining first special game rounds for which the reserve consecutive performance will be executed. For example, if the reserve consecutive performance is set to "Chance Eye X times" (where X is a positive integer from 1 to 4), the MPU 51 sets the value of the reserve consecutive performance execution counter to "X".

<Steps S4114 and S4115>
When the pending continuous performance execution counter is set, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a chance event is set as the pending continuous performance (step S4114). If a chance event is set as the pending continuous performance (step S4114: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance event flag to ON to indicate that a chance event is set as the pending continuous performance (step S4115), and terminates the pending continuous performance setting process. On the other hand, if a chance event is not set as the pending continuous performance (step S4114: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4116.

<Steps S4116 and S4117>
If no chance symbol animation is set as the pending continuous animation (step S4114: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a same-colored symbol animation is set as the pending continuous animation (step S4116). If a same-colored symbol animation is set as the pending continuous animation (step S4116: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same-colored symbol flag to ON to indicate that a same-colored symbol animation is set as the pending continuous animation (step S4117), and terminates the pending continuous animation setting process. On the other hand, if a same-colored symbol animation is not set as the pending continuous animation (step S4116: No), that is, if a mini-character animation or a zone animation (mode animation) is set as the pending continuous animation, the MPU 51 terminates the pending continuous animation setting process.

[Second Special Feature Setting Process]
Next, an example of the procedure for setting the second special effect, which is executed in step S4019 of the command determination process in Figure 85, will be explained with reference to Figure 92. The second special effect setting process is a process that enables the start of the second special effect in the second special game, which is executed when the electric mechanism 315b is opened for a long time during a long-opening normal game in the low-frequency support mode, and a game ball 99 enters the second prize entry 315. Here, Figure 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the second special effect.

<Step S4201>
In the second special effect setting process, in step S4201, the MPU 51 first determines whether the second special effect setting flag is set to ON. The second special effect setting flag is a flag that enables the start of the second special effect in the second special game, and is set to ON in step S4203, which will be described later. The second special effect setting flag is also referenced in step S4335 of the effect type setting process shown in Figure 96, which will be described later, to determine whether or not to start the second special effect in the second special game.

If the second special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the second special effect setting process. If the second special effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S4201: No), the process proceeds to step S4202.

<Steps S4202 and S4203>
If the second special effect setting flag is set to off (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second special effect execution flag is set to on (step S4202). The second special effect execution flag is a flag that indicates that the second special effect will be started, and is set to on in step S4311 of the effect type setting process in Figure 94 described later when the second special effect will be executed in the next second special game. The second special effect execution flag is also referenced in step S4303 of the effect type setting process in Figure 93 described later to determine whether or not to execute the second special effect in the second special game.

If the second special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the second special effect setting process. Conversely, if the second special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S4202: No), the MPU 51 sets the second special effect setting flag to ON (step S4203) and terminates the second special effect setting process. In this way, by setting the second special effect setting flag to ON, it becomes possible to start the second special effect in the second special effect game, which is executed when the electric mechanism 315b is opened fully during a long-open normal game in the normal game state, causing a game ball 99 to enter the second prize entry 315, as shown in the effect type setting process in Figure 94 below.

[Performance Type Setting Process]
Next, an example of the procedure for setting the performance type, which is performed in step S4027 of the command determination process in Figure 86, will be explained with reference to Figures 93 to 98. The performance type setting process is the process of setting the performance type for the first special feature game or the second special feature game, which is performed when a variation pattern command is received. Here, Figures 93 to 98 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for setting the performance type.

<Step S4301>
In the performance type setting process, in step S4301, the MPU 51 first determines whether the second number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol game is 0. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, if there are reserved balls for the second special symbol game, the second special symbol game is executed with priority over the first special symbol game. That is, by determining whether the second number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol game is 0, it is determined whether to execute the second special symbol game or the first special symbol game as the variation. If the second number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4302 and executes the process of setting the performance for the first special symbol game. On the other hand, if the second number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S4301: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4335 in Figure 96 and executes the process of setting the performance for the second special symbol game.

<Step S4302>
If the second number of reserved balls M for the second special feature game is 0 (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the reserved ball continuous performance setting flag is set to ON (step S4302). The reserved ball continuous performance setting flag is a flag that indicates that the setting to execute the reserved ball continuous performance has been made, and is set to ON in step S4112 when the setting to execute the reserved ball continuous performance has been made in the reserved ball continuous performance setting process shown in Figure 89, which is executed when the first reserved ball command is received.

Then, if the pending continuous performance setting flag is set to ON (step S4302: Yes), that is, if the first pending continuous performance is executed in the first special feature game that is being played, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4305 in Figure 94. On the other hand, if the pending continuous performance setting flag is set to OFF (step S4302: No), that is, if the first pending continuous performance is not executed in the first special feature game that is being played, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4303.

<Step S4303>
If the pending continuous performance setting flag is set to off (step S4302: No), that is, if the first pending continuous performance is not performed in the first special feature game that is executed after the variation, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to on (step S4303). The pending continuous performance execution flag is a flag that indicates that a pending continuous performance has started, and is set to on in step S4311 of the performance type setting process in Figure 94 described later, when it is planned that a pending continuous performance will be performed in the first special feature game that is executed immediately after the first special feature game in which the pending continuous performance starts.

Then, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S4302: Yes), that is, if the pending continuous performance is executed in the first special game executed as that variation, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4320 in Figure 95. On the other hand, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S4302: No), that is, if the pending continuous performance is not executed in the first special game executed as that variation, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4304.

<Step S4304>
If the flag for executing the pending continuous performance is set to off (step S4303: No), that is, if the pending continuous performance is executed in the first special game that is executed as the variation, the settings for the normal performance are made, that is, the performance type (performance pattern type) is set in the same way as in the first embodiment described above, and the performance type setting process is terminated.

<Steps S4305-S4308>
If the pending continuous performance setting flag is set to ON (step S4302: Yes), that is, if the first pending continuous performance is executed in the first special feature game that is being executed as a variation, then, as shown in Figure 94, the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance setting flag to OFF (step S4305) and sets the pending continuous performance that was set in any of steps S4108 to S4110 in Figure 88 as the pending continuous performance for the first special feature game that is being executed as a variation (step S4306). Then, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter, which indicates the remaining number of times the pending continuous performance will be executed (step S4307), and determines whether the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4308). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the first special feature game that is being executed as a variation is the last first special feature game in which the pending continuous performance will be executed.

Then, if the value of the count counter for the number of consecutive pending animations after subtraction is 0 (step S4308: Yes), that is, if the first special feature game executed as the variation is the last first special feature game in which the consecutive pending animation is executed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4314. On the other hand, if the value of the count counter for the number of consecutive pending animations after subtraction is not 0 (step S4308: No), that is, if the first special feature game executed as the variation is not the last first special feature game in which the consecutive pending animation is executed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4309.

<Steps S4309 and S4310>
If the value of the count counter for the number of times a pending continuous performance has been executed after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4308: No), that is, if the first special symbol game to be executed as the variation is not the last first special symbol game in which a pending continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game to be executed as the variation is a jackpot (step S4309). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a jackpot game will be executed after the end of the variation, or whether the pending first special symbol game will be executed.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the variation is a jackpot (step S4309: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the variation, the MPU 51 clears the reserved continuous performance execution counter, which indicates the remaining number of executions of the reserved continuous performance, in order to make the first special symbol game executed as the variation the last first special symbol game for which the reserved continuous performance is executed (step S4310), and proceeds to step S4314. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the variation is not a jackpot (step S4309: No), that is, if the reserved first special symbol game is executed after the end of the variation, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4311.

<Step S4311>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the variation is not a jackpot (step S4309: No), that is, if the first special symbol game that was held in reserve after the end of the variation is executed, the MPU 51 sets the reserved continuous performance execution flag to ON, indicating that the reserved continuous performance has started (step S4311), and proceeds to step S4312.

<Steps S4312 and S4313>
If the pending consecutive performance execution flag, which indicates that the pending consecutive performance has started, is set to ON, it is determined whether or not the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S4312). The chance eye flag is a flag that indicates that the chance eye performance is set as a pending consecutive performance, and is set to ON in step S4115 of the pending consecutive performance setting process shown in Figure 89, which is executed when the first pending command is received, if the chance eye performance is set as a pending consecutive performance.

Then, if the chance symbol flag is set to ON (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the chance symbol count counter, which indicates the number of times the first special symbol game was played in the chance symbol sequence executed as a continuous hold sequence (step S4313), and terminates the sequence type setting process.

In this embodiment, the upper limit for the number of times the first special symbol game in the consecutive chance event sequence is 4 times if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the consecutive hold sequence is a jackpot, and 3 times if it is a miss (see Figure 90). Therefore, by referring to the value of the chance event counter, inconsistencies between the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the consecutive hold sequence and the number of times the chance event sequence is executed in the first special symbol game are prevented.

On the other hand, if the chance flag is set to off (step S4312: No), the MPU 51 terminates the performance type setting process.

<Steps S4314-S4316>
If the first special symbol game executed as the variation is the last first special symbol game in which the pending continuous performance is executed (step S4308 or step S4309 is Yes), that is, if the value of the pending continuous performance execution counter, which indicates the remaining number of times the pending continuous performance is executed, is 0, then it is determined whether or not the chance eye flag, which indicates that a chance eye performance is set as the pending continuous performance, is set to ON (step S4314).

If the chance symbol flag is set to ON (step S4314: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance symbol flag to OFF (step S4315), and sets the final chance symbol flag to ON (step S4316) to indicate that the chance symbol animation to be executed as a continuous animation in that variation is the last chance symbol animation, and then terminates the animation type setting process. The final chance symbol flag is referenced in step S4402 of the stop symbol combination setting process shown in Figure 99 below to determine whether or not to set a chance symbol as a stop symbol combination.

On the other hand, if the chance flag is set to off (step S4314: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4317.

<Steps S4317-S4319>
If the chance flag is set to off (step S4314: No), it is determined whether the same-colored symbol flag, which indicates that a same-colored symbol performance is set as a retained continuous performance, is set to on (step S4317). If the same-colored symbol flag is set to on (step S4317: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same-colored symbol flag to off (step S4318), and sets the final same-colored symbol flag to on, which indicates that the same-colored symbol performance to be executed as a retained continuous performance in that variation is the last same-colored symbol performance (step S4319), and ends the performance type setting process. The final same-colored symbol flag is referenced in step S4406 of the stop symbol combination setting process in Figure 99 described later, in order to determine whether or not to set a same-colored symbol as a stop symbol combination.

On the other hand, if the same-colored symbol flag is set to off (step S4317: No), that is, if the last consecutive hold animation performed in that variation is neither a chance symbol animation nor a same-colored symbol animation, the MPU 51 terminates the animation type setting process.

<Step S4320>
If the flag indicating that a pending consecutive performance has started is set to ON (step S4302: Yes), that is, if a pending consecutive performance is to be performed in the first special game that is to be performed as that variation, then, as shown in Figure 95, the MPU 51 sets the pending consecutive performance for that variation (step S4320) and proceeds to step S4321.

For the variable spin, the reserved continuous animation set in any of steps S4108 to S4110 of the reserved continuous animation setting process in Figure 88 is set. However, as described later, if a fourth chance-eye animation can be set to be executed as a jackpot confirmation animation even though the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable spin is a loss, a process is executed to change the reserved continuous animation executed for that variable spin from a chance-eye animation to a same-colored symbol animation to prevent inconsistencies between the jackpot lottery result and the reserved continuous animation (step S4362 in Figure 98).

<Step S4321>
If a reserved continuous performance is set for the variation (step S4320), the MPU 51 determines whether the chance eye flag, which indicates that a chance eye performance is set as a reserved continuous performance, is set to ON (step S4321). If the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S4321: Yes), the process moves to step S4322. If the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S4321: No), the process moves to step S4325.

<Steps S4322-S4324>
If the chance eye flag, which indicates that a chance eye animation is set as a pending continuous animation, is set to ON (step S4321: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the chance eye count counter, which indicates the number of times the chance eye animation has been performed as a pending continuous animation in the first special feature game (step S4322), and determines whether the value of the chance eye count counter after the addition is 4 (step S4323). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the spin in question is the first special feature game in which the fourth chance eye animation is performed as a pending continuous animation.

If the value of the chance event counter after addition is 4 (step S4323: Yes), the chance event temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S4324), and the process proceeds to step S4328. On the other hand, if the value of the chance event counter after addition is not 4 (step S4323: No), the process proceeds to step S4325.

As mentioned above, the upper limit of the chance symbol count counter (the number of times the chance symbol animation is executed consecutively as a consecutive hold animation in the first special symbol game) is 4 when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution of the chance symbol animation as a consecutive hold animation is a jackpot. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of holds for the first special symbol game is 4, and the number of first special symbol games in which the consecutive hold animation is executed consecutively is also 4. When the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as identical numbers, and it is not possible to stop and display a chance symbol. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to execute the chance symbol consecutively in four first special symbol games, in the fourth first special symbol game which notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, for example, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the high-speed spinning game before the reach animation is executed, and then, after the reach animation, it is stopped and displayed as identical numbers. Thus, in this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the continuous hold animation is a jackpot, and the chance symbol animation as a continuous hold animation is executed consecutively for four first special symbol games, the chance symbol is temporarily displayed before the decorative symbols stop displaying matching numbers in the fourth first special symbol game. Therefore, in step S4324, the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON in order to temporarily display the chance symbol before the decorative symbols stop displaying matching numbers. This chance symbol temporary stop flag is referenced in step S4409 of Figure 100 when setting the combination of decorative symbol stop display for the fourth first special symbol game when the chance symbol animation as a continuous hold animation is executed consecutively for four first special symbol games.

<Step S4325>
If the chance event flag is set to off (step S4321: No), or if the value of the chance event count counter after addition is not 4 (step S4323: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game in question is a jackpot (step S4325). That is, the MPU 51 determines, in the same way as in step S4309 above, whether a jackpot game will be executed after the end of the question, or whether the reserved first special symbol game will be executed.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the variation is a jackpot (step S4325: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is executed after the end of the variation, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4328. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the variation is not a jackpot (step S4325: No), that is, if the first special symbol game that was held in reserve is executed after the end of the variation, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4326.

<Steps S4326 and S4327>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the variation is not a jackpot (step S4325: No), that is, if the first special symbol game that was held in reserve is executed after the end of the variation, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter, which indicates the remaining number of times the reserved continuous performance will be executed (step S4326). The MPU 51 then determines whether the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter after the subtraction is 0, that is, whether the first special symbol game executed as the game is the last first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance will be executed (step S4327).

Then, if the value of the count counter for the number of consecutive pending animations after subtraction is 0 (step S4327: Yes), that is, if the first special feature game to be executed as the game is the last first special feature game in which the consecutive pending animation is executed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4329. On the other hand, if the value of the count counter for the number of consecutive pending animations after subtraction is not 0 (step S4327: No), that is, if the first special feature game to be executed as the game is not the last first special feature game in which the consecutive pending animation is executed, the MPU 51 terminates the animation type setting process.

<Step S4328>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the variation is a jackpot (step S4325: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the variation, the MPU 51 clears the reserve continuous performance execution count counter, which indicates the remaining number of times the reserve continuous performance is executed, in order to make the first special symbol game executed as the variation the last first special symbol game for which the reserve continuous performance is executed (step S4328), and proceeds to step S4329.

<Step S4329>
If the value of the count of executions of the pending consecutive performance after subtraction is 0 (step S4327: Yes), or if the count of executions of the pending consecutive performance, which indicates the remaining number of executions of the pending consecutive performance, is cleared (step S4328), that is, if the first special feature game to be executed as the game is the last first special feature game in which the pending consecutive performance is executed, the MPU 51 sets the pending consecutive performance execution flag, which indicates that the pending consecutive performance has started, to off (step S4329), and proceeds to step S4330.

<Step S4330>
In step S4330, the MPU 51 determines whether the chance eye flag, which indicates that a chance eye animation is set as a pending continuous animation, is set to ON. If the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S4330: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4331, and if the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S4330: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4333.

<Steps S4331 and S4332>
If the chance flag is set to ON (step S4330: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance flag to OFF (step S4331), clears the chance count counter (step S4332), and terminates the performance type setting process.

<Steps S4333 and S4334>
If the chance flag is set to off (step S4330: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the same-colored symbol flag, which indicates that the same-colored symbol performance is set as a continuous hold performance, is set to on (step S4333). If the same-colored symbol flag is set to on (step S4333: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same-colored symbol flag to off (step S4334) and terminates the performance type setting process.

On the other hand, if the same-colored symbol flag is set to off (step S4330: No), that is, if the pending continuous performance is not a chance symbol performance or a same-colored symbol performance, but a mini-character performance or a zone performance (mode performance), the MPU 51 terminates the performance type setting process.

<Step S4335>
If, in step S4301 of Figure 93, it is determined that the second number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S4301: No), and there are reserved balls for the second special symbol game, the MPU 51 determines whether the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to ON or OFF (step S4335), as shown in Figure 96. The second special symbol special effect setting flag is a flag used to start the second special symbol special effect (see Figures 87(B) and 87(C)) in the second special symbol game that is executed as that variation. This second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to ON in step S4203 of the second special symbol special effect setting process in Figure 92 when a second reserved ball command is received, which is sent when a game ball 99 is entered into the second prize-winning slot 315 due to the second prize-winning slot 315 being opened for a long time in a long-open regular symbol game.

If the second special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S4335: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4336. If the second special effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S4335: No), the process proceeds to step S4341.

<Steps S4336 and S4337>
If the second special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S4335: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second special effect execution flag to ON, indicating that the second special effect has started (step S4336), and sets the second special effect setting flag to OFF (step S4337), and proceeds to step S4338.

<Step S4338>
In step S4338, the MPU 51 determines whether the "Electric Mechanism Long Open" flag, which indicates that the second prize slot 315 is long open (a long-open winning game is being executed), is set to ON. If the "Electric Mechanism Long Open" flag is set to ON (Step S4338: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4339. If the "Electric Mechanism Long Open" flag is set to OFF (Step S4338: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4342.

<Steps S4339 and S4340>
If the "Electric mechanism long opening" flag is set to ON (step S4338: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process to terminate the electric mechanism long opening animation (see Figure 87(A)) (step S4339), sets the "Electric mechanism long opening" flag to OFF (step S4340), and proceeds to step S4342. That is, the electric mechanism long opening animation (see Figure 87(A)) is terminated when either the start of the second special animation (see Figure 87(A)) or the chain of the electric mechanism 315b is met. In other words, the second special animation is executed with priority over the electric mechanism long opening animation.

<Step S4341>
If it is determined in step S4335 that the second special effect setting flag is set to off (step S4335: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second special effect execution flag, which is set to on in step S4336 when the second special effect is started, is set to on (step S4341).

Then, if the second special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S4341: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4342. If the second special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S4341: No), the process proceeds to step S4352 in Figure 97.

<Steps S4342 and S4343>
In step S4342, the MPU 51 sets the second special symbol game animation for the second special symbol game to be executed as the variation. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether the pending continuous animation execution flag is set to ON (step S4343). The pending continuous animation execution flag is a flag that indicates that a pending continuous animation has started, and is set to ON in step S4311 of Figure 94 above when it is scheduled that a pending continuous animation will be executed in the first special symbol game that is executed after the first special symbol game in which a pending continuous animation was executed. That is, in step S4343, it is determined whether the pending continuous animation will be resumed in the first special symbol game that is executed after the completion of all second special symbol games in which the second special symbol animation is executed.

Then, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S4343: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4344. If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S4343: No), the process proceeds to step S4345.

<Step S4344>
If the flag for executing the pending continuous performance is set to ON (step S4343: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the capture image display information in the display variation pattern command sent from the sound lamp control device 5 to the display control device 6 (step S4344) in order to display a capture image 77 (see Figure 87(C)) on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special symbol game performance, which is executed after all second special symbol games in which the second special performance is executed have finished, indicating that the pending continuous performance will be resumed in the first special symbol game. Then, the process moves to step S4345. As a result, the capture image 77 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special symbol game performance (see Figure 87(C)).

Furthermore, if the flag for executing the pending continuous performance is set to off (step S4343: No), that is, if the pending continuous performance is not executed in the first special symbol game that is executed after all second special symbol games in which the second special performance is executed, the processing in step S4344 is skipped. Therefore, if the pending continuous performance is not executed in the first special symbol game that is executed after all second special symbol games in which the second special performance is executed, the capture image 77 will not be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the second special symbol game performance (see Figure 87(B)).

Here, the captured image is displayed as a reduced image of the screen of the continuous hold animation that was being executed on the symbol display unit 341 during the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation. This captured image 77 is displayed when the continuous hold animation was being executed during the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, and when the continuous hold animation is being executed during the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation (see Figure 73(B)). In other words, the captured image 77 explicitly or suggests during the execution of the second special feature animation that the continuous hold animation was being executed during the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, and that the continuous hold animation will be executed during the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation.

Thus, in this embodiment, the captured image 77 clearly or suggests that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special game before the execution of the second special animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation. Therefore, the possibility of the player forgetting that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special game before the execution of the second special animation is significantly reduced, and the player can understand that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation. As a result, even if the continuous hold animation is resumed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation, the player's feeling of discomfort regarding the continuous hold animation being performed in the first special game after the execution of the second special animation is significantly reduced. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the continuous hold animation that was performed before the execution of the second special animation after the completion of the second special animation.

In particular, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time in a game with a long opening, players become more engrossed in whether or not the game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 compared to when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a short time in a game with a short opening. Therefore, players are more likely to forget that a continuous hold animation was performed before the execution of the second special symbol game. Also, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time in a game with a long opening, game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 more easily (more balls enter) compared to when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a short time in a game with a short opening, resulting in more second special symbol games in which the second special symbol animation is executed (the execution time of the second special symbol animation is longer). Therefore, the time between the end of the reserve continuous performance before the execution of the second special feature performance (when the second special feature performance begins) and the resumption of the reserve continuous performance upon the end of the second special feature performance becomes longer. Furthermore, compared to when the first special feature game is executed, players pay more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special feature game in which the second special feature performance is executed is a jackpot. Thus, in a long-opening normal feature jackpot game, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time, compared to a short-opening normal feature jackpot game, players are more likely to forget that a reserve continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special feature game. Therefore, explicitly indicating or suggesting that a reserve continuous performance was executed in the first special feature game prior to the execution of the second special feature performance is highly effective.

Furthermore, since the captured image 77 is displayed as a reduced image of the screen of the hold-continuous performance that was being performed on the symbol display unit 341 during the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature performance, the type of hold-continuous performance that was being performed during the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature performance is clearly indicated or suggested, and the type of hold-continuous performance that will be performed during the first special feature game after the completion of the second special feature performance is clearly indicated or suggested. For example, in this embodiment, four types of hold-continuous performances are set: same-color symbol performance, chance symbol performance, mini-character performance, and zone performance (mode performance) (see Figures 90 and 91). In the captured image 77 shown in Figure 87(C), it is clearly indicated or suggested that during the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature performance, a chance symbol performance was being performed as a hold-continuous performance, in which the decorative symbol stops at "113" (see Figure 91(B)), which is a chance symbol. This allows players to understand not only that a continuous hold animation was performed during the first special feature game before the second special feature animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation, but also the type of continuous hold animation. Therefore, players are less likely to feel uncomfortable when the continuous hold animation resumes during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation, and the decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the continuous hold animation that was running before the second special feature animation ends is further prevented.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the captured image 77 is displayed in a reduced size in the lower left area of the symbol display unit 341. However, for a certain period at the end of the second special feature animation and/or at the start of the hold-continuous animation performed after the end of the second special feature animation, the captured image may be displayed across the entire symbol display unit 341. For example, the captured image may be displayed as a so-called stage change animation, where the stage animation (background animation) from the previous special feature game is changed in the current special feature game. By displaying the captured image across the entire symbol display unit 341 for a certain period at the end of the second special feature animation and/or at the start of the hold-continuous animation performed after the end of the second special feature animation, the transition from the execution of the second special feature animation in the second special feature game to the execution of the hold-continuous animation in the first special feature game can be performed smoothly and without any sense of incongruity.

<Step S4345>
If the flag for executing the pending continuous performance is set to off (step S4343: No), or if the flag for executing the pending continuous performance is set to on (step S4343: Yes), and capture image display information is set in the display variation pattern command (step S4344), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as that variation is a jackpot (step S4345). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a jackpot game is executed after the execution of the second special symbol game executed as that variation.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the variation is a jackpot (step S4345: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the second special symbol game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4346. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the variation is not a jackpot (step S4345: No), that is, if a jackpot game is not executed after the end of the second special symbol game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4349.

<Step S4346>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the variation is a jackpot (step S4345: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the long-open entry counter (step S4346) and proceeds to step S4347. Here, the value of the long-open entry counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second entry hole 315 while the second entry hole 315 is long-open (during the execution of the long-open regular symbol jackpot game). That is, if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the second special symbol game executed as the variation, the MPU 51 sets the number of unexecuted second special symbol games to 0.

<Steps S4347 and S4348>
In step S4347, the MPU 51 determines whether the pending continuous performance execution flag, which indicates that a pending continuous performance has started, is set to ON (step S4347). If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S4347: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance execution flag to OFF (step S4348) and proceeds to step S4351. If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S4348: No), the process proceeds to step S4351.

<Steps S4349 and S4350>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game performed as the variation is not a jackpot (step S4345: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the long-open prize counter (step S4349) and determines whether the value of the long-open prize counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4350). If the value of the long-open prize counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4350: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4351, and if the value of the long-open prize counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4350: No), the performance setting process is terminated.

Here, if the value of the long-open winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4350: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol game in question is the last second special symbol game in which the second special symbol special effect is executed, the processing in steps S4347 and S4348 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S4351. As a result, if the reserve continuous effect execution flag is set to ON, the reserve continuous effect execution flag is not set to OFF. Therefore, the reserve continuous effect is resumed in the first special symbol game executed after the last second special symbol game in which the second special symbol special effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the continuous hold animation is resumed in the first special feature game executed after the last second special feature game in which the second special feature animation is performed. However, if the value of the long-open winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4350: Yes), the process may be moved to step S4347, thereby preventing the continuous hold animation from resuming in the first special feature game executed after the last second special feature game in which the second special feature animation is performed.

<Step S4351>
In step S4351, the MPU 51 sets the special effect execution flag, which indicates that the second special effect has started, to off (step S4349), and terminates the effect type setting process. As a result, the second special effect to be executed in the second special game executed as that variation is executed as the final second special effect.

<Steps S4352 and S4353>
If it is determined in step S4341 that the flag for executing the second special effect is set to off (step S4341: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the flag indicating that the electric mechanism 315b, which was briefly open during the short-open normal-win game, has been closed is set to on (step S4352), as shown in Figure 97. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 is restricted due to the end of the short-open normal-win game, and whether the number of game balls 99 entering the second prize slot 315 does not increase.

Then, if the short-open/closed flag is set to ON (step S4352: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the short-open/closed flag to OFF (step S4353) and proceeds to step S4354. On the other hand, if the short-open/closed flag is set to OFF (step S4352: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4358 in Figure 98.

<Step S4354>
If the short-open/closed flag is set to ON (step S4352: Yes), or if the short-open/closed flag is set to OFF (step S4353), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance symbol flag is set to ON (step S4354). The chance symbol flag is a flag that indicates that a chance symbol performance is set as a reserved continuous performance. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a chance symbol performance is set as a reserved continuous performance when the electric mechanism 315b, which was briefly open in the short-open normal winning game, is closed, and determines whether or not a chance symbol performance is executed as a reserved continuous performance in the second special game which is executed when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 in the short-open normal winning game.

Then, if the chance flag is set to ON (step S4354: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4355. If the chance flag is set to OFF (step S4354: No), the process proceeds to step S4358 in Figure 98.

<Steps S4355 and S4356>
If the chance event flag is set to ON (step S4354: Yes), the MPU 51 adds the value of the chance event count counter, the value of the hold continuous performance count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter (step S4355), and determines whether the added value is 4 or more (step S4356).

Here, the value of the Chance Eye Count Counter represents the number of times the Chance Eye演出 (Chance Eye演出) was executed as a continuous hold animation during the first special symbol game, and the value of the Continuous Hold Animation Count Counter represents the number of remaining first special symbol games during which the continuous hold animation is executed. Therefore, the sum of the Chance Eye Count Counter value and the Continuous Hold Animation Count Counter value is the number of first special symbol games during which the initially set continuous hold animation is executed. Furthermore, the Short Opening Entry Counter value represents the number of second special symbol games executed when 99 game balls enter the second entry slot 315 during a short opening normal symbol win game, and also the number of second special symbol games during which the continuous hold animation is executed. Therefore, the sum of the Chance Eye Count Counter value, the Continuous Hold Animation Count Counter value, and the Short Opening Entry Counter value is the maximum number of special symbol games (first and second special symbol games) during which the Chance Eye演出 (Chance Eye演出) is executed consecutively as a continuous hold animation.

On the other hand, as mentioned above, if the chance symbol animation is performed consecutively in four or more special symbol games as part of a continuous hold animation, it becomes a jackpot confirmation animation that clearly indicates a jackpot. Therefore, when the chance symbol animation is set as a continuous hold animation, and the second special symbol game is executed as a result of the entry of 99 game balls into the second prize slot 315 during a short-opening normal symbol jackpot game, if the jackpot lottery result for each special symbol game in which the chance symbol animation is performed is a loss, an inconsistency may arise between the result clearly indicated by the consecutive execution of the chance symbol animation as a continuous hold animation and the result of the jackpot lottery.

Therefore, when a chance symbol animation is set as a continuous hold animation, by determining whether the sum of the chance symbol count counter, the continuous hold animation count counter, and the short-open winning counter is 4 or more, it becomes possible to determine in advance whether there may be an inconsistency between the result explicitly shown by the continuous execution of the chance symbol animation as a continuous hold animation and the result of the jackpot lottery.

Then, if the sum of the value of the chance event counter, the value of the hold-continuous performance counter, and the value of the short-open winning counter is 4 or more (step S4356: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4357. If the sum is not 4 or more (step S4356: No), the process proceeds to step S4358 in Figure 98.

<Step S4357>
If the sum of the value of the chance event counter, the value of the hold-continuous performance counter, and the value of the short-open winning counter is 4 or more (Step S4356: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as that variation, is a loss (Step S4357). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether a jackpot is included in the result of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as that variation.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as the current variation, is a loss (step S4357: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4360 in Figure 98. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as the current variation, is not a loss (step S4357: No), and if a jackpot is included in the result of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as the current variation, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4358 in Figure 98.

<Steps S4358 and S4359>
If the short-open/close flag is set to off (step S4352: No), if the chance eye flag is set to off (step S4354: No), if the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the hold-continuous performance count counter, and the value of the short-open winning counter is not 4 or more (step S4356: No), or if a jackpot is included in the jackpot lottery results for all subsequent special feature games, including the second special feature game executed as the variation (step S4357: Yes), then the MPU 51 executes the process in step S4358. That is, if there is no inconvenience in the chance eye performance being executed four or more times in a row as a hold-continuous performance in special feature games, the MPU 51 determines in step S4358 whether the hold-continuous performance execution flag, which indicates that a hold-continuous performance has started, is set to on. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set a hold-continuous performance as a performance for the second special feature game executed as the variation.

Then, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S4358: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance as the performance for the second special symbol game to be executed as that variation (step S4359), and executes the processes of steps S4325 to S4334 in Figure 95 above.

On the other hand, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S4358: No), that is, if the pending continuous performance is not set as the performance for the second special symbol game to be executed as that variation, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4304 in Figure 93, sets a normal performance as the performance for the second special symbol game to be executed as that variation (setting the performance in the same way as in the first embodiment described above), and ends the setting of the performance type.

Thus, when the flag for executing the pending continuous performance is set to ON (step S4358: Yes), by setting the pending continuous performance as a performance for the second special symbol game to be executed as that variation (step S4359), when the pending continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as that variation, and it is scheduled that the pending continuous performance will be executed in the next pending first special symbol game, even if a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 due to a short opening of the second prize slot 315, the second special symbol performance will not be executed in the second special symbol game resulting from the game ball 99 entering the second prize slot 315 when the second prize slot 315 is short-opened, and the pending continuous performance will continue to be executed. Therefore, when a player is experiencing a continuous hold animation during a first special symbol game, and it is planned that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next first special symbol game, they will not feel any discomfort if the continuous hold animation is not performed after the second special symbol game, which is triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 during its short opening. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the non-performance of the continuous hold animation in the first special symbol game that follows the second special symbol game.

In particular, when the second prize slot 5 is briefly open, it is more difficult for game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315 compared to when it is fully open (fewer balls enter). Since players are more likely to remember that a continuous hold animation was performed before the second special feature game, the effect of having the continuous hold animation continue without the second special feature animation being executed during the second special feature game when game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 (when the second prize slot 315 is briefly open) is significant.

Furthermore, in the case of a short opening of the second prize slot 315, where it is difficult for game balls 99 to enter, it is expected that the number of game balls 99 entering the second prize slot 315 will be small. Therefore, even if the continuous hold animation is executed continuously in the second special feature game when game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 in the case of a short opening, the number of consecutive executions of the continuous hold animation will not increase significantly. Thus, it is unlikely that players will feel any discomfort with the continuous hold animation being executed continuously in the second special feature game. On the contrary, the continuous hold animation being executed continuously in the second special feature game allows for the effective use of the continuous hold animation in the second special feature game.

<Steps S4360 and S4361>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as the variation in question, is a loss (step S4357: Yes), that is, if there is a possibility of inconsistency between the result indicated by the continuous execution of the chance symbol演出 as a hold-continuous演出 and the result of the jackpot lottery, the MPU 51 sets the chance symbol flag to off (step S4360) and clears the value of the chance symbol count counter (step S4361), thereby restricting the continuous execution of the chance symbol演出.

<Steps S4362 and S4363>
If processing is performed to restrict the continuous execution of the chance symbol effect (steps S4360 and S4361), the MPU 51 sets the same-colored symbol effect as the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game executed as that variation (step S4362), and sets the same-colored symbol to ON to indicate that the same-colored symbol is set as the reserved continuous effect (step S4363), and proceeds to step S4364. In other words, the MPU 51 changes the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game executed as that variation from the chance symbol effect to the same-colored symbol effect.

Here, as mentioned above, the "Chance Symbol" animation becomes a guaranteed jackpot animation when it is executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games. Therefore, by changing the consecutive hold animation for the second special symbol game executed in that spin from the "Chance Symbol" animation to the "Same-Colored Symbol" animation, the consecutive execution of the "Chance Symbol" animation in four or more special symbol games is avoided. This prevents inconsistencies between the result indicated by the consecutive execution of the "Chance Symbol" animation as a consecutive hold animation and the result of the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, as mentioned above, the "Same-Colored Symbol" animation is an animation that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot, and even if it is executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games, it does not become a guaranteed jackpot animation. Therefore, by changing the consecutive hold animation for the second special symbol game executed in that spin from the "Chance Symbol" animation to the "Same-Colored Symbol" animation, even if the "Same-Colored Symbol" animation is executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games, the result of the jackpot lottery will not be indicated as a jackpot by the consecutive hold animation, thus preventing inconsistencies between the consecutive hold animation and the result of the jackpot lottery.

In this embodiment, when the consecutive hold animation changes from a chance symbol animation to a same-colored symbol animation, the consecutive hold animation is executed consecutively for multiple special feature games. However, the consecutive hold animation may be interrupted by executing a special feature game that displays images of complete misses (neither chance symbols nor same-colored symbols) between the time the chance symbol animation changes to the same-colored symbol animation. In this case, it is prevented that the player will feel uncomfortable with the consecutive hold animation being executed consecutively for four or more special feature games. Furthermore, by interrupting the consecutive hold animation, it is possible to give the player the illusion that a new consecutive hold animation, the same-colored symbol animation, has started after the chance symbol animation as a consecutive hold animation has ended. This allows for a smooth and seamless transition from the chance symbol animation to the same-colored symbol animation, and also makes it appear as if the change from the chance symbol animation to the same-colored symbol animation did not occur. By making it appear as if the switch from the chance symbol animation to the same-colored symbol animation did not occur, the inconvenience caused by the consecutive execution of the chance symbol animation can be avoided without the player noticing. By the way, in order to avoid the inconvenience of the chance symbol animation being executed four or more times consecutively in a special symbol game, if the chance symbol animation is changed to a same-colored symbol animation, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same-colored symbol animation is executed will be a loss. Therefore, there is a concern that players will realize that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same-colored symbol animation is executed will be a loss. Therefore, by disguising the fact that the change from the chance symbol animation to the same-colored symbol animation did not occur, it is possible to prevent players from realizing that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same-colored symbol animation is executed will be a loss.

<Step S4364>
If the continuous hold animation for the second special symbol game executed as the variation is changed from a chance symbol animation to a same-colored symbol animation, the MPU 51 adds the value of the short-opening prize counter to the value of the continuous hold animation execution count counter (step S4364).

Here, the value of the "Reserved Consecutive Performance Execution Count Counter" indicates the number of remaining special feature games in which the reserved consecutive performance will be executed. The value of the "Short Opening Entry Counter" is the number of game balls 99 that enter the second entry slot 315 when the second entry slot 315 is briefly open (a short opening normal feature win game is being executed) and the number of reserved balls M for the second special feature game has not reached its upper limit. Therefore, the MPU 51 adds the value of the "Short Opening Entry Counter" to the value of the "Reserved Consecutive Performance Execution Count Counter" to reset the value of the "Reserved Consecutive Performance Execution Count Counter," which indicates the number of remaining special feature games in which the reserved consecutive performance will be executed, to a value that includes the number of reserved consecutive performances executed in the second special feature game.

<Steps S4365 and S4366>
When the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter is reset (step S4364), the MPU 51 clears the value of the short-open prize counter (step S4365), sets the short-open close flag to off (step S4366), executes the processes of steps S4325 to S4334 in Figure 95 above, and terminates the performance type setting process.

[Stop Symbol Combination Setting Process]
Next, an example of the procedure for setting the stop symbol combination, which is performed in step S4028 of the command determination process in Figure 86, will be explained with reference to Figures 99 and 100. The stop symbol combination setting process is the process of setting the symbol combinations when decorative symbols that are displayed in a variable manner in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game are displayed as stop symbols. Here, Figures 99 and 100 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for setting the stop symbol combination.

<Step S4401>
In the stop symbol combination setting process, in step S4401, the MPU 51 first determines whether the chance symbol flag, which indicates that a chance symbol effect is set as a hold-continuous effect, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set a chance symbol (see Figure 91(B)) as the stop symbol combination.

Then, if the chance flag is set to ON (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4404; if the chance flag is set to OFF (step S4401: No), the process proceeds to step S4402.

<Steps S4402 and S4403>
If the chance event flag is set to off (step S4401: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the final chance event flag, which indicates that the chance event to be performed as a continuous hold event in that variation is the last chance event, is set to on (step S4402).

Then, if the final chance flag is set to ON (step S4402: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final chance flag to OFF (step S4403) and proceeds to step S4404. On the other hand, if the final chance flag is set to OFF (step S4402: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4405.

<Step S4404>
If the chance symbol flag is set to ON (step S4401: Yes), or if the last chance symbol flag that was set to ON is set to OFF (step S4403), the MPU 51 sets a chance symbol (see Figure 91(B)) as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed, and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process.

Furthermore, regarding the type of chance symbol to be displayed during the fluctuation, it is conceivable to set up a chance symbol type selection table that associates a chance symbol type counter with individual chance symbols, and then select the chance symbol from the chance symbol type selection table based on the value of the chance symbol type counter when setting the stop symbol combination.

<Step S4405>
If the chance symbol flag and the final chance symbol flag are set to off (step S4402: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the same-color symbol flag, which indicates that the same-color symbol performance is set as the hold-continuous performance, is set to on (step S4405). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set the same-color symbol (see Figure 91(B)) as the stop symbol combination.

Then, if the same-color pattern flag is set to ON (step S4405: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4408; if the same-color pattern flag is set to OFF (step S4405: No), the process proceeds to step S4406.

<Steps S4406 and S4407>
If the same-colored symbol flag is set to off (step S4405: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the final same-colored symbol flag, which indicates that the same-colored symbol performance to be performed as a pending continuous performance in that variation is the last same-colored symbol performance, is set to on (step S4406).

Then, if the final same-color pattern flag is set to ON (step S4406: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final same-color pattern flag to OFF (step S4407) and proceeds to step S4408. On the other hand, if the final same-color pattern flag is set to OFF (step S4406: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4409 in Figure 100.

<Step S4408>
If the same-colored pattern flag is set to ON (step S4405: Yes), or if the last same-colored pattern flag that was set to ON is set to OFF (step S4407), the MPU 51 sets the same-colored pattern (see Figure 91(B)) as the combination of decorative patterns to be displayed at stop (step S4408), and terminates the stop pattern combination setting process.

Furthermore, regarding the type of same-colored symbol to be displayed as a stop during the fluctuation, it is conceivable to set up a same-colored symbol type selection table that associates a same-colored symbol type counter with individual same-colored symbols, and then select the same-colored symbol from the same-colored symbol type selection table based on the value of the same-colored symbol type counter when setting the stop symbol combination.

<Step S4409>
If no combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is set to include a chance symbol and a same-colored symbol, the MPU 51 determines whether the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON, as shown in Figure 100 (step S4409). The chance symbol temporary stop flag is a flag used to temporarily stop and display a chance symbol before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, during the high-speed rotation of decorative symbols before a reach) when the result of the jackpot lottery for that spin is a jackpot and the fourth chance symbol performance is executed as a continuous hold performance in that spin.

Then, if the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S4409: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4410. If the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to OFF (step S4409: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4413.

<Steps S4410-S4412>
If the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S4409: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance symbol as the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed (step S4410), and sets the matching symbols as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed (step S4411). Then, the MPU 51 sets the chance symbol temporary stop flag to OFF (step S4412), and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process.

The chance combinations that trigger a temporary stop can be set in the same manner as in step S4404 described above. The matching combinations that trigger a stop can be set in the same manner as in step S2103 of the command determination process shown in Figure 37 of the first embodiment described above.

<Step S4413>
If no combination of decorative symbols to be displayed as a stop symbol or a matching color symbol is set, and no combination of decorative symbols to be displayed as a stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the combination of decorative symbols to be displayed as a normal setting (setting the combination of decorative symbols in the same way as in the first embodiment described above), and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the opening modes of the second prize entry point 315 by the electric mechanism 315b are set as follows: a short opening, which makes it difficult for game balls 99 to enter the second prize entry point 315, and a long opening, which is longer than the short opening, making it easier for game balls 99 to enter the second prize entry point 315. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second special symbol game for the second reserved ball takes precedence over the first special symbol game for the first reserved ball.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is scheduled that the continuous hold animation will be performed in the next reserved first special symbol game, if a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 due to a short opening of the second prize slot 315, the continuous hold animation that was being performed in the first special symbol game will continue to be performed in the second special symbol game which is performed after the end of the first special symbol game as a variation. In other words, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is scheduled that the continuous hold animation will be performed in the next reserved first special symbol game, even if a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 due to a short opening of the second prize slot 315, the second special symbol animation will not be performed in the second special symbol game resulting from the game ball 99 entering the second prize slot 315 when the second prize slot 315 is short-opened, and the continuous hold animation will continue to be performed. Therefore, when a player is experiencing a continuous hold animation during a first special symbol game, and it is planned that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next first special symbol game, they will not feel any discomfort if the continuous hold animation is not performed after the second special symbol game, which is triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 during its short opening. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the non-performance of the continuous hold animation in the first special symbol game that follows the second special symbol game.

In particular, when the second prize slot 5 is briefly open, it is more difficult for game balls 99 to enter the second prize slot 315 compared to when it is fully open (fewer balls enter). Since players are more likely to remember that a continuous hold animation was performed before the second special feature game, the effect of having the continuous hold animation continue without the second special feature animation being executed during the second special feature game when game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 (when the second prize slot 315 is briefly open) is significant.

Furthermore, in the case of a short opening of the second prize slot 315, where it is difficult for game balls 99 to enter, it is expected that the number of game balls 99 entering the second prize slot 315 will be small. Therefore, even if the continuous hold animation is executed continuously in the second special feature game when game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 in the case of a short opening, the number of consecutive executions of the continuous hold animation will not increase significantly. Thus, it is unlikely that players will feel any discomfort with the continuous hold animation being executed continuously in the second special feature game. On the contrary, the continuous hold animation being executed continuously in the second special feature game allows for the effective use of the continuous hold animation in the second special feature game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a chance symbol animation, which guarantees a jackpot when executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games, is determined to be executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games, and if the results of the jackpot lottery for the fourth and subsequent special symbol games from the first special symbol game in which the chance symbol animation began are all misses, the consecutive hold animation is changed from the chance symbol animation to a same-colored symbol animation, which does not guarantee a jackpot even when executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games, before the number of special symbol games in which the chance symbol animation is executed reaches four. This prevents the consecutive execution of the chance symbol animation in four or more special symbol games, thereby preventing inconsistencies between the result indicated by the consecutive execution of the chance symbol animation as a consecutive hold animation and the result of the jackpot lottery.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is scheduled that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next reserved first special symbol game, when a game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315 due to the long opening of the second prize slot 315, the second special symbol special animation is performed in the second special symbol game which is performed after the end of the first special symbol game as a variation, and a captured image 77 of the continuous hold animation that was performed in the first special symbol game is displayed. In other words, the captured image 77 clearly indicates or suggests that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special animation. This significantly reduces the possibility that the player may forget that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special animation, and allows the player to understand that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special animation. Therefore, even if the continuous hold animation resumes during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation has been executed, the player's discomfort with the continuous hold animation resuming during the first special feature game after the second special feature animation has been executed is significantly reduced. As a result, the decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the continuous hold animation that was running before the second special feature animation has been executed is prevented.

In particular, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time in a game with a long opening, players become more engrossed in whether or not the game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 compared to when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a short time in a game with a short opening. Therefore, players are more likely to forget that a continuous hold animation was performed before the execution of the second special symbol game. Also, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time in a game with a long opening, game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 more easily (more balls enter) compared to when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a short time in a game with a short opening, resulting in more second special symbol games in which the second special symbol animation is executed (the execution time of the second special symbol animation is longer). Therefore, the time between the end of the reserve continuous performance before the execution of the second special feature performance (when the second special feature performance begins) and the resumption of the reserve continuous performance upon the end of the second special feature performance becomes longer. Furthermore, compared to when the first special feature game is executed, players pay more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special feature game in which the second special feature performance is executed is a jackpot. Thus, in a long-opening normal feature jackpot game, when the second prize slot 315 is opened for a long time, compared to a short-opening normal feature jackpot game, players are more likely to forget that a reserve continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special feature game. Therefore, explicitly indicating or suggesting that a reserve continuous performance was executed in the first special feature game prior to the execution of the second special feature performance is highly effective.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to fifth embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

[Seventh Embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, in a gaming machine in which the opening mode of the second prize slot by the electric mechanism is set to a first opening (short opening) which is a first time, and a second opening (long opening) which is a second time, longer than the first time, when a game ball enters the second prize slot in a game where the reserve continuous performance is scheduled to be performed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special symbol games, the reserve continuous performance is performed continuously in the second special symbol game when the game ball enters the second prize slot in the case of a short opening, while in the second special symbol game when the game ball enters the second prize slot in the case of a long opening, the second special symbol special performance is performed, and it is explicitly stated or suggested at the time of the execution of the second special symbol special performance that the reserve continuous performance was performed before the execution of the second special symbol special performance.

However, in addition to the short and long opening modes, there are various other opening modes for the second prize slot operated by the electric mechanism in a gaming machine. For example, there are opening modes where the second prize slot has only one opening time, opening modes where the second prize slot opens multiple times per regular spin, and opening modes where the opening time of the second prize slot differs between low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the opening modes for the second prize slot are not necessarily limited to short and long openings.

Furthermore, in gaming machines, the opening configuration of the second prize slot generally includes configurations that facilitate the entry of game balls into the second prize slot, such as the long opening configuration described in the sixth embodiment above. On the other hand, even during gameplay, there are situations where game balls do not flow down the game area of the game board. For example, this can occur when a player stops shooting game balls during a reach animation or when the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol reaches its limit, or when game balls do not reach the game area of the game board due to a shooting malfunction or other reasons. Therefore, even if the second prize slot is opened in a manner that facilitates the entry of game balls, the number of game balls entering the second prize slot may be small due to delays in shooting game balls by the player or due to a shooting malfunction. For example, even if the second prize slot is opened in such a way that the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol game can reach the maximum limit, the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol game may not reach the maximum limit, resulting in a small number of balls entering the second prize slot, similar to the number of balls entering the second prize slot during a short opening, such as two or fewer.

In the sixth embodiment described above, when the opening mode of the second prize slot is long-open, regardless of the number of balls entering the second prize slot, the special effect for the second special feature game is executed in response to the entry of game balls into the second prize slot, corresponding to the long-open opening mode of the second prize slot. On the other hand, as described above, even when the opening mode of the second prize slot is long-open, the number of reserved balls in the second special feature game may not reach the upper limit, and the number of game balls entering the second prize slot may be a small number, such as two or fewer, similar to the number of balls entering the second prize slot when it is short-open. Therefore, even though the opening mode of the second prize slot is short-open, a situation similar to when the effect for a long-open opening is executed occurs. In other words, a substantial inconsistency arises between the opening mode of the second prize slot and the effect.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special symbol game as the variation, and it is planned that the continuous hold animation will be performed in the next reserved first special symbol game (for example, Special 1 Variation + Special 1 Hold 1 + Special 1 Hold 2 (see Figure 72(A))), regardless of the opening mode of the electric mechanism, when a game ball enters the second prize slot due to the opening of the second prize slot, the animation in the second special symbol game, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot, differs depending on whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot is greater than zero but less than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, one or two balls) or whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot exceeds a predetermined number (three or more balls). Specifically, as shown in Figure 101(A), if the number of balls entering the second prize slot is greater than zero but less than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, one or two balls), the continuous hold animation is performed continuously in the second special symbol game, similar to the short opening of the second prize slot in the sixth embodiment described above. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 101(B), if the number of balls entering the second prize slot exceeds a predetermined number (3 or more), the second special feature animation is executed in the second special feature game, similar to the long-open second prize slot in the sixth embodiment described above. Furthermore, it is explicitly indicated or suggested at the time of the execution of the second special feature animation that a continuous hold animation had been executed prior to the execution of the second special feature animation.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the continuous hold animation is scheduled to be executed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special feature games, if a game ball enters the second prize slot due to its opening, the animation executed in the second special feature game differs depending on whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot is less than or equal to a predetermined number greater than zero, or whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot exceeds a predetermined number. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the continuous hold animation not being executed in the first special feature game executed after the second special feature game, regardless of the opening and closing mode of the second prize slot. Furthermore, it prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the continuous hold animation being resumed after the second special feature animation has finished.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is planned that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next first special symbol game that has been held, if a game ball enters the second prize slot due to the opening of the second prize slot, the animation performed in the second special symbol game will differ depending on whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot is less than or equal to a predetermined number greater than zero, or whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot exceeds a predetermined number. This makes it possible to handle cases where the number of game balls entering the second prize slot is small, even when the second prize slot is opened in an opening and closing manner that facilitates the entry of game balls.

The following description of this embodiment will focus on the differences from the previously described sixth embodiment, with reference to Figures 102-107.

This embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment described above in that, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special symbol game as a variation, and it is planned that the continuous hold animation will be performed again in the next first special symbol game that has been held, the animation in the second special symbol game, which is triggered by the entry of game balls into the second prize slot, is set to be different depending on whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot is less than or equal to a predetermined number greater than zero (for example, one or two balls) or greater than a predetermined number (three or more balls), regardless of the opening mode. Therefore, some of the processing procedures in the command judgment process, the second special symbol special animation setting process, and the animation type setting process differ in this embodiment compared to the sixth embodiment described above.

[Command determination process]
The command determination process in this embodiment differs from that of the sixth embodiment described above in its processing when a second hold command and an electric mechanism closing command are received.

Here, Figures 102 and 103 are flowcharts illustrating the differences in the command determination process compared to the aforementioned sixth embodiment.

<Step S4501>
As shown in Figure 102, in the command determination process of this embodiment, when a second hold command is received and the second special feature hold information is updated (steps S4015: Yes and S4016), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the electric feature opening prize counter (step S4501) and terminates the command determination process. That is, in the command determination process of this embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment described above, the number of balls entering the second prize opening 315 is not counted by distinguishing between short opening and long opening cases, but rather the number of balls entering the second prize opening 315 is counted in the electric feature opening prize counter without distinguishing between short opening and long opening cases. Also, in this embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment described above, even if a second hold command is received, the second special feature special effect setting process is not executed, and is executed in step S4502 of Figure 103, which will be described later, on the condition that an electric feature closing command is received (step S4021: Yes).

Furthermore, the electric payout counter is referenced in step S4601 of the second special effect setting process shown in Figure 104 (described later) to determine whether or not to execute the second special effect.

<Step S4502>
As shown in Figure 103, in the command determination process of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives an electric mechanism closing command (step S4021: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special effect setting process when the electric mechanism is closed, without distinguishing between short-open and long-open cases (step S4502). That is, in this embodiment, the second special effect setting process, which was executed when the second hold command was received in the sixth embodiment described above, is set when the electric mechanism closing command is received.

[Second Special Feature Setting Process]
The second special feature setting process in this embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment described above, in that it determines whether or not to execute the second special feature based on whether or not the second special feature is short-lived or long-lived, in that it determines whether or not to execute the second special feature based on the number of balls that enter the second prize-winning opening 315 until the electric mechanism 315b closes.

Here, Figure 104 is a flowchart illustrating the differences between the second special effect setting process of this embodiment and the sixth embodiment described above.

<Steps S4601-S4603>
As shown in Figure 104, when the electric mechanism 315b is closed, if both the second special effect setting flag and the second special effect execution flag are set to off (No in both steps S4201 and S4202), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the electric mechanism opening prize counter, which indicates the number of game balls 99 that have entered the second prize entry opening 315, is 3 or more (step S4601).

If the value of the electric payout counter is 3 or greater (Step S4601: Yes), the second special feature special effect setting flag is set to ON in order to start the second special feature special effect (Step S4602), and the second special feature special effect setting process is terminated.

If the value of the electric payout counter is not 3 or greater (Step S4601: No), or if the value of the electric payout counter is 2 or less, the flag indicating that the second special feature animation will not start is set to ON (Step S4603), and the second special feature animation setting process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the second special feature animation is executed when the value of the electric payout counter is 3 or more. However, the second special feature animation may also be executed when the value of the electric payout counter is 4 or more, or when the value of the electric payout counter is 2 or more, etc.

[Performance Type Setting Process]
The performance type setting process of this embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment described above in that, regardless of the opening and closing mode of the electric mechanism 315b, the second special performance is set for the second special game as a variation when the electric mechanism 315b is fully open, regardless of the number of game balls 99 that enter the second prize slot 315.

Figures 105 to 107 are flowcharts illustrating the differences between the performance type setting process of this embodiment and the aforementioned sixth embodiment.

<Steps S4701-S4703>
As shown in Figure 105, when a special effect for the second special symbol game is set for the second special symbol game as a variation, the MPU 51 clears the value of the electric payout counter if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game as a variation is a jackpot (step S4345: Yes) (step S4701). On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game as a variation is not a jackpot (step S4345: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the electric payout counter (step S4702) and determines whether the value of the electric payout counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4703).

In other words, in this embodiment, instead of the short-opening and long-opening prize counters of the sixth embodiment described above, a common electric-operated opening prize counter is provided for both short-opening and long-opening. Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of the processing related to the long-opening prize counter in the sixth embodiment described above, the processing of steps S4701 to S4703 related to the electric-operated opening prize counter is executed.

<Step S4704>
If it is determined in step S4341 that the second special feature special effect setting flag is set to off (step S4341: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4704 in Figure 106 and determines whether the second special feature special effect not set flag, which indicates that the second special feature special effect will not be started, is set to on. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the second special feature game in question is the first second special feature game to be executed when the number of game balls 99 entering the second prize pocket 315 is two or less.

Then, if the second special feature special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S4704: Yes), that is, if the second special feature game in question is the first second special feature game to be executed when two or fewer game balls 99 enter the second prize entry point 315, the MPU 51 sets the second special feature special effect setting flag to OFF (step S4705) and proceeds to step S4354.

On the other hand, if the second special feature special effect setting flag is set to off (step S4704: No), that is, if the second special feature game as the variation is not the first second special feature game executed when the number of game balls 99 entering the second prize entry 315 is two or less, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4358 in Figure 107, and then executes the same process as in the sixth embodiment described above.

<Steps S4705 to S4708>
If the flag indicating that the second special effect will not be started is set to ON (step S4704: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the flag indicating that the second special effect will not be started to OFF (step S4705), and proceeds to step S4354, thereby executing the same process as in the sixth embodiment described above.

However, in this embodiment, as described above, a common electric power opening prize counter is provided for both short and long openings, instead of the short opening prize counter and long opening prize counter of the sixth embodiment described above. Therefore, in this embodiment, the processing related to the long opening prize counter in the sixth embodiment described above is replaced by the processing of step S4706 related to the electric power opening prize counter, and the processing of steps S4707 and S4708 in Figure 107.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the number of balls entering the second prize slot 315 is less than or equal to a predetermined number greater than zero (for example, one or two balls), the continuous hold animation is continuously executed in the second special symbol game, similar to the short opening of the second prize slot 315 in the sixth embodiment described above. On the other hand, if the number of balls entering the second prize slot 315 exceeds a predetermined number (three or more balls), the second special symbol animation is executed in the second special symbol game, similar to the long opening of the second prize slot 315 in the sixth embodiment described above. Therefore, even in gaming machines other than those where the opening mode of the second prize slot 315 by the electric mechanism 315b is set to either a short opening that makes it difficult for game balls to enter the second prize slot 315 or a long opening that makes it easy for game balls to enter the second prize slot 315—that is, regardless of the opening and closing mode of the second prize slot 315—a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the non-execution of the reserve continuous performance in the first special symbol game, which is executed after the end of the second special symbol game, is prevented. Furthermore, a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the reserve continuous performance that was being executed before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, after the end of the second special symbol special performance, is also prevented.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold animation is being performed in the first special feature game as a variation, and when game balls 99 enter the second prize slot 315 due to its opening, the animation performed in the second special feature game differs depending on whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot 315 is less than or equal to a predetermined number greater than zero, or whether the number of balls entering the second prize slot 315 exceeds a predetermined number. This allows for handling cases where the number of game balls entering the second prize slot 315 is small, even when the second prize slot 315 is opened in a manner that facilitates ball entry.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design modifications similar to those described in the first to sixth embodiments are possible, to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, various modifications are possible in the aforementioned sixth and seventh embodiments. For example, in the aforementioned sixth and seventh embodiments, a reduced image of the continuous hold animation performed in the first special game was displayed as the capture image 77 in the lower left region of the symbol display unit 341. However, the capture image 77 may be displayed by other methods as long as the variation of the decorative symbols is visible. For example, the capture image 77 may be displayed as a background animation on the back side of the decorative symbols across the entire symbol display unit 341, or it may be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols with a visible density (transparency), or only the outline may be displayed on the front or back side of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the explicit indication or suggestion that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the second special feature animation was performed, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the second special feature animation was performed, is not limited to the display of the capture image 77. Other methods are acceptable as long as the variation of the decorative symbols is clearly visible. For example, such explicit indication or suggestion, indicating that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the second special feature animation was performed, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the second special feature animation, may be displayed as a specific image different from the capture image 77, such as an icon image, a character image, or an image combining two or more of these.

Furthermore, while the capture image 77 may be displayed for the entire duration of the execution of the second special symbol game, it may also be displayed for a portion of the execution period, for example, only for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game, only for a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, or for both a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game and a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game. There are no particular limitations on the display period of the capture image 77. Also, when the second special symbol game is executed multiple times consecutively, the capture image 77 does not need to be displayed for all of the second special symbol games. For example, it may be displayed only for the first second special symbol game executed, only for the last second special symbol game executed, or for both the first and last second special symbol games. The number of times the capture image 77 is displayed may differ from the number of times the second special symbol special effect is executed.

Furthermore, the fact that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, such as a captured image, and the fact that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation, may be indicated or suggested by display means other than the symbol display unit 341 on which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. For example, such indication or suggestion may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 which displays a non-set value, which is a game setting value other than the set value, which is a game setting value set in the game machine 10. Also, if there is a display means other than the symbol display unit 341 on which the variable display of decorative symbols and image animations are performed, such as a sub-LCD display unit, the indication or suggestion may be displayed on this sub-LCD display unit or other display means. In this way, the fact that a continuous hold animation was performed in the first special feature game before the execution of the second special feature animation, and that a continuous hold animation will be performed in the first special feature game after the execution of the second special feature animation, can be clearly indicated or suggested by other display means, such as a sub-LCD display separate from the symbol display unit 341 where the image animation is performed. This allows the indication or suggestion to be displayed on the other display means without interfering with the display of the decorative symbols or image animation on the symbol display unit 341. As a result, both the variable display/image animation and the indication or suggestion can be displayed reliably and appropriately without interfering with each other's visibility.

Furthermore, the second special effect is not limited to the examples in Figures 87(B) and 87(C), and may take other forms. For example, the second special effect may display other images, such as character images, in place of or in addition to the text images, or it may perform a predetermined sound effect using the speaker 26 in place of or in addition to the effect on the pattern display unit 341.

Furthermore, the second special effect only needs to be an effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a bonus will be granted to the player when certain conditions are met. It is not necessary for the decorative symbols to stop and display as a winning symbol (e.g., matching numbers), nor is it necessary for the effect to be a probability-increasing jackpot when these conditions are met. Examples of predetermined conditions include the decorative symbols becoming a "reach" (a near-win) or a specific effect being executed. In other words, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines other than those where the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 is always a probability-increasing jackpot. For example, the present invention can be applied not only to loop probability-increasing machines like the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, but also to ST machines such as V-ST machines and Type 1/Type 2 mixed machines, where the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game balls 99 into the second prize slot 315 includes wins other than probability-increasing jackpots.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned sixth and seventh embodiments, the continuous hold animation and the second special symbol special animation were executed in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, and were not executed in the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state, which are the high-frequency support modes. However, the continuous hold animation and the second special symbol special animation may be executed in both or one of the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state, which are the high-frequency support modes.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned sixth and seventh embodiments, when a continuous hold animation is executed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special symbol games, except for the exception to avoid inconsistencies where the chance-eye animation is executed consecutively for four or more special symbol games, a single type of continuous hold animation is executed for each first special symbol game. However, different continuous hold animations may be executed for each first special symbol game, and multiple types of continuous hold animations (e.g., mini-character animation and zone animation) may be executed simultaneously in a single first special symbol game, as long as the combination is executable as an animation.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned sixth and seventh embodiments, the timing for changing the type of the reserved continuous performance may be any timing at which no inconsistency occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content revealed by the predetermined reserved continuous performance. For example, it may be any time between the special feature game executed after the special feature game executed at the stage when it is determined that an inconsistency may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content revealed by the reserved continuous performance, and the special feature game in which an inconsistency occurs (for example, the special feature game executed for the fourth time from the start of the predetermined reserved continuous performance). In other words, the timing for changing the type of reserved continuous performance may be either the first special feature game or the second special feature game, as long as no inconsistency occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content revealed by the reserved continuous performance.

Of course, even if a series of hold-and-reserve animations other than the chance-eye animation is being performed, and the number of times the hold-and-reserve animation is performed in the special feature game exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 4 times), the type of hold-and-reserve animation may be changed. In other words, even if no inconvenience occurs when a single type of hold-and-reserve animation is performed consecutively more than a predetermined number of times, the type of hold-and-reserve animation may be changed. By changing the type of hold-and-reserve animation when no inconvenience occurs when a single type of hold-and-reserve animation is performed consecutively more than a predetermined number of times, it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored when a single type of hold-and-reserve animation is performed consecutively in many special feature games, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the consecutive performance of a single type of hold-and-reserve animation in many special feature games.

Furthermore, not only when changing the type of consecutive hold animation to prevent inconsistencies between the results of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the consecutive hold animation, but also when changing the type of consecutive hold animation, if the display time for the variation of the hold for the first special symbol game that triggered the start of the consecutive hold animation is long, that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery for that hold is a jackpot, or if a reach animation with a high probability of winning a jackpot is executed, the type of consecutive hold animation may be changed so that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher for the specific consecutive hold animation after the change compared to the predetermined consecutive hold animation type before the change. For example, if the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change is the mini-character animation with the lowest probability of winning a jackpot, the specific consecutive hold animation after the change may be a chance eye animation, same-colored symbol animation, or zone animation (mode animation) which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the mini-character animation. If the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the change is the chance eye animation or same-colored symbol animation, the specific consecutive hold animation after the change may be a zone animation (mode animation) which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the chance eye animation and same-colored symbol animation. In this case, the difference in the probability of winning a jackpot between the modified specific consecutive hold animation and the predetermined consecutive hold animation before the modification is set to, for example, 10% or more, preferably 25% or more.

Furthermore, the change in the consecutive hold animation is not limited to just one change; it may be done multiple times.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[Other variations]
In the embodiments and modifications described above, the outer frame 14 of the gaming machine 10 is generally made of wood, but it may also be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or it may be made of metal such as iron (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Also, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the inner frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 may also be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or it may be made of metal such as iron (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Also, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10 may also be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or it may be made of metal such as iron (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the inner frame 12 is openable and closable relative to the front frame 11, and the back pack unit 13 is openable and closable relative to the inner frame 12. However, the gaming machine 10 may lock the inner frame 12 to the front frame 11 in a way that prevents it from being opened, and lock the back pack unit 13 to the inner frame 12 in a way that prevents it from being opened, using a locking means such as a single cylinder lock. Alternatively, a locking means for preventing the inner frame 12 from being opened relative to the front frame 11 and a locking means for preventing the back pack unit 13 from being opened relative to the inner frame 12 may be provided separately. In addition, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the left end of the inner frame 12 in a front view is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, thereby enabling the inner frame 12 to be openable and closable relative to the front frame 11. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the right end of the inner frame 12 in a front view is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, thereby enabling the inner frame 12 to be openable and closable relative to the front frame 11. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the left end of the back pack unit 13 in a front view is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, thereby enabling the back pack unit 13 to open and close relative to the inner frame 12. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the right end of the back pack unit 13 in a front view is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, thereby enabling the back pack unit 13 to open and close relative to the inner frame 12. Also, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the game board 31 provided by the game machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or it may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Also, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the game machine 10 is configured to have an upper tray 23 and a lower tray 24. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the lower tray 24 is omitted and only the upper tray 23 is provided. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on the right side when viewed from the front is adopted, but a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on another part, such as the left side when viewed from the front, may also be adopted. Also, a configuration in which multiple launch handles 22 are provided, such as a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on both the right and left sides when viewed from the front, may also be adopted. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, a configuration in which a touch sensor 21a capable of detecting whether or not the player is touching the launch handle 22 (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the launch handle 22) is adopted, but a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a is omitted may also be adopted for the launch handle 22. In addition, in the embodiments and modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted for the launching means capable of launching the game balls, for example, a configuration in which the game balls are launched using the elastic force of a spring or the like, or a configuration in which the game balls are launched using the wind pressure when compressed gas is ejected, may be adopted. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, when the launch handle 22 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, the system is configured to launch one game ball every 0.6 seconds, for example (100 game balls per minute). However, the system may also be configured to launch fewer than 100 game balls per minute (for example, 60), or 100 or more game balls per minute (for example, 200). The system may also be configured to launch game balls when the launch handle 22 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount. The system may also be configured to launch game balls one at a time by flicking a lever. In addition, in the embodiments and modifications described above, the system is configured to include a speaker 26 as a means for outputting sound. However, the system may also be configured to include an earphone jack in addition to the speaker 26, or in place of the speaker 26. With this configuration, the player can connect their own earphones or headphones to the earphone jack, allowing them to fully enjoy the sounds of the game machine 10 they are playing without being disturbed by the sounds of the surrounding game machines 10. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, a 7-segment display device is provided as a means for displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which begins to change based on the entry of a game ball into the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315. However, other configurations can be used as means for displaying the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol. For example, a configuration in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, or a configuration equipped with halogen lamps may be used. Also, in the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, the predetermined suggestion information was a capture image 77 displayed on the symbol display unit 341 where the decorative symbols change, but the predetermined suggestion information may be displayed on a display means other than the symbol display unit 341. In this case, it is conceivable to set up a dedicated display means for displaying predetermined suggestive information, but it is also conceivable to use a display means already provided in the gaming machine 10. That is, the predetermined suggestive information may be displayed, for example, on a 7-segment display unit 39 that displays a non-set value, which is a game setting value other than the set value, which is a game setting value set in the gaming machine 10, or on the main display unit 36 (normal symbol display unit 361, first special symbol display unit 362, second special symbol display unit 363, first reserved number display unit 364, and second reserved number display unit 365). Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, a configuration was adopted in which two LED lamps are provided as means for displaying normal symbols that start to be displayed based on the passing of a game ball through the through gate 317, but other configurations can be adopted as means for displaying normal symbols. For example, a configuration in which three or more LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration equipped with a 7-segment display device, a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, or a configuration equipped with halogen lamps may be adopted. Furthermore, in the embodiments and modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted for the display means such as the pattern display unit 341 capable of displaying decorative patterns. For example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, a plasma display device, a drum-rotating display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or a configuration combining two or more of these may be adopted. Also, in the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, when a predetermined suggestive information is to be displayed continuously, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously by continuously displaying the capture image 77 displayed on the pattern display unit 341. However, the suggestive information to be displayed is not limited to the capture image 77; other information may also be displayed. For example, it may be information that was displayed in the first special symbol game immediately before the execution of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game in which a chance-eye effect was continuously displayed. This could be the entire screen of the first special symbol game or a textual description of the images displayed on that screen. In that case, it may be the type of effect that was continuously displayed at that time, the number of big wins, the number of spins since the end of the big win, the number of reserved balls, the number of balls launched, etc., and it may be a combination of multiple of these, or just one of them. Furthermore, in the aforementioned sixth and seventh embodiments, combinations of stopped symbols such as chance symbol effects were used as the hold-continuous effects, but the system is not limited to this, as long as the player can visually perceive the continuity of the effects. For example, the display shown on the back of the symbols during the reel spin may be displayed continuously over multiple first special symbol games, and may be, for example, a specific character, characters that suggest continuous display, a display displayed as part of the background image, or the background itself. Similarly, the effects that are changed may be, as long as the player can visually perceive that a continuous effect has been changed, and may be, for example, changed to an effect that displays a specific character. In addition, in the aforementioned embodiments and modifications, the decorative symbols are not limited to numbers, but can be various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, or combinations of two or more of these. For example, the decorative symbols may be the alphabet, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, or combinations of two or more of these. In addition, in the aforementioned embodiments and modifications, the number of symbol rows in which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be, for example, two or fewer, or four or more. Furthermore, if a configuration is adopted in which there is only one row of decorative symbols, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (for example, "7") stops. Also, if a configuration is adopted in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line (effective line). In addition, in the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, a zone effect (mode effect) with a high probability of winning a jackpot was set as the hold-continuous effect, but the hold-continuous effect may also include background effects other than zone effects (mode effects). That is, multiple background effects may be set as the hold-continuous effect, and in this case, it is conceivable to set the jackpot probability of the multiple background effects to be different. Furthermore, when multiple background effects with different jackpot probability are set as the hold-continuous effect, if a low-probability background effect with a low jackpot probability is executed as the hold-continuous effect, it is conceivable to change from the low-probability background effect to a high-probability background effect with a higher jackpot probability. Of course, multiple background effects with similar levels of expectation of winning a jackpot may be set, for example, multiple low-expectation background effects with low expectations of winning a jackpot, and the background effects may be changed amongst the low-expectation background effects. Furthermore, in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted for special electric mechanisms such as opening and closing doors 319 that open and close large prize openings such as variable prize openings 316. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a rotating shaft extending substantially horizontally is provided below a plate-shaped member, and the large prize opening can be opened by the plate-shaped member rotating forward around the rotating shaft; a configuration may be adopted in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-to-back direction of the game board 31; or a configuration may be adopted in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by a wing-type member rotating left and right (clockwise and counterclockwise). Furthermore, while the embodiments and modifications described above have described so-called loop probability variation machines, in a game machine that transitions to a game state advantageous to the player, such as a probability variation game state, after the end of a jackpot game, on the condition of a V-entry in a jackpot game, such as a V-ST machine, a V-entry is provided in the large entry opening, such as the variable entry opening 316. The V-entry may be one that can always be entered when the large entry opening is open, but a configuration may be adopted in which it is opened when specific conditions are met. Specific conditions include, for example, the execution of a specific round game (for example, the first round game, the final round game). Also, if the V-entry is configured to be opened when specific conditions are met, a configuration can be adopted in which a movable member capable of opening and closing the V-entry is provided in the V-entry, and the V-entry is opened and closed by controlling the operation of the movable member. Furthermore, if the V-entry is opened when specific conditions are met, a configuration may be adopted in which the V-entry is closed by the entry of a game ball into the V-entry or after a certain period of time has elapsed. Other changes to the presentation (continuous hold presentation) may include the type of decorative symbols used in the first special symbol game, or the color of the background of the first special symbol game.

It may be a background, a part of the background of the first special symbol game, or the entire background of the first special symbol game. The timing of the change may be at the start of the variation of the first special symbol game, in the middle of the variation, at the timing when a specific event (e.g., a reach is established, a super reach develops, a special reach develops) occurs during the variation, or when the symbols stop. For example, the background effect (specific effect image) before a specific event occurs may be changed to a different type of background (predetermined effect image) at the timing when the specific event (e.g., a reach is established, a super reach develops, a special reach develops). In addition, there may be multiple large prize slots, for example, a large prize slot with a V prize slot and a large prize slot without a V prize slot may be provided separately. Furthermore, in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, various configurations can be adopted for the ordinary electric mechanism 315b, which switches whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of game balls into the starting prize entry opening, such as the second prize entry opening 315. For example, a tulip-type ordinary electric mechanism (so-called electric chu) can be adopted in which a pair of movable valves (wing members) can be opened to the left and right; a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending substantially horizontally is provided below a plate-shaped member, and the starting prize entry opening can be opened by the plate-shaped member rotating forward around the rotating shaft; a configuration in which the starting prize entry opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board 31; and a configuration in which the starting prize entry opening is opened and closed by the wing members rotating left and right (clockwise and counterclockwise). Furthermore, in each of the embodiments and modified examples described above, the number of prize balls set for each prize entry point (general prize entry point 313, first prize entry point 314, second prize entry point 315, variable prize entry point 316, etc.) is merely an example, and by appropriately changing the number of prize balls set for each prize entry point, it is possible to realize multiple types of gaming machines 10 with different specifications.

[Summary of the Invention]
The following is an overview of the inventions extracted from each of the embodiments described above. For convenience, reference numerals and other symbols may be used to explain the correspondence between each annotation and each embodiment; however, the invention related to such annotation is not limited to the specific configuration indicated by the reference numeral. Furthermore, it is possible to select and combine the configurations and processing functions described below as desired.

[Note A1']
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A storage means (41) that stores numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to multiple different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities),
Selection means (41) for selecting each of the aforementioned numerical information,
A gaming machine equipped with,
A numerical information storage means (41) that stores one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from multiple types of numerical information,
A display control means (51) that, when certain conditions are met, causes to display specific information (digits) that indicate specific numerical information (unset values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information for a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, on the display means (35, 39, 341),
Equipped with,
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A1', when certain conditions are met, specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means during a specified period. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and also to recognize the predetermined numerical information when all specific numerical information is displayed. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and consequently, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A2']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information.

[Note A3']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) that indicates a part of the multiple types of numerical information.

In gaming machines relating to Appendix A2' or Appendix A3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows players to identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the display means, and also to infer specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, players can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on special information, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A4']
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas on which the specific information is displayed.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A2' or Appendix A3', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the special information using a portion of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A4', special information is displayed using a portion of the multiple display areas of the display means that displays specific information. In other words, the display area for special information is shared with the display area for specific information. This allows both specific and special information to be displayed using a common display means, thus simplifying the control required to display both information and simplifying the configuration of the display means.

[Note A5']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A4', characterized in that the display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions (segments A to G) as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A5', the display means has multiple light-emitting areas. Such a display means can be implemented using readily available and low-cost display devices, such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with a display means that shows specific and special information while suppressing the complexity of the machine's configuration and the increase in manufacturing costs.

[Note A6']
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A4', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the specific information or special information to be displayed as an image on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A6', specific information and special information are displayed as images on the display means. Therefore, there are many options for the type of image and display method to be displayed as specific information and special information, allowing for the display of specific information and special information in diverse forms. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in identifying or inferring specific numerical information or predetermined numerical information based on the specific information and special information.

[Note A7']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A6', characterized in that the image display means (341) is capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A7', specific information and special information are displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a fluctuating image of symbols that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying a fluctuating image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that same image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine, without requiring a separate display means for displaying specific information and special information.

[Note A8']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A7', characterized in that the aforementioned prescribed period is set to a period that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A8', when certain conditions are met, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means, and a prescribed period during which predetermined information indicating predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means is set as the period for suggesting or explicitly indicating the result of the transition judgment. Therefore, it becomes possible to display the specific information together with the result of the transition judgment. For example, when a variation display image of a symbol suggesting or explicitly indicating the result of the transition judgment is displayed on the image display means, it becomes possible to simultaneously display the specific information on the image display means. This makes it possible to increase interest in suggesting or explicitly indicating the result of the transition judgment by displaying the specific information.

[Note A9']
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition is met when a game ball passes through a specific area (373).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A9', a specific condition can be met when a specific area is passed through, allowing players to easily understand when that condition has been met. This allows for greater enjoyment of the game, as players can anticipate whether or not the condition will be met. Furthermore, when a game ball passes through a specific area, the display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display. Therefore, even in situations where gameplay tends to proceed mechanically, focusing on whether or not the game ball passes through a specific area can improve the gameplay experience.

[Note A10']
The game board (31) from which the game balls are launched is further equipped with an outlet (373) on the back side for discharge,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A9', characterized in that the specified area is the discharge port (373).

[Note A11']
The machine is further equipped with multiple prize slots (313-316) from which prize balls are dispensed when game balls enter,
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) that discharges game balls that did not enter the plurality of prize-winning ports (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board (31), and a second discharge port (373) that is different from the first discharge port (318).
The gaming machine according to Appendix A10', characterized in that the specified area is the second discharge port (373).

[Note A12']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A11', characterized in that the second discharge port (373) is capable of receiving balls in the special game.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix A10' to Appendix A12', the content of specific information displayed on the display means is controlled when certain conditions are met, triggered by the game ball passing through the second discharge port into which it can enter during special gameplay. Therefore, in special gameplay, which tends to proceed mechanically, it is possible to improve the gameplay experience by drawing attention to whether or not a game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Note A13']
The aforementioned multiple prize slots (313 to 316) include a variable prize slot (316) into which game balls can be entered during the special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A12', characterized in that the second discharge port (373) allows game balls that have passed through the variable prize entry port (316) to pass through.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A13', the content of specific information displayed on the display means is controlled when certain conditions are met, triggered by a game ball passing through a second discharge port that can accommodate a game ball that has entered a variable prize slot during a special game. Therefore, during a special game, by launching a game ball into the game area and getting it into the variable prize slot, the game ball can pass through the second discharge port. As a result, during a special game, simply playing the game as usual allows the specific information to be displayed on the display means without requiring any special skill. This prevents players from avoiding playing the machine due to potential skill differences in getting the game ball into the second discharge port, compared to situations where skill differences might arise in getting the game ball into the second discharge port.

[Note A14']
The game ball that enters the variable prize entry opening (316) can pass through the third discharge opening (378), which is different from the second discharge opening (373),
A distribution means (37) that distributes the game balls that enter the variable prize entry opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A13', further comprising the above.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A14', the game balls are distributed to the second and third discharge ports by the distribution mechanism. Therefore, the gameplay is enhanced by the fact that whether or not specific conditions are met depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution mechanism. This allows players to enjoy the game by focusing on the behavior of the game balls in the distribution mechanism regarding whether or not specific conditions are met.

[Note A15']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) when the specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which the start date of the special game is set.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A15', when specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which a special game is set to begin, specific information indicating specific numerical data is displayed on the display means. Therefore, players can enjoy estimating or identifying specific numerical data, and consequently, estimating or identifying predetermined numerical data, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met during the predetermined period. Furthermore, by setting the start date of the predetermined period to coincide with a special game, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met during the special game.

[Note A16']
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A15', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the player transitions when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A16', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game state to which the player transitions when the transition determination result indicates a transition to the special game state, in the first game state where the probability of transitioning to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than that of the second game state. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game state of the so-called initial win. As a result, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, a predetermined period is always set for each initial win, guaranteeing at least one opportunity to infer or identify specific numerical information for each initial win.

[Note A17']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A15' or Appendix A16', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set between the start date of the special game and the start date of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A17', the start date of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-granting game. Therefore, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met, at least from the start of the value-granting game.

[Note A18']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A15' to Appendix A17', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A18', the end of the predetermined period is set during the special game. That is, the predetermined period begins and ends during the special game. However, the result of the transition determination is not announced during the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. To address this, by setting both the start and end dates for the predetermined period during the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decline in general interest, is improved.

[Note A19']
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A18', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R regular jackpot) that is performed in the first special game state, which is transitioned to after the end of the special game in the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state, which is reached after the special game ends. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination to the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win where the initial win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in that first special game state. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination to the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a winning streak where the initial win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in that second special game state. Instead, if the result of the transition determination to the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in that first special game state. In other words, in the case of a winning streak where the initial win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the winning streak ends. Therefore, in the case of consecutive wins, the predetermined period is set to span across the first special game at the end of the consecutive wins, resulting in a longer predetermined period compared to single wins. The more times the game transitions to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, consecutive wins have a higher probability of fulfilling specific conditions than single wins, and the more consecutive wins there are, the higher the probability of fulfilling specific conditions. This means that players benefit from a higher number of consecutive wins, not only because the expected value of the game they can win increases, but also because they can obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical data, making it easier to infer or identify that specific numerical data, and consequently, the predetermined numerical data.

[Note A20']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A18' or Appendix A19', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-granting game.

Incidentally, during the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, neither game value is awarded nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine described in Appendix A20', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the predetermined period, it becomes possible to utilize this blank period for the player to display specific information indicating specific numerical data on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Note A21']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', characterized in that the aforementioned prescribed period is set to the execution period of the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A21', specific information indicating specific numerical data is displayed on the display device during a specified period set within the special game execution period, provided certain conditions are met. This allows players to enjoy identifying specific numerical data, and consequently, estimating or identifying predetermined numerical data, based on the specific information displayed on the display device during the special game execution period (specified period), thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A22']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player, and an ending which is executed after the value-granting game (open/close execution mode) has finished.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A21', characterized in that the aforementioned prescribed period is set at the ending.

Incidentally, during the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, neither game value is awarded nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine described in Appendix A22', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the predetermined period, it becomes possible to utilize this blank period for the player to display specific information indicating specific numerical data on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Note A23']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display at least the specific numerical information (number) indicating the specific numerical information (non-set value) if the specific condition is met during a predetermined period.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A21' or Appendix A22', characterized in that the aforementioned prescribed period is set at least after the expiration of the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A23', if certain conditions are met during a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical data will be displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the specific conditions are met during the predetermined period, and then enjoy the game by focusing on the specific information displayed on the display after the predetermined period has elapsed. This enhances the enjoyment of the game throughout the entire period, from the start of the predetermined period to the display of the specific information after the predetermined period has elapsed.

[Note A24']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player,
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the transition occurs when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A21' to Appendix A23', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R regular jackpot) that is performed in the first special game state, which is transitioned to after the end of the special game in the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A24', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game played in the special game state to which the player transitions when the transition judgment result in the first game state results in a transition to the special game state. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game played in the first special game state to which the player transitions after the completion of the aforementioned specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game played, regardless of whether it is the first win or a winning streak. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win, ends with the last special game played, and specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. This makes it possible to provide a gameplay feature that presents specific numerical information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is played. Furthermore, in the case of a winning streak, it is also possible to present a number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in this winning streak all at once after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, players can access a large amount of information about specific data within a short period after a predetermined time has elapsed. This improves the convenience of identifying or inferring specific numerical data, and ultimately predetermined numerical data, based on specific information indicating specific numerical data.

[Note A25']
The aforementioned predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game that is initiated within the said predetermined period.
The aforementioned prescribed period is set after the expiration of the aforementioned specific period.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A23' or Appendix A24', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific conditions are met during the specific period.

The gaming machine described in Appendix A25' includes a specific period set for special games that begin within a predetermined period. That is, if multiple special games begin within a predetermined period, such as in a winning streak, multiple special periods are set according to the number of special games that begin within that period. Furthermore, after the expiration of a specific period, specific information indicating specific numerical data is displayed on the display means. Therefore, if multiple specific periods exist within the predetermined period, it is determined whether specific conditions are met for each specific period, and if the specific conditions are met during that period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period has elapsed. This allows players to focus on whether specific conditions are met for each special game, and if the specific conditions are met, they can focus on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the special games.

[Note A26']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) that includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the value-granting game ends.
The aforementioned specific period includes the period during which the value-granting game is performed.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A25', characterized in that the aforementioned prescribed period is set at the ending.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A26', it is determined whether specific conditions are met during each specific period, including the value-granting game. If the specific conditions are met during that period, specific information is displayed in the ending sequence, which is executed after the value-granting game ends. Therefore, the value-granting game draws attention to whether or not the specific conditions are met, and if the conditions are met, the ending sequence after the value-granting game ends draws attention to the content of the specific information. This effectively utilizes the ending of the special game to display specific information, and also draws attention to the progress of the game throughout the special game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A27']
The aforementioned specific condition is that a game ball passes through a specific area (373), and that the player wins a display lottery that is executed as a result of the game ball passing through the specific area (373).
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A21' to Appendix A26', characterized in that the aforementioned specified period is after the winner of the aforementioned display lottery.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A27', specific information is displayed on the display means upon winning a display lottery triggered by the game ball passing through a specific area. By conducting a display lottery as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not they have won the lottery (whether or not the specific information is displayed) when the game ball passes through the specific area, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when conducting a display lottery as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easier to adjust the difficulty and variability of meeting the specific condition (the difficulty and variability of the display of specific information). This allows for various gameplay elements regarding the display of specific information, depending on the winning probability and lottery method in the display lottery.

[Note A28']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the number of specific conditions that are met during a predetermined period when specific conditions are met during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A28', when specific conditions are met during a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions met during that period. This allows the player to infer specific numerical information based on the information displayed on the display means, and to identify all specific numerical information once all of it is displayed. Furthermore, by identifying all specific numerical information, it is also possible to recognize predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy inferring or identifying specific numerical information, and consequently, predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. In particular, since specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions met during the predetermined period, the player can enjoy the game's progression by focusing on the number of specific conditions met, while anticipating that many of those conditions will be met during the predetermined period.

[Note A29']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A28', characterized in that the display means is an information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the multiple types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A29', the display means is an information display means. Therefore, players can visually grasp specific information based on the content displayed by the display means. This makes it easier for players to grasp specific information, and consequently, to identify or infer specific numerical information based on that information.

[Note A30']
The aforementioned specific information includes multiple individual pieces of information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual pieces of information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A29', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays a number of individual pieces of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions that are met during the predetermined period, using the plurality of display areas of the information display means.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A30', the specific information includes multiple individual pieces of information, and the information display means has multiple display areas for displaying these individual pieces of information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display the multiple individual pieces of information necessary for identifying the specific numerical information in any of the multiple display areas. This allows for gameplay that adjusts the difficulty of identifying or inferring the specific numerical information depending on which of the multiple individual pieces of information is displayed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A31']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30', characterized in that each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the corresponding individual information from the specified information.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A31', each of the multiple display areas displays corresponding individual pieces of information from among multiple pieces of individual information. Therefore, it becomes possible to identify or infer specific numerical information based on these correspondences. This allows players to enjoy identifying or inferring specific numerical information while anticipating which individual piece of information will be displayed when certain conditions are met.

[Note A32']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30' or Appendix A31', characterized in that the information display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A32', the information display means has multiple light-emitting areas. Such information display means can be implemented using readily available and low-cost display devices, such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with information display means that can display specific information while suppressing the complexity of the machine's configuration and the increase in manufacturing costs.

[Note A33']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30' or Appendix A31', characterized in that the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A33', the information display means can display a specific image that allows for the identification or inference of specific numerical information. Therefore, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process leading to its display. As a result, the specific numerical information can be identified or inferred in a variety of patterns depending on the form of the specific image and the process leading to its display. This improves the gameplay experience related to identifying or inferring specific numerical information.

[Note A34']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A33', characterized in that the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A34', a specific image is displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a symbol that suggests or clearly indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is to be displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine, without the need to provide a separate display means for displaying the specific image.

[Note A35']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or letters using the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine described in any of Appendix A29' to Appendix A34', characterized in that the specified information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A35', the information display means is capable of displaying numbers or letters, and specific information is displayed corresponding to numbers or letters. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or letters, making it easier to identify or infer specific numerical information. This allows players to easily enjoy identifying or inferring specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge.

[Note A36']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A29', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the specific information to be displayed in the individual display units (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information, according to the number of specific conditions that are met during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A36', specific numerical information is displayed in an individual display unit corresponding to a particular numerical information among multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display unit is defined for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped and identified based on the type of individual display unit that displays it. This enhances the convenience of identifying specific numerical information.

[Note A37']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A36', characterized in that the display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) to either a display state in which the specific information is displayed or a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A37', the individual display unit is controlled to either a displayed state or a non-display state. Therefore, specific numerical information can be easily identified depending on the state of the individual display unit. This enhances the convenience of identifying specific numerical information.

[Note A38']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A36' or Appendix A37', characterized in that the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, or staggered pattern.

[Note A39']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A36' to Appendix A38', characterized in that the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In gaming machines relating to Appendix A38' and Appendix A39', it becomes possible to create information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Note A40']
A display order determining means (51) that determines the display order in which the display means (35, 39, 341) display the specific information when a predetermined condition is met,
Furthermore,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information during the specified period based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) when the specific conditions are met during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A40', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when predetermined conditions are met. By determining the display order of specific information based on the fulfillment of these predetermined conditions, the display order of the specific information is prevented from becoming monotonous. This prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and prevents the display of specific information from becoming repetitive.

[Note A41']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40', characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the power to the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A41', the display order of specific information displayed on the display means is determined when the gaming machine's power is turned on. However, the gaming machine's power is often turned on before the gaming hall opens. Therefore, since the display order of specific information is determined when the gaming machine's power is turned on, the display order of specific information is determined each business day. This prevents the display order of specific information from becoming fixed, thus preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly on different business days and preventing the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note A42']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40', characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A42', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by the storage of predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thus preventing the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note A43']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40', characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period begins.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A43', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined period begins. This determines the display order of the specific information for each predetermined period. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from becoming fixed, thus preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note A44']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40', characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the special game is initiated.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A44', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a special game is initiated. This means that the display order of specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, the display order of specific information is prevented from becoming fixed, thus preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note A45']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40', characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the value-granting game is initiated.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A45', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a value-granting game is initiated. This means that the display order of specific information is determined for each value-granting game. Therefore, the display order of specific information is prevented from becoming fixed, thus preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note A46']
A display content storage means (512) that stores the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period,
During a special period different from the aforementioned prescribed period (for example, a standby period), an operating means (21) is operated by the player to cause the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) to be displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341),
When a player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means (21) during the aforementioned special period, a second display control means (51) causes the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) to be displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', further comprising the above.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A46', the content of specific information displayed during a prescribed period can be displayed during a special period different from the prescribed period through operation of the control means. This allows the player to display the content of specific information displayed during the prescribed period on the second display means by operating the control means during the special period. Therefore, if the player wishes to confirm the content of specific information displayed during the prescribed period—for example, if they have forgotten the content, or if there has been a change of players—they can confirm the content during the special period. As a result, by confirming the content displayed during the prescribed period during the special period, the player can identify or infer specific numerical information, and then decide whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine based on that identification or inference.

[Note A47']
The system further comprises a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A46', characterized in that the special period is set during a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being played.

In gaming machines related to Appendix A47', the special period during which the display content can be checked within the specified period is set to a period when neither special games nor notification games are being played. This allows players to carefully and thoroughly check the display content at their own pace, without time constraints, and decide whether or not to play the game on the machine.

[Note A48']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing the display content of a plurality of specific pieces of information that have been displayed during a plurality of different specified periods.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A46' or Appendix A47', characterized in that the display content control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means (21) by a player during the special period.

[Note A49']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A48', characterized in that the display content control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display content selected by the player from the display content of a plurality of specific pieces of information during the special period, by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Note A50']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A49', characterized in that when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means (21) during the special period, the display content control means (51) causes two or more of the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) to be displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

In gaming machines relating to appendices A48' to A50', at least one of the display contents of multiple specific pieces of information displayed during multiple specified periods can be displayed on the second display means. For example, the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of multiple specific pieces of information stored in the display contents storage means (512) can be displayed on the second display means. In this case, since the player can select the display contents to be shown on the second display means from the display contents of multiple specific pieces of information, the player can confirm the display contents they desire according to their own will. This allows for efficient confirmation of display contents while avoiding confirmation of previously confirmed information or information with a small amount of information, thus enabling efficient confirmation of display contents. Furthermore, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, allowing for efficient confirmation of the presented contents in this case as well.

[Note A51']
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A46' to A50', characterized in that the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Note A52']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A51', characterized in that the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means that displays a pattern (decorative pattern) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix A51' and Appendix A52', a first display means is provided for a specified period and a second display means is provided for a special period, and specific information is displayed by different display means during the specified period and the special period, respectively. Therefore, during the specified period, if information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means, it is possible to prevent the display of that information from being obstructed. For example, if the second display means is a variable display image display means, it is possible to prevent obstruction of the visibility of the image (e.g., image effects) displayed on this variable display image display means. On the other hand, during the special period (e.g., standby state), the content of the specific information to be displayed during the specified period is presented by a second display means such as a variable display image display means in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Generally, because variable display image display means have a large display area, visibility is improved when the content of the specific information to be displayed during the specified period is presented on the variable display image display means. In addition, variable display image display means may be used to set various settings such as effects and characters that are executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, by displaying the content of specific information for a specified period on the variable display image display device, it becomes possible to display the content of specific information for that period on the variable display image display device using the same operations as those used for various settings. This improves the convenience of displaying the content of specific information on the variable display image display device during special periods.

[Note A53']
The aforementioned specific information includes multiple pieces of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A8', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific pieces of information in a predetermined display order on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a specific condition is met during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A53', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. This predetermined order can be set as appropriate; for example, it can be set to an order that facilitates the narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information, an order that makes narrowing down and recognition difficult, an order that facilitates the determination of high or low probability of favorable outcomes, or an order that makes such determination difficult. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note A54']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A53', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific pieces of information on the display means in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period if the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A54', if the number of times a specific condition is met within a predetermined period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information within that period are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order. In this way, when the specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order, allowing the player to grasp the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times the specific condition is met within the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Furthermore, the gaming machine described in Appendix A54' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific pieces of information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display device, and therefore information that negates high setting values, such as the highest setting value, is not presented.

[Note A55']
A display order selection means (51) that selects one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific pieces of information during the predetermined period,
The system further comprises a selected display order storage means (51) that stores the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A53', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the plurality of specific pieces of information to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A55', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a specified period of time according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that define the priority order of displaying multiple pieces of specific information. Therefore, by adjusting the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier to display multiple pieces of specific information in a particular display order, make it harder to display multiple pieces of specific information in a particular display order, and prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed in a particular display order. This allows for the display of multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rates of the multiple display orders, thus preventing the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note A56']
The aforementioned multiple display orders are defined for each of the aforementioned multiple types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A55', characterized in that the display order selection means (51) selects one of the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A56', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display means for a specified period, according to a display order selected from multiple display orders based on predetermined numerical information. In other words, since it is possible to set multiple display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This allows the display order to be set based on factors such as whether the probability of a favorable outcome corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific pieces of information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Note A57']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A56', characterized in that the plurality of display orders include display orders with different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A57', it is possible to make it easier or more difficult to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where the probability of selecting all display orders is the same, it becomes easier to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, more difficult to identify a specific non-set value. This allows for adjustments to the likelihood of a high setting value or a low setting value.

[Note A58']
The aforementioned multiple display order includes the first display order with the lowest priority of the specific information that shows the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of favorable determination among the multiple favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A57', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the first display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than that of any other display order.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A58', the first display order is likely to select the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable outcome among multiple favorable outcome probabilities corresponding to multiple specific pieces of information. That is, excluding the favorable outcome probability corresponding to predetermined numerical information, the specific numerical information indicating the lowest favorable outcome probability and the most unfavorable outcome for the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, because the most unfavorable specific numerical information is displayed last, the possibility of both the most unfavorable favorable outcome probability and a more favorable outcome probability remains until the last piece of specific information is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to realize that they are in the most unfavorable favorable outcome probability, thus preventing premature termination of gameplay on the machine and preventing a decline in the machine's utilization rate.

[Note A59']
The specified information includes first specified information indicating the specified numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specified numerical information, and second specified information indicating the specified numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of favorable determination among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities.
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the priority of the first specific information and the second specific information is the two lowest,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A57', characterized in that the second display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than any other display order (including 100%).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A59', the second display order is likely to be selected, which has a low priority for the specific information that shows the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of advantageous judgment among multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific pieces of information. Therefore, similar to the gaming machine described in Appendix A58', it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the advantageous judgment probability is the most unfavorable to the player, thus preventing the game from ending prematurely and suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the second display order has a low priority for the specific information that shows the specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of advantageous judgment among multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific pieces of information. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp not only that the advantageous judgment probability is unfavorable to the player, but also that it is advantageous to the player. In this way, by having a low priority for the two pieces of specific information that show the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability that is unfavorable to the player and the advantageous judgment probability that is advantageous to the player, it becomes difficult for the player to determine until the end which of the two conflicting advantageous judgment probabilities is advantageous to the player, thus making it possible to increase interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Note A60']
The plurality of display orders include a third display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability that is higher in probability than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower in priority than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability that is lower in probability than the first favorable determination probability.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A57', characterized in that the third display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than any other display order (including 100%).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A60', the priority of specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than the first favorable judgment probability is set to a higher selection rate for the third display order, which is lower than the selection rate for specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than the first favorable judgment probability. This high selection rate for the third display order allows players to expect that the favorable judgment probability is higher than the actual first favorable judgment probability up until they determine the first favorable judgment probability. This allows players to enjoy speculating on specific information (predetermined information) while expecting a higher favorable judgment probability up until they determine the first favorable judgment probability.

[Note A61']
The plurality of display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability with a lower probability than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability with a higher probability than the first favorable determination probability.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A57', characterized in that the fourth display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than any other display order (including 100%).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A61', the priority of the specific information indicating a specific numerical value corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than the first favorable judgment probability is set to a higher selection rate for the fourth display order, which is lower than the selection rate for the specific numerical information indicating a favorable judgment probability higher than the first favorable judgment probability. Because the selection rate for this fourth display order is set to a higher rate, the specific information indicating a specific numerical value corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than the first favorable judgment probability remains hidden immediately before the first favorable judgment probability is determined. As a result, the final candidates for the first favorable judgment probability become the actual first favorable judgment probability and the specific information indicating a specific numerical value corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than that first favorable judgment probability. Consequently, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the first favorable judgment probability that is advantageous to the player is ultimately recognized as the first favorable judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), thus improving the player's satisfaction when the setting value is determined.

[Note A62']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', further comprising a display restriction means (51) that restricts the display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during periods other than the specified period.

In gaming machines related to Appendix A62', the display of specific information on the display device is restricted outside of the specified period. Therefore, the display of specific information is implemented as a reward for players who perform a game that meets specific conditions for displaying that information. This prevents other players from taking advantage of the reward received by the previous player to obtain specific information needed to identify or infer specific numerical information.

[Note A63']
The system further comprises a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A62', characterized in that the period other than the aforementioned specified period is a standby period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is being performed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A63', the display of specific information on the display device is restricted during the standby period when neither special gameplay nor notification gameplay is being performed. Here, player changes generally occur during the standby period. Therefore, by restricting the display of specific information on the display device during the standby period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or inferring specific numerical information.

[Note A64']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A62' or Appendix A63', characterized in that the display restriction means (51) restricts the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period, during a period other than the specified period.

In gaming machines related to Appendix A64', the display of specific information previously shown on the display means during the specified period is restricted outside of the specified period. In other words, specific information is only displayed during the specified period, and the display of past specific information display history is restricted outside of the specified period. This makes it impossible to verify previously displayed specific information based on the display history, thus more effectively preventing other players from taking advantage of the benefits obtained by previous players to identify or infer specific numerical information.

[Note A65']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the plurality of specific information (numbers) to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a first display order when a first specific condition is met during a predetermined period, and causes the plurality of specific information (numbers) to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a first display order different from the first display order when a second specific condition different from the first specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A65', when a first specific condition is met, multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display means in a first display order, and when a second specific condition is met, multiple specific pieces of information (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the multiple specific pieces of information is set according to the type of specific condition that is met. Therefore, the display order of the multiple specific pieces of information is made difficult for the player to recognize, preventing the easy identification or recognition of multiple specific numerical pieces of information based on the specific information. This prevents the player from quickly realizing that the probability of a favorable outcome is low, even when it corresponds to a low probability of favorable outcome. As a result, even when the probability of favorable outcome is low, the game on the gaming machine is prevented from ending prematurely, thus preventing a decrease in the machine's operating rate.

[Note A66']
The first specific condition includes that a first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A65', characterized in that the second specific condition includes the storage of a second predetermined numerical information (set value) in the numerical information storage means (41) that is different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A66', the first specific condition includes the storage of first predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes the storage of second predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is determined based on the predetermined numerical information, and multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display means for a specified period according to that display order. In other words, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical piece of information. This allows the display order to be set based on whether the probability of determining a favorable outcome corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific pieces of information for each predetermined numerical piece of information.

[Note A67']
A display order selection means (51) that, when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is met, selects one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific pieces of information during the predetermined period,
The system further comprises a selected display order storage means (51) that stores the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A65' or Appendix A66', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the plurality of specific pieces of information to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A67', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a specified period of time according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that define the priority order of displaying multiple pieces of specific information. Therefore, by adjusting the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier to display multiple pieces of specific information in a particular display order, make it harder to display multiple pieces of specific information in a particular display order, and prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed in a particular display order. This allows for the display of multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rates of the multiple display orders, thus preventing the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note A68']
The aforementioned multiple display orders are defined for each of the aforementioned multiple types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A67', characterized in that the display order selection means (51) selects one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A68', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display means for a specified period, according to a display order selected from multiple display orders based on predetermined numerical information. In other words, since it is possible to set multiple display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This allows the display order to be set based on factors such as whether the probability of a favorable outcome corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific pieces of information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Note A69']
The system further includes a second display control means (41) that causes a second display means (45) to display predetermined information (digits) indicating the predetermined numerical information,
The aforementioned display means (35, 39, 341) are provided in a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided in a position where the player's view is restricted.
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A69', specific information other than predetermined information is displayed on a first display means located in a position visible to the player, while predetermined information is displayed on a second display means (45) located in a position where the player's visibility is restricted. That is, when certain conditions are met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means located in a position visible to the player during a specified period. As a result, the player can identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can also recognize the predetermined numerical information when all specific numerical information is displayed. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and consequently, inferring or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by displaying predetermined information on the second display means, which is positioned in a location where the player's view is restricted, it is possible to prevent players from grasping predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the gaming hall can grasp the predetermined information outside of business hours. As a result, the gaming hall can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside of business hours, and can also confirm the predetermined information indicating the changed predetermined numerical information when changing the predetermined numerical information, thus simplifying the process of changing the predetermined numerical information.

[Note A70']
The game board (31) from which the game balls are launched is further provided.
The display means (35, 39, 341) are provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A69', characterized in that the second display means (45) is provided on the rear side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A70', specific numerical information other than predetermined numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided on the front side of the gaming board, and predetermined numerical information is displayed on a second display means provided on the back side of the gaming board. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means is easily visible, and the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be easily restricted.

[Note A71']
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so that it can be opened and closed.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A70', characterized in that the second display means (45) is provided in a position that is visible when the game board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A71', a second display means is provided on the back side of the game board, which is fixed to the frame in a way that allows it to be opened and closed. Therefore, by closing the game board, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information displayed on the second display means, while by opening the game board, the gaming hall can confirm the predetermined information displayed on the second display means. This makes it possible to achieve a state where the predetermined information on the second display means is visible and a state where its visibility is restricted through the simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Note A72']
The second display control means (41) is,
The second display means (45) can be controlled between a display state in which the predetermined numerical information is displayed and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the second display means (45).
When a first operation is performed on a specific operating means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the display is controlled from the non-display state to the display state.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A70' or Appendix A71', characterized in that when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A72', the second display means can be switched between a display state, where predetermined information is displayed, and a non-display state, where the predetermined information is not displayed, by operating a specific operating means provided on the back side of the game board. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the gaming hall's operating hours, it is possible to reliably prevent the predetermined information from being seen by the player via the second display means, even when the game board is opened in the event of a ball jam or other issue in the gaming machine.

[Note B1']
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A storage means (41) that stores numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to multiple different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities),
Selection means (41) for selecting each of the aforementioned numerical information,
A gaming machine equipped with,
A numerical information storage means (41) that stores one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from multiple types of numerical information,
A display control means (51) that, when certain conditions are met, causes to display specific information (digits) that indicate specific numerical information (unset values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information for a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, on the display means (35, 39, 341),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific conditions can be met when a game ball passes through a specific area (373),
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B1', a specific condition can be met when the game ball passes through a specific area, allowing players to easily understand when that condition has been met. This enhances the enjoyment of the game by allowing players to anticipate whether or not the condition will be met. Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display. Therefore, even in situations where the game tends to proceed mechanically, focusing on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area improves the gameplay experience.

[Note B2']
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information.

[Note B3']
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) that indicates a part of the multiple types of numerical information.

In gaming machines relating to Appendix B2' or Appendix B3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows players to identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the display means, and also to infer specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, players can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on special information, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note B4']
The game board (31) from which the game balls are launched is further equipped with an outlet (373) on the back side for discharge,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix B1' to Appendix B3', characterized in that the specified area is the discharge port (373).

[Note B5']
The machine is further equipped with multiple prize slots (313-316) from which prize balls are dispensed when game balls enter,
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) that discharges game balls that did not enter the plurality of prize-winning ports (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board (31), and a second discharge port (373) that is different from the first discharge port (318).
The gaming machine according to Appendix B4', characterized in that the specified area is the second discharge port (373).

[Note B6']
The gaming machine according to Appendix B5', characterized in that the second discharge port (373) is capable of receiving balls in the special game.

In gaming machines related to Appendix B4' to Appendix B6', the content of specific information displayed on the display means is controlled when certain conditions are met, triggered by the game ball passing through the second discharge port into which it can enter during special gameplay. Therefore, in special gameplay, which tends to proceed mechanically, it is possible to improve the gameplay experience by drawing attention to whether or not a game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Note B7']
The aforementioned multiple prize slots (313 to 316) include a variable prize slot (316) into which game balls can be entered during the special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B6', characterized in that the second discharge port (373) allows gaming balls that have passed through the variable prize entry port (316) to pass through.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B7', the content of specific information displayed on the display means is controlled when certain conditions are met, triggered by a game ball passing through a second discharge port that can accommodate a game ball that has entered a variable prize slot during a special game. Therefore, during a special game, by launching a game ball into the game area and getting it into the variable prize slot, the game ball can pass through the second discharge port. As a result, during a special game, simply playing the game as usual allows the specific information to be displayed on the display means without requiring any special skill. This prevents players from avoiding playing the machine due to potential skill differences in getting the game ball into the second discharge port, compared to situations where skill differences might arise in getting the game ball into the second discharge port.

[Note B8']
The game ball that enters the variable prize entry opening (316) can pass through the third discharge opening (378), which is different from the second discharge opening (373),
A distribution means (37) that distributes the game balls that enter the variable prize entry opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378),
The gaming machine described in Appendix B7' is further characterized by comprising the following:

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B8', the game balls are distributed to the second and third discharge ports by the distribution mechanism. Therefore, the gameplay is enhanced by the fact that whether or not specific conditions are met depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution mechanism. This allows players to enjoy the game by focusing on the behavior of the game balls in the distribution mechanism regarding whether or not specific conditions are met.

[Note B9']
The aforementioned specific information includes multiple pieces of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix B1' to Appendix B8', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific pieces of information in a predetermined display order on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a specific condition is met during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B9', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. This predetermined order can be set as appropriate; for example, it can be set to an order that facilitates the filtering and recognition of specific numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes filtering and recognition difficult, or an order that facilitates the determination of high or low probability of favorable outcomes, or conversely, an order that makes such determination difficult. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note B10']
The gaming machine according to Appendix B9', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific pieces of information on the display means in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period if the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B10', if the number of times a specific condition is met within a predetermined period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information within that period are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order. In this way, when the specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order, allowing the player to grasp the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times the specific condition is met within the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Furthermore, the gaming machine described in Appendix B10' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific pieces of information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display device, and therefore information that negates high setting values, such as the highest setting value, is not presented.

[Note C1']
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A storage means (41) that stores numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to multiple different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities),
Selection means (41) for selecting each of the aforementioned numerical information,
A gaming machine equipped with,
A numerical information storage means (41) that stores one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from multiple types of numerical information,
A display control means (51) that, when certain conditions are met, when certain conditions are met within a predetermined period, causes to display specific information (digits) that indicate specific numerical information (unset values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information for a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, on the display means (35, 39, 341),
Equipped with,
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).
The start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game, characterized in that the game machine is configured accordingly.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C1', when specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which a special game is set to begin, specific information indicating specific numerical data is displayed on the display means. Therefore, players can enjoy identifying specific numerical data, and consequently, estimating or identifying the predetermined numerical data, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met during the predetermined period. Furthermore, by setting the start date of the predetermined period to coincide with a special game, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met during the special game.

[Note C2']
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can, when the specific conditions are met, cause the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not show the multiple types of numerical information to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

[Note C3']
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can, when the specific conditions are met, cause the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In gaming machines relating to Appendix C2' or Appendix C3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows players to identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the display means, and also to infer specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, players can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on special information, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note C4']
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1' to Appendix C3', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the player transitions when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C4', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game state to which the player transitions when the transition determination result indicates a transition to the special game state, in the first game state where the probability of transitioning to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than that of the second game state. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game state of the so-called initial win. As a result, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, a predetermined period is always set for each initial win, thus guaranteeing at least one opportunity to infer or identify specific numerical information for each initial win.

[Note C5']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1' to Appendix C4', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set between the start date of the special game and the start date of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C5', the start date of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-granting game. Therefore, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met, at least from the start of the value-granting game.

[Appendix C6']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1' to Appendix C5', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C6', the end of the predetermined period is set during the special game. That is, the predetermined period begins and ends during the special game. However, the result of the transition determination is not announced during the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. To address this, by setting both the start and end dates for the predetermined period during the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decline in general interest, is improved.

[Note C7']
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The gaming machine according to Appendix C6', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R regular jackpot) that is performed in the first special game state, which is transitioned to after the special game in the special game state has ended.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C7', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state, which is reached after the special game ends. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination to the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win where the initial win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in that first special game state. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination to the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a winning streak where the initial win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in that second special game state. Instead, if the result of the transition determination to the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in that first special game state. In other words, in the case of a winning streak where the initial win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the winning streak ends. Therefore, in the case of consecutive wins, the predetermined period is set to span across the first special game at the end of the consecutive wins, resulting in a longer predetermined period compared to single wins. The more times the game transitions to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, consecutive wins have a higher probability of fulfilling specific conditions than single wins, and the more consecutive wins there are, the higher the probability of fulfilling specific conditions. This means that players benefit from a higher number of consecutive wins, not only because the expected value of the game they can win increases, but also because they can obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical data, making it easier to infer or identify that specific numerical data, and consequently, the predetermined numerical data.

[Note C8']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) that includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the value-granting game ends.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C6' or Appendix C7', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

Incidentally, during the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, neither game value is awarded nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine described in Appendix C8', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the predetermined period, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical data on the display means, utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Note C9']
The aforementioned specific information includes multiple pieces of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1' to Appendix C8', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific pieces of information in a predetermined display order on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a specific condition is met during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C9', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. This predetermined order can be set as appropriate; for example, it can be set to an order that facilitates the filtering and recognition of predetermined numerical information, an order that makes filtering and recognition difficult, an order that facilitates the determination of high or low probability of favorable outcomes, or an order that makes such determination difficult. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note C10']
The gaming machine according to Appendix C9', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific pieces of information on the display means in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period if the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C10', if the number of times a specific condition is met within a predetermined period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information within that period are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order. In this way, when the specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, allowing the player to grasp the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times the specific condition is met within the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Furthermore, the gaming machine described in Appendix C10' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific pieces of information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and therefore information that negates high setting values, such as the highest setting value, is not presented.

[Note D1']
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A storage means (41) that stores numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to multiple different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities),
Selection means (41) for selecting each of the aforementioned numerical information,
A gaming machine equipped with,
A numerical information storage means (41) that stores one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from multiple types of numerical information,
A display control means (51) that, when certain conditions are met, causes to display specific information (digits) that indicate specific numerical information (unset values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information for a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, on the display means (35, 39, 341),
Equipped with,
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).
The aforementioned prescribed period is set to the period during which the special game is to be played, and is a gaming machine characterized in that.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D1', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during a specified period set for the execution period of the special game when certain conditions are met. This allows players to enjoy identifying specific numerical information, and consequently, estimating or identifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period of the special game (specified period), thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note D2']
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can, when the specific conditions are met, cause the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not show the multiple types of numerical information to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

[Note D3']
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can, when the specific conditions are met, cause the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In gaming machines relating to Appendix D2' or Appendix D3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows players to identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the display means, and also to infer specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, players can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on special information, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note D4']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player, and an ending which is executed after the value-granting game (open/close execution mode) has finished.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices D1' to D3', characterized in that the aforementioned prescribed period is set at the ending.

Incidentally, during the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, neither game value is awarded nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine described in Appendix D4', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the predetermined period, it becomes possible to utilize this blank period for the player to display specific information indicating specific numerical data on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Note D5']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display at least the specific numerical information (number) indicating the specific numerical information (non-set value) if the specific condition is met during a predetermined period.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices D1' to D4', characterized in that the aforementioned prescribed period is set at least after the expiration of the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D5', if certain conditions are met within a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical data will be displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the specific conditions are met within the predetermined period, and then enjoy the game by focusing on the specific information displayed on the display after the predetermined period has elapsed. This enhances the enjoyment of the game throughout the entire period, from the start of the predetermined period to the display of the specific information after the predetermined period has elapsed.

[Note D6']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player,
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the player transitions when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix D5', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R regular jackpot) that is performed in the first special game state, which is transitioned to after the end of the special game in the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D6', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game played in the special game state to which the player transitions when the transition judgment result in the first game state results in a transition to the special game state. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game played in the first special game state to which the player transitions after the completion of the aforementioned specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game played, regardless of whether it is the first win or a winning streak. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win, ends with the last special game played, and specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. This makes it possible to provide a gameplay feature that presents specific numerical information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is played. Furthermore, in the case of a winning streak, it is also possible to present a number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in this winning streak all at once after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, players can access a large amount of information about specific data within a short period after a predetermined time has elapsed. This improves the convenience of identifying or inferring specific numerical data, and ultimately predetermined numerical data, based on specific information indicating specific numerical data.

[Note D7']
The aforementioned predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game that is initiated within the said predetermined period.
The aforementioned prescribed period is set after the expiration of the aforementioned specific period.
The gaming machine according to Appendix D5' or Appendix D6', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific conditions are met during the specific period.

The gaming machine described in Appendix D7' includes a specific period set for special games that begin within a predetermined period. That is, if multiple special games begin within a predetermined period, such as in a winning streak, multiple special periods are set according to the number of special games that begin within that period. Furthermore, after the expiration of a specific period, specific information indicating specific numerical data is displayed on the display means. Therefore, if multiple specific periods exist within the predetermined period, it is determined whether specific conditions are met for each specific period, and if the specific conditions are met during that period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period has elapsed. This allows players to focus on whether specific conditions are met for each special game, and if the specific conditions are met, they can focus on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the special games.

[Note D8']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) that includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the value-granting game ends.
The aforementioned specific period includes the period during which the value-granting game is performed.
The gaming machine according to Appendix D7', characterized in that the aforementioned prescribed period is set at the ending.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix D8', it is determined whether specific conditions are met during each specific period, including the value-granting game. If the specific conditions are met during that period, specific information is displayed in the ending sequence, which is executed after the value-granting game ends. Therefore, the value-granting game draws attention to whether specific conditions are met, and if the conditions are met, the ending sequence after the value-granting game ends draws attention to the content of the specific information. This effectively utilizes the ending of the special game to display specific information, and also draws attention to the progress of the game throughout the special game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note D9']
The aforementioned specific condition is that a game ball passes through a specific area (373), and that the player wins a display lottery that is executed as a result of the game ball passing through the specific area (373).
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix D1' to Appendix D8', characterized in that the aforementioned specified period is after the winner of the aforementioned display lottery.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D9', specific information is displayed on the display means upon winning a display lottery triggered by the game ball passing through a specific area. By conducting a display lottery as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not they have won the display lottery (whether or not the specific information is displayed) when the game ball passes through the specific area, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when conducting a display lottery as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easier to adjust the difficulty and variability of meeting the specific condition (the difficulty and variability of the display of specific information). This allows for various gameplay elements regarding the display of specific information, depending on the winning probability and lottery method in the display lottery.

[Note D10']
The aforementioned specific information includes multiple pieces of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices D1' to D9', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific pieces of information in a predetermined display order on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a specific condition is met during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D10', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. This predetermined order can be set as appropriate; for example, it can be set to an order that facilitates the filtering and recognition of specific numerical information, an order that makes filtering and recognition difficult, an order that facilitates the determination of high or low probability of favorable outcomes, or an order that makes such determination difficult. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note D11']
The gaming machine according to Appendix D10', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific pieces of information on the display means in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period if the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D11', if the number of times a specific condition is met within a predetermined period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information within that period are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order. In this way, when the specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order, allowing the player to grasp the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times the specific condition is met within the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Furthermore, the gaming machine described in Appendix D11' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific pieces of information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, and therefore information that negates high setting values, such as the highest setting value, is not presented.

[Note E1']
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A storage means (41) that stores numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to multiple different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities),
Selection means (41) for selecting each of the aforementioned numerical information,
A gaming machine equipped with,
Numerical information storage means (41) that stores one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from multiple types of numerical information,
A display control means (51) that, when certain conditions are met during a predetermined period, causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (digits) that indicate specific numerical information (unset values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information, based on the number of specific conditions that are met during the predetermined period, for a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing,
Equipped with,
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E1', when specific conditions are met during a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions met during that period. This allows the player to infer specific numerical information based on the information displayed on the display means, and to identify all specific numerical information once all specific information is displayed. Furthermore, by identifying all specific numerical information, it is also possible to recognize predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy inferring or identifying specific numerical information, and consequently, predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. In particular, since specific information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions met during the predetermined period, the player can enjoy the game's progression by focusing on the number of specific conditions met, while anticipating that many specific conditions will be met during the predetermined period.

[Note E2']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information.

[Note E3']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) that indicates a part of the multiple types of numerical information.

In gaming machines relating to Appendix E2' or Appendix E3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows players to identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the display means, and also to infer specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, players can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on special information, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note E4']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E1' to Appendix E3', characterized in that the display means is an information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the multiple types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E4', the display means is an information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp specific information based on the content displayed by the display means. This makes it easier for the player to grasp specific information, and thus also makes it easier to identify or infer specific numerical information based on that specific information.

[Note E5']
The aforementioned specific information includes multiple individual pieces of information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual pieces of information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix E4', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays a number of individual pieces of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions that are met during the predetermined period, using the plurality of display areas of the information display means.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E5', the specific information includes multiple individual pieces of information, and the information display means has multiple display areas for displaying these individual pieces of information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display the multiple individual pieces of information necessary for identifying the specific numerical information in any of the multiple display areas. This allows for gameplay that adjusts the difficulty of identifying or inferring the specific numerical information depending on which of the multiple individual pieces of information is displayed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note E6']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5', characterized in that each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the corresponding individual information from the specified information.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E6', each of the multiple display areas displays corresponding individual pieces of information from among multiple pieces of individual information. Therefore, it becomes possible to identify or infer specific numerical information based on these correspondences. This allows players to enjoy identifying or inferring specific numerical information while anticipating which individual piece of information will be displayed when certain conditions are met.

[Note E7']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5' or Appendix E6', characterized in that the information display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E7', the information display means has multiple light-emitting areas. Such information display means can be implemented using readily available and low-cost display devices, such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with information display means that can display specific information while suppressing the complexity of the machine's configuration and the increase in manufacturing costs.

[Note E8']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5' or Appendix E6', characterized in that the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E8', the information display means can display a specific image that allows for the identification or inference of specific numerical information. Therefore, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process leading to its display. As a result, the specific numerical information can be identified or inferred in a variety of patterns depending on the form of the specific image and the process leading to its display. This improves the gameplay experience related to identifying or inferring specific numerical information.

[Note E9']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E8', wherein the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E9', a specific image is displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable symbol display image that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when a variable symbol display image is to be displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that same image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine, without the need for a separate display means specifically for displaying the specific image.

[Note E10']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or letters using the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine described in any of Appendix E5' to Appendix E9', characterized in that the aforementioned specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E10', the information display means is capable of displaying numbers or letters, and specific information is displayed corresponding to numbers or letters. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or letters, making it easier to identify or infer specific numerical information. This allows players to easily enjoy identifying or inferring specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge.

[Note E11']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix E4', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the individual display units (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information to display the specific numerical information according to the number of specific conditions that are met during the predetermined period.

In gaming machines related to Appendix E11', specific numerical information is displayed in individual display units corresponding to specific numerical information among multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display unit is defined for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped and identified based on the type of individual display unit that displays it. This enhances the convenience of identifying specific numerical information.

[Note E12']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E11', characterized in that the display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) to either a display state in which the specific information is displayed or a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E12', the individual display unit is controlled to either a displayed state or a non-displayed state. Therefore, specific numerical information can be easily identified depending on the state of the individual display unit. This enhances the convenience of identifying specific numerical information.

[Note E13']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E11' or Appendix E12', characterized in that the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, or staggered pattern.

[Note E14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E11' to E13', characterized in that the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In gaming machines relating to appendices E13' and E14', it becomes possible to create information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Note E15']
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices E1' to E14', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E15', when specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which a special game is scheduled to begin, specific information indicating specific numerical data is displayed on the display means. Therefore, players can enjoy estimating or identifying specific numerical data, and consequently, estimating or identifying predetermined numerical data, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met during the predetermined period. Furthermore, by setting the start date of the predetermined period to coincide with a special game, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met during the special game.

[Note E16']
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The gaming machine according to Appendix E15', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the player transitions when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E16', the start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game state to which the player transitions when the transition determination result indicates a transition to the special game state, in the first game state where the probability of transitioning to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than that of the second game state. In other words, the start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game state of the so-called initial win. As a result, regardless of whether it is a single win or a series of wins, a predetermined period is always set for each initial win, thus guaranteeing at least one opportunity to infer or identify specific numerical information, and consequently the predetermined numerical information, for each initial win.

[Note E17']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix E15' or Appendix E16', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set between the start date of the special game and the start date of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E17', the start date of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-granting game. Therefore, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met, at least from the start of the value-granting game.

[Note E18']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E15' to Appendix E17', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E18', the end of the predetermined period is set during the special game. That is, the predetermined period begins and ends during the special game. However, the result of the transition determination is not announced during the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. To address this, by setting both the start and end dates for the predetermined period during the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decline in general interest, is improved.

[Note E19']
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The gaming machine according to Appendix E18', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R regular jackpot) that is executed in the first special game state, which is transitioned to after the end of the special game in the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state, which is reached after the special game ends. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination to the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win where the initial win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in that first special game state. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination to the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a winning streak where the initial win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in that second special game state. Instead, if the result of the transition determination to the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in that first special game state. In other words, in the case of a winning streak where the initial win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the winning streak ends. Therefore, in the case of consecutive wins, the predetermined period is set to span across the first special game at the end of the consecutive wins, resulting in a longer predetermined period compared to single wins. The more times the game transitions to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, consecutive wins have a higher probability of fulfilling specific conditions than single wins, and the more consecutive wins there are, the higher the probability of fulfilling specific conditions. This means that players benefit from a higher number of consecutive wins, not only because the expected value of the game they can win increases, but also because they can obtain more specific information to identify specific numerical information, making it easier to infer or identify that specific numerical information, and ultimately, the predetermined numerical information.

[Note E20']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) that includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the value-granting game ends.
The gaming machine according to Appendix E18' or Appendix E19', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

Incidentally, during the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, neither game value is awarded nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine described in Appendix E20', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the predetermined period, it becomes possible to utilize this blank period for the player to display specific information indicating specific numerical data on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Note E21']
The aforementioned specific information includes multiple pieces of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E1' to Appendix E20', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific pieces of information in a predetermined display order on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a specific condition is met during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E21', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. This predetermined order can be set as appropriate; for example, it can be set to an order that facilitates the filtering and recognition of predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes filtering and recognition difficult, or an order that facilitates the determination of high or low probability of favorable outcomes, or conversely, an order that makes such determination difficult. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note E22']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E21', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific pieces of information on the display means in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period if the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E22', if the number of times a specific condition is met within a predetermined period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information within that period are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order. In this way, when the specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order, allowing the player to grasp the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times the specific condition is met within the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Furthermore, the gaming machine described in Appendix E22' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific pieces of information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display device, and therefore information that negates high setting values, such as the highest setting value, is not presented.

[Note F1']
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A storage means (41) that stores numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to multiple different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities),
Selection means (41) for selecting each of the aforementioned numerical information,
A gaming machine equipped with,
A numerical information storage means (41) that stores one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from multiple types of numerical information,
A display control means (51) that, when certain conditions are met within a predetermined period, causes to display specific information (digits) that represent specific numerical information (unset values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information for a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A display order determining means (51) that determines the display order in which the display means (35, 39, 341) display the specific information when a predetermined condition is met,
Equipped with,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information during the specified period based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) when the specific condition is met during the specified period.
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F1', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when predetermined conditions are met. By determining the display order of specific information based on the fulfillment of these predetermined conditions, the display order of the specific information is prevented from becoming monotonous. This prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and prevents the display of specific information from becoming repetitive.

[Note F2']
The gaming machine according to Appendix F1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information.

[Note F3']
The gaming machine according to Appendix F1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In gaming machines related to Appendix F2' or Appendix F3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows players to identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the display means, and also to infer specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, players can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on special information, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note F4']
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices F1' to F3', characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the power to the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F4', the display order of specific information displayed on the display means is determined when the gaming machine's power is turned on. However, the gaming machine's power is often turned on before the gaming hall opens. Therefore, since the display order of specific information is determined when the gaming machine's power is turned on, the display order of specific information is determined each business day. This prevents the display order of specific information from becoming fixed, thus preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly on different business days and preventing the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note F5']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix F1' to Appendix F3', characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F5', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by the storage of predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thus preventing the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note F6']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix F1' to Appendix F3', characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period begins.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F6', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined period begins. This determines the display order of the specific information for each predetermined period. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is prevented from becoming fixed, thus preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note F7']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix F1' to Appendix F3', characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F7', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a special game is initiated. This means that the display order of specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, the display order of specific information is prevented from becoming fixed, thus preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note F8']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix F1' to Appendix F3', characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the value-granting game is initiated.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F8', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a value-granting game is initiated. This means that the display order of specific information is determined for each value-granting game. Therefore, the display order of specific information is prevented from becoming fixed, thus preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note F9']
A display order selection means (51) that, when the predetermined conditions are met, selects one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific pieces of information during the predetermined period,
A selected display order storage means (51) that stores the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
Furthermore,
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices F1' to F8', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the plurality of specific pieces of information to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F9', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a specified period of time according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that define the priority order of displaying multiple pieces of specific information. Therefore, by adjusting the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier to display multiple pieces of specific information in a particular display order, make it harder to display multiple pieces of specific information in a particular display order, and prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed in a particular display order. This allows for the display of multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rates of the multiple display orders, thus preventing the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note F10']
The aforementioned multiple display orders are defined for each of the aforementioned multiple types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix F9', characterized in that the display order selection means (51) selects one of the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F10', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display means for a specified period, according to a display order selected from multiple display orders based on predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, a display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This allows the display order to be set based on factors such as whether the probability of a favorable outcome corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific pieces of information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Note F11']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix F1' to Appendix F10', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F11', when specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which a special game is set to begin, specific information indicating specific numerical data is displayed on the display means. Therefore, players can enjoy estimating or identifying specific numerical data, and consequently, estimating or identifying predetermined numerical data, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met during the predetermined period. Furthermore, by setting the start date of the predetermined period to a special game, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met during the special game.

[Note F12']
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The gaming machine according to Appendix F11', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the player transitions when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F12', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game state to which the player transitions when the transition determination result indicates a transition to the special game state, in the first game state where the probability of transitioning to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than that of the second game state. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game state of the so-called initial win. As a result, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, a predetermined period is always set for each initial win, thus guaranteeing at least one opportunity to infer or identify specific numerical information, and consequently the predetermined numerical information, for each initial win.

[Note F13']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix F11' or Appendix F12', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set between the start date of the special game and the start date of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F13', the start date of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-granting game. Therefore, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met, at least from the start of the value-granting game.

[Note F14']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix F11' to Appendix F13', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F14', the end of the predetermined period is set during the special game. That is, the predetermined period begins and ends during the special game. However, the result of the transition determination is not announced during the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. To address this, by setting both the start and end dates for the predetermined period during the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in general interest, is improved.

[Note F15']
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The gaming machine according to Appendix F14', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R regular jackpot) that is performed in the first special game state, which is transitioned to after the end of the special game in the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state, which is reached after the special game ends. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination to the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win where the initial win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in that first special game state. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination to the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a winning streak where the initial win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in that second special game state. Instead, if the result of the transition determination to the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in that first special game state. In other words, in the case of a winning streak where the initial win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the winning streak ends. Therefore, in the case of consecutive wins, the predetermined period is set to span across the first special game at the end of the consecutive wins, resulting in a longer predetermined period compared to single wins. The more times the game transitions to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, consecutive wins have a higher probability of fulfilling specific conditions than single wins, and the more consecutive wins there are, the higher the probability of fulfilling specific conditions. This means that players benefit from a higher number of consecutive wins, not only because the expected value of the game they can win increases, but also because they can obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical data, making it easier to infer or identify that specific numerical data, and consequently, the predetermined numerical data.

[Note F16']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) that includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the value-granting game ends.
The gaming machine according to Appendix F14' or Appendix F15', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

Incidentally, during the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, neither game value is awarded nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine described in Appendix F16', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the predetermined period, it becomes possible to utilize this blank period for the player to display specific information indicating specific numerical data on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Note F17']
The aforementioned specific information includes multiple pieces of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices F1' to F16', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific pieces of information in a predetermined display order on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a specific condition is met during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F17', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. This predetermined order can be set as appropriate; for example, it can be set to an order that facilitates the narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, or an order that facilitates the determination of high or low probability of favorable outcomes, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine high or low probabilities. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note F18']
The gaming machine according to Appendix F17', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific pieces of information on the display means in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period if the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F18', if the number of times a specific condition is met within a predetermined period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information within that period are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order. In this way, when the specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order, allowing the player to grasp the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times the specific condition is met within the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Furthermore, the gaming machine related to Appendix F18' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific pieces of information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display device, and therefore information that negates high setting values such as the highest setting value is not presented.

[Note G1']
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A storage means (41) that stores numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to multiple different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities),
Selection means (41) for selecting each of the aforementioned numerical information,
A gaming machine equipped with,
A numerical information storage means (41) that stores one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from multiple types of numerical information,
A first display control means (51) causes a first display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (digits) that indicate specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information, when certain conditions are met, for a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing,
A display content storage means (512) that stores the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period,
During a special period different from the aforementioned prescribed period (for example, a standby period), an operating means (21) is operated by the player to cause the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) to be displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341),
When a player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means (21) during the aforementioned special period, a second display control means (51) causes the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) to be displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341),
Equipped with,
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix G1', the content of specific information displayed during a prescribed period can be displayed during a special period different from the prescribed period through operation of the control means. This allows the player to display the content of specific information displayed during the prescribed period on the second display means by operating the control means during the special period. Therefore, if the player wishes to confirm the content of specific information displayed during the prescribed period—for example, if they have forgotten the content, or if there has been a change of players—they can confirm the content during the special period. As a result, by confirming the content displayed during the prescribed period during the special period, the player can identify or infer specific numerical information, and decide whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine based on that identification or inference.

[Note G2']
The gaming machine according to Appendix G1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information.

[Note G3']
The gaming machine according to Appendix G1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) that indicates a part of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In gaming machines relating to Appendix G2' or Appendix G3', the first display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows players to identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the first display means, and also to infer specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the first display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, players can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on special information, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note G4']
The system further comprises a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix G1' to Appendix G3', characterized in that the special period is set during a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being performed.

In gaming machines related to Appendix G4', the special period during which the display content can be checked within the specified period is set to a period when neither special games nor notification games are being played. This allows players to carefully and thoroughly check the display content at their own pace, without being constrained by time, and decide whether or not to play the game on that machine.

[Note G5']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing the display content of a plurality of specific pieces of information that have been displayed during a plurality of different specified periods.
The game machine according to any one of Appendix G1' to Appendix G4', characterized in that the display content control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means (21) by a player during the special period.

[Note G6']
The gaming machine according to Appendix G5', characterized in that the display content control means (51) causes the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display content selected by the player from the display content of a plurality of specific pieces of information during the special period, by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Note G7']
The gaming machine according to Appendix G5', characterized in that when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means (21) during the special period, the display content control means (51) causes two or more of the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) to be displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

In gaming machines relating to Appendix G5' to Appendix G7', at least one of the display contents of multiple specific pieces of information displayed during multiple specified periods can be displayed on the second display means. For example, the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of multiple specific pieces of information stored in the display contents storage means (512) can be displayed on the second display means. In this case, since the player can select the display contents to be shown on the second display means from the display contents of multiple specific pieces of information, the player can confirm the display contents of their choice. This allows for efficient confirmation of display contents while avoiding confirmation of previously confirmed information or information with a small amount of information, thus enabling efficient confirmation of display contents. Furthermore, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, allowing for efficient confirmation of the presented contents in this case as well.

[Note G8']
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices G1' to G7', characterized in that the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Note G9']
The gaming machine according to Appendix G8', characterized in that the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means that displays a pattern (decorative pattern) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination.

In gaming machines relating to Appendix G8' and Appendix G9', a first display means is provided for a specified period and a second display means is provided for a special period, and specific information is displayed by different display means during the specified period and the special period, respectively. Therefore, during the specified period, if information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means, it is possible to prevent the display of that information from being obstructed. For example, if the second display means is a variable display image display means, it is possible to prevent obstruction of the visibility of the image (e.g., image effects) displayed on this variable display image display means. On the other hand, during the special period (e.g., standby state), the content of the specific information to be displayed during the specified period is presented by a second display means such as a variable display image display means on which symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Generally, because variable display image display means have a large display area, visibility is improved when the content of the specific information to be displayed during the specified period is presented on the variable display image display means. In addition, variable display image display means may be used to set various settings such as effects and characters that are executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, by displaying the content of specific information for a specified period on the variable display image display device, it becomes possible to display the content of specific information for that period on the variable display image display device using the same operations as those used for various settings. This improves the convenience of displaying the content of specific information on the variable display image display device during special periods.

[Note G10']
The aforementioned specific information includes multiple pieces of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix G1' to Appendix G9', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific pieces of information in a predetermined display order on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a specific condition is met during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G10', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. This predetermined order can be set as appropriate; for example, it can be set to an order that facilitates the narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, or an order that facilitates the determination of high or low probability of favorable outcomes, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine high or low probabilities. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note G11']
The gaming machine according to Appendix G10', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific pieces of information on the display means in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period if the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix G11', if the number of times a specific condition is met within a predetermined period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information within that period are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order. In this way, when the specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order, allowing the player to grasp the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times the specific condition is met within the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Furthermore, the gaming machine related to Appendix G11' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific pieces of information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display device, and therefore information that negates high setting values such as the highest setting value is not presented.

[Note H1']
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A storage means (41) that stores numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to multiple different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities),
Selection means (41) for selecting each of the aforementioned numerical information,
A gaming machine equipped with,
A numerical information storage means (41) that stores one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from multiple types of numerical information,
A display control means (51) that, when certain conditions are met within a predetermined period, causes a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing to display, in a distinguishable manner, a plurality of specific pieces of information (digits) that represent a plurality of specific numerical pieces of information other than the predetermined numerical piece of information (unset value) among the plurality of types of numerical information, on the display means (35, 39, 341),
Equipped with,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific pieces of information during the specified period in a predetermined display order.
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H1', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. This predetermined order can be set as appropriate; for example, it can be set to an order that facilitates the filtering and recognition of predetermined numerical information, an order that makes filtering and recognition difficult, an order that facilitates the determination of high or low probability of favorable outcomes, or an order that makes such determination difficult. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note H2']
The gaming machine according to Appendix H1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information.

[Note H3']
The gaming machine according to Appendix H1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) that indicates a part of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In gaming machines related to Appendix H2' or Appendix H3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows players to identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the display means, and also to infer specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, players can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on special information, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note H4']
A display order selection means (51) that selects one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific pieces of information during the predetermined period,
The system further comprises a selected display order storage means (51) that stores the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H1' to Appendix H3', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the plurality of specific pieces of information to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H4', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a specified period of time according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that define the priority order of displaying multiple pieces of specific information. Therefore, by adjusting the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier to display multiple pieces of specific information in a particular display order, make it harder to display multiple pieces of specific information in a particular display order, and prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed in a particular display order. This allows for the display of multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rates of the multiple display orders, thus preventing the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note H5']
The aforementioned multiple display orders are defined for each of the aforementioned multiple types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix H4', characterized in that it selects one of the multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H5', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display means for a specified period, according to a display order selected from multiple display orders based on predetermined numerical information. In other words, since it is possible to set multiple display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This allows the display order to be set based on factors such as whether the probability of a favorable outcome corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific pieces of information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Note H6']
The gaming machine according to Appendix H5', characterized in that the plurality of display orders include display orders with different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In gaming machines related to Appendix H6', it is possible to make it easier or harder to select a specific display order. That is, unlike cases where the probability of selecting all display orders is the same, it becomes easier to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, more difficult to identify a specific non-set value. This allows for adjustments to the likelihood of a high setting or a low setting.

[Note H7']
The aforementioned multiple display order includes the first display order with the lowest priority of the specific information that shows the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of favorable determination among the multiple favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the first display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than that of any other display order.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H7', the first display order is likely to select the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable outcome among multiple favorable outcome probabilities corresponding to multiple specific pieces of information. That is, excluding the favorable outcome probability corresponding to predetermined numerical information, the specific numerical information indicating the lowest favorable outcome probability and the most unfavorable outcome for the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the most unfavorable specific numerical information is displayed last, the possibility of both the most unfavorable favorable outcome probability and a more favorable outcome probability remains until the last piece of specific information is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to realize that they are in the most unfavorable favorable outcome probability, thus preventing premature termination of gameplay on the machine and suppressing a decline in the machine's utilization rate.

[Note H8']
The specified information includes first specified information indicating the specified numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specified numerical information, and second specified information indicating the specified numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of favorable determination among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities.
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the priority of the first specific information and the second specific information is the two lowest,
The gaming machine according to Appendix H6', characterized in that the second display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than any other display order (including 100%).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H8', the second display order is more likely to select the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable outcome among multiple favorable outcome probabilities corresponding to multiple specific pieces of information, as this has a lower priority. Therefore, similar to the gaming machine described in Appendix H6', it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the favorable outcome probability is the most unfavorable to them, thus preventing the game from ending prematurely and suppressing a decrease in the gaming machine's operating rate. Furthermore, the second display order has a lower priority for the specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of a favorable outcome among multiple favorable outcome probabilities corresponding to multiple specific pieces of information. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp not only that the favorable outcome probability is unfavorable to them, but also that it is favorable to them. In this way, the two pieces of specific numerical information that show the two favorable outcome probabilities corresponding to the unfavorable and favorable outcomes for the player have a lower priority, making it difficult for the player to determine which of the two conflicting favorable outcome probabilities is advantageous to them until the very end, thus increasing interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Note H9']
The plurality of display orders include a third display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability that is higher in probability than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower in priority than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability that is lower in probability than the first favorable determination probability.
The gaming machine according to Appendix H6', characterized in that the third display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than any other display order (including 100%).

In the gaming machine related to Note H9', the priority of specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than the first favorable judgment probability is set to a higher selection rate for the third display order, which is lower than the selection rate for specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than the first favorable judgment probability. This high selection rate for the third display order allows players to expect that the favorable judgment probability is higher than the actual first favorable judgment probability up until just before they determine the first favorable judgment probability. This allows players to enjoy speculating on specific information (predetermined information) while expecting a higher favorable judgment probability up until just before they determine the first favorable judgment probability.

[Note H10']
The plurality of display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability with a lower probability than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability with a higher probability than the first favorable determination probability.
The gaming machine according to Appendix H6', characterized in that the fourth display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than any other display order (including 100%).

In the gaming machine related to Note H10', the priority of the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than the first favorable judgment probability is set to a higher selection rate for the fourth display order, which is lower than the selection rate for the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than the first favorable judgment probability. Because the selection rate for this fourth display order is set to a higher rate, the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than the first favorable judgment probability remains hidden as specific information just before the first favorable judgment probability is determined. As a result, the final candidates for the first favorable judgment probability become the actual first favorable judgment probability and the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than that first favorable judgment probability. Consequently, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the first favorable judgment probability that is advantageous to the player is ultimately determined as the first favorable judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), thus improving the player's satisfaction when the setting value is determined.

[Note H11']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H1' to Appendix H10', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H11', when specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which a special game is set to begin, specific information indicating specific numerical data is displayed on the display means. Therefore, players can enjoy estimating or identifying specific numerical data, and consequently, estimating or identifying predetermined numerical data, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met during the predetermined period. Furthermore, by setting the start date of the predetermined period to a special game, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met during the special game.

[Note H12']
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The gaming machine according to Appendix H11', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the player transitions when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H12', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game state to which the player transitions when the transition determination result indicates a transition to the special game state, in the first game state where the probability of transitioning to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than that of the second game state. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game state of the so-called initial win. As a result, regardless of whether it is a single win or a series of wins, a predetermined period is always set for each initial win, thus guaranteeing at least one opportunity to infer or identify specific numerical information for each initial win.

[Note H13']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix H11' or Appendix H12', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set between the start date of the special game and the start date of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machines related to Note H13', the start date of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-granting game. Therefore, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met, at least from the start of the value-granting game.

[Note H14']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H11' to Appendix H13', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix H14', the end of the predetermined period is set in the special game. That is, the predetermined period begins and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. To address this, by setting an end date in addition to the start date of the predetermined period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in general interest, is improved.

[Note H15']
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The gaming machine according to Appendix H14', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R regular jackpot) that is performed in the first special game state, which is transitioned to after the end of the special game in the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state, which is reached after the special game ends. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination to the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win where the initial win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in that first special game state. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination to the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a winning streak where the initial win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in that second special game state. Instead, if the result of the transition determination to the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in that first special game state. In other words, in the case of a winning streak where the initial win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the winning streak ends. Therefore, in the case of consecutive wins, the predetermined period is set to span across the first special game at the end of the consecutive wins, resulting in a longer predetermined period compared to single wins. The more times the game transitions to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, consecutive wins have a higher probability of fulfilling specific conditions than single wins, and the more consecutive wins there are, the higher the probability of fulfilling specific conditions. This means that players benefit from a higher number of consecutive wins, not only because the expected value of the game they can win increases, but also because they can obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical data, making it easier to infer or identify that specific numerical data, and consequently, the predetermined numerical data.

[Note H16']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix H14' or Appendix H15', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-granting game.

Incidentally, during the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, neither game value is awarded nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine described in Appendix H16', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the predetermined period, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical data on the display means, utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Note H17']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H1' to Appendix H15', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific pieces of information on the display means in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period if the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H17', if the number of times a specific condition is met within a predetermined period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information within that period will be displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order. In this way, when the specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information will be displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order, allowing the player to grasp the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times the specific condition is met within the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Furthermore, the gaming machine described in Appendix H17' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific pieces of information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display device, and therefore information that negates high setting values such as the highest setting value is not presented.

[Note I1']
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A storage means (41) that stores numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to multiple different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities),
Selection means (41) for selecting each of the aforementioned numerical information,
A gaming machine equipped with,
A numerical information storage means (41) that stores one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from multiple types of numerical information,
A display control means (51) that, when certain conditions are met, causes to display specific information (digits) that indicate specific numerical information (unset values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information for a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, on the display means (35, 39, 341),
Display restriction means (51) that restricts the display of the specified information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during periods other than the specified period,
Equipped with,
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In gaming machines related to Appendix I1', the display of specific information on the display device is restricted outside of the specified period. Therefore, the display of specific information is implemented as a reward for players who have performed a game that meets specific conditions for displaying that information. This prevents other players from taking advantage of the reward received by the previous player to obtain specific information necessary to identify or infer specific numerical information.

[Note I2']
The gaming machine according to Appendix I1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information.

[Note I3']
The gaming machine according to Appendix I1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) that indicates a part of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In gaming machines relating to Appendix I2' or Appendix I3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows players to identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the display means, and also to infer specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, players can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on special information, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note I4']
The system further comprises a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices I1' to I3', characterized in that the period other than the aforementioned specified period is a period of standby in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being performed.

In gaming machines related to Appendix I4', the display of specific information on the display device is restricted during the standby period when neither special gameplay nor notification gameplay is being performed. Here, player changes generally occur during the standby period. Therefore, by restricting the display of specific information on the display device during the standby period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player to obtain specific information for identifying or inferring specific numerical information.

[Note I5']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix I1' to Appendix I4', characterized in that the display restriction means (51) restricts the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period, during a period other than the specified period.

In gaming machines related to Appendix I5', the display of specific information previously shown on the display means during the specified period is restricted outside of the specified period. In other words, specific information is only displayed during the specified period, and the display of past specific information display history is restricted outside of the specified period. This makes it impossible to verify previously displayed specific information based on the display history, thus more effectively preventing other players from taking advantage of the benefits obtained by previous players to identify or infer specific numerical information.

[Note I6']
The aforementioned specific information includes multiple pieces of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix I1' to Appendix I5', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific pieces of information in a predetermined display order on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a specific condition is met during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I6', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. This predetermined order can be set as appropriate; for example, it can be set to an order that facilitates the filtering and recognition of predetermined numerical information, an order that makes filtering and recognition difficult, an order that facilitates the determination of high or low probability of favorable outcomes, or an order that makes such determination difficult. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note I7']
The gaming machine according to Appendix I6', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific pieces of information on the display means in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period if the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I7', if the number of times a specific condition is met within a predetermined period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information within that period are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order. In this way, when the specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order, allowing the player to grasp the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times the specific condition is met within the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Furthermore, the gaming machine described in Appendix I7' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific pieces of information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means, and therefore information that negates high setting values, such as the highest setting value, is not presented.

[Note J1']
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A storage means (41) that stores numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to multiple different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities),
Selection means (41) for selecting each of the aforementioned numerical information,
A gaming machine equipped with,
A numerical information storage means (41) that stores one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from multiple types of numerical information,
A display control means (51) causes a display means (35, 39, 341) to distinguish and display a plurality of specific information (digits) that represent a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information, when a first specific condition or a second specific condition different from the second specific condition is met during a predetermined period, during a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing,
Equipped with,
The display control means (51) causes the plurality of specific information (digits) to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a first display order when the first specific condition is met, and causes the plurality of specific information (digits) to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a second display order different from the first display order when the second specific condition is met.
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J1', when a first specific condition is met, multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display means in a first display order, and when a second specific condition is met, multiple specific pieces of information (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the multiple specific pieces of information is set according to the type of specific condition that is met. Therefore, the display order of the multiple specific pieces of information is made difficult for the player to recognize, preventing the easy identification or recognition of multiple specific numerical pieces of information based on the specific information. This prevents the player from quickly realizing that the probability of a favorable outcome is low, even when it corresponds to a low probability of favorable outcome. As a result, even when the probability of favorable outcome is low, the game on the gaming machine is prevented from ending prematurely, thus preventing a decrease in the machine's operating rate.

[Note J2']
The gaming machine according to Appendix J1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information.

[Note J3']
The gaming machine according to Appendix J1', characterized in that the display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) that indicates a part of the multiple types of numerical information.

In gaming machines related to Appendix J2' or Appendix J3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows players to identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the display means, and also to infer specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, players can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on special information, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note J4']
The first specific condition includes that a first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1' to J3', characterized in that the second specific condition includes a second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information, which is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine relating to Appendix J4', the first specific condition includes the storage of first predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes the storage of second predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is determined by the predetermined numerical information, and multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display means for a specified period according to that display order. In other words, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical piece of information. This allows the display order to be set based on whether the probability of determining a favorable outcome corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific pieces of information for each predetermined numerical piece of information.

[Note J5']
A display order selection means (51) that, when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is met, selects one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific pieces of information during the predetermined period,
The system further comprises a selected display order storage means (51) that stores the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices J1' to J4', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the plurality of specific pieces of information to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J5', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a specified period of time according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that define the priority order of displaying multiple pieces of specific information. Therefore, by adjusting the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier to display multiple pieces of specific information in a particular display order, make it harder to display multiple pieces of specific information in a particular display order, and prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed in a particular display order. This allows for the display of multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rates of the multiple display orders, thus preventing the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note J6']
The aforementioned multiple display orders are defined for each of the aforementioned multiple types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix J5', characterized in that the display order selection means (51) selects one of the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J6', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display means for a specified period, according to a display order selected from multiple display orders based on predetermined numerical information. In other words, since it is possible to set multiple display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This allows the display order to be set based on factors such as whether the probability of a favorable outcome corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific pieces of information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Note J7']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix J1' to Appendix J6', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set in the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J7', when specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which a special game is scheduled to begin, specific information indicating specific numerical data is displayed on the display device. Therefore, players can enjoy speculating on or identifying specific numerical data, and consequently, speculating on or identifying predetermined numerical data, based on the specific information displayed on the display device when specific conditions are met during the predetermined period. Furthermore, by setting the start date of the predetermined period to coincide with a special game, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met during the special game.

[Note J8']
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The gaming machine according to Appendix J7', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the player transitions when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J8', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game state to which the player transitions when the transition determination result indicates a transition to the special game state, in the first game state where the probability of transitioning to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than that of the second game state. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game state of the so-called initial win. As a result, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, a predetermined period is always set for each initial win, guaranteeing at least one opportunity to infer or identify specific numerical information, and thus the predetermined numerical information, for each initial win.

[Note J9']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) which includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix J7' or Appendix J8', characterized in that the start date of the predetermined period is set between the start date of the special game and the start date of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J9', the start date of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-granting game. Therefore, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met, at least from the start of the value-granting game.

[Note J10']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix J7' to Appendix J9', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J10', the end of the predetermined period is set during the special game. That is, the predetermined period begins and ends during the special game. However, the result of the transition determination is not announced during the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. To address this, by setting both the start and end dates for the predetermined period during the special game, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in general interest, is improved.

[Note J11']
The aforementioned special game state is,
After the completion of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R normal jackpot) transitions to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported,
The system includes a second special game state (5R probability variation jackpot game state and 16R probability variation jackpot game state) in which, after the completion of the special game in the said special game state, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining to transition to the said special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the system transitions to a second game state (high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is reported,
The gaming machine according to Appendix J10', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R regular jackpot) that is performed in the first special game state, which is transitioned to after the end of the special game in the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J11', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state, which is reached after the special game ends. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination to the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win where the initial win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in that first special game state. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination to the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a winning streak where the initial win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in that second special game state. Instead, if the result of the transition determination to the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in that first special game state. In other words, in the case of a winning streak where the initial win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the winning streak ends. Therefore, in the case of consecutive wins, the predetermined period is set to span across the first special game at the end of the consecutive wins, resulting in a longer predetermined period compared to single wins. The more times the game transitions to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, consecutive wins have a higher probability of fulfilling specific conditions than single wins, and the more consecutive wins there are, the higher the probability of fulfilling specific conditions. This means that players benefit from a higher number of consecutive wins, not only because the expected value of the game they can win increases, but also because they can obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical data, making it easier to infer or identify that specific numerical data, and consequently, the predetermined numerical data.

[Note J12']
The aforementioned special game includes a value-granting game (open/close execution mode) that includes multiple unit games (round games) that grant game value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the value-granting game ends.
The gaming machine according to Appendix J10' or Appendix J11', characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

Incidentally, during the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, neither game value is awarded nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine described in Appendix J12', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the predetermined period, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical data on the display means, utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Note J13']
The aforementioned specific information includes multiple pieces of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices J1' to J12', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific pieces of information in a predetermined display order on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a specific condition is met during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J13', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. This predetermined order can be set as appropriate; for example, it can be set to an order that facilitates the filtering and recognition of specific numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes filtering and recognition difficult, or an order that facilitates the determination of high or low probability of favorable outcomes, or conversely, an order that makes such determination difficult. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note J14']
The gaming machine according to Appendix J13', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific pieces of information on the display means in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period if the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J14', if the number of times a specific condition is met within a predetermined period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information within that period are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order. In this way, when the specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order, allowing the player to grasp the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times the specific condition is met within the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Furthermore, the gaming machine described in Appendix J14' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific pieces of information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display device, and therefore information that negates high setting values, such as the highest setting value, is not presented.

[Note K1']
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A storage means (41) that stores numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to multiple different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities),
Selection means (41) for selecting each of the aforementioned numerical information,
A gaming machine equipped with,
A numerical information storage means (41) that stores one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from multiple types of numerical information,
A first display control means (51) causes a first display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (digits) that indicate specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information, when certain conditions are met, for a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing,
A second display control means (41) causes the second display means (45) to display predetermined information (digits) indicating the predetermined numerical information,
Equipped with,
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided in a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided in a position where the player's view is restricted.
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the specified period, the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K1', specific information other than predetermined information is displayed on a first display means located in a position visible to the player, while predetermined information is displayed on a second display means (45) located in a position where the player's visibility is restricted. That is, when certain conditions are met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means located in a position visible to the player during a specified period. As a result, the player can identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can also recognize the predetermined numerical information when all specific numerical information is displayed. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and consequently, inferring or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by displaying predetermined information on the second display means, which is positioned in a location where the player's view is restricted, it is possible to prevent players from grasping predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the gaming hall can grasp the predetermined information outside of business hours. As a result, the gaming hall can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside of business hours, and can also confirm the predetermined information indicating the changed predetermined numerical information when changing the predetermined numerical information, thus simplifying the process of changing the predetermined numerical information.

[Note K2']
The gaming machine according to Appendix K1', characterized in that the first display control means (51) can display the specific information and special information (a part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

[Note K3']
The gaming machine according to Appendix K1', characterized in that the first display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) that indicates a part of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In gaming machines relating to Appendix K2' or Appendix K3', the first display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a portion of multiple types of numerical information. This allows players to identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the display means, and also to infer specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, players can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on special information, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note K4']
The game board (31) from which the game balls are launched is further provided.
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices K1' to K3', characterized in that the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K4', specific numerical information other than predetermined numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided on the front side of the gaming board, and predetermined numerical information is displayed on a second display means provided on the back side of the gaming board. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means is easily visible, and the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be easily restricted.

[Note K5']
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so that it can be opened and closed.
The gaming machine according to Appendix K4', characterized in that the second display means (45) is provided in a position that is visible when the game board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K5', a second display means is provided on the back side of the game board, which is fixed to the frame in a way that allows it to be opened and closed. Therefore, by closing the game board, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information displayed on the second display means, while by opening the game board, the gaming hall can confirm the predetermined information displayed on the second display means. This allows for the simple operation of opening and closing the game board to achieve both a state where the predetermined information on the second display means is visible and a state where its visibility is restricted.

[Note K6']
The second display control means (41) is,
The second display means (45) can be controlled between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45).
When a first operation is performed on a specific operating means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the display is controlled from the non-display state to the display state.
The gaming machine according to Appendix K4' or Appendix K5', characterized in that when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K6', the second display means can be switched between a display state, where predetermined information is displayed, and a non-display state, where the predetermined information is not displayed, by operating a specific operating means provided on the back side of the game board. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the gaming hall's operating hours, it is possible to reliably prevent the predetermined information from being seen by the player via the second display means, even when the game board is opened in the event of a ball jam or other issue in the gaming machine.

[Note K7']
The aforementioned specific information includes multiple pieces of specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices K1' to K6', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the plurality of specific pieces of information in a predetermined display order on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a specific condition is met during a predetermined period.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix K7', multiple specific pieces of information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. This predetermined order can be set as appropriate; for example, it can be set to an order that facilitates the narrowing down and recognition of predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, or an order that facilitates the determination of high or low probability of favorable outcomes, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine high or low probabilities. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Note K8']
The gaming machine according to Appendix K7', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific pieces of information on the display means in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period if the number of times the specific condition is met during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K8', if the number of times a specific condition is met within a predetermined period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information within that period are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order. In this way, when the specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific pieces of information are displayed on the display device in a predetermined display order, allowing the player to grasp the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times the specific condition is met within the predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times.

Furthermore, the gaming machine related to Appendix K8' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific pieces of information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display device, and therefore information that negates high setting values such as the highest setting value is not presented.

[Note A1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a specific condition is met in the particular first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, a specific performance image is continuously displayed during a specific first notification game that is executed after the completion of a predetermined second notification game that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize pocket in the first judgment state, and when a specific condition is met during the specific first notification game, the specific performance image can be switched to a predetermined performance image. In this way, by continuously displaying a specific performance image during a specific first notification game that is executed after the completion of a predetermined second notification game that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize pocket in the first judgment state, and when a specific condition is met during the specific first notification game, it becomes possible to choose whether to continue displaying the specific performance image or switch to displaying a predetermined performance image based on whether or not a specific condition is met. For example, if no problems arise from continuously executing a specific animation image, that image will be executed continuously. If problems arise from continuously executing that image, a predetermined animation image will be switched and executed. As a result, problems caused by continuously executing a specific animation image are prevented.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, it becomes possible to select whether to continue displaying a specific animation image or switch to a predetermined animation image based on whether a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game in the first judgment state. This reduces the possibility that the player might feel uncomfortable when the specific animation image is resumed after it has finished, or conversely, when the specific animation image is not resumed, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the player feeling uncomfortable with the animation during gameplay.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in Appendix A1, if a specific condition is not met during a particular first notification game in the first judgment state, a specific visual effect image is continuously displayed. This allows the specific visual effect image displayed during the first notification game to be usefully utilized during the second notification game as well.

[Appendix A2]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the absence of the aforementioned benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A2, the specific condition includes the absence of any rewards for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more. Thus, by including the absence of any rewards for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, if the specific condition is not met, the situation where the specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, even though there are no rewards for the player, is avoided. This prevents a situation where the player does not receive a reward despite it being clearly stated that a reward would be granted upon display during notification games.

[Note A3]
The permitted state of the second prize-winning opening (315) includes a first permitted state (short opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a first hour, and a second permitted state (long opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a longer period than the first hour.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the entry of a game ball into the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the first permitted state (short opening) in the first notification game (first special picture game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A3, the game ball enters the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game when a specific visual image is displayed. By defining the game ball entering the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game when a specific visual image is displayed, it prevents the specific visual image from being displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games, even though there is no reward to be given to the player. This prevents a situation where the player does not receive a reward despite it being clearly stated that a reward will be given upon display during the notification game.

[Note A4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that in the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341), a number of game balls greater than zero but less than or equal to a specific number enters the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the permitted state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A4, the first notification game, in which a specific performance image is displayed on the display means, includes the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state. By including the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state, the specific performance image is continuously displayed. This prevents the specific performance image from being displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games, even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where, despite the display in the notification game clearly indicating that a benefit will be granted, the player does not receive that benefit.

[Note A5]
The gaming machine described in any of Appendix A2 to Appendix A4, characterized in that the aforementioned benefit is the execution of the aforementioned special game.

In the gaming machines related to Appendix A5, the reward is the execution of a special game. This prevents situations where the special game is not executed despite the game's notification clearly indicating that it will be executed.

[Note A6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A5, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A6, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note A7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to A6, characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A7, the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of these images. Furthermore, when these images are displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to A7, characterized in that the specific performance image can be switched to the predetermined performance image in the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A8, if a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game during the first judgment state, the specific performance image in the predetermined second notification game can be switched to a predetermined performance image. In this way, by switching the specific performance image in the predetermined second notification game when a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game, it is possible to avoid problems occurring in the predetermined second notification game due to the continuous execution of the specific performance image resulting from the fulfillment of a specific condition in the particular first notification game. Furthermore, even if problems occur in the first notification game that resumes after the completion of the predetermined second notification game, the occurrence of such problems can be avoided before the execution of the first notification game.

[Note A9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A8, characterized in that the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game) is the second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed after the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined conditions are met.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A9, the predetermined second notification game is the second notification game executed after a specific first notification game where a specific condition is met. Because the predetermined second notification game is the second notification game executed after a specific first notification game where a specific condition is met, the occurrence of the problem is immediately avoided once it is detected that a problem would arise from continuously executing a specific animation image.

[Note A10]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that there is no benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to A9, characterized in that the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game) is the second notification game (second special symbol game) of a specific number of times in which the specific performance image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A10, if there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image during the second notification game. In this way, when there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the second notification game, switching from the specific performance image to a predetermined performance image during the second notification game allows the specific performance image to be displayed consecutively for the maximum possible time. This maximizes the player's expectation of seeing the specific performance image consecutively, thus reducing the decrease in the player's interest in the game when the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image, and thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A11]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to A7, characterized in that in a predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game) executed in the specific first notification game, the specific performance image can be switched to the predetermined performance image.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A11, when a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game during the first judgment state, the specific animation image in a predetermined first notification game can be switched to a predetermined animation image. In this way, by switching the specific animation image in a predetermined first notification game when a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game during the first judgment state, it is possible to avoid problems occurring in the first notification game due to the continuous execution of the specific animation image upon the fulfillment of the specific condition.

Furthermore, in the first notification game that resumes after the completion of the predetermined second notification game, the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image. This ensures that, if continuously executing the specific performance image would cause problems, a greater number of notification games in which the specific performance image is displayed are secured. In this way, by ensuring the maximum number of notification games in which the specific performance image is displayed continuously, even if continuous execution of the specific performance image would cause problems due to the fulfillment of certain conditions, the player can enjoy the specific performance image to the fullest.

[Note A12]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that there is no benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A11, characterized in that the specific first notification game (first special symbol game) is the first notification game (first special symbol game) of the specific number of times the specific performance image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A12, if there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image during that first notification game. In this way, when there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the first notification game, switching from the specific performance image to a predetermined performance image during that first notification game allows the specific performance image to be displayed consecutively for the maximum possible time. This maximizes the player's expectation of seeing the specific performance image consecutively, thus reducing the decrease in the player's interest in the game when the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image, and thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A13]
The aforementioned specific performance image and the aforementioned predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to A12, characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image have the same or substantially the same expected value.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A13, the expectation level of transitioning to a special game state is set to be the same or nearly the same for both the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image. By setting the expectation level of transitioning to a special game state to be the same or nearly the same for both the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image, even when the predetermined image displayed on the display means switches from the specific performance image to the predetermined performance image, the player's expectation for the display of the predetermined image is maintained without decreasing. Therefore, a decrease in the player's interest due to the image switch is prevented, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game is prevented.

[Note A14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A13, characterized in that the difference in expected value between the specified performance image and the predetermined performance image is set to -5% to +5%.

[Note A15]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A14, characterized in that the difference in expected value between the specified performance image and the predetermined performance image is set to -2.5% to +2.5%.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix A14 and Appendix A15, the difference in expected value between a specific presentation image and a predetermined presentation image is set to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%. By setting the difference in expected value between the specific presentation image and the predetermined presentation image to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%, the player's expectations for the display of the predetermined image can be more appropriately maintained. Therefore, a decrease in player interest due to the switching of the predetermined image is more effectively prevented, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game is more effectively prevented.

[Note A16]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A13 to A15, characterized in that the probability of the specific performance image being displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined performance image being displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A16, the probability of a specific animation image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state is set higher than the probability of a predetermined animation image being displayed. Thus, by setting the probability of a specific animation image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state higher than the probability of a predetermined animation image being displayed, the occurrence of problems is appropriately avoided when a specific animation image, which has a high probability of causing problems if executed continuously, is displayed consecutively.

[Note A17]
The aforementioned specific performance image and the aforementioned predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to A12, characterized in that the predetermined performance image is set to have a higher expectation level than the specific performance image.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A17, the expectation of transitioning to a special game state is set higher for the predetermined presentation image after the switch than for the specific presentation image before the switch. Thus, because the expectation of transitioning to a special game state is set higher for the predetermined presentation image after the switch than for the specific presentation image before the switch, when the predetermined image is switched from a specific presentation image to a predetermined presentation image, the expectation suggested to the player by the switch is enhanced. As a result, when a specific presentation image is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting a switch from the specific presentation image to a predetermined presentation image. Furthermore, when the switch to the predetermined presentation image occurs, the player can enjoy the game while having a strong expectation that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined presentation image was displayed will lead to a transition to a special game state. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced by the switch from a specific presentation image to a predetermined presentation image.

[Note A18]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A17, characterized in that the difference between the expected value when the predetermined performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game and the expected value when the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game is set to 10% or more.

[Note A19]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A18, characterized in that the difference between the expected value when the predetermined performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game and the expected value when the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix A18 and Appendix A19, the difference in expected value between the predetermined presentation image and the specific presentation image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. By setting the difference in expected value between the predetermined presentation image and the specific presentation image to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more, when the specific presentation image is displayed, players can enjoy the game with a greater expectation that the game will switch from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image. Furthermore, when the game switches to the predetermined presentation image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined presentation image was displayed will transition to a special game state, allowing players to enjoy the game with great anticipation. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced by the predetermined image switching from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image.

[Note A20]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A17 to A19, characterized in that the probability of the specific performance image being displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined performance image being displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A20, the probability of a specific performance image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state is set higher than the probability of a predetermined performance image being displayed. Thus, because the probability of a specific performance image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state is set higher than the probability of a predetermined performance image being displayed, the frequency of the specific performance image being displayed increases. This increases the opportunities for players to anticipate the specific performance image being switched to the predetermined performance image, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by setting a lower probability of the predetermined performance image being selected after the switch, the frequency of the predetermined performance image being displayed decreases, further increasing the player's enjoyment when the predetermined performance image is displayed, thus further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note A21]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to A20, characterized in that when the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) is switched to the predetermined performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance), the display means (341) displays a specific information image different from the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image that explicitly indicates or suggests specific information in a notification game performed between the notification game before the switch and the notification game after the switch.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A21, a specific information image that explicitly or suggestively displays specific information is displayed during the notification game performed between the notification game before the predetermined image change and the notification game after the predetermined image change. In this way, by displaying a specific information image that explicitly or suggestively displays specific information during the notification game performed between the notification game before the predetermined image change and the notification game after the predetermined image change, the continuity between the display of the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image is interrupted, rather than the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image being displayed consecutively in multiple notification games. This creates the illusion for the player that the predetermined performance image was displayed independently of the specific performance image after its display ended, rather than the player being switched from the specific performance image to the predetermined performance image. Therefore, it is possible to disguise the fact that no switch occurred between the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image. Thus, the inconvenience caused by the continuous display of the specific performance image can be avoided without the player noticing.

Furthermore, if a switch is made from a specific animation image to a predetermined animation image to avoid inconveniences arising from the continuous execution of that specific animation image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined animation image is executed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, there is a concern that players may realize that when a switch is made from a specific animation image to a predetermined animation image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined animation image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, by disguising the fact that a switch from the specific animation image to the predetermined animation image did not occur, it is possible to prevent players from realizing that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined animation image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state.

[Note B1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image can be switched to the predetermined performance image.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B1, if a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game during the first judgment state, the specific performance image in a predetermined second notification game may be switched to a predetermined performance image. In this way, by switching the specific performance image in a predetermined second notification game when a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game, it is possible to avoid problems occurring in the predetermined second notification game due to the continuous execution of the specific performance image resulting from the fulfillment of a specific condition in the particular first notification game. Furthermore, even if problems occur in the first notification game that resumes after the completion of the predetermined second notification game, the occurrence of such problems is avoided before the execution of the first notification game.

[Note B2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, characterized in that the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game) is the second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed after the specific first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B2, the predetermined second notification game is the second notification game executed after a specific first notification game where a specific condition is met. In this way, because the predetermined second notification game is the second notification game executed after a specific first notification game where a specific condition is met, the occurrence of the problem is immediately avoided once it is detected that a problem would arise from continuously executing a specific animation image.

[Note B3]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that there is no benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, characterized in that the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game) is the second notification game (second special symbol game) of the specified number of times in which the specific performance image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B3, if there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image during the second notification game. In this way, when there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the second notification game, switching from the specific performance image to a predetermined performance image during the second notification game allows the specific performance image to be displayed consecutively for the maximum possible time. This maximizes the player's expectation of seeing the specific performance image consecutively, thus reducing the decrease in the player's interest in the game when the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image, and thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[Note B4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix B1 to Appendix B3, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B4, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note B5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix B1 to Appendix B4, characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix B5, the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of these images. Furthermore, when these images are displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note C1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game) executed in the specific first notification game, the specific performance image can be switched to the predetermined performance image.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C1, when a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game during the first judgment state, the specific animation image in a predetermined first notification game can be switched to a predetermined animation image. In this way, by switching the specific animation image in a predetermined first notification game when a specific condition is met in a particular first notification game during the first judgment state, it is possible to avoid problems occurring in the first notification game due to the continuous execution of the specific animation image upon the fulfillment of the specific condition.

Furthermore, in the first notification game that resumes after the completion of the predetermined second notification game, the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image. This ensures that, if continuously executing the specific performance image would cause problems, a greater number of notification games in which the specific performance image is displayed are secured. In this way, by ensuring the maximum number of notification games in which the specific performance image is displayed continuously, even if continuous execution of the specific performance image would cause problems due to the fulfillment of certain conditions, the player can enjoy the specific performance image to the fullest.

[Note C2]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that there is no benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, characterized in that the specific first notification game (first special symbol game) is the first notification game (first special symbol game) of the specific number of times the specific performance image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C2, if there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image during the first notification game. In this way, when there is no special benefit for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a certain number of notification games, and the notification game executed at the specific number of times is the first notification game, switching from the specific performance image to a predetermined performance image during the first notification game allows the specific performance image to be displayed consecutively for the maximum possible time. This maximizes the player's expectation of seeing the specific performance image consecutively, thus reducing the decrease in the player's interest in the game when the specific performance image is switched to a predetermined performance image, and thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

[Note C3]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1 or Appendix C2, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C3, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note C4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1 to C3, characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix C4, the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the specific and predetermined performance images. Furthermore, when the specific and predetermined performance images are displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note D1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
The aforementioned specific performance image and the aforementioned predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that the aforementioned specific presentation image and the aforementioned predetermined presentation image are set to have the same or substantially the same expected value.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D1, the expected probability of transitioning to a special game state is set to be the same or nearly the same for both the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image. By setting the expected probability of transitioning to a special game state to be the same or nearly the same for both the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image, even when the predetermined image displayed on the display means is switched from the specific performance image to the predetermined performance image, the player's expectation for the display of the predetermined image is maintained without decreasing. Therefore, a decrease in the player's interest due to the image switch is prevented, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game is prevented.

[Note D2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, characterized in that the difference in expected value between the specified performance image and the predetermined performance image is set to -5% to +5%.

[Note D3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix D2, characterized in that the difference in expected value between the specified performance image and the predetermined performance image is set to -2.5% to +2.5%.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix D2 and Appendix D3, the difference in expected value between a specific presentation image and a predetermined presentation image is set to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%. By setting the difference in expected value between the specific presentation image and the predetermined presentation image to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%, the player's expectations for the display of the predetermined image can be more appropriately maintained. Therefore, a decrease in player interest due to the switching of the predetermined image is more effectively prevented, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game is more effectively prevented.

[Note D4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices D1 to D3, characterized in that the probability of the specific performance image being displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined performance image being displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D4, the probability of a specific performance image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state is set higher than the probability of a predetermined performance image being displayed. Thus, by setting the probability of a specific performance image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state higher than the probability of a predetermined performance image being displayed, the occurrence of problems is appropriately avoided when a specific performance image, which has a high probability of causing problems if executed continuously, is displayed consecutively.

[Note D5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices D1 to D4, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix D5, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note E1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
The aforementioned specific performance image and the aforementioned predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined performance image is set to have a higher expectation level than the specific performance image.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E1, the expectation of transitioning to a special game state is set higher for the predetermined presentation image after the switch than for the specific presentation image before the switch. Thus, because the expectation of transitioning to a special game state is set higher for the predetermined presentation image after the switch than for the specific presentation image before the switch, when the predetermined image is switched from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image, the expectation suggested to the player by the switch is enhanced. As a result, when a specific presentation image is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting a switch from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image. Furthermore, when the switch to the predetermined presentation image occurs, the player can enjoy the game while having a strong expectation that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined presentation image was displayed will lead to a transition to a special game state. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced by the switch from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, characterized in that the difference between the expected value when the predetermined performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game and the expected value when the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game is set to 10% or more.

[Note E3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E2, characterized in that the difference between the expected value when the predetermined performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game and the expected value when the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341) in the notification game is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix E2 and Appendix E3, the difference in expected value between the predetermined presentation image and the specific presentation image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. By setting the difference in expected value between the predetermined presentation image and the specific presentation image to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more, when the specific presentation image is displayed, players can enjoy the game with a greater expectation that the game will switch from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image. Furthermore, when the game switches to the predetermined presentation image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined presentation image was displayed will transition to a special game state, allowing players to enjoy the game with great anticipation. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced by the predetermined image switching from the specific presentation image to the predetermined presentation image.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices E1 to E3, characterized in that the probability of the specific performance image being displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined performance image being displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E4, the probability of a specific performance image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state is set higher than the probability of a predetermined performance image being displayed. Thus, because the probability of a specific performance image being displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first judgment state is set higher than the probability of a predetermined performance image being displayed, the frequency of the specific performance image being displayed increases. This increases the opportunities for players to anticipate the specific performance image being switched to the predetermined performance image, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by setting a lower probability of the predetermined performance image being selected after the switch, the frequency of the predetermined performance image being displayed decreases, further increasing the player's enjoyment when the predetermined performance image is displayed, thus further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note E5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices E1 to E4, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix E5, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note F1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the aforementioned specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) is switched to the aforementioned predetermined performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance), the display means (341) displays a specific information image different from the aforementioned specific performance image and the aforementioned predetermined performance image, which explicitly indicates or suggests specific information, in a notification game performed between the notification game before the switch and the notification game after the switch.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F1, a specific information image that explicitly or implicitly indicates specific information is displayed during the notification game performed between the notification game before the predetermined image change and the notification game after the predetermined image change. In this way, by displaying a specific information image that explicitly or implicitly indicates specific information during the notification game performed between the notification game before the predetermined image change and the notification game after the predetermined image change, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image are not displayed consecutively in multiple notification games. Instead, the continuity between the display of the specific performance image and the display of the predetermined performance image is interrupted. This creates the illusion for the player that the predetermined performance image was displayed independently of the specific performance image after its display ended, rather than that a switch occurred from the specific performance image to the predetermined performance image. Therefore, it is possible to disguise the fact that no switch occurred from the specific performance image to the predetermined performance image. Thus, the inconvenience caused by the continuous display of the specific performance image can be avoided without the player noticing.

Furthermore, if a switch is made from a specific animation image to a predetermined animation image to avoid inconveniences arising from the continuous execution of that specific animation image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined animation image is executed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, there is a concern that players may realize that when a switch is made from a specific animation image to a predetermined animation image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined animation image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, by disguising the fact that a switch from the specific animation image to the predetermined animation image did not occur, it is possible to prevent players from realizing that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined animation image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state.

[Note F2]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The gaming machine according to Appendix F1, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the absence of the aforementioned benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.

In gaming machines related to Appendix F2, the specific condition includes the absence of any benefits for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more. Thus, by including the absence of any benefits for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, if the specific condition is not met, the situation where the specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, even though there are no benefits for the player, is avoided. This prevents a situation where the player does not receive a benefit despite it being clearly stated that a benefit will be granted upon display during notification games.

[Note F3]
The permitted state of the second prize-winning opening (315) includes a first permitted state (short opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a first hour, and a second permitted state (long opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a longer period than the first hour.
The gaming machine according to Appendix F2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the entry of a game ball into the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the first permitted state (short opening) in the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F3, this refers to the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game in which a specific visual effect image is displayed. In this way, by referring to the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game in which a specific visual effect image is displayed, it is prevented that the specific visual effect image will be displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where the player is not granted a benefit despite it being clearly stated that a benefit will be granted through the display during the notification game.

[Note F4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix F2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that in the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341), a number of game balls greater than zero but less than or equal to a specific number enters the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the permitted state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F4, the first notification game, in which a specific performance image is displayed on the display means, includes the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state. By including the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state, the specific performance image is continuously displayed. This prevents the specific performance image from being displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games, even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where, despite the display in the notification game clearly indicating that a benefit will be granted, the player does not receive that benefit.

[Note F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix F2 to Appendix F4, characterized in that the aforementioned benefit is the execution of the aforementioned special game.

In the gaming machine related to Note F5, the reward is the execution of a special game. This prevents situations where the special game is not executed despite the game's notification clearly indicating that it will be executed.

[Note F6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix F1 to Appendix F5, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F6, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note F7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices A1 to F6, characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix F7, the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the specific and predetermined performance images. Furthermore, when the specific and predetermined performance images are displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note G1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special symbol game executed for the holding of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G1, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Appendix G2]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The gaming machine according to Appendix G1, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the absence of the aforementioned benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.

In gaming machines related to Appendix G2, the specific condition includes the absence of any benefits for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more. Thus, by including the absence of any benefits for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, if the specific condition is not met, the situation where the specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, even though there are no benefits for the player, is avoided. This prevents a situation where the player does not receive a benefit despite it being clearly stated that a benefit would be granted upon display during notification games.

[Note G3]
The permitted state of the second prize-winning opening (315) includes a first permitted state (short opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a first hour, and a second permitted state (long opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a longer period than the first hour.
The gaming machine according to Appendix G2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the entry of a game ball into the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the first permitted state (short opening) in the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G3, this refers to the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game in which a specific visual effect image is displayed. In this way, by requiring the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game in which a specific visual effect image is displayed, it is prevented that the specific visual effect image will be displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where, despite it being clearly stated that a benefit will be granted through the display in the notification game, the player does not receive the benefit.

[Appendix G4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that in the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341), a number of game balls greater than zero but less than or equal to a specific number enters the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the permitted state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G4, the first notification game in which a specific performance image is displayed on the display means includes the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state. By including the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state, the specific performance image is continuously displayed. This prevents the specific performance image from being displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games, even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where the player is not granted a benefit despite it being clearly stated that a benefit will be granted through the display in the notification game.

[Appendix G5]
The gaming machine described in any of Appendix G2 to Appendix G4, characterized in that the aforementioned benefit is the execution of the aforementioned special game.

In the case of gaming machines related to Appendix G5, the reward is the execution of a special game. This prevents situations where the special game is not executed despite the game's notification clearly indicating that it will be executed.

[Appendix G6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix G1 to Appendix G5, characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix G6, the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. In this way, because the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the specific and predetermined performance images. Furthermore, when the specific and predetermined performance images are displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note H1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A display means (341) that displays a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The system includes a holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined prize-winning slots (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The gaming machine in question is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes notification game execution means that executes a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize entry (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry (315).
The aforementioned notification game execution means is:
A means for displaying a specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance event) on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of times during the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The system includes means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) during a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special symbol games executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry opening 315 during a short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
In a specific first notification game (a first special game executed for the holding of the first special game after the end of the second special game) that is executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (second special game), the specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341).
When a specific condition is met in the aforementioned first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific performance image (for example, an image of a chance symbol performance) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined performance image different from the specific performance image (for example, an image of a same-colored symbol performance).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H1, the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined performance images indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of these images. Furthermore, when these images are displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note H2]
The system includes a bonus granting means (41) that grants a bonus to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a certain number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game,
The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the absence of the aforementioned benefit to be granted to the player when the aforementioned specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of times or more of the aforementioned notification game.

In gaming machines related to Appendix H2, the specific condition includes the absence of any benefits for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more. Thus, by including the absence of any benefits for the player when a specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, if the specific condition is not met, the situation where the specific performance image is displayed consecutively for a specified number of notification games or more, even though there are no benefits for the player, is avoided. This prevents a situation where the player does not receive a benefit despite it being clearly stated that a benefit would be granted upon display during notification games.

[Note H3]
The permitted state of the second prize-winning opening (315) includes a first permitted state (short opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a first hour, and a second permitted state (long opening) in which the permitted state is maintained for a longer period than the first hour.
The gaming machine according to Appendix H2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the entry of a game ball into the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the first permitted state (short opening) in the first notification game (first special picture game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H3, this refers to the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game in which a specific visual effect image is displayed. By defining this as the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot, which is in the first permitted state during the first notification game in which a specific visual effect image is displayed, it prevents the specific visual effect image from being displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games, even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where, despite the display of the visual effect image during the notification game clearly indicating that a benefit will be granted, the player does not receive that benefit.

[Note H4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H2, characterized in that the aforementioned specific condition includes the fact that in the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific performance image is displayed on the display means (341), a number of game balls greater than zero but less than or equal to a specific number enters the second prize entry opening (315) which is in the permitted state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H4, the first notification game in which a specific performance image is displayed on the display means includes the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state. By including the entry of a specified number of game balls (greater than zero but less than or equal to zero) into the second prize slot, which is in an acceptable state, the specific performance image is continuously displayed. This prevents the specific performance image from being displayed consecutively for a predetermined number of notification games, even though there is no benefit to be granted to the player. This prevents a situation where the player is not granted a benefit despite it being clearly stated that a benefit will be granted through the display in the notification game.

[Note H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H2 to Appendix H4, characterized in that the aforementioned benefit is the execution of the aforementioned special game.

In the gaming machines related to Appendix H5, the reward is the execution of a special game. This prevents situations where the special game is not executed despite the game's notification clearly indicating that it will be executed.

[Note H6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variable symbols on the display means (341).
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H1 to Appendix H5, characterized in that the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display means (341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H6, the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the specific performance image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily recognize when the specific performance image has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the specific performance image is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the specific performance image.

[Note I1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 77),
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I1, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when a specific visual effect image is displayed during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information when a specific visual effect image is displayed during the second notification game, players can understand that predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. This prevents players from forgetting that predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and allows them to know in advance that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable when the display of predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.
[Appendix I2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information without changing it when the predetermined suggestion information is to be displayed continuously.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I2, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed without change. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, thus further preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I2, wherein the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed after the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined suggestion information was displayed, while maintaining the manner in which it was displayed in the first notification game (first special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I3, in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in the same manner as it was displayed in the first notification game. This allows the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first notification game before the execution of the second notification game. This more effectively prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game, thereby preventing a further decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I4]
The aforementioned suggestive information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed after the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first notification game (first special symbol game), as described in Appendix I1 of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I4, in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a different manner than in the first notification game. In this way, by displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a different manner in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the player can be made to understand in various ways that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. Furthermore, this understanding can be conveyed to the player without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes displayed during the second notification game.

[Appendix I5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I1 to Appendix I4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information without changing the display position of the predetermined suggestion information when displaying the predetermined suggestion information continuously.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I5, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information remains unchanged. This continuous display of the predetermined suggestive information allows players to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that its display will resume after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents players from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows them to anticipate that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, players are less likely to feel uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that it was displayed before the start of the second notification game, thus further preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that it continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information (displayed as a captured image 77) in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, as described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I5.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I6, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, the player can understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the symbol fluctuations displayed during the second notification game.

[Appendix I7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I6, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information (displayed as a capture image 77) at a position adjacent to the pattern variation display area in the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I7, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game. By continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game, it becomes easier for players focusing on the symbol variation during the second notification game to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Appendix I8]
The system includes a first holding means (41) that can hold up to a first upper limit (for example, 4) the right to execute the first notification game (first special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314),
The suggestion information continuation display means (51) is characterized in that it continues to display the predetermined suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game (first special symbol game) is reserved by the first retention means (41), as described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I7.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I8, if the right to execute the first notification game, which is triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot, is reserved, the prescribed suggestion information is continuously displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the prescribed suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game, which is triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot, is reserved, it is prevented that the prescribed suggestion information will not be displayed for the first notification game if the right to execute the first notification game is reserved while the second notification game is being executed in a specific game state. This prevents the prescribed suggestion information from being displayed for the first notification game more times than the number of consecutive instances of the prescribed suggestion information that was set before transitioning to the specific game state, after the end of the specific game state. As a result, when a player is granted a reward for displaying a specific suggestive information consecutively during the first notification game more than a certain number of times, the system prevents the specific suggestive information from being displayed consecutively during the first notification game more than a certain number of times even when there is no reward to be granted to the player. Therefore, it prevents situations where a player is not granted a reward despite it being clearly stated that a reward will be granted upon display during the notification game.

[Note I9]
A permissible frequency control means that switches between a first frequency state in which the frequency at which the second prize slot (315) is in the permissible state is a first frequency, and a second frequency state in which the frequency at which the second prize slot (315) is in the permissible state is a second frequency higher than the first frequency,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices I1 to I8, characterized in that the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state.

[Note I10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I9, characterized in that the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the first frequency state.

[Note I11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I9 or Appendix I10, characterized in that the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix I9 to Appendix I11, a specific game state is generated in at least one of the following states: a first frequency state, where the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is low, and a second frequency state, where the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is high. In the first frequency state, the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is low. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the frequency of the specific game state occurring is low, and the specific game state occurs as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is high. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the frequency of the specific game state occurring is high, and the specific game state occurs as a non-special state. Thus, the frequency of occurrence of specific game states differs between the first and second frequency states, and their positioning also differs. Therefore, different gameplay characteristics are provided depending on whether the specific game state occurs in the first frequency state (where the second prize entry point is less likely to be in an acceptable state) or in the second frequency state (where the second prize entry point is more likely to be in an acceptable state). This can increase the player's attention and interest in the game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I12]
The first display means (341) on which the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51),
A second display means (39, etc.) different from the first display means (341) on which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by the suggestive information continuation display means (51),
A gaming machine as described in any one of the appendices I1 to I11, characterized by comprising the above.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I12, the first display means, which displays a specific performance image corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state, and the second display means, which displays predetermined suggestive information, are different. Because the first display means, which displays the specific performance image corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state, and the second display means, which displays the predetermined suggestive information, are different, the predetermined suggestive information can be displayed in the second display means without obstructing the display of the specific performance image in the first display means. This ensures that both the specific performance image and the predetermined suggestive information are displayed reliably and appropriately without obstructing each other's visibility.

[Note I13]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices I1 to I12, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed on the display means (341) as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I13, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note I14]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices I1 to I13, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I14, an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I15]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices I1 to I14, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I15, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the outline of the image shown as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I16]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front or back side of the fluctuating symbols, as described in any of the appendices I1 to I15.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I16, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game. This continuous display of predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game makes it easy for players focusing on the changing symbols to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note I17]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices I1 to I16, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I17, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I18]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices I1 to I17, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I18, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, the player can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows the player to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I19]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix I1 to Appendix I18, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I19, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note J1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special symbol game in which a first special symbol hold continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through the first special symbol hold continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 77),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, when the predetermined suggestion information is to be displayed continuously, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed continuously without changing it.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J1, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed without change. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents players from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows them to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, it is less likely that players will feel uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, thus further preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note J2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to Appendix J1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information (displayed as a captured image 77) in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, the player can understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the symbol fluctuations displayed during the second notification game.

[Note J3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix J1 or Appendix J2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information (displayed as a capture image 77) at a position adjacent to the pattern variation display area in the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J3, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game. By continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game, it becomes easier for players focusing on the symbol variation during the second notification game to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note J4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The game machine according to Appendix J1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the fluctuating symbols during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J4, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game. This continuous display of predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game makes it easy for players focusing on the changing symbols to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note J5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J4, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J5, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note J6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix J1 to Appendix J5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note K1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 77),
Equipped with,
The suggestive information continuation display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed after the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in the manner in which it was displayed in the first notification game (first special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K1, in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in the same manner as it was displayed in the first notification game. This allows the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first notification game before the execution of the second notification game. This more effectively prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game, thereby preventing a further decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note K2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to Appendix K1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information (displayed as a captured image 77) in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, the player can understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the symbol fluctuations performed during the second notification game.

[Note K3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix K2, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information (displayed as a captured image 77) at a position adjacent to the variable display area of the symbols in the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K3, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game. By continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game, it becomes easier for players focusing on the symbol variation during the second notification game to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note K4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The game machine according to Appendix K1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the fluctuating symbols during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix K4, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed either in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game. This continuous display of predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game makes it easy for players focusing on the changing symbols to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note K5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices K1 to K4, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix K5, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note K6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices K1 to K5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix K6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note L1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special symbol game in which a first special symbol hold continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through the first special symbol hold continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 77),
Equipped with,
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, when the predetermined suggestion information is to be displayed continuously, the display position of the predetermined suggestion information is not changed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L1, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information remains unchanged. This continuous display of the predetermined suggestive information allows players to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents players from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows them to anticipate that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, players are less likely to feel uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, thus further preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note L2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The game machine according to Appendix I1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the fluctuating symbols during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game. This continuous display of predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game makes it easy for players focusing on the changing symbols to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note L3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix L1 or Appendix L2, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L3, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note L4]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices L1 to L3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L4, an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note L5]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that it displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game), as described in any of the appendices L1 to L4.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix L5, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note L6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices L1 to L5, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L6, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note L7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices L1 to L6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L7, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note L8]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix L1 to L7, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix L8, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note M1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 77),
Equipped with,
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that it continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information (displayed as a captured image 77) in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix M1, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, the player can understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the symbol fluctuations displayed during the second notification game.

[Note M2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestion information (displayed as a capture image 77) at a position adjacent to the pattern variation display area in the second notification game.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game. By continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area during the second notification game, it becomes easier for players focusing on the symbol variation during the second notification game to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note M3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix M1 or Appendix M2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M3, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. Furthermore, it becomes possible to make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, it is prevented that the player will feel uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note M4]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices M1 to M3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M4, an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note M5]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices M1 to M4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M5, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note M6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices M1 to M5, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M6, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note M7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed at a stop.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M7, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note M8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices M1 to M7, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix M8, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note N1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special symbol game in which a first special symbol hold continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through the first special symbol hold continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A first holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the first notification game (first special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), up to a first upper limit number (for example, 4),
A second holding means (41) that can hold the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize entry slot (315), up to a second upper limit number (for example, 4),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second notification game can be continuously generated for a specified number of times equal to or greater than the second upper limit, based on the second prize entry opening (315) being in the predetermined permissible state (long open).
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 77),
Equipped with,
The suggestion information continuation display means (51) is characterized in that it continues to display the predetermined suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game (first special symbol game) is reserved by the first retention means (41).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N1, if the right to execute the first notification game, which is triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot, is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when the right to execute the first notification game, which is triggered by a game ball entering the first prize slot, is reserved, it is prevented that the predetermined suggestive information will not be displayed for the first notification game if the right to execute the first notification game is reserved while the second notification game is being executed in a specific game state. This prevents the predetermined suggestive information from being displayed for the first notification game more times than the number of consecutive instances of predetermined suggestive information set before transitioning to the specific game state, after the end of the specific game state. As a result, when a player is granted a reward for displaying a specific suggestive information consecutively during the first notification game more than a certain number of times, the system prevents the specific suggestive information from being displayed consecutively during the first notification game more than a certain number of times even when there is no reward to be granted to the player. Therefore, it prevents situations where a player is not granted a reward despite it being clearly stated that a reward will be granted upon display during the notification game.

[Note N2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix N1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N2, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note N3]
The game machine according to Appendix N1 or Appendix N2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N3, an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note N4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices N1 to N3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the outline of the image shown as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note N5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices N1 to N4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N5, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note N6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices N1 to N5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note N7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices N1 to N6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix N7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note O1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special symbol game in which a first special symbol hold continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through the first special symbol hold continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 77),
A permissible frequency control means that switches between a first frequency state in which the frequency at which the second prize slot (315) is in the permissible state is a first frequency, and a second frequency state in which the frequency at which the second prize slot (315) is in the permissible state is a second frequency that is higher than the first frequency,
Equipped with,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state.

[Note O2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O1, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the first frequency state.

[Note 03]
The gaming machine according to Appendix O1 or Appendix O2, characterized in that the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machines described in Appendix O1 to Appendix O3, a specific game state is generated in at least one of the following states: a first frequency state, where the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is low, and a second frequency state, where the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is high. In the first frequency state, the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is low. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the frequency of the specific game state occurring is low, and the specific game state occurs as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the frequency of the second prize entry point being in an acceptable state is high. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the frequency of the specific game state occurring is high, and the specific game state occurs as a non-special state. Thus, the frequency of occurrence of specific game states differs between the first and second frequency states, and their positioning also differs. Therefore, different gameplay characteristics are provided depending on whether the specific game state occurs in the first frequency state (where the second prize entry point is less likely to be in an acceptable state) or in the second frequency state (where the second prize entry point is more likely to be in an acceptable state). This can increase the player's attention and interest in the game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note 04]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that it displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game), as described in any of the appendices O1 to O3.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix O4, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note 05]
The game machine according to any one of Appendix O1 to Appendix O4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix O5, an image with reduced density, displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, similar to the image displayed in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note 06]
The suggestion information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that it displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game), as described in any of the appendices O1 to O5.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix O6, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the outline of the image shown as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note 07]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices O1 to O6, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix O7, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note 08]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices O1 to O7, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed at a stop.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix O8, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note 09]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix O1 to Appendix O8, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix O9, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix P1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special symbol game in which a first special symbol hold continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through the first special symbol hold continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 77),
The first display means (341) on which the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51),
A second display means (39, etc.) different from the first display means (341) on which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by the suggestive information continuation display means (51),
A gaming machine characterized by having the following features.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P1, the first display means, which displays a specific performance image corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state, and the second display means, which displays predetermined suggestive information, are different. Because the first display means, which displays the specific performance image corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state, and the second display means, which displays the predetermined suggestive information, are different, the predetermined suggestive information can be displayed in the second display means without obstructing the display of the specific performance image in the first display means. This ensures that both the specific performance image and the predetermined suggestive information are displayed reliably and appropriately without interfering with each other's visibility.

[Appendix P2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix P1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P2, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix P3]
The game machine according to Appendix P1 or Appendix P2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P3, an image with reduced density, displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, similar to the image displayed in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P4]
The suggestion information continuation display means (51) is characterized in that it displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game), as described in any of the appendices P1 to P3.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the outline of the image shown as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices P1 to P4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P5, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices P1 to P5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed at a stop.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note P7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices P1 to P6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix P7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note Q1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 77),
Equipped with,
The suggestion information continuation display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed after the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first notification game (first special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q1, in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a different manner than in the first notification game. In this way, by displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a different manner in the second notification game executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the player can be made to understand in various ways that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. Furthermore, this understanding can be conveyed to the player without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes displayed during the second notification game.

[Note Q2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix Q1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q2, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note Q3]
The game machine according to Appendix Q1 or Appendix Q2, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q3, an image with reduced density, displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, similar to the image displayed in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note Q4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices Q1 to Q3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the outline of the image shown as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note Q5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix Q1 to Q4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q5, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note Q6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix Q1 to Appendix Q5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed at a stop.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily recognize when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note Q7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix Q1 to Appendix Q6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix Q7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the likelihood that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note R1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 77),
Equipped with,
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second notification game, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front or back side of the fluctuating symbols.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix R1, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game. This continuous display of predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the changing symbols during the second notification game makes it easy for players focusing on the changing symbols to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows players to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the end of the second notification game.

[Note R2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix R1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix R2, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note R3]
The game machine according to Appendix R1 or Appendix R2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix R3, an image with reduced density, displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, similar to the image displayed in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note R4]
The suggestion information continuation display means (51) is characterized in that it displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game), as described in any of the appendices R1 to R3.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix R4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the outline of the image shown as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note R5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices R1 to R4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix R5, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note R6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices R1 to R5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix R6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image containing an image of the combination of symbols displayed during the notification game, players can easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Note R7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices R1 to R6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine related to Appendix R7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note S1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 77),
Equipped with,
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are displayed at a stop.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix S1, the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is notified by stopping the displayed symbols, and predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped, so that the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows the player to easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while anticipating that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note S2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix S1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix S2, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced version of an image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to not only make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification, but also to make the player aware of the display method (type) of predetermined suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more effectively prevents players from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and more effectively prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information.

[Note S3]
The game machine according to Appendix S1 or Appendix S2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix S3, an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note S4]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices S1 to S3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix S4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note S5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices S1 to S4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix S5, a specific image corresponding to predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix S6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices S1 to S5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix S6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. Thus, because the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the expected probability that the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, players can enjoy the game while anticipating the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note T1]
A transition determination means (41) that performs a transition determination (jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined prize-winning opening (314, 315) that satisfies the aforementioned judgment condition when a game ball enters,
A notification game execution means (41) executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
Equipped with,
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variation game state) where the probability of determining to transition to the special game state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
The predetermined prize slots (314, 315) include a first prize slot (314) and a second prize slot (315) different from the first prize slot (314), which can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the first prize slot (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
In a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a hold-continuous performance is executed), a suggestion information display means (341) that displays predetermined suggestion information (information relating to the probability of winning a jackpot through a hold-continuous performance relating to the probability of winning a jackpot),
A holding means (41) that can hold up to a maximum number (for example, 4) the right to execute the second notification game (second special symbol game), which is executed when a game ball enters the second prize slot (315),
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to a predetermined allowable state (long open),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned specific game state is a state in which the second prize entry opening (315) is set to the predetermined permissible state (long open), and in which a specific number of the second notification game, greater than or equal to the upper limit, can be generated consecutively.
A specific performance image display means (51) that displays a specific performance image (an image displayed by the second special performance) corresponding to the second notification game which is executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generation means (41),
In the second notification game (second special symbol game), when the specific performance image is displayed by the specific performance image display means (51), the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the predetermined suggestion information (for example, as a captured image 77),
Equipped with,
The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix T1, the specific and predetermined presentation images indicate the expected degree that the transition determination result by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state. This allows players to enjoy the game while anticipating the display of predetermined suggestive information. Furthermore, when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether the transition determination result will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Note T2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix T1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix T2, a reduced-size image of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying a reduced-size image of the image shown in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note T3]
The game machine according to Appendix T1 or Appendix T2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image in which the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game is reduced, as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix T3, an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. By displaying an image with reduced density, which was displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game, as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note T4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices T1 to T3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix T4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying an image showing the outline of the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. This also allows players to understand that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, players are prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Note T5]
The game machine according to any one of the appendices T1 to T4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a character image corresponding to the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game).

In the gaming machine related to Appendix T5, a text image corresponding to the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a text image corresponding to the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without hindering the visibility of the effects and symbol changes performed in the second notification game. Furthermore, it becomes possible to make the player aware that the display of predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification. As a result, it is prevented that the player will feel uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the resumption of the display of predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the fluctuating symbols.
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices T1 to T5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols that are stopped.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix T6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay. Because the predetermined suggestive information is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means during notification gameplay, players can easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also allows players to easily understand when the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed consecutively, thus enhancing the enjoyment of the game as they can anticipate the consecutive display of the predetermined suggestive information.

10: Gaming machine 31: Game board 316: Variable prize entry slot 341: Symbol display unit 35: Lamp display unit 351: First individual lamp unit 352: Second individual lamp unit 353: Third individual lamp unit 354: Fourth individual lamp unit 355: Fifth individual lamp unit 356: Sixth individual lamp unit 37: Cruun device 373: Special out ball opening 38: Game ball retention unit 381: Retention lane 383: Stopper unit 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7-segment display unit E-G: Segment 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: REM
45: Setting value display unit 46: Setting value change operation unit 47: ROM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: REM
6: Display control device 75: The fluctuating display image 76: The held display image 77: Captured image

Claims (1)

A transition determination means that can perform a transition determination to determine whether or not to transition to a game state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed, based on the fulfillment of the determination conditions,
A predetermined means of awarding prizes that can satisfy the aforementioned determination conditions based on the entry of a game ball,
A result notification information display control means for displaying result notification information for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means on a display means provided in correspondence with the game board,
A launching means capable of launching game balls toward the game board at predetermined intervals when a predetermined game operation is performed,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The aforementioned predetermined means of awarding prizes is:
The first method for winning a prize,
The system includes a second prize-winning means, different from the first prize-winning means, which is capable of switching between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted.
The aforementioned result notification information is,
First result notification information that may be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, conditional on a game ball entering the first prize-winning means,
This includes a second result notification information that may be displayed after a specific period of time has elapsed, conditional on a game ball entering the second prize-winning means,
This gaming machine is
A hold count information display control means capable of displaying hold count information up to a predetermined upper limit number, indicating that balls have entered at least the first prize-winning means but the transition determination has not yet been performed, and the hold count information indicates that the balls are in a hold state.
Information that can be displayed in any of a plurality of display modes in response to the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means, and a suggestion information display control means capable of displaying predetermined suggestion information different from the reserved number information for at least a plurality of predetermined periods that are executed consecutively,
A specific allowable state generating means capable of generating a specific allowable state, which is an allowable state for a period of time during which a predetermined number of game balls can be launched toward the game board by performing the predetermined game operation based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
Equipped with,
This gaming machine is
The system is configured such that the execution of a predetermined specific period for the entry of a game ball into the second prize-winning means takes precedence over the execution of a predetermined period for the entry of a game ball into the first prize-winning means in a pending state.
The system is configured such that a game ball can enter the second prize-winning means during the specified permissible state while the display of the predetermined suggestive information is being performed during the predetermined period.
If the permissible state that occurs during the execution of displaying the predetermined suggestive information during the predetermined period is the specific permissible state, and a game ball enters the second prize-winning means, the system is configured to display a specific display image during the specific period, and to display the predetermined suggestive information together with the specific display image, at least while the specific display image is displayed.
If a game ball enters the second prize-winning means when the permissible state that occurs during the execution of displaying the predetermined suggestive information during the predetermined period is not the specific permissible state, the system is configured to prevent the specific display image from being displayed during the specific period and to allow the predetermined suggestive information to be displayed.
The predetermined suggestive information is configured to be displayed in at least a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode, as one of the multiple types of display modes.
This gaming machine is
During the specified period, the system is configured to display the specified display image together with the specified display image for a predetermined period while the specified suggestive information is displayed without changing it from the first display mode.
The system is configured to maintain the first display mode that was displayed during the specific predetermined period and to display the predetermined suggestive information together with the specific display image during the specific predetermined period,
A gaming machine characterized in that, during a specific period executed after a predetermined period in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a first display mode, if a preset switching condition for switching the display mode of the predetermined suggestion information is met, the display mode of the predetermined suggestion information can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode.